munotes®

Company Law Notes | LL.B. (3 years) Semester 3 | Mumbai University | munotes

Official Notes munotes.in

Company Law

LL.B. (3 YEARS) · SEMESTER 3

Strictly as per the revised CBCS syllabus of the University of Mumbai

For students of the University of Mumbai and all its affiliated law colleges

Open the book ↓

munotes.in Second Year

Company Law

Copyright © 2026 munotes.in. All rights reserved.

Written and first published by munotes.in, 2026.

This book is free for individual students to read at munotes.in. No part of it may be reproduced, distributed, stored, translated or used for institutional or classroom purposes in any form without a prior written licence from munotes.in.

Licensing and permissions: contact@munotes.in

The text of statutes and of judgments reproduced in this book is in the public domain under section 52(1)(q) of the Copyright Act 1957. The commentary, arrangement, examples and questions are the original work of munotes.in.

munotes.in is an independent study resource for MU students. It is not affiliated with, endorsed by, or officially connected to the University of Mumbai. Course names and university references describe the students and syllabus the material relates to.

munotes.in

Contents

Module I

  1. What a Company Is 1
  2. The Characteristics of a Company 7
  3. Lifting the Corporate Veil 13
  4. Citizenship, Nationality and Residence of a Company 19
  5. Types of Companies by Liability and Membership 23
  6. Types of Companies by Control and Purpose 29
  7. Companies with Charitable Objects 35
  8. Promoters: Position, Duties and Liabilities 41
  9. Formation and Incorporation of Companies 48
  10. The Memorandum of Association 53
  11. The Doctrine of Ultra Vires 60
  12. The Articles of Association 66
  13. Alteration of the Memorandum and the Articles 71
  14. The Registered Office and Service of Documents 78
  15. Commencement of Business 84
  16. Constructive Notice and Indoor Management 89
  17. Rectification of Name and Other Incidental Matters 95
  18. How a Company Raises Money: Public Offer and Private Placement 101
  19. What a Prospectus Is, and What It Must Say 106
  20. Kinds of Prospectus 113
  21. The Golden Rule, or Golden Legacy 120
  22. Civil Liability for Mis-statements in a Prospectus 125
  23. Criminal Liability, Fraudulent Inducement and Personation 131
  24. Allotment of Securities 138
  25. Private Placement and Global Depository Receipts 144
  26. Kinds of Share Capital and the Nature of a Share 151
  27. Issue and Redemption of Preference Shares 157
  28. Sweat Equity, Share Premium and the Ban on Shares at a Discount 163
  29. Share Certificates, Calls and Variation of Shareholders' Rights 169
  30. Transfer and Transmission of Securities 176
  31. Power of a Limited Company to Alter its Share Capital 183
  32. Further Issue of Share Capital and Bonus Shares 189
  33. Reduction of Share Capital 196
  34. Restrictions on Purchase of Own Shares, and Buy-back 202
  35. Debentures and the Power to Nominate 210

Module II

  1. Acceptance of Deposits: What a Deposit Is and Who May Take One 217
  2. Repayment, Damages for Fraud, and Punishment 224
  3. Registration of Charges: Creation and Registration 231
  4. Fixed Charges, Floating Charges and Crystallisation 238
  5. Modification, Satisfaction and Rectification of Charges 245
  6. The Register of Members, and Significant Beneficial Owners 253
  7. The Annual Return 263
  8. Kinds of Meetings: The Annual General Meeting and the Extraordinary General Meeting 270
  9. Notice, Quorum, Chairman and Proxy 278
  10. Voting and its Types, and Types of Resolutions 287
  11. Circulation of Members' Resolutions, and Minutes 296
  12. Resolutions to be Filed, and the Report on the Annual General Meeting 305
  13. Meetings of the Board and its Committees 312
  14. Declaration and Payment of Dividend 319
  15. Books of Account and Financial Statements 328
  16. The Board's Report, the Annual Report and Integrated Reporting 337
  17. The National Financial Reporting Authority 345
  18. Auditors: Appointment, Rotation, Resignation, Removal and Disqualification 352
  19. Rights, Duties and Liabilities of Auditors 362
  20. The Audit Report, Internal Audit and Cost Audit 372

Module III

  1. Who is a Director, and the Director Identification Number 379
  2. Types of Directors 386
  3. Appointment and Reappointment of Directors 394
  4. Disqualification, Vacation of Office, Resignation and Removal 400
  5. Duties of Directors 409
  6. Rights of Directors, and the Registers Kept About Them 416
  7. Loans to Directors 423
  8. Disclosure of Interest and Related Party Transactions 430
  9. Loan and Investment by a Company 440
  10. Board Composition and Independent Directors 450
  11. Powers of the Board, and the Restrictions on Them 463
  12. Board Committees 474
  13. Other Provisions About the Board and its Officers 483
  14. Appointment of Key Managerial Personnel 492
  15. Managing Directors, Whole-Time Directors and Managers 499
  16. Remuneration of Managerial Personnel 510
  17. The Company Secretary 523
  18. Majority Rule, Minority Rights and the Principle of Non-interference 529
  19. Prevention of Oppression and Mismanagement 537
  20. Class Action 549
  21. Compromises and Arrangements 558
  22. Mergers, Amalgamations and the Acquisition of Minority Shares 571

Module IV

  1. Corporate Social Responsibility 585
  2. Secretarial Audit 594
  3. Winding Up: The Modern Map 598
  4. Winding Up by the Tribunal: The Petition and the Order 606
  5. The Company Liquidator 616
  6. Contributories, Calls and the Conduct of a Winding Up 628
  7. Provisions Applicable to Every Mode of Winding Up 640
  8. Official Liquidators, Records and the Close of a Winding Up 657
  9. Voluntary Liquidation under the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code 670
  10. Winding Up of Unregistered Companies 678
  11. The Tribunal and the Appellate Tribunal 686
  12. Special Courts and the Trial of Offences 699
  13. Corporate Governance 710
  14. Environmental, Social and Governance 719
  15. Insider Trading: The Definitions 726
  16. Insider Trading: Trading Plans, Window Closure and Penalties 735
  17. Inspection, Inquiry and Investigation 746
  18. Registered Valuers, and Removal of a Company's Name from the Register 761
  19. Companies Authorised to Register under this Act 771
  20. Producer Companies 780
  21. Companies Incorporated Outside India 795
  22. Government Companies, Registration Offices, Statistics and Nidhis 806
  23. Fraud, Penalties and the Closing Provisions 816
munotes.in

Module I

munotes.in

Chapter One

What a Company Is

Syllabus topic 1.1, "Basic principles of company law for incorporation, prospects and Securities", first label: "Meaning and Definition of a Company"

In one line

A company is a business that the law treats as a person in its own right, separate from the people who own it.

In exam wording: section 2(20) of the Companies Act 2013 defines a company to mean a company incorporated under this Act or under any previous company law, and section 9 provides that from the date of incorporation the subscribers and all later members shall be a body corporate by the name in the memorandum.

Why the law has this at all

Suppose four friends want to open a chain of bakeries. They need money, so they gather it from two hundred strangers. Now ask three ordinary questions. Who owns the ovens? If a customer is injured, who does she sue? If one of the four dies, does the bakery close?

Without a company the answers are ugly. The ovens belong to two hundred and four people in undivided shares. The customer must sue all of them. A death changes the ownership of every oven. Every time an investor sells out, the property has to be conveyed all over again.

Company law solves all three at once by inventing a new legal person. The ovens belong to the company. The customer sues the company. The four friends and the two hundred strangers hold shares, which are just a way of measuring what each of them is entitled to, and a share can change hands without disturbing a single oven.

That is the whole idea, and everything else in this book is detail hanging off it.

Some words this chapter uses

You will meet these on nearly every page, so they are defined once, here.

Incorporation is the act of registering a company, which is what brings it into existence. The Registrar is the Registrar of Companies, the government officer who keeps the register and issues the certificate. A member is a person whose name is on the company's register of members; in a company with shares the members are the shareholders. A subscriber is one of the first members, the people who sign the memorandum before the company exists. The memorandum of association is the company's charter, and the articles of association are its internal rulebook; both get their own chapters. A body corporate is any artificial legal person. A share is a unit measuring a member's interest in the company.

Two words here look like ordinary English and are not. Company in this Act does not mean any business; it means a registered one. A partnership firm is a business but it is not a company. And member does not mean a customer or a subscriber to a service; it means an owner.

munotes.in1

What a Company Is

The definition itself: section 2(20)

The Act's definition is famously unhelpful and you should quote it anyway, because it is the definition:

"company" means a company incorporated under this Act or under any previous company law

Read it twice and notice that it defines a company by how it came into being, not by what it does. That is deliberate. A company is not a kind of business. It is a status that a business acquires by registering. Two shops on the same street selling the same bread may be a company and not a company, and the only difference is that one of them is on the register.

"Or under any previous company law" matters more than students expect. Companies registered under the Companies Act 1956, and under the Acts before it, are companies for the 2013 Act too. Most of the large Indian companies you can name were incorporated long before 2013 and are governed by the 2013 Act today.

Section 3: who may form a company

Section 3(1) says a company may be formed for any lawful purpose by:

  • (a) seven or more persons, where the company to be formed is to be a public company;
  • (b) two or more persons, where it is to be a private company; or
  • (c) one person, where it is to be a One Person Company, that is to say, a private company,

by subscribing their names or his name to a memorandum and complying with the requirements of this Act in respect of registration.

So the minimum membership is seven, two or one, according to the kind of company. Those three numbers are worth memorising because they come back in several places, including section 3A below.

The One Person Company carries four provisos, and they exist because a company with one member has an obvious problem: what happens when that member dies? The answer is that the memorandum of a One Person Company must name another person, with that person's prior written consent, who becomes the member on the subscriber's death or incapacity. The nominee may withdraw consent, the member may change the nominee at any time, the member must tell the company of a change and the company must tell the Registrar, and such a change is not an alteration of the memorandum.

Section 3(2) then says a company formed under sub-section (1) may be limited by shares, limited by guarantee, or unlimited. Those three are taught in the chapter on types of companies.

Section 9: the section that actually creates the person

This is the most important single sentence in the subject.

From the date of incorporation mentioned in the certificate of incorporation, such subscribers to the memorandum and all other persons, as may, from time to time, become members of the company, shall be a body corporate by the name contained in the memorandum, capable of exercising all the functions of an incorporated company under this Act and having perpetual succession with power to acquire, hold and dispose of property, both movable and immovable, tangible and intangible, to contract and to sue and be sued, by the said name.

munotes.in2

What a Company Is

Take it apart, because six separate legal consequences are packed into it.

  1. From the date of incorporation mentioned in the certificate. Not from the date the papers were filed, and not from the date the Registrar signed. The certificate names a date and that date is when the person begins.
  2. Shall be a body corporate. This is the operative phrase. Parliament does not say the company is like a person; it says it is one.
  3. By the name contained in the memorandum. The company's name is its identity, which is why altering it is regulated and why a wrongly chosen name can be rectified.
  4. Perpetual succession. The company outlives its members.
  5. Power to acquire, hold and dispose of property. The company owns its assets, not the members.
  6. To contract and to sue and be sued, by the said name. It makes its own contracts and it litigates in its own name.

One thing has been quietly removed from that list and most notes still print it. Section 9 used to end "...perpetual succession and a common seal with power to acquire...". The words "and a common seal" were omitted by the Companies (Amendment) Act 2015, with effect from 29 May 2015. A company may still have a seal, and several sections now read "common seal, if any", but it is no longer a compulsory characteristic of a company. Writing that every company has a common seal is a mistake of live law, and it is the commonest one in this subject.

A worked example

Ganesh, Radha, Iqbal and five friends want to run a courier service in Thane. They are eight, so they may form either a public or a private company; if they had been six they could only have formed a private one.

They sign a memorandum stating the name Speedpost Thane Logistics Limited, file it with the Registrar with the other documents section 7 requires, and on 14 June 2026 the Registrar issues a certificate of incorporation bearing that date.

From 14 June 2026, by section 9:

  • The vans the company buys belong to Speedpost Thane Logistics Limited, not to Ganesh and the others, however much of the money each of them put in.
  • A contract with a customer is made by the company. If it is broken, the customer sues the company.
  • When Radha dies in 2031, the company does not close. Her shares pass to her heirs and the courier service runs as before. That is perpetual succession doing its work.
  • If the eight of them later want to sell the business, they can sell their shares, and every van, every contract and every employee stays exactly where it is, because none of them ever belonged to the eight.
munotes.in3

What a Company Is

Notice that none of these four consequences needed a separate agreement. They followed automatically from the certificate.

The case this rests on, and how to cite it

Salomon v. A. Salomon and Co. Ltd., decided by the House of Lords in 1897, is the decision every company law course begins with. It is the case that settled that a company, once properly registered, is a different person in law from the members who own it, and that this is so even where one man holds almost all the shares and controls everything the company does.

How to answer on it. In an Indian paper the authority you must cite is the section, and the proposition Salomon established is now written into the Act: section 9 says the company shall be a body corporate with power to hold property, to contract and to sue and be sued in its own name. So the full-mark shape is: state the principle, cite section 9, and name Salomon as the decision in which the principle was established.

A note on how this book handles cases. No law report carrying Salomon could be opened from where this book was written, and the house rule is that a citation is attached only to a case whose report has actually been read. So this book names the case and states the proposition it settled, and does not print facts or a citation it has not verified. The full position, including every source that was tried, is in authorities/cases.json and in FINDINGS.md section 5.1. Nothing in the syllabus is left untaught by this: the rule itself is section 9, and section 9 is set out above in the Act's own words.

What this does NOT mean

It does not mean the members own the company's property. They own shares. A member who owns ninety-nine per cent of a company still owns none of its factory, and cannot insure the factory in his own name. This trips people up constantly and it is examined.

It does not mean the company is a citizen. Separate personality and citizenship are different questions, and the second gets its own chapter.

munotes.in4

What a Company Is

It does not mean incorporation is a formality. Until the certificate is issued there is no company, and a contract made "for the company" before that date binds nobody in the way the parties expect. That is the promoters' problem and it has its own chapter.

It does not mean the separation can never be looked through. It can, in defined situations, and that is the next chapter but one.

Limits and criticism

The separation is a rule of law, not a description of reality, and it produces results that look wrong to a non-lawyer. In a one-member company the member and the company are the same in every practical sense and different in law. That gap is exactly what the doctrine of lifting the veil exists to police.

A reform is pending, and it is not law. The Corporate Laws (Amendment) Bill 2026 would change several parts of this Act. It was introduced in Lok Sabha on 23 March 2026, referred the same day to a Joint Parliamentary Committee, which reported on 3 August 2026. It has not been passed by either House and has not received assent. Answer on the Act as it stands.

Quick revision

  • Definition: section 2(20), a company incorporated under this Act or any previous company law. Defined by how it came into being.
  • Formation: section 3(1), seven persons for a public company, two for a private, one for an OPC, by subscribing to a memorandum.
  • Kinds on formation: section 3(2), limited by shares, limited by guarantee, or unlimited.
  • The creating section: section 9. Body corporate, by the name in the memorandum, from the date on the certificate, with perpetual succession, power to hold property, to contract, and to sue and be sued.
  • "And a common seal" was omitted from section 9 by the Companies (Amendment) Act 2015 with effect from 29 May 2015.
  • The case: Salomon, for separate personality. In an Indian answer, cite section 9 and name Salomon.

Test yourself

1. Define a company under the Companies Act 2013. A company means a company incorporated under this Act or under any previous company law: section 2(20). The definition turns on registration, not on the nature of the business.

2. How many persons are needed to form a private company, and where does the number come from? Two or more, under section 3(1)(b). Seven or more for a public company under section 3(1)(a), and one for a One Person Company under section 3(1)(c).

3. From what date does a company exist? From the date of incorporation mentioned in the certificate of incorporation: section 9. Not from the date of filing.

4. A shareholder holding ninety per cent of a company's shares says the company's warehouse is "his". Is he right? No. Section 9 gives the company the power to acquire and hold property in its own name, so the warehouse belongs to the company. He owns shares, which measure his interest in the company, not in any particular asset.

munotes.in5

What a Company Is

5. Is a common seal a characteristic of every company? No, and this is a trap. The words "and a common seal" were omitted from section 9 by the Companies (Amendment) Act 2015 with effect from 29 May 2015. A company may have one; several sections now say "common seal, if any".

6. What happens to a One Person Company when its only member dies? The person named in the memorandum as nominee, who gave prior written consent, becomes the member: the first proviso to section 3(1). The memorandum must name that person at incorporation.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in6

Chapter Two

The Characteristics of a Company

Syllabus topic 1.1, label: "Nature and Characteristics of a Company"

In one line

A company has five features that follow automatically from registration: it is a separate person, it lives on regardless of its members, its members' liability is limited, its shares can be sold without disturbing the business, and it can own property, contract and litigate in its own name.

In exam wording: the characteristics of a company flow from section 9 of the Companies Act 2013, which makes the members a body corporate with perpetual succession and the power to acquire, hold and dispose of property, to contract, and to sue and be sued in its own name.

Why the law has this at all

The previous chapter explained why the law invents a separate person. This chapter is about what that invention gets you, and it is worth being precise, because "characteristics of a company" is one of the two or three questions most likely to appear on a Company Law paper and it is usually answered as a list of remembered words.

A list is not an answer. Each characteristic solves a specific practical problem, and each one is traceable to specific words in the Act. Answer it that way and it reads like law rather than like a memorised bullet list.

Some words this chapter uses

Perpetual succession means the company's existence does not depend on who its members are at any moment. Limited liability means a member cannot be made to pay the company's debts beyond a fixed amount. Movable property is property other than land and things attached to land; the distinction matters because movable property transfers differently. A debenture is an instrument acknowledging a debt owed by the company. A depository is an institution that holds shares in electronic form. An attorney, in section 22, means a person authorised in writing to act for another, not a lawyer.

The five characteristics, each tied to its words

1. Separate legal personality

Section 9 says the members shall be a body corporate. This is the parent characteristic and the other four are consequences of it.

The practical test is ownership. The company's factory belongs to the company. A member owns shares, and a share is an interest in the company, not a slice of any particular asset. This is why a member cannot insure the company's property in his own name: he has no insurable interest in a thing he does not own. That is the proposition Macaura v. Northern Assurance Co. Ltd. is cited for.

It also works the other way round. Because the company is a different person, a person can be both a controlling member and an employee of the same company, and can hold both relationships at once. That is the proposition Lee v. Lee's Air Farming Ltd. is cited for.

munotes.in7

The Characteristics of a Company

Both cases are named here without citations and without facts, and that is deliberate. No law report carrying either could be opened from where this book was written, and the house rule is that a citation is attached only to a report that has been read. See authorities/cases.json. In an Indian answer the authority is section 9, and the cases are named as the decisions that established the propositions.

2. Perpetual succession

Section 9 gives the company perpetual succession. Members die, sell out, go bankrupt or disappear; the company does not notice. It ends only when it is wound up or its name is struck off, both of which are formal legal processes with their own chapters.

Section 3A shows what happens when membership falls too low, and it is the closest the Act comes to an exception. If the number of members falls below seven in a public company or below two in a private company, and the company carries on business for more than six months in that state, then every member during that time who is aware of it becomes severally liable for the whole of the debts contracted during that period. Note carefully what that does and does not do: the company does not cease to exist, and its perpetual succession is untouched. What is lost is the members' limited liability.

3. Limited liability

This is not automatic, and saying that it is loses marks. A company may be limited by shares, limited by guarantee, or unlimited, under section 3(2), and only the first two have limited liability at all.

  • In a company limited by shares, section 2(22), the liability is limited to the amount, if any, unpaid on the shares held by the member. A member whose shares are fully paid can be called on for nothing.
  • In a company limited by guarantee, section 2(21), the liability is limited to the amount each member has undertaken by the memorandum to contribute to the assets in the event of winding up. Notice that this money is payable only on winding up, which is what makes guarantee companies suitable for clubs and charities that do not want capital from their members while they are running.
  • In an unlimited company there is no limit at all.

4. Transferability of shares

Section 44 is short and does a great deal of work:

The shares or debentures or other interest of any member in a company shall be movable property transferable in the manner provided by the articles of the company.

munotes.in8

The Characteristics of a Company

Three consequences. First, a share is movable property, so it moves like goods rather than like land. Second, it is transferable, which is what lets an investor exit without the company being disturbed. Third, transfer is in the manner provided by the articles, which is how a private company restricts transfer while remaining a company, under section 2(68).

Section 45 adds that every share in a company having a share capital must be distinguished by its distinctive number, unless it is held in a depository, that is, in electronic form. In practice almost all listed shares are now held that way, so the proviso has swallowed a good deal of the rule.

5. Capacity to contract, to own and to sue

Section 9 gives the company power to acquire, hold and dispose of property, both movable and immovable, tangible and intangible, to contract and to sue and be sued, by the said name. It does all of this through human beings, because it has no hands, and section 22 is where the Act says how.

Under section 22(1), a bill of exchange, hundi or promissory note is deemed to have been made, accepted, drawn or endorsed on behalf of the company if it is done in the name of, or on behalf of, or on account of the company by any person acting under its authority, express or implied.

Under section 22(2), the company may by writing under its common seal, if any, authorise a person as its attorney to execute deeds on its behalf, in or outside India. The proviso is the modern part: where the company does not have a common seal, the authorisation is made by two directors, or by a director and the Company Secretary where one has been appointed.

The common seal: the characteristic that was removed

Read the words of section 22(2) again. "Under its common seal, if any." That phrase was substituted by the Companies (Amendment) Act 2015. The same Act omitted the words "and a common seal" from section 9, with effect from 29 May 2015, and made the same change in section 46(1) so that a share certificate is one "issued under the common seal, if any, of the company".

So a company may keep a seal and many do, but a company without one is a perfectly ordinary company, and everything a seal used to be required for can now be done by two directors, or a director and the Company Secretary.

Say this in an answer and you will stand out, because the old list of characteristics ran "separate legal entity, perpetual succession, limited liability, common seal, transferability of shares" and that fourth item has been wrong since 2015.

munotes.in9

The Characteristics of a Company

A worked example

Mrs Karve holds ninety-eight of the hundred shares of Kolhapur Looms Private Limited, is its managing director, and draws a salary from it. The company owns a weaving shed, its looms, and a lorry.

Who owns the shed? The company, not Mrs Karve. Under section 9 the members are a body corporate with power to acquire, hold and dispose of property, and what she owns is ninety-eight shares, which are an interest in the company and not a slice of the shed. If she insures the shed in her own name she insures property that is not hers.

She dies. The company does not. Perpetual succession under section 9 means her shares pass to her legal representative and the company carries on without a pause, keeping its name, its contracts and its licences. Had this been a partnership, her death would have affected the firm itself.

Only one member left. Suppose her executor is the only member for eight months. The company continues to exist, but section 3A provides that where the number of members falls below two in a private company and the business is carried on for more than six months while it is so reduced, every person who is a member during that time and knows of it is severally liable for the whole of the debts contracted after those six months. So the separate personality survives; the limited liability does not.

Her salary. She is both the controlling member and an employee, and the two relationships are separate because the company is a different person from her. Her employment contract is with the company.

Her liability for a debt. The company owes a yarn supplier four lakh rupees and cannot pay. Her shares are fully paid, so under section 2(22) nothing further can be required of her, and the supplier has no claim against her personally. Had the company been limited by guarantee under section 2(21), she would have been liable for the amount she undertook by the memorandum to contribute in the event of winding up, and no more; had it been an unlimited company under section 3(2), there would have been no limit at all.

Selling out. She agrees to transfer sixty shares to her nephew. Under section 44 the shares are movable property transferable in the manner provided by the articles, and this being a private company the articles will restrict the transfer, so the transfer takes effect only as the articles allow. The shares she keeps carry distinctive numbers under section 45, unless they are held in a depository.

munotes.in10

The Characteristics of a Company

Signing for the company. The lorry is bought on a promissory note signed "for and on behalf of Kolhapur Looms Private Limited" by Mrs Karve as managing director. Under section 22(1) the note is deemed to have been made on behalf of the company, so the company is liable on it and she is not.

And the seal. The company has never had a common seal. That does not matter. Section 22(2) says "under its common seal, if any", the words having been substituted by the Companies (Amendment) Act, 2015, and a deed may instead be executed by two directors, or by a director and the company secretary where one is appointed. A student who lists the common seal among the characteristics of a company is describing the law as it stood before 2015.

Distinctions that carry marks

CompanyPartnership firm
Legal personalitySeparate from members, section 9None; the firm is the partners
Who owns the assetsThe companyThe partners jointly
LiabilityLimited, if limited by shares or guaranteeUnlimited and joint
SuccessionPerpetualEnds on death or retirement, subject to agreement
Transfer of interestFree, subject to the articles, section 44Only with the consent of all partners
Maximum membersNo general ceiling for a companyCapped; see section 464
ShareDebenture
What the holder isA member and an ownerA creditor
ReturnDividend, only out of profitsInterest, payable whether or not there are profits
VotingYes, section 47No
On winding upPaid lastPaid before members
Both areMovable property, transferable in the manner the articles provide, section 44

What this does NOT mean

It does not mean a company can do anything a human can. It cannot marry, cannot be imprisoned, and cannot take an oath. Where the Act punishes an offence with imprisonment, the punishment falls on the officer in default, not on the company.

It does not mean limited liability protects a member who behaves badly. Sections 3A, 7(6) and 339 all make individuals personally liable in defined circumstances, and they are the subject of the next chapter.

It does not mean a share gives you a share of the assets. It gives you a bundle of rights against the company: to vote, to dividends when declared, and to a share in the surplus on winding up after everybody else is paid.

Quick revision

  • Source of nearly all of them: section 9.
  • Separate personality: the company owns its property; a member does not, so he cannot insure it (Macaura). A member may also be an employee (Lee's Air Farming).
  • Perpetual succession: section 9. Section 3A is the exception that removes limited liability, not existence, after six months below seven or two members.
  • Limited liability: section 3(2) with sections 2(21) and 2(22). Not automatic; an unlimited company has none.
  • Transferability: section 44, shares are movable property transferable as the articles provide. Section 45, distinctive numbers, except in a depository.
  • Contracting: section 22. No seal needed; two directors, or a director and the Company Secretary.
  • The common seal is NOT a characteristic since 29 May 2015.
munotes.in11

The Characteristics of a Company

Test yourself

1. List the characteristics of a company and give the section for each. Separate legal personality, perpetual succession, and the power to hold property, contract and sue, all from section 9; limited liability from section 3(2) with sections 2(21) and 2(22); transferability from section 44.

2. Ravi owns all the shares in a company that owns a godown. He insures the godown in his own name. It burns down. Can he claim? No. The godown belongs to the company under section 9, and Ravi owns shares, not the godown, so he has no insurable interest in it. This is the point for which Macaura is cited.

3. A private company's membership falls to one, and it trades for eight months. What follows? Section 3A applies. Every person who was a member during the period after the first six months, and who was aware that the company was carrying on business with fewer than two members, becomes severally liable for the whole of the debts contracted during that time. The company continues to exist.

4. Does every company have a common seal? No. The words "and a common seal" were omitted from section 9 by the Companies (Amendment) Act 2015 with effect from 29 May 2015. Sections 22(2) and 46(1) now read "common seal, if any", and the proviso to section 22(2) lets two directors, or a director and the Company Secretary, authorise an attorney where there is no seal.

5. Distinguish a share from a debenture. A shareholder is a member and an owner, gets a dividend only out of profits, votes under section 47, and is paid last on winding up. A debenture holder is a creditor, gets interest whether or not there are profits, does not vote, and is paid before members. Both are movable property under section 44.

6. Are shares freely transferable in every company? No. Section 44 makes them transferable in the manner provided by the articles, and section 2(68) requires a private company's articles to restrict the right to transfer its shares.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in12

Chapter Three

Lifting the Corporate Veil

Syllabus topic 1.1, label: "Doctrine of Lifting of the Corporate Veil"

In one line

Lifting the corporate veil means looking past the company at the people behind it, and making those people answer personally for what the company did.

In exam wording: the corporate veil is the separation between a company and its members created by section 9. Lifting or piercing the veil is the exception, and it is done either by a court where the corporate form is used to defeat the law, or by statute, which the Companies Act 2013 does in sections 3A, 7(6), 7(7), 339 and 464.

Why the law has this at all

The previous two chapters built a wall. This one is about the door in it.

Separate personality is granted for a purpose: to let people pool money and take business risks without betting their houses. It is not granted so that a debtor can move his assets into a company and tell his creditors there is nothing to take, or so that a man forbidden to compete can compete through a company he owns.

So the law keeps a power to look through. Used too readily, that power destroys the certainty that makes companies useful, and nobody would invest. Used too rarely, the company becomes a device for cheating. Every case in this area is really about where that line sits.

Some words this chapter uses

The veil is a metaphor for the separation between the company and its members. To lift or pierce the veil is to disregard that separation. Severally liable means each person is liable for the whole amount, so a creditor may recover all of it from any one of them. A contributory is a person liable to contribute to a company's assets when it is wound up. The Official Liquidator and the Company Liquidator are the officers who take charge of a company being wound up. Misfeasance is a wrongful act by an officer of a company in relation to its property or affairs.

The two routes: judicial and statutory

Judicial lifting happens when a court decides that on the facts the corporate form is being used as a cloak. The recognised situations are the classic essay: fraud or improper conduct, evasion of a legal obligation or a contract, determining the enemy character of a company in wartime, tax evasion, and treating a group of companies as one economic unit. These are categories developed by decisions, and this book does not print the decisions' facts because it has not read their reports.

Statutory lifting is where the marks are, and it is where most students are weakest, because it is specific and citable. The Act itself names the occasions. They are set out below in the Act's own words.

munotes.in13

Lifting the Corporate Veil

Section 3A: membership below the minimum

If at any time the number of members of a company is reduced, in the case of a public company, below seven, in the case of a private company, below two, and the company carries on business for more than six months while the number of members is so reduced, every person who is a member of the company during the time that it so carries on business after those six months and is cognisant of the fact that it is carrying on business with less than seven members or two members, as the case may be, shall be severally liable for the payment of the whole debts of the company contracted during that time, and may be severally sued therefor.

Broken down, four conditions must all be satisfied:

  1. Membership falls below seven (public) or below two (private).
  2. The company carries on business in that state.
  3. It does so for more than six months.
  4. The member sought to be charged is cognisant of the fact, that is, knows about it.

Only then, and only for debts contracted after those six months, is the member severally liable, meaning a creditor can recover the whole debt from him alone.

Notice what is not affected. The company continues to exist and keeps its separate personality; section 3A takes away the members' limited liability, not the company's personality. That distinction is worth a sentence in an answer.

Section 7(5), (6) and (7): a company got by lying

Section 7 is the incorporation section. Its last three sub-sections deal with what happens when the company was obtained dishonestly, and they escalate.

Section 7(5). If any person furnishes false or incorrect particulars, or suppresses material information of which he is aware, in any document filed for registration, he shall be liable for action under section 447, which is the Act's fraud provision.

Section 7(6). Where, at any time after incorporation, it is proved that the company was got incorporated by false or incorrect information or representation, by suppressing a material fact, or by any fraudulent action, then the promoters, the persons named as the first directors, and the persons who made the declaration under section 7(1)(b) shall each be liable for action under section 447.

Section 7(7). This is the true veil-lifting provision, because it reaches the company itself. On an application, and on being satisfied that the situation warrants it, the Tribunal may:

  • (a) pass such orders as it thinks fit for regulation of the management of the company, including changes in its memorandum and articles, in the public interest or in the interest of the company and its members and creditors;
  • (b) direct that the liability of the members shall be unlimited;
  • (c) direct removal of the name of the company from the register of companies;
  • (d) pass an order for the winding up of the company; or
  • (e) pass such other orders as it may deem fit.
munotes.in14

Lifting the Corporate Veil

Two safeguards in the proviso. Before making any such order the Tribunal must give the company a reasonable opportunity of being heard, and must take into consideration the transactions entered into by the company, including obligations contracted and any liability paid. The second one exists because innocent outsiders have usually dealt with the company by then.

Clause (b) is the striking one. The Tribunal can convert a limited company into an unlimited one by order, which is veil-lifting written into the statute.

Section 339: fraudulent conduct of business

This one operates in the course of winding up.

If in the course of the winding up of a company, it appears that any business of the company has been carried on with intent to defraud creditors of the company or any other persons or for any fraudulent purpose, the Tribunal, on the application of the Official Liquidator, or the Company Liquidator or any creditor or contributory of the company, may, if it thinks it proper so to do, declare that any person, who is or has been a director, manager, or officer of the company or any persons who were knowingly parties to the carrying on of the business in the manner aforesaid shall be personally responsible, without any limitation of liability, for all or any of the debts or other liabilities of the company as the Tribunal may direct.

Take the elements in order:

  1. The company is being wound up. Section 339 cannot be used against a going concern.
  2. Business was carried on with intent to defraud creditors or others, or for any fraudulent purpose.
  3. Who can apply: the Official Liquidator, the Company Liquidator, any creditor, or any contributory.
  4. Who can be made liable: a director, manager or officer, past or present, or any person who was knowingly a party to carrying on the business that way. Note that the last limb catches people who were never officers at all.
  5. The consequence: personally responsible, without any limitation of liability, for such debts as the Tribunal directs.

The words "without any limitation of liability" are the point. Limited liability is simply switched off for that person.

Section 464: too many members outside a company

Section 464(1) forbids an association or partnership of more than the prescribed number of persons, formed to carry on business for gain, unless it is registered as a company or formed under some other law. The proviso caps the prescribable number at one hundred.

munotes.in15

Lifting the Corporate Veil

Section 464(2) exempts two cases: a Hindu undivided family carrying on business, and an association or partnership formed by professionals governed by special Acts, which is why very large firms of chartered accountants and advocates are lawful.

Section 464(3) is the veil-lifting part: every member of an association carrying on business in contravention shall be punishable with fine which may extend to one lakh rupees and shall also be personally liable for all liabilities incurred in such business.

A worked example

Sunil owes a decree of forty lakh rupees to a bank. Before the bank can execute, he forms Sunview Trading Private Limited, transfers his shop and his stock to it for a nominal price, takes ninety-nine of its hundred shares, and tells the bank the shop is no longer his.

What the bank cannot do. It cannot simply say "the company is Sunil". Section 9 stands, and Salomon's principle stands with it. The company owns the shop.

What the bank can do. It can ask a court to look through the arrangement, because the corporate form has been used for the single purpose of defeating an existing obligation, and that is the paradigm case for judicial lifting. It can point to the timing, the nominal price and the ninety-nine per cent shareholding as evidence of purpose.

And if the company is wound up, section 339 becomes available: the business was carried on with intent to defraud a creditor, and Sunil, as a director and as a person knowingly a party to it, may be declared personally responsible without any limitation of liability for the company's debts, on the application of the liquidator or of the bank itself as a creditor.

Change one fact. Suppose Sunil had formed the company two years before the loan and had run a genuine business through it. The bank's argument collapses, because there is nothing to look through. Incorporating to limit future risk is the whole purpose of company law; incorporating to escape a debt you already owe is not.

Distinctions that carry marks

Judicial liftingStatutory lifting
SourceDecisions of courtsNamed sections of the Act
WhenFraud, evasion of law or contract, enemy character, tax evasion, single economic unitSections 3A, 7(6), 7(7), 339, 464
Who decidesThe court on the factsThe Tribunal or the court applying a stated condition
CertaintyDepends on the factsConditions are printed in the section
EffectVariesStated in the section, up to unlimited liability

What this does NOT mean

It does not mean the company disappears. In almost every instance the company continues; what changes is that a person behind it is also liable. Section 7(7)(c) and (d), removal from the register and winding up, are the exceptions.

munotes.in16

Lifting the Corporate Veil

It does not mean a court will lift the veil because the result seems unfair. Salomon's principle is the rule and lifting is the exception, and an examiner will expect you to say so before you list the exceptions.

It does not mean a one-member company is a sham. Section 3(1)(c) expressly allows a One Person Company, so having a single member is lawful and is not by itself a ground for lifting anything.

Limits and criticism

The judicial categories are criticised as vague. "Fraud" and "single economic unit" are not tests so much as labels applied after the decision has been made, and the same facts can be described either way. That vagueness is the reason the statutory instances matter: they tell a person in advance exactly when their limited liability is at risk.

The counter-argument is that a closed statutory list would be gamed within a year, and that the courts need a residual power precisely because dishonest people are inventive. An answer that sets out both sides is a better answer than one that recites categories.

Quick revision

  • The rule is separate personality, section 9. Lifting is the exception.
  • Judicial grounds: fraud or improper conduct, evasion of law or of a contract, enemy character, tax evasion, single economic unit.
  • Section 3A: below seven or two members, business carried on more than six months, member aware, severally liable for debts of that period.
  • Section 7(5): false particulars, action under section 447.
  • Section 7(6): company got incorporated by fraud, promoters, first directors and declarants liable under section 447.
  • Section 7(7): Tribunal may regulate management, make members' liability unlimited, strike off, wind up, or make any other order. Hearing first, and past transactions considered.
  • Section 339: in winding up, business carried on to defraud, director, manager, officer or knowing party personally responsible without limit.
  • Section 464: association above the prescribed number, capped at one hundred, fine up to one lakh rupees and personal liability. HUF and professionals exempt.

Test yourself

1. What is meant by lifting the corporate veil? Disregarding the separation between a company and the persons behind it, created by section 9, so as to fix those persons with liability or to look at their characteristics. It is an exception to the rule in Salomon.

2. Name five statutory instances under the Companies Act 2013. Section 3A, membership below the minimum for over six months; section 7(6), incorporation obtained by fraud; section 7(7), the Tribunal's power to make members' liability unlimited; section 339, fraudulent conduct of business in a winding up; section 464(3), association exceeding the prescribed number.

munotes.in17

Lifting the Corporate Veil

3. Under section 339, who may apply and against whom? The Official Liquidator, the Company Liquidator, any creditor or any contributory may apply. The declaration may be made against any past or present director, manager or officer, and against any person who was knowingly a party to carrying on the business with intent to defraud.

4. A public company has had five members for four months and is trading. Are the members personally liable? Not yet. Section 3A requires the business to be carried on for more than six months while the number is reduced. At four months the condition is not satisfied. Liability, if it comes, attaches only to debts contracted after the six months and only to members who are aware of the position.

5. What is the maximum number of persons who may carry on business in an unregistered association? Such number as may be prescribed, and the proviso to section 464(1) says the prescribed number shall not exceed one hundred. A Hindu undivided family, and an association of professionals governed by special Acts, are outside the section altogether.

6. Can the Tribunal make the members of a limited company unlimitedly liable? Yes, in one situation: section 7(7)(b), where the company was got incorporated by false or incorrect information, by suppression of a material fact, or by any fraudulent action. The company must first be heard, and the Tribunal must consider the transactions it has already entered into.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in18

Chapter Four

Citizenship, Nationality and Residence of a Company

Syllabus topic 1.1, label: "Citizenship of a Company"

In one line

A company is not a citizen, but it does have a nationality and a residence, and the three are different questions with different answers.

In exam wording: a company is a legal person but not a natural person, so it cannot be a citizen and cannot claim the fundamental rights that the Constitution gives only to citizens. It does, however, have a nationality, fixed by the country under whose law it is incorporated, and a residence, fixed by where its control and management actually sit.

Why the law has this at all

The confusion this topic exists to clear up comes from taking "legal person" too literally. Section 9 makes a company a person, and a beginner naturally asks: if it is a person, is it an Indian?

The answer has to be no, because citizenship is a status the Constitution and the Citizenship Act confer on human beings, by birth, descent, registration, naturalisation or incorporation of territory. None of those five routes is available to a thing that comes into existence when a Registrar signs a certificate.

But it cannot be nothing either. A company plainly belongs somewhere: it was registered somewhere, it is taxed somewhere, and in wartime somebody has to decide whether it is friend or enemy. So the law gives it nationality and residence instead, and keeps those separate from citizenship.

Some words this chapter uses

A citizen is a person on whom the state confers full membership of the political community. A natural person is a human being; a juristic or legal person is anything else the law treats as a person. Nationality, for a company, means the legal system it belongs to. Residence means where a company actually is for the purposes of a particular law, most often tax. Domicile is the place a company is permanently attached to, and for a company it is the place of incorporation and does not change.

The three questions, kept apart

1. Is a company a citizen? No.

The Constitution gives some rights to all persons and some only to citizens. Article 14, equality before the law, is given to "any person", and a company can claim it. The freedoms in Article 19, including the freedom to practise any profession or to carry on any occupation, trade or business, are given to "all citizens", and a company cannot claim them in its own right.

That is the whole of the doctrine and it is usually all that is asked. Two refinements are worth a sentence each.

First, the shareholders' rights are not lost. Where state action against a company also injures the fundamental rights of its shareholders as individuals, the shareholders may complain, because they are citizens even though the company is not.

munotes.in19

Citizenship, Nationality and Residence of a Company

Second, "not a citizen" is not "no rights". A company holds the rights given to persons, and it holds its ordinary legal rights of property and contract under section 9 in full. Nothing about the citizenship rule weakens the company's separate personality.

2. What is a company's nationality? The country it was incorporated in.

A company's nationality follows its place of incorporation, and the Companies Act works on exactly that footing. Section 2(20) defines a company as one incorporated under this Act or under any previous company law, so an Indian company is an Indian company because it is on the Indian register.

Everything else is a foreign company. Section 2(42) defines it as:

any company or body corporate incorporated outside India which (a) has a place of business in India whether by itself or through an agent, physically or through electronic mode; and (b) conducts any business activity in India in any other manner.

Note the two limbs. Being incorporated outside India is not by itself enough to make a body a "foreign company" for this Act; it must also have a place of business in India and conduct business activity here. A company in Singapore with no Indian presence is simply outside the Act.

3. Where does a company reside? Where it is really controlled.

Nationality is fixed once and for all at incorporation. Residence is a question of fact and can change, because it asks where the company's central control and management actually are. This is why an Indian-registered company may be resident abroad for a particular purpose, and why a foreign-registered company controlled from Mumbai may be treated as resident here.

The Act contains a striking illustration of the same instinct. Section 379(2) provides that where not less than fifty per cent of the paid-up share capital of a foreign company, whether equity or preference or partly both, is held by one or more citizens of India, or by one or more companies or bodies corporate incorporated in India, or by a combination of the two, whether singly or in the aggregate, that company shall comply with the provisions of this Chapter and such other provisions of this Act as may be prescribed with regard to the business carried on by it in India as if it were a company incorporated in India.

Read that carefully, because it is the most examinable sentence in this chapter. The company's nationality does not change. It remains incorporated outside India. What changes is the regulatory treatment: for its Indian business it is treated as if it were an Indian company. That is the law choosing substance over the register, and it is the same instinct that drives veil-lifting.

munotes.in20

Citizenship, Nationality and Residence of a Company

Section 379(1) sets the baseline: sections 380 to 386 and sections 392 and 393 apply to all foreign companies, whoever owns them.

A worked example

Harbour Analytics Pte Ltd is incorporated in Singapore. It opens an office in Andheri and sells software to Indian banks. Sixty per cent of its shares are held by two Indian citizens and by an Indian private company.

Is it a citizen of India? No, and neither would an Indian-registered company be. Citizenship is not available to any company.

What is its nationality? Singaporean. It was incorporated under Singapore law and that does not change because Indians bought its shares.

Is it a "foreign company" under this Act? Yes. It is incorporated outside India, it has a place of business in India, and it conducts business activity here, so section 2(42) is satisfied on both limbs.

What follows from the sixty per cent? Section 379(2) is triggered, because at least fifty per cent of the paid-up share capital is held by Indian citizens and an Indian company in the aggregate. So for the business it carries on in India it must comply with Chapter XXII and such other provisions as are prescribed as if it were an Indian company. Sections 380 to 386, 392 and 393 would have applied to it anyway under section 379(1).

Change one fact. If the Indian holding were forty per cent, section 379(2) would not bite, and only section 379(1) would apply. The company would still be a foreign company; it would simply carry a lighter load.

Distinctions that carry marks

CitizenshipNationalityResidence
Available to a company?NoYesYes
Fixed byThe Constitution and the Citizenship Act, for human beingsPlace of incorporationWhere control and management actually are
Can it change?Not applicableNoYes, it is a question of fact
Why it mattersArticle 19 rights cannot be claimed by a companyDecides which company law governs itDecides tax and, historically, enemy character

What this does NOT mean

It does not mean a company has no constitutional protection. Rights given to "any person", such as Article 14, are available to it.

It does not mean shareholders lose their rights. They are citizens and their own fundamental rights survive the fact that they invested through a company.

It does not mean a foreign company escapes Indian law. Section 379(1) applies a defined set of provisions to every foreign company, and section 379(2) applies much more where the ownership is substantially Indian.

It does not mean nationality and residence are the same. Mixing them is the commonest error here. Nationality is fixed at incorporation; residence is a factual question about control.

munotes.in21

Citizenship, Nationality and Residence of a Company

Quick revision

  • Citizen: no. A company is a juristic person, not a natural one, so it cannot claim Article 19 rights. It can claim rights given to "any person", such as Article 14.
  • Shareholders: remain citizens and keep their own fundamental rights.
  • Nationality: the country of incorporation. Section 2(20) for Indian companies.
  • Foreign company: section 2(42), incorporated outside India, and has a place of business in India, and conducts business activity here.
  • Section 379(1): sections 380 to 386, 392 and 393 apply to all foreign companies.
  • Section 379(2): fifty per cent or more of the paid-up capital held by Indian citizens or Indian bodies corporate, singly or in the aggregate, means the company complies with Chapter XXII as if it were incorporated in India, for its Indian business.
  • Residence: where central control and management are. A question of fact, and it can change.

Test yourself

1. Is a company a citizen of India? No. Citizenship is conferred on natural persons. A company is a juristic person, so it cannot claim the rights that Article 19 gives to citizens only, though it can claim rights given to any person, such as Article 14.

2. If a company cannot claim Article 19, is its business unprotected? No. The shareholders are citizens and may complain of state action that infringes their own fundamental rights, and the company retains its ordinary legal rights of property and contract under section 9.

3. Define a foreign company. Section 2(42): any company or body corporate incorporated outside India which has a place of business in India, whether by itself or through an agent, physically or through electronic mode, and conducts any business activity in India in any other manner.

4. A company incorporated in Dubai has seventy per cent of its shares held by Indian citizens and runs a branch in Pune. What is the consequence? Section 379(2) applies, because not less than fifty per cent of the paid-up share capital is held by Indian citizens. For the business it carries on in India it must comply with Chapter XXII and such other provisions as may be prescribed as if it were a company incorporated in India. Its nationality remains foreign.

5. Distinguish the nationality of a company from its residence. Nationality is fixed by the place of incorporation and does not change. Residence depends on where the central control and management of the company actually are, is a question of fact, and can change.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in22

Chapter Five

Types of Companies by Liability and Membership

Syllabus topic 1.1, label: "Types of Companies"

In one line

Companies sort along two independent axes, and this chapter takes the first: how far the members can be made to pay, and how many of them there are.

In exam wording: under section 3(2) a company may be limited by shares, limited by guarantee or unlimited; and under section 2 it may be private, public, a One Person Company or a small company, according to its membership and its size.

Why the law has this at all

A company that is going to raise money from the public and a company that two brothers run between them need very different rules. If the law imposed the public company's rules on the brothers, nobody would incorporate a small business. If it let a company selling shares to strangers run on the brothers' rules, the strangers would be robbed.

So the Act sorts companies into classes and attaches a different weight of regulation to each. Almost every later chapter in this book has a sentence beginning "in the case of a public company", and this chapter is what makes those sentences mean something.

The two axes are independent and that is the thing students get wrong. "Private" and "limited by shares" are not alternatives; they are answers to different questions. A company can be private and limited by shares, which most Indian companies are, or public and limited by guarantee, or private and unlimited.

Some words this chapter uses

Paid-up share capital, section 2(64), is the money actually received by the company on its shares. Turnover is the value of what the company sold in a financial year. A subscriber is one of the first members who signs the memorandum. Winding up is the process of closing a company and distributing its assets. A joint holding is one share held by two or more people together.

Axis one: liability, under section 3(2)

Section 3(2) says a company formed under section 3(1) may be either a company limited by shares, or a company limited by guarantee, or an unlimited company. That is a closed list of three.

Limited by shares

Section 2(22): a company having the liability of its members limited by the memorandum to the amount, if any, unpaid on the shares respectively held by them.

Four things follow. The limit is set by the memorandum. It is the unpaid amount, so a member with fully paid shares owes nothing more. The words "if any" matter, because if nothing is unpaid the liability is nil. And the limit attaches to the shares, so it travels with them.

This is the ordinary commercial company and the great majority of companies in India are of this kind.

munotes.in23

Types of Companies by Liability and Membership

Limited by guarantee

Section 2(21): a company having the liability of its members limited by the memorandum to such amount as the members may respectively undertake to contribute to the assets of the company in the event of its being wound up.

The differences from the first kind are worth spelling out because they are examined together. The member does not buy shares; he promises an amount. The promise is enforceable only in the event of winding up, so while the company is a going concern the members owe nothing at all. And the amount is whatever each member undertook in the memorandum, so different members may have undertaken different amounts.

That is exactly what a club, a trade association, a school or a research body needs. It wants members, not investors, and it does not want to hand out shares. A guarantee company may also have a share capital, in which case its members carry both liabilities.

Unlimited

Section 3(2)(c). The members' liability is not limited at all, and on a winding up they must contribute whatever is needed to pay the debts. It is rare, and it is chosen where members want to signal that they stand fully behind the business, or where the regulatory relief for unlimited companies is worth more than the protection given up.

Axis two: membership

Private company, section 2(68)

A private company is one having a minimum paid-up share capital as may be prescribed, and which by its articles:

  • (i) restricts the right to transfer its shares;
  • (ii) except in the case of a One Person Company, limits the number of its members to two hundred, joint holders being counted as a single member; and
  • (iii) prohibits any invitation to the public to subscribe for any securities of the company.

About the capital. The words "of one lakh rupees or such higher paid-up share capital" were omitted by the Companies (Amendment) Act 2015 with effect from 29 May 2015. What survives is "as may be prescribed", and no minimum is prescribed. So a private company can be incorporated with a paid-up capital of one hundred rupees. Writing that a private company needs one lakh rupees is an error of live law.

About the two hundred. Note two things. The count is of members, not of shareholders as individuals, so joint holders of a share are one member. And the limit is on members, not on employees or former employees who became members while employed, who are excluded by the second proviso.

About the restriction on transfer. This is the clause that makes a private company private in practice. Read it alongside section 44, which makes shares transferable in the manner provided by the articles. Section 44 is what gives the articles the power that section 2(68)(i) then requires them to use.

munotes.in24

Types of Companies by Liability and Membership

Public company, section 2(71)

A public company is one which:

  • (a) is not a private company; and
  • (b) has a minimum paid-up share capital as may be prescribed.

The definition is deliberately residual. A company is public because it is not private, not because of anything it does. The words "of five lakh rupees or such higher paid-up capital," were omitted by the same 2015 Act on the same day, so there is no capital floor here either.

The proviso is the sting, and it is heavily examined:

a company which is a subsidiary of a company, not being a private company, shall be deemed to be public company for the purposes of this Act even where such subsidiary company continues to be a private company in its articles.

So a private company that is a subsidiary of a public company is treated as public, no matter what its own articles say. It keeps its restrictive articles and it loses its private status. Students almost always miss this.

One Person Company, section 2(62)

"One Person Company" means a company which has only one person as a member. Section 3(1)(c) allows it to be formed, and says it is a private company, so everything said about private companies applies to it except the two hundred member ceiling, which section 2(68)(ii) expressly disapplies.

The four provisos to section 3(1), covering the nominee, are set out in [What a Company Is] and are the distinctive feature: the memorandum must name a person, with prior written consent, who becomes the member on the subscriber's death or incapacity.

Small company, section 2(85)

A small company is a company, other than a public company, of which:

  • (i) the paid-up share capital does not exceed fifty lakh rupees, or such higher amount as may be prescribed, which shall not be more than ten crore rupees; and
  • (ii) the turnover as per the profit and loss account for the immediately preceding financial year does not exceed two crore rupees, or such higher amount as may be prescribed, which shall not be more than one hundred crore rupees.

Both limbs must be satisfied, because the clause says "and".

The proviso excludes three kinds outright, whatever their size: (A) a holding company or a subsidiary company; (B) a company registered under section 8; and (C) a company or body corporate governed by any special Act.

Note the drafting technique in the two figures. The section states a figure and then a ceiling on what may be prescribed, so the Government can raise the threshold by rule up to ten crore and one hundred crore but no further. Small company status is not a separate kind of company; it is a size label that switches on relief in later chapters, such as fewer board meetings and a simpler annual return.

munotes.in25

Types of Companies by Liability and Membership

Pending reform, not law. The Corporate Laws (Amendment) Bill 2026 would raise these thresholds. It is before a Joint Parliamentary Committee, which reported on 3 August 2026, and it has not been passed or assented to. Answer on the figures above.

A worked example

Meera and Farhan want to open a design studio in Dadar.

They are two, so under section 3(1)(b) they may form a private company. They choose to be limited by shares under section 3(2)(a), so their liability will be limited to any amount unpaid on their shares, under section 2(22).

Their articles must, under section 2(68), restrict the transfer of shares, cap members at two hundred, and prohibit any invitation to the public. They put in a paid-up capital of ten thousand rupees, which is lawful, because the one lakh rupee floor was removed on 29 May 2015.

In its first year the studio's paid-up capital is ten thousand rupees and its turnover is eighty lakh rupees. Both are within section 2(85), it is not a public company, and it is not a holding or subsidiary company, a section 8 company or governed by a special Act. It is a small company and gets the reliefs that go with that.

Now change one fact. A listed public company buys sixty per cent of the studio. Two things happen at once. By the proviso to section 2(71) the studio is deemed to be a public company, even though its articles still restrict transfers. And by proviso (A) to section 2(85) it stops being a small company, because it is now a subsidiary. Its capital and turnover have not moved at all.

Distinctions that carry marks

Private companyPublic company
DefinitionSection 2(68), by what its articles must doSection 2(71), residual: not a private company
Members, minimumTwo, section 3(1)(b); one for an OPCSeven, section 3(1)(a)
Members, maximumTwo hundred, except an OPCNo limit
Transfer of sharesArticles must restrict itFreely transferable
Public invitationArticles must prohibit itPermitted, under Chapter III
Minimum paid-up capitalNone prescribed since 29 May 2015None prescribed since 29 May 2015
Subsidiary of a public companyDeemed public, proviso to section 2(71)Not applicable
Limited by sharesLimited by guaranteeUnlimited
Section2(22)2(21)3(2)(c)
Measure of liabilityAmount unpaid on sharesAmount undertaken in the memorandumNo limit
When payableOn call, at any timeOnly on winding upOn winding up
Typical useTrading and commercialClubs, associations, research bodiesRare
munotes.in26

Types of Companies by Liability and Membership

What this does NOT mean

It does not mean "private" and "limited by shares" are alternatives. They answer different questions and every company has an answer to both.

It does not mean a private company is small. Some of the largest companies in India are private companies. Size is section 2(85); privateness is section 2(68).

It does not mean a small company is a separate kind of company. It is a label that attaches to a private company for as long as it stays under both thresholds, and it falls away the moment either is crossed or the company becomes a subsidiary.

It does not mean a One Person Company has one director. It has one member. Directors are a different question entirely.

Quick revision

  • Section 3(2): limited by shares, limited by guarantee, or unlimited. A closed list.
  • 2(22) unpaid on shares; 2(21) amount undertaken, payable only on winding up.
  • 2(68) private: articles restrict transfer, cap members at two hundred except an OPC, prohibit public invitation. Joint holders count as one.
  • 2(71) public: not a private company. Proviso: a subsidiary of a non-private company is deemed public.
  • No minimum paid-up capital for either since 29 May 2015, Act 21 of 2015.
  • 2(62) OPC: one member; a private company by section 3(1)(c).
  • 2(85) small: not public, capital up to fifty lakh (prescribable to ten crore) and turnover up to two crore (prescribable to one hundred crore). Excludes holding and subsidiary companies, section 8 companies, and companies under a special Act.
  • Section 464: unregistered associations above the prescribed number, capped at one hundred.

Test yourself

1. What are the three kinds of company by liability? Limited by shares, limited by guarantee, and unlimited: section 3(2).

2. What must a private company's articles contain? Under section 2(68): a restriction on the right to transfer its shares; a limit of two hundred members, except in a One Person Company; and a prohibition on any invitation to the public to subscribe for its securities.

3. What is the minimum paid-up capital of a public company? None. The words "of five lakh rupees or such higher paid-up capital," were omitted from section 2(71) by the Companies (Amendment) Act 2015 with effect from 29 May 2015, and nothing has been prescribed in their place.

4. A private company is a wholly owned subsidiary of a listed company. Its articles still restrict transfers. Is it private? No. By the proviso to section 2(71) it is deemed to be a public company for the purposes of the Act, even though it continues to be a private company in its articles.

munotes.in27

Types of Companies by Liability and Membership

5. A company has paid-up capital of forty lakh rupees and turnover of one crore fifty lakh rupees, and is a subsidiary of another company. Is it a small company? No. Both numerical limbs of section 2(85) are satisfied, but proviso (A) excludes a subsidiary company outright.

6. In a company limited by guarantee, when does a member have to pay? Only in the event of the company being wound up, and then only the amount he undertook by the memorandum to contribute: section 2(21).

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in28

Chapter Six

Types of Companies by Control and Purpose

Syllabus topic 1.1, label: "Types of Companies"

In one line

The second way of sorting companies asks who controls them and what they exist for: whether another company controls them, whether the Government does, whether they trade at all, and whether they were set up for a special purpose the Act singles out.

In exam wording: besides the classification by liability and membership, the Companies Act 2013 recognises holding, subsidiary and associate companies under sections 2(46), 2(87) and 2(6); Government companies under section 2(45); foreign companies under section 2(42); dormant companies under section 455; Nidhi companies under section 406; producer companies under Chapter XXIA; and companies with charitable objects under section 8.

Why the law has this at all

Once companies can own shares in other companies, a single business can be spread across twenty legal persons. If the law looked only at each company on its own, a group could hide its debts in one subsidiary, its profits in another and its risks in a third, and no shareholder or creditor could see the whole.

So the Act defines the relationships between companies, and then uses those definitions to require consolidated accounts, to restrict loans and investments inside a group, and to stop the circular shareholding that would let a group own itself. The definitions in this chapter are the plumbing for a good deal of Modules II and III.

The other companies here exist for a different reason: they are ordinary companies doing something the Act wants to treat specially, either because the Government owns them, or because they do not trade, or because they are doing a job the law wants to encourage.

Some words this chapter uses

Control, for these purposes, is defined in each clause and is not left to ordinary language. Total voting power means the total number of votes that may be cast at a general meeting. A layer of subsidiaries means one step down the ownership chain. A joint venture is defined in the Explanation to section 2(6). An intellectual property is a right such as a patent or a trade mark. Beneficial interest means the real ownership behind a registered name.

The group relationships

Subsidiary, section 2(87)

A subsidiary, in relation to any other company (that is to say the holding company), means a company in which the holding company:

  • (i) controls the composition of the Board of Directors; or
  • (ii) exercises or controls more than one-half of the total voting power either at its own or together with one or more of its subsidiary companies.

The "or" is the point. There are two independent tests, and satisfying either one is enough. A company that holds only thirty per cent of the shares but can appoint or remove a majority of the board is a holding company just as surely as one that holds fifty-one per cent.

munotes.in29

Types of Companies by Control and Purpose

Test (i), control of composition, means the power to appoint or remove all or a majority of the directors. Test (ii), more than one-half of the total voting power, is a bare arithmetic test, and the words "either at its own or together with one or more of its subsidiary companies" make it a group test: A holds thirty per cent of C directly and owns B, which holds twenty-five per cent of C. Together that is fifty-five per cent, so C is A's subsidiary.

The proviso limits layers. Such class or classes of holding companies as may be prescribed shall not have layers of subsidiaries beyond such numbers as may be prescribed. The mischief is a chain of companies so long that nobody can trace who really owns the business at the bottom.

Holding company, section 2(46)

A company of which such companies are subsidiary companies. It is purely the mirror of section 2(87), so all the work is done there. The Explanation adds that for this clause "company" includes any body corporate, which matters because it brings in bodies that are not companies registered under this Act.

Associate company, section 2(6)

A company in which that other company has a significant influence, but which is not a subsidiary company of the company having such influence, and includes a joint venture company.

The Explanation defines both key terms:

  • "significant influence" means control of at least twenty per cent of total voting power, or control of or participation in business decisions under an agreement;
  • "joint venture" means a joint arrangement whereby the parties that have joint control of the arrangement have rights to the net assets of the arrangement.

So the ladder is: twenty per cent or more but not control equals associate; control equals subsidiary. And note that significant influence has a second route that has nothing to do with shares at all: control of or participation in business decisions under an agreement. A company with no shareholding whatever can be an associate if there is such an agreement.

Section 19: a subsidiary may not hold shares in its holding company

This section exists to stop a group owning itself, which would let the same money be counted as capital twice.

Section 19(1) provides that no company shall, either by itself or through its nominees, hold any shares in its holding company, and no holding company shall allot or transfer its shares to any of its subsidiary companies, and any such allotment or transfer shall be void.

munotes.in30

Types of Companies by Control and Purpose

Three exceptions in the first proviso, where the subsidiary holds the shares:

  • (a) as the legal representative of a deceased member of the holding company;
  • (b) as a trustee; or
  • (c) where the subsidiary was a shareholder even before it became a subsidiary.

The second proviso restricts voting: a subsidiary within the exceptions may vote at a meeting of the holding company only in respect of the shares it holds as a legal representative or as a trustee, that is, under (a) or (b). So the (c) shareholding is tolerated but silent.

Section 19(2) deals with a holding company that has no share capital, being limited by guarantee or unlimited: the reference to shares is read as a reference to the interest of its members, whatever be the form of interest.

Government company, section 2(45)

Any company in which not less than fifty-one per cent of the paid-up share capital is held by the Central Government, or by any State Government or Governments, or partly by the Central Government and partly by one or more State Governments, and includes a company which is a subsidiary company of such a Government company.

Three points. The threshold is not less than fifty-one per cent, so exactly fifty-one qualifies. The holding may be aggregated across the Centre and one or more States. And a subsidiary of a Government company is itself a Government company, which extends the definition a long way down a group.

A Government company is an ordinary company in all other respects. It is registered under this Act, it has shareholders and directors, and it can be sued. Being a Government company is not the same as being the Government, and the separate personality in section 9 applies to it exactly as to any other company.

Dormant company, section 455

Section 455(1) lets a company apply to the Registrar for the status of a dormant company where it is formed and registered for a future project or to hold an asset or intellectual property and has no significant accounting transaction, or where it is an inactive company.

The Explanation defines both terms and they are examinable:

  • "inactive company" means a company which has not been carrying on any business or operation, or has not made any significant accounting transaction during the last two financial years, or has not filed financial statements and annual returns during the last two financial years.
  • "significant accounting transaction" means any transaction other than: (a) payment of fees to the Registrar; (b) payments made to fulfil the requirements of this Act or any other law; (c) allotment of shares to fulfil the requirements of this Act; and (d) payments for maintenance of its office and records.
munotes.in31

Types of Companies by Control and Purpose

Read (a) to (d) again. They are the four things a company must do simply to stay alive. Excluding them means a company can keep itself lawfully in existence without losing dormant status.

The rest of the section is machinery. The Registrar allows the status and issues a certificate, section 455(2), and maintains a register of dormant companies, section 455(3). Where a company has not filed financial statements or annual returns for two consecutive financial years, the Registrar shall issue a notice and enter its name in that register, section 455(4), so dormancy can be imposed as well as applied for. A dormant company must keep a minimum number of directors, file documents and pay an annual fee to retain the status, and may become active again on application, section 455(5). If it fails to comply, the Registrar shall strike off its name from the register of dormant companies, section 455(6).

Nidhi and producer companies, in one line each

A Nidhi, section 406, is a company incorporated with the object of cultivating the habit of thrift and savings among its members, receiving deposits from and lending to its members only, for their mutual benefit. It is a recognised class with its own rules and it appears again in [Government Companies, Registration Offices, Statistics and Nidhis].

A producer company is a company of primary producers, formed under Chapter XXIA, sections 378A to 378ZU, which was put into this Act in 2020. It has its own chapter, [Producer Companies].

A worked example

Anvi Holdings Limited owns forty per cent of Kesar Foods Private Limited and, under a shareholders' agreement, has the right to appoint four of Kesar's seven directors.

Is Kesar a subsidiary? Yes. Anvi does not have more than half the voting power, so test (ii) of section 2(87) fails. But it controls the composition of the Board, because it can appoint a majority of the directors, so test (i) is satisfied. Either test is enough.

What does that make Anvi? A holding company, by section 2(46).

What is Kesar's status as a private company? By the proviso to section 2(71), a private company that is a subsidiary of a company which is not a private company is deemed to be a public company. So if Anvi is public, Kesar is deemed public.

Kesar owns some shares in Anvi, bought last year. That is caught by section 19(1) and is void, unless it falls in one of the three exceptions. It does not: Kesar is not a legal representative or a trustee, and it bought the shares after becoming a subsidiary, so exception (c) does not apply either.

munotes.in32

Types of Companies by Control and Purpose

Anvi also owns twenty-two per cent of Rangoli Spices Limited and cannot control it. Twenty-two per cent is at least twenty per cent of total voting power, so Anvi has significant influence and Rangoli is an associate company under section 2(6), not a subsidiary.

Distinctions that carry marks

SubsidiaryAssociate
Section2(87)2(6)
TestControl of Board composition, or more than one-half of total voting powerSignificant influence: at least twenty per cent of total voting power, or participation in business decisions under an agreement
RelationshipControlledInfluenced, but expressly not a subsidiary
IncludesGroup holdings through other subsidiariesA joint venture company
Dormant companyInactive company
Where definedSection 455(1) and (2), a status granted by the RegistrarExplanation (i) to section 455, a factual description
How it arisesOn application, or imposed under section 455(4)Simply by not trading or not filing
EffectReduced compliance while the status lastsNone by itself; it is a qualifying condition

What this does NOT mean

It does not mean fifty-one per cent is needed for a subsidiary. Control of Board composition is enough, at any shareholding.

It does not mean an associate is a small subsidiary. Section 2(6) expressly excludes a subsidiary. The two categories cannot overlap.

It does not mean a Government company is part of the Government. It is a company under section 9 with its own personality, and it sues and is sued in its own name.

It does not mean a dormant company is a dead one. It exists, it keeps directors, it files and it pays a fee, and it can be made active again under section 455(5).

Quick revision

  • 2(87) subsidiary: control of Board composition or more than one-half of total voting power, alone or with other subsidiaries. Proviso: prescribed classes may not exceed prescribed layers.
  • 2(46) holding: the mirror; "company" includes any body corporate.
  • 2(6) associate: significant influence, not a subsidiary, includes a joint venture. Significant influence is at least twenty per cent of total voting power or participation in business decisions under an agreement.
  • Section 19: a subsidiary may not hold shares in its holding company; any such allotment or transfer is void. Exceptions: legal representative, trustee, or a shareholder before becoming a subsidiary. Only the first two may vote.
  • 2(45) Government company: not less than fifty-one per cent held by the Centre, a State, or both together; includes a subsidiary of such a company.
  • Section 455 dormant: future project, holding an asset or intellectual property, no significant accounting transaction, or inactive. Four excluded transactions. Registrar may impose it after two years of non-filing.
  • 2(42) foreign; section 406 Nidhi; Chapter XXIA producer companies; section 8 charitable.
munotes.in33

Types of Companies by Control and Purpose

Test yourself

1. State the two tests for a subsidiary company. Section 2(87): the holding company either controls the composition of the Board of Directors, or exercises or controls more than one-half of the total voting power, alone or together with one or more of its subsidiaries. Either test alone suffices.

2. What is significant influence? Under the Explanation to section 2(6), control of at least twenty per cent of total voting power, or control of or participation in business decisions under an agreement.

3. A subsidiary buys shares in its holding company on the stock exchange. Is the purchase good? No. Section 19(1) makes any such holding, and any allotment or transfer to a subsidiary, void. None of the three exceptions in the first proviso applies to a purchase made after the company became a subsidiary.

4. Is a company in which the Central Government holds thirty per cent and the State of Maharashtra holds twenty-five per cent a Government company? Yes. Section 2(45) allows the holding to be partly by the Central Government and partly by one or more State Governments, and the aggregate here is fifty-five per cent, which is not less than fifty-one per cent.

5. What is a significant accounting transaction? Any transaction other than the four in Explanation (ii) to section 455: payment of fees to the Registrar, payments to fulfil the requirements of this or any other law, allotment of shares to fulfil the requirements of this Act, and payments for maintenance of the office and records.

6. Can the Registrar make a company dormant without an application? Yes. Under section 455(4), where a company has not filed financial statements or annual returns for two consecutive financial years, the Registrar shall issue a notice and enter its name in the register of dormant companies.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in34

Chapter Seven

Companies with Charitable Objects

Syllabus topic 1.1, label: "Types of Companies"

In one line

A section 8 company is a company formed to do good rather than to make money for its members, and in exchange for promising not to pay dividends it is allowed to drop "Limited" from its name.

In exam wording: section 8 of the Companies Act 2013 empowers the Central Government to license an association with charitable objects, which intends to apply its profits in promoting those objects and to prohibit the payment of dividend to its members, to be registered as a limited company without the word "Limited" or "Private Limited" in its name.

Why the law has this at all

A charity that wants to hold property, employ people, take donations and be sued in one name needs exactly what a company offers: separate personality and perpetual succession. A trust or a society can do some of this, less conveniently.

But the word "Limited" at the end of a name signals a business, and a charity does not want it. More importantly, a body that keeps its surplus for its objects is not really a trading company at all, and forcing it to look like one misleads the public.

So section 8 makes a trade. Give up the two things that make a company commercial, the power to distribute profit and the right to be treated as an ordinary registrant, and the law gives you the corporate form with a plain name and a lighter tax and fee burden. The licence is the instrument by which the Government polices that bargain, and most of section 8 is about the licence.

Some words this chapter uses

A licence here is the Central Government's written permission, without which the company cannot be registered under this section. A dividend is a distribution of profit to members. To revoke is to cancel. Amalgamation is the merging of two companies into one. Dissolution is the final ending of a company's existence.

The three conditions: section 8(1)

The Central Government must be satisfied that the person or association proposed to be registered as a limited company:

  • (a) has in its objects the promotion of commerce, art, science, sports, education, research, social welfare, religion, charity, protection of environment or any such other object;
  • (b) intends to apply its profits, if any, or other income in promoting its objects; and
  • (c) intends to prohibit the payment of any dividend to its members.

All three, because the clauses are cumulative. A body with charitable objects that intends to pay dividends is not a section 8 company.

Two drafting points worth noticing. The list in (a) ends with "or any such other object", so it is illustrative and not closed; a purpose of the same general character qualifies. And (b) says "profits, if any", which concedes that a section 8 company may well make a profit. What it may not do is hand that profit to its members.

munotes.in35

Companies with Charitable Objects

Where satisfied, the Government may by licence, issued in the prescribed manner and on such conditions as it deems fit, allow registration as a limited company without the addition to its name of the word "Limited" or the words "Private Limited", and the Registrar shall then register it on application.

The consequences: section 8(2), (3) and (4)

Section 8(2): it is a real company. It shall enjoy all the privileges and be subject to all the obligations of limited companies. Losing the word "Limited" does not lose the limited liability, and it does not buy any exemption from the rest of the Act except where the Act says so.

Section 8(3): a firm may be a member. This is a genuine exception. A partnership firm is not a person in law, and ordinarily cannot be a member of a company. Section 8(3) lets it be one here.

Section 8(4): two restrictions.

  • (i) The company shall not alter the provisions of its memorandum or articles except with the previous approval of the Central Government. So the constitutional documents are frozen without permission, which is how the Government keeps the objects charitable.
  • (ii) The company may convert itself into a company of any other kind only after complying with such conditions as may be prescribed. Conversion out of section 8 is possible but controlled.

Bringing an existing company in: section 8(5)

An ordinary limited company already registered under this Act or a previous company law, which is found to have been formed with the section 8(1)(a) objects and with the (b) and (c) restrictions, may be licensed to be registered under section 8 and to change its name by omitting "Limited" or "Private Limited". Every provision of the section then applies to it.

Revocation: section 8(6), (7) and (8)

Section 8(6): when the licence can be revoked. The Central Government may by order revoke the licence if:

  1. the company contravenes any of the requirements of this section; or
  2. it contravenes any of the conditions subject to which the licence was issued; or
  3. the affairs of the company are conducted fraudulently, or in a manner violative of the objects of the company, or prejudicial to public interest.

On revocation the Government directs the company to convert its status and change its name to add "Limited" or "Private Limited", and the Registrar registers it accordingly.

Two safeguards. The first proviso: no such order shall be made unless the company is given a reasonable opportunity of being heard. The second proviso: a copy of every such order shall be given to the Registrar.

munotes.in36

Companies with Charitable Objects

Section 8(7): what may follow revocation. Where a licence is revoked, the Central Government may, if satisfied that it is essential in the public interest, direct that the company be wound up or amalgamated with another company registered under this section. Again, only after a reasonable opportunity of being heard.

Section 8(8): a forced amalgamation. Where the licence is revoked and the Government is satisfied that it is essential in the public interest that the company be amalgamated with another section 8 company having similar objects, it may by order provide for the amalgamation, notwithstanding anything to the contrary in this Act, specifying the constitution, properties, powers, rights, interests, authorities, privileges, liabilities, duties and obligations of the merged company. This is one of the few places where the Act allows a merger to be imposed by executive order rather than approved by a Tribunal.

What happens to the assets: section 8(9) and (10)

Section 8(9). If on winding up or dissolution any asset remains after satisfaction of the debts and liabilities, it may be:

  • transferred to another section 8 company having similar objects, on such conditions as the Tribunal may impose; or
  • sold, and the proceeds credited to the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Fund formed under section 224 of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code 2016.

Notice what is missing: the members get nothing. In an ordinary company the surplus after paying creditors goes to the members. Here it cannot, because the whole basis of the licence is that members do not take value out.

Section 8(10). A section 8 company shall amalgamate only with another company registered under this section and having similar objects. So charitable assets cannot be walked out of the sector through a merger.

The penalty: section 8(11)

If a company makes any default in complying with the requirements of the section, then without prejudice to any other action under the section:

  • the company shall be punishable with a fine not less than ten lakh rupees and up to one crore rupees; and
  • the directors and every officer in default shall be punishable with a fine not less than twenty-five thousand rupees and up to twenty-five lakh rupees.

The proviso: when it is proved that the affairs of the company were conducted fraudulently, every officer in default shall be liable for action under section 447, the Act's fraud provision.

A worked example

A group of doctors in Nagpur wants to run a free diagnostic centre. They want corporate form so that the equipment can be owned in one name and the centre can survive them.

munotes.in37

Companies with Charitable Objects

They apply for a licence under section 8, showing objects of social welfare and charity within clause (a), an intention to plough back any surplus under clause (b), and an article prohibiting dividends under clause (c). The Central Government grants a licence and they register as Vidarbha Free Diagnostics, with no "Limited" at the end.

Year three. The centre has a surplus of eleven lakh rupees. The doctors may spend it on a new scanner. They may not distribute it among themselves, because clause (c) and their own articles forbid it, and doing so would be a contravention exposing the company to a fine of at least ten lakh rupees under section 8(11).

Year five. They want to change the objects to include running a paid pharmacy. They cannot simply pass a special resolution: section 8(4)(i) requires the previous approval of the Central Government for any alteration of the memorandum or articles.

Year seven. It emerges that two directors have been routing payments to a firm they own. The Government may revoke the licence under section 8(6), because the affairs are being conducted fraudulently, after giving the company a hearing. On revocation the company must add "Limited" to its name. The Government may also direct winding up or amalgamation with another section 8 company under section 8(7), and the two directors face section 447 by the proviso to section 8(11).

On winding up. Suppose four lakh rupees remain after the debts are paid. It does not go to the doctors. Under section 8(9) it goes to another section 8 company with similar objects on the Tribunal's conditions, or is sold with the proceeds credited to the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Fund under section 224 of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code 2016.

Distinctions that carry marks

Section 8 companyOrdinary limited company
NameMay omit "Limited" or "Private Limited"Must carry it
Requires a licenceYes, from the Central GovernmentNo
DividendProhibited, section 8(1)(c)Permitted, Chapter VIII
Alteration of memorandum or articlesNeeds previous Central Government approval, section 8(4)(i)By resolution, sections 13 and 14
A firm as memberAllowed, section 8(3)Not allowed
Surplus on winding upTo another section 8 company or to the Insolvency and Bankruptcy FundTo the members
AmalgamationOnly with another section 8 company with similar objectsWith any company, Chapter XV
Small company statusExcluded, proviso (B) to section 2(85)Available if within the limits

What this does NOT mean

It does not mean a section 8 company cannot make a profit. Section 8(1)(b) says "profits, if any", so profit is expected. What is forbidden is distributing it to members.

munotes.in38

Companies with Charitable Objects

It does not mean there is no limited liability. Section 8(2) preserves all the privileges of limited companies. The word is dropped from the name, not the protection.

It does not mean it is exempt from the Act. Section 8(2) subjects it to all the obligations of limited companies as well.

It does not mean the licence is permanent. Section 8(6) lists three grounds of revocation, and section 8(7) allows a compulsory winding up or amalgamation to follow.

Quick revision

  • Three conditions, section 8(1): charitable objects in the list, which ends "or any such other object"; profits applied to the objects; dividends prohibited. All three.
  • The reward: registration as a limited company without "Limited" or "Private Limited", by Central Government licence on such conditions as it deems fit.
  • 8(2): all the privileges and all the obligations of limited companies.
  • 8(3): a firm may be a member.
  • 8(4): no alteration of memorandum or articles without previous Central Government approval; conversion only on prescribed conditions.
  • 8(5): an existing limited company may be brought in and drop the word from its name.
  • 8(6): revocation for contravention of the section, of a licence condition, or where affairs are fraudulent, against the objects, or prejudicial to public interest. Hearing required; copy to the Registrar.
  • 8(7) and (8): winding up, or amalgamation with another section 8 company, in the public interest.
  • 8(9): surplus to another section 8 company on the Tribunal's conditions, or sold and credited to the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Fund under section 224 of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code 2016.
  • 8(10): may amalgamate only with another section 8 company having similar objects.
  • 8(11): company, ten lakh to one crore rupees; directors and officers in default, twenty-five thousand to twenty-five lakh rupees; fraud attracts section 447.

Test yourself

1. What three things must the Central Government be satisfied of before granting a section 8 licence? That the body has charitable objects within section 8(1)(a); intends to apply its profits or other income in promoting those objects, section 8(1)(b); and intends to prohibit the payment of any dividend to its members, section 8(1)(c).

2. Can a section 8 company change its objects by special resolution alone? No. Section 8(4)(i) requires the previous approval of the Central Government for any alteration of the memorandum or articles.

3. On what grounds may the licence be revoked? Section 8(6): contravention of the requirements of the section; contravention of a condition of the licence; or the affairs being conducted fraudulently, or in a manner violative of the objects, or prejudicial to public interest. The company must first be given a reasonable opportunity of being heard.

4. A section 8 company is wound up and two lakh rupees remain after the creditors are paid. Who gets it? Not the members. Under section 8(9) it may be transferred to another section 8 company with similar objects on such conditions as the Tribunal imposes, or sold and the proceeds credited to the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Fund under section 224 of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code 2016.

munotes.in39

Companies with Charitable Objects

5. Can a partnership firm be a member of a section 8 company? Yes. Section 8(3) expressly permits it, which is an exception to the general position.

6. Can a section 8 company be a small company? No. Proviso (B) to section 2(85) excludes a company registered under section 8 from the definition, whatever its capital or turnover.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in40

Chapter Eight

Promoters: Position, Duties and Liabilities

Syllabus topic 1.1, label: "Promoters - position - duties and liabilities"

In one line

A promoter is the person who brings a company into existence, and because he acts for a company that cannot yet protect itself, the law puts him in a position of trust and then makes him pay when he abuses it.

In exam wording: section 2(69) of the Companies Act 2013 defines a promoter by three alternative tests. He stands in a fiduciary relationship to the company he is forming, which requires him to disclose any profit he makes and not to make a secret profit, and he is exposed to liability under sections 7(5) and (6), 35 and 300 and, where fraud is proved, under section 447.

Why the law has this at all

Before a company exists, somebody has to decide what it will do, find the money, choose the first directors and sign the memorandum. That person is dealing with an entity that cannot yet say no to him, cannot yet take advice, and has no board to check him.

That is a dangerous position, and the classic abuse is simple. The promoter owns a piece of land worth twenty lakh rupees. He forms a company, has the company buy the land from him for eighty lakh, and sells shares to the public to fund it. The company has been robbed before it drew its first breath, and the shareholders paid for it.

So the law does two things. It puts the promoter under a duty of disclosure rather than a bare prohibition, because there is nothing wrong with a promoter selling his own property to the company if everyone knows. And it gives the company and the investors remedies afterwards, because a duty with no remedy is advice.

Some words this chapter uses

A fiduciary is a person who must act in another's interest rather than his own, and who must not put himself in a position where his interest conflicts with his duty. A secret profit is a gain the fiduciary makes out of his position without disclosing it. A pre-incorporation contract is a contract made in the company's name before the company exists. Rescission is the undoing of a contract, putting the parties back where they were. An independent board means directors who are not themselves the promoter or under his control.

Who is a promoter: section 2(69)

The definition has three limbs, joined by "or", so any one of them makes a person a promoter:

"promoter" means a person:

(a) who has been named as such in a prospectus or is identified by the company in the annual return referred to in section 92; or

(b) who has control over the affairs of the company, directly or indirectly whether as a shareholder, director or otherwise; or

(c) in accordance with whose advice, directions or instructions the Board of Directors of the company is accustomed to act:

Provided that nothing in sub-clause (c) shall apply to a person who is acting merely in a professional capacity.

munotes.in41

Promoters: Position, Duties and Liabilities

Look at what the three limbs are doing, because they are three very different ideas.

Limb (a) is formal. You are a promoter because a document says so, either the prospectus or the annual return under section 92. It is easy to prove and easy to avoid.

Limb (b) is factual control. It catches the person who runs the company whatever the paperwork says, and the words "directly or indirectly whether as a shareholder, director or otherwise" are drawn as wide as the drafter could manage.

Limb (c) is the shadow. A person whose advice, directions or instructions the Board is accustomed to act on is a promoter even if he holds no shares and no office. "Accustomed" means habitually, not once.

The proviso is essential and is regularly missed. A person acting merely in a professional capacity is outside limb (c). So the company's solicitor, its chartered accountant and its merchant banker do not become promoters by giving the advice they were engaged to give. If they step outside that role and start directing the business, the proviso stops protecting them.

The promoter's position: a fiduciary, not a trustee and not an agent

This is the part MU asks as "position of a promoter", and the answer is best given by saying what he is not first.

He is not an agent of the company, because an agent needs a principal and before incorporation there is no company to be the principal. This is why pre-incorporation contracts are a problem at all.

He is not a trustee of the company, because a trustee holds specific property for a beneficiary, and a promoter usually holds nothing of the company's.

He is in a fiduciary relationship with the company he is bringing into existence. From that single proposition the duties follow.

The duties

1. To disclose any interest and any profit. If the promoter sells his own property to the company, or takes a commission, he must disclose it. Disclosure is the operative duty; the profit itself is not unlawful.

2. To disclose to somebody capable of receiving the disclosure. Telling himself is not disclosure. It must be made either to an independent board of directors, or to the existing and intended shareholders, ordinarily through the prospectus. This is why section 26 requires a prospectus to state the promoters' interests and the amounts paid to them.

3. Not to make a secret profit. The corollary of the first two. A profit made and not disclosed must be handed over.

munotes.in42

Promoters: Position, Duties and Liabilities

4. To give the company the benefit of what he acquires for it. Where the promoter acquires property while acting for the company in formation, he cannot keep the upside for himself.

5. To make full and truthful disclosure in the prospectus. This duty is enforced by sections 34, 35 and 36 and is the subject of its own chapters.

6. To act with reasonable care and not to mislead. Sections 7(5) and 7(6) make this concrete for the documents filed at incorporation.

The liabilities, section by section

This is where an answer earns its marks, because these are citable.

Section 7(5). Any person who furnishes false or incorrect particulars of any information, or suppresses any material information of which he is aware, in any document filed with the Registrar for registration, shall be liable for action under section 447.

Section 7(6). Where it is later proved that the company was got incorporated by false or incorrect information or representation, by suppressing a material fact, or by any fraudulent action, then the promoters, the persons named as first directors, and the persons who made the declaration under section 7(1)(b) shall each be liable for action under section 447. The promoter is named expressly.

Section 7(7). The Tribunal's consequential powers, including making the members' liability unlimited and winding the company up, are set out in [Lifting the Corporate Veil].

Section 35: civil liability for the prospectus. Where a person subscribes for securities acting on a misleading statement, or on the inclusion or omission of any matter, in the prospectus and sustains loss, then the company and every person who falls in clauses (a) to (e) is liable to pay compensation to every person who sustained the loss. Clause (c) is "is a promoter of the company", so the promoter's liability is written into the section by name, alongside directors, persons who authorised the issue, and experts.

Section 35(2) gives the defences, and they are the promoter's escape route: that he withdrew his consent to be a director before issue and the prospectus was issued without his authority; that the prospectus was issued without his knowledge or consent and that on becoming aware he forthwith gave a reasonable public notice to that effect; or, as regards an expert's statement, that it was a correct and fair representation and that he had reasonable ground to believe, and did believe up to the time of issue, that the expert was competent and had given and not withdrawn his consent.

Section 35(3) is the severe one. Where it is proved that a prospectus has been issued with intent to defraud the applicants or any other person, or for any fraudulent purpose, every person referred to in sub-section (1), which includes the promoter, shall be personally responsible, without any limitation of liability, for all or any of the losses or damages incurred by any person who subscribed on the faith of it.

munotes.in43

Promoters: Position, Duties and Liabilities

Section 300. In a winding up by the Tribunal, the Tribunal may direct the public examination of a promoter where the Company Liquidator's report alleges fraud in the promotion or formation of the company. The promoter can be put in the witness box and questioned on oath.

Section 447. The Act's general fraud provision, which sections 7(5), 7(6) and several others route into.

Pre-incorporation contracts

A promoter often has to contract before the company exists: to take a lease, to order machinery, to engage an architect.

The company is not bound by such a contract, because it did not exist and could not have authorised anyone to act for it. And it cannot ratify it after incorporation, because ratification requires that the principal existed and was competent at the time the act was done.

The promoter is personally liable on it. He purported to contract, there was no principal, and he cannot escape by pointing at a company that did not exist.

What can be done instead. After incorporation the company can enter into a fresh contract on the same terms, which is a novation: the old contract is discharged and a new one, to which the company is a party, takes its place. Where the contract was for the purposes of the company and warranted by the terms of incorporation, the specific relief legislation allows the company to enforce or be held to it, and this is the route ordinarily used in practice.

A worked example

Pravin owns a warehouse in Bhiwandi that he bought for thirty lakh rupees.

He decides to form Bhiwandi Cold Chain Limited to run a cold storage business. Before incorporation he signs a contract with a refrigeration supplier in the company's name, and he arranges for the company, once formed, to buy his warehouse for ninety lakh rupees. He then issues a prospectus inviting the public to subscribe, which states the object and the warehouse purchase but says nothing about the fact that the seller is Pravin or that he paid thirty lakh for it.

Is he a promoter? Yes, on all three limbs of section 2(69): he is named in the prospectus, he controls the affairs, and the first board acts on his instructions.

The warehouse sale. The sixty lakh rupee profit is not unlawful in itself. What makes it wrongful is that it was not disclosed to an independent board or to the intended shareholders. It is a secret profit, and the company may recover it, or rescind the sale and return the warehouse.

munotes.in44

Promoters: Position, Duties and Liabilities

The prospectus. The omission of Pravin's interest is an omission of a matter in the prospectus within section 35(1). A subscriber who bought on the faith of it and lost money may claim compensation from the company and from Pravin, who is caught expressly by section 35(1)(c). Pravin cannot use any of the section 35(2) defences: he knew of the issue, he consented to it, and no expert's statement is involved.

If the omission is shown to have been made with intent to defraud, section 35(3) applies and Pravin is personally responsible without any limitation of liability for the losses.

The refrigeration contract. The company is not bound and cannot ratify it. Pravin is personally liable to the supplier. The sensible course after incorporation is a fresh contract between the supplier and the company on the same terms.

If the company is later wound up and the liquidator's report alleges fraud in its promotion, section 300 allows the Tribunal to direct Pravin's public examination on oath.

Distinctions that carry marks

PromoterDirector
When he actsBefore incorporation, and afterOnly after incorporation
Source of positionFact: section 2(69) testsOffice: appointment under Chapter XI
DutiesFiduciary, chiefly disclosure and no secret profitStatutory, section 166
Can bind the companyNo; the company does not yet existYes, within the Board's powers
RemunerationNo right to it; only what the company agrees after incorporationGoverned by sections 197 and 198

What this does NOT mean

It does not mean a promoter cannot profit. He may. He must disclose, and disclose to someone able to act on the information.

It does not mean a professional adviser is a promoter. The proviso to section 2(69)(c) takes out a person acting merely in a professional capacity.

It does not mean a promoter is an agent or a trustee. He is neither, and saying so is a common error. He is a fiduciary.

It does not mean the company can ratify a pre-incorporation contract. It cannot. It can make a new one.

Limits and criticism

Disclosure is a weak remedy where the disclosure is made to a board the promoter selected. The Act tries to compensate through section 26's mandatory prospectus contents and through section 35's compensation regime, but the underlying problem, that the promoter chooses who receives the disclosure, is not fully solved.

The definition in section 2(69) has the opposite problem. Limb (b) is so wide that a controlling shareholder years after incorporation is a "promoter" for the Act's purposes, which is useful for regulation and is a long way from the ordinary meaning of the word.

munotes.in45

Promoters: Position, Duties and Liabilities

Quick revision

  • Definition, section 2(69): named as such in a prospectus or identified in the annual return under section 92; or has control over the affairs, directly or indirectly, as shareholder, director or otherwise; or the Board is accustomed to act on his advice, directions or instructions. Proviso: not a person acting merely in a professional capacity.
  • Position: a fiduciary. Not an agent, not a trustee.
  • Duties: disclose interest and profit, to an independent board or to the intended shareholders; make no secret profit; account for benefits acquired for the company; full disclosure in the prospectus.
  • Liabilities: section 7(5) false particulars; section 7(6) incorporation obtained by fraud; section 35(1)(c) compensation for prospectus mis-statements, with the section 35(2) defences; section 35(3) personal liability without limit where the intent was to defraud; section 300 public examination in winding up; section 447 fraud.
  • Pre-incorporation contracts: company not bound, cannot ratify; promoter personally liable; cure by a fresh contract after incorporation.

Test yourself

1. Define a promoter. Section 2(69): a person named as such in a prospectus or identified by the company in the annual return under section 92; or who has control over the affairs of the company directly or indirectly, whether as shareholder, director or otherwise; or in accordance with whose advice, directions or instructions the Board is accustomed to act. A person acting merely in a professional capacity is excluded from the third limb.

2. What is the legal position of a promoter? He stands in a fiduciary relationship to the company he is forming. He is neither its agent, because there is no principal before incorporation, nor its trustee, because he holds no specific property of the company.

3. A promoter sells his own land to the company at a profit and tells the two directors, both of whom he appointed and controls. Is that good disclosure? No. Disclosure must be to an independent board or to the existing and intended shareholders. Disclosure to a board the promoter controls is disclosure to himself, and the profit remains a secret profit that the company may recover.

4. Is a company bound by a contract its promoter made before incorporation? No, and it cannot ratify it, because the company did not exist when the contract was made. The promoter is personally liable. The company may make a fresh contract on the same terms after incorporation.

5. Under which clause of section 35 is a promoter liable for a misleading prospectus, and what is the effect of section 35(3)? Section 35(1)(c) names a promoter among those liable to pay compensation. Section 35(3) provides that where the prospectus was issued with intent to defraud, or for any fraudulent purpose, every person referred to in section 35(1) is personally responsible without any limitation of liability for the losses.

munotes.in46

Promoters: Position, Duties and Liabilities

6. Can a promoter be examined on oath? Yes. Under section 300, in a winding up by the Tribunal, where the Company Liquidator's report alleges fraud in the promotion or formation of the company, the Tribunal may direct the public examination of a promoter.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in47

Chapter Nine

Formation and Incorporation of Companies

Syllabus topic 1.2, "Incorporation of companies & matters incidental thereto", label: "Formation and Incorporation of Companies"

In one line

Incorporation is the process of filing a defined set of documents with the Registrar and getting back a certificate, and the certificate is what turns a group of people into a company.

In exam wording: section 3 states who may form a company and by what act, section 7 prescribes the documents and information to be filed with the Registrar and requires him to issue a certificate of incorporation and allot a corporate identity number, and section 9 gives that certificate its effect.

Why the law has this at all

The state is being asked to create a new legal person which will be able to own property, borrow money and limit its members' liability. Anyone dealing with that person later will want to know who set it up, who runs it, what it says it will do and where it can be found.

So incorporation is designed as a disclosure transaction. The promoters hand over a defined package of information, the Registrar puts it on a public register, and in exchange the company comes into existence. Everything in section 7(1) is there because somebody, later, will need to look it up.

The corollary is section 7(5) and (6): because the whole system rests on the truth of what was filed, lying in the filings is treated as fraud.

Some words this chapter uses

The Registrar is the Registrar of Companies for the jurisdiction in which the registered office is to be. A declaration is a formal written statement. A subscriber is one of the first members, who signs the memorandum. Corporate identity number, or CIN, is the unique number allotted to a company. Dissolution is the ending of a company's existence. A practising professional, in section 7(1)(b), means an advocate, chartered accountant, cost accountant or company secretary in practice.

Step one: who may form it, section 3(1)

A company may be formed for any lawful purpose by:

  • seven or more persons for a public company;
  • two or more persons for a private company;
  • one person for a One Person Company, which is a private company,

by subscribing their names or his name to a memorandum and complying with the requirements of this Act in respect of registration.

Two things are being required at once: the act of subscribing to a memorandum, and compliance with the registration requirements, which is section 7. Neither alone is enough.

Section 3(2) then fixes the liability class: limited by shares, limited by guarantee, or unlimited. Those are covered in [Types of Companies by Liability and Membership].

Step two: what is filed, section 7(1)

There shall be filed with the Registrar within whose jurisdiction the registered office of the company is proposed to be situated the following documents and information:

munotes.in48

Formation and Incorporation of Companies

  • (a) the memorandum and articles, duly signed by all the subscribers to the memorandum in the prescribed manner;
  • (b) a declaration in the prescribed form by an advocate, a chartered accountant, cost accountant or company secretary in practice, who is engaged in the formation of the company, and by a person named in the articles as a director, manager or secretary, that all the requirements of this Act and the rules in respect of registration and matters precedent or incidental thereto have been complied with;
  • (c) a declaration from each subscriber and from each person named as a first director that he is not convicted of any offence in connection with the promotion, formation or management of any company, or has not been found guilty of any fraud or misfeasance or of any breach of duty to any company under this Act or any previous company law during the preceding five years, and that all the documents filed with the Registrar contain information that is correct and complete and true to the best of his knowledge and belief;
  • (d) the address for correspondence till the registered office is established;
  • (e) the particulars of every subscriber: name including surname or family name, residential address, nationality and such other particulars as may be prescribed, with proof of identity, and for a body corporate subscriber, such particulars as may be prescribed;
  • (f) the particulars of the first directors named in the articles: names, Director Identification Number, residential address, nationality and other prescribed particulars including proof of identity; and
  • (g) the particulars of the interests of those first directors in other firms or bodies corporate, along with their consent to act as directors.

Notice the pattern. Clause (b) is a professional's certificate that the law has been followed. Clause (c) is a personal declaration by each individual about his own past and about the truth of the papers. Clauses (e) to (g) are identification: who these people are, where they live, what else they are involved in. The register exists so that a stranger can answer those questions later.

Step three: what the Registrar does, section 7(2), (3) and (4)

Section 7(2). The Registrar, on the basis of the documents and information filed, shall register them and issue a certificate of incorporation in the prescribed form to the effect that the proposed company is incorporated under this Act.

Section 7(3). On and from the date mentioned in the certificate, the Registrar shall allot a corporate identity number, which shall be a distinct identity for the company and shall also be included in the certificate.

munotes.in49

Formation and Incorporation of Companies

Section 7(4). The company shall maintain and preserve at its registered office copies of all documents and information as originally filed under sub-section (1), till its dissolution. So the company keeps its own copy of its founding papers for its whole life.

And then section 9 operates, which is set out in [What a Company Is]: from the date on the certificate the members are a body corporate with perpetual succession and the power to hold property, contract and sue.

Step four: what happens if the filings were false

Section 7(5). If any person furnishes false or incorrect particulars of any information, or suppresses any material information of which he is aware, in any of the documents filed with the Registrar in relation to registration, he shall be liable for action under section 447.

Note the breadth of "any person": it is not limited to subscribers or directors.

Section 7(6). Without prejudice to sub-section (5), where at any time after incorporation it is proved that the company has been got incorporated by furnishing false or incorrect information or representation, by suppressing any material fact or information, or by any fraudulent action, then the promoters, the persons named as first directors, and the persons making the declaration under section 7(1)(b) shall each be liable for action under section 447.

So the professional who certified compliance under clause (b) is personally exposed. That is deliberate: the certificate is the gatekeeping mechanism and it would be worthless if signing it carried no risk.

Section 7(7). The Tribunal's powers, which include directing that the liability of the members shall be unlimited, are set out in [Lifting the Corporate Veil].

A worked example

Nikhil, Asha and five others want to form a public company to manufacture solar inverters in Pune.

Formation. They are seven, so section 3(1)(a) is satisfied for a public company. They subscribe their names to a memorandum stating the name, the State of Maharashtra, the objects, the liability clause and the capital clause, and each indicates the number of shares he takes.

Filing. Because the registered office is proposed to be in Pune, the papers go to the Registrar with jurisdiction there, under section 7(1). They file the memorandum and articles signed by all seven; a declaration by their company secretary in practice and by Nikhil, who is named in the articles as a director, that all requirements have been complied with; a declaration by each of the seven and by each first director about convictions, fraud and the truth of the papers; an address for correspondence; the personal particulars and identity proof of all seven; and the particulars, Director Identification Numbers and consents of the first directors, with their interests in other firms.

munotes.in50

Formation and Incorporation of Companies

Registration. The Registrar registers the documents and issues a certificate of incorporation stating that Sunveer Inverters Limited is incorporated under the Act, bearing the date 3 August 2026, and allots a corporate identity number which appears in the certificate itself.

Effect. From 3 August 2026 the company exists as a body corporate under section 9. It must keep copies of everything filed at its registered office until it is dissolved, under section 7(4).

Change one fact. Suppose Asha had been found guilty of a breach of duty to another company four years ago, and her declaration under section 7(1)(c) said otherwise. That is a false particular in a document filed for registration, so section 7(5) exposes her to action under section 447. If it is later proved that the company was got incorporated by that suppression, then under section 7(6) the promoters, the first directors and the company secretary who signed the clause (b) declaration are each liable under section 447, and under section 7(7) the Tribunal may regulate the company's management, make the members' liability unlimited, strike it off, or wind it up.

What this does NOT mean

It does not mean the company can start trading on the day it is incorporated. A company with a share capital must first satisfy section 10A, which is the next chapter but five and is the trap of this module.

It does not mean the certificate cures every defect. Sections 7(5), (6) and (7) exist precisely to reach back behind a certificate that was obtained by lying.

It does not mean the Registrar verifies the truth of what is filed. He registers on the basis of the documents and information filed, section 7(2). The truth is guaranteed by the declarations and by the penalties, not by an investigation.

It does not mean the first directors are appointed by the Registrar. They are named in the articles, and their particulars and consents are filed under section 7(1)(f) and (g).

Quick revision

  • Section 3(1): seven, two or one person, by subscribing to a memorandum and complying with the registration requirements.
  • Section 7(1), seven items: (a) signed memorandum and articles; (b) professional's and officer's declaration of compliance; (c) each subscriber's and first director's declaration on convictions, fraud and truth; (d) correspondence address; (e) subscriber particulars with proof of identity; (f) first directors' particulars with DIN; (g) their other interests and consents.
  • Filed with the Registrar in whose jurisdiction the registered office is proposed to be.
  • Section 7(2): registration and certificate of incorporation. 7(3): corporate identity number, included in the certificate. 7(4): keep copies at the registered office till dissolution.
  • Section 7(5): false particulars or suppression by any person, section 447.
  • Section 7(6): incorporation got by fraud, promoters, first directors and the clause (b) declarants each liable under section 447.
  • Section 9: the effect of the certificate.
munotes.in51

Formation and Incorporation of Companies

Test yourself

1. With which Registrar are the incorporation documents filed? The Registrar within whose jurisdiction the registered office of the company is proposed to be situated: section 7(1).

2. Who must make the declaration of compliance under section 7(1)(b)? Two people: an advocate, chartered accountant, cost accountant or company secretary in practice who is engaged in the formation of the company, and a person named in the articles as a director, manager or secretary.

3. What must each subscriber declare under section 7(1)(c)? That he is not convicted of any offence in connection with the promotion, formation or management of any company; or has not been found guilty of any fraud or misfeasance or breach of duty to any company under this or any previous company law during the preceding five years; and that all the documents filed contain information that is correct, complete and true to the best of his knowledge and belief.

4. How long must a company keep copies of its incorporation documents? Till its dissolution, at its registered office: section 7(4).

5. A chartered accountant certifies compliance knowing that a subscriber's declaration is false. What is his exposure? He is a person making the declaration under section 7(1)(b), so if it is proved that the company was got incorporated by the false information he is liable for action under section 447: section 7(6). He may also be caught by section 7(5) in his own right.

6. What does the Registrar allot besides the certificate? A corporate identity number, which is a distinct identity for the company and is included in the certificate: section 7(3).

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in52

Chapter Ten

The Memorandum of Association

Syllabus topic 1.2, label: "Memorandum of association"

In one line

The memorandum is the company's charter: the document that says who it is, where it is, what it may do, what its members risk and how much capital it starts with.

In exam wording: the memorandum of association is defined by section 2(56) as the memorandum of association of a company as originally framed or as altered from time to time. Section 4(1) prescribes its six clauses, section 4(2) to (5) govern its name, section 4(6) prescribes its form from Schedule I, and section 10 gives it the effect of a contract between the company and its members.

Why the law has this at all

A company can do things a person cannot: it can live forever, and it can limit what its owners lose. Anyone who lends to it, sells to it or invests in it is dealing with an artificial thing whose limits they cannot see by looking.

The memorandum is the answer. It is the public statement of those limits, filed at incorporation and available on the register. A creditor can read it and learn the company's name, the State it belongs to, the business it says it is in, whether the members' liability is limited, and how much capital was subscribed.

That is why the memorandum is harder to change than the articles, and why some of its clauses cannot be changed without the Central Government or the Tribunal. It is the outward-facing document; the articles are the inward-facing one.

Some words this chapter uses

A clause, here, means one of the six required statements in section 4(1). Subscribed capital is what the first members agree to take. Nominal or authorised capital is the amount the company is registered with. Reservation of a name means holding a name so that nobody else can register it. An ordinary resolution is one passed by a simple majority; a special resolution needs three fourths. Divisible profits are profits available for distribution.

The six clauses: section 4(1)

The memorandum shall state:

(a) The name clause

The name of the company with the last word "Limited" in the case of a public limited company, or the last words "Private Limited" in the case of a private limited company.

The proviso: nothing in this clause applies to a company registered under section 8, which is why a charitable company may drop the word. See [Companies with Charitable Objects].

(b) The registered office clause

The State in which the registered office of the company is to be situated.

Read that carefully. The memorandum states the State, not the address. The address is dealt with by section 12, and that is why moving office within a State is easy and moving it to another State needs Central Government approval under section 13(4).

munotes.in53

The Memorandum of Association

(c) The objects clause

The objects for which the company is proposed to be incorporated and any matter considered necessary in furtherance thereof.

This is the clause that generates the doctrine of ultra vires, which has its own chapter. Note the second half: matters necessary in furtherance of the objects are covered without being spelled out.

(d) The liability clause

The liability of members of the company, whether limited or unlimited, and also:

  • (i) in a company limited by shares, that the liability of its members is limited to the amount unpaid, if any, on the shares held by them;
  • (ii) in a company limited by guarantee, the amount up to which each member undertakes to contribute:
  • (A) to the assets of the company in the event of its being wound up while he is a member or within one year after he ceases to be a member, for payment of the debts and liabilities of the company, or of such debts and liabilities as may have been contracted before he ceases to be a member; and
  • (B) to the costs, charges and expenses of winding up and for adjustment of the rights of the contributories among themselves.

The one year tail in (A) is the detail students miss. A member of a guarantee company who resigns is still on the hook for a year, and only for debts contracted before he ceased to be a member.

(e) The capital clause

In the case of a company having a share capital:

  • (i) the amount of share capital with which the company is to be registered, its division into shares of a fixed amount, and the number of shares the subscribers agree to subscribe, which shall not be less than one share; and
  • (ii) the number of shares each subscriber intends to take, indicated opposite his name.

So every subscriber must take at least one share, and must write against his own name how many.

(f) The nominee clause, for a One Person Company

In the case of a One Person Company, the name of the person who, in the event of death of the subscriber, shall become the member of the company.

The machinery around this, consent and change of nominee, is in the four provisos to section 3(1), set out in [What a Company Is].

The name: section 4(2) to 4(5)

This is where marks are quietly available, because most answers stop at clause (a).

Section 4(2): two prohibitions. The name shall not:

  • (a) be identical with or resemble too nearly the name of an existing company registered under this Act or any previous company law; or
  • (b) be such that its use by the company (i) will constitute an offence under any law for the time being in force, or (ii) is undesirable in the opinion of the Central Government.
munotes.in54

The Memorandum of Association

Section 4(3): names needing approval. Without prejudice to sub-section (2), a company shall not be registered with a name containing:

  • (a) any word or expression likely to give the impression that the company is in any way connected with, or has the patronage of, the Central Government, any State Government, or any local authority, corporation or body constituted by either under any law; or
  • (b) such word or expression as may be prescribed,

unless the previous approval of the Central Government has been obtained.

Section 4(4): reservation. A person may apply to the Registrar, in the prescribed form and with the prescribed fee, to reserve a name either (a) as the name of a proposed company, or (b) as the name to which an existing company proposes to change its name.

Section 4(5)(i): how long. On receipt of the application the Registrar may, on the basis of the information and documents furnished, reserve the name for twenty days from the date of approval, or such other period as may be prescribed. Proviso: where the application is by an existing company, for reservation or for a change of name, the Registrar may reserve it for sixty days from the date of approval.

Section 4(5)(ii): reservation obtained by wrong information. Where it is found that the name was applied for by furnishing wrong or incorrect information, then:

  • (a) if the company has not been incorporated, the reserved name shall be cancelled and the applicant shall be liable to a penalty which may extend to one lakh rupees;
  • (b) if the company has been incorporated, the Registrar may, after giving the company an opportunity of being heard:
  • (i) direct it to change its name within three months, after passing an ordinary resolution; or
  • (ii) take action for striking off the name of the company from the register; or
  • (iii) make a petition for winding up of the company.

Note the resolution in (b)(i): an ordinary resolution. A change of name normally requires a special resolution under section 13(1) and Central Government approval under section 13(2). Here, because the Registrar is directing it, an ordinary resolution suffices. That contrast is worth a line in an answer.

Form and one prohibition: section 4(6) and 4(7)

Section 4(6). The memorandum shall be in the respective forms specified in Tables A, B, C, D and E in Schedule I, as applicable. Table A is for a company limited by shares, and so on down the list.

munotes.in55

The Memorandum of Association

Section 4(7). In a company limited by guarantee and not having a share capital, any provision in the memorandum or articles purporting to give any person a right to participate in the divisible profits of the company otherwise than as a member shall be void.

Section 10: what the memorandum does once registered

Subject to the provisions of this Act, the memorandum and articles shall, when registered, bind the company and the members thereof to the same extent as if they respectively had been signed by the company and by each member, and contained covenants on its and his part to observe all the provisions of the memorandum and of the articles.

So the memorandum and articles operate as a statutory contract. Two consequences follow, and they are examined as a pair:

It binds the company to the members and the members to the company. A member can enforce the memorandum and articles against the company, and the company against him, in respect of their rights as members.

Section 10(2) adds that all monies payable by any member to the company under the memorandum or articles shall be a debt due from him to the company, which is how unpaid calls are recovered.

What it does not do is make the memorandum a contract between the company and an outsider, or between one member and another in their personal capacities. A person who is a member but is suing in some other character, say as the company's solicitor under an article appointing him, is an outsider for this purpose.

Section 6: the Act beats the memorandum

Whatever the memorandum says, section 6 provides that, save as otherwise expressly provided in the Act:

  • (a) the provisions of this Act shall have effect notwithstanding anything to the contrary in the memorandum or articles, in any agreement executed by the company, or in any resolution of the company in general meeting or of its Board, whether before or after the commencement of this Act; and
  • (b) any such provision shall, to the extent to which it is repugnant to the Act, become or be void.

A worked example

Seven people wish to incorporate a public company to make ceramic tiles in Morbi and register it in Gujarat.

Their memorandum states: (a) the name Morbi Ceramics Limited; (b) the State of Gujarat, not the street address; (c) objects of manufacturing and dealing in ceramic tiles and matters necessary in furtherance; (d) that liability is limited and, being limited by shares, limited to the amount unpaid on shares held; (e) a share capital of fifty lakh rupees divided into five lakh shares of ten rupees each, with each of the seven writing against his name the number of shares taken, none taking fewer than one; and (f) nothing, because it is not a One Person Company.

munotes.in56

The Memorandum of Association

The name. They first apply under section 4(4) and the Registrar reserves Morbi Ceramics Limited for twenty days. Had an existing company applied to change its name to that, the reservation would have been for sixty days.

Suppose they had chosen "National Ceramics Limited". The word "National" is likely to give the impression of a connection with the Central Government, so section 4(3)(a) requires previous Central Government approval, and without it the company cannot be registered with that name.

Suppose the reservation was obtained by giving wrong information and this comes out after incorporation. Under section 4(5)(ii)(b) the Registrar, after hearing the company, may direct it to change its name within three months by an ordinary resolution, or move to strike it off, or petition for winding up.

Two years later a member sues the company for refusing to register a transfer his articles entitle him to. He can, because by section 10 the memorandum and articles bind the company to him as a member. The same man, as the company's landlord, cannot sue on an article about rent, because there he is an outsider.

Distinctions that carry marks

MemorandumArticles
What it isThe company's charter, facing outwardsThe internal rulebook, facing inwards
Contents fixed bySection 4(1), six clausesSection 5, regulations for management
FormTables A to E of Schedule I, section 4(6)Tables F to J of Schedule I, section 5(6)
AlterationSection 13, special resolution plus, for some clauses, Central Government approvalSection 14, special resolution; Central Government order only for public to private conversion
RelationshipDominantSubordinate; cannot exceed the memorandum
EffectSection 10, statutory contractSection 10, statutory contract

What this does NOT mean

It does not mean the memorandum states the company's address. It states the State: section 4(1)(b).

It does not mean every company has a capital clause. Clause (e) applies only to a company having a share capital, so a guarantee company without capital has no capital clause.

It does not mean the memorandum is a contract with the world. Section 10 binds the company and the members, in their capacity as members, and nobody else.

It does not mean a reserved name is yours forever. Twenty days, or sixty for an existing company, and it can be cancelled with a penalty of up to one lakh rupees if it was obtained by wrong information.

munotes.in57

The Memorandum of Association

Quick revision

  • Six clauses, section 4(1): (a) name with Limited or Private Limited, not for a section 8 company; (b) the State of the registered office; (c) objects and matters in furtherance; (d) liability, with the guarantee company's one year tail; (e) capital, division into shares, at least one share each, number opposite each name; (f) the OPC nominee.
  • Section 4(2): not identical with or too nearly resembling an existing name; not an offence; not undesirable in the Central Government's opinion.
  • Section 4(3): words suggesting Government connection or patronage, or as prescribed, need previous Central Government approval.
  • Section 4(4) and (5): reservation, twenty days, or sixty days for an existing company. Wrong information: cancellation and up to one lakh rupees before incorporation; after incorporation, change of name in three months by ordinary resolution, striking off, or winding up petition, after a hearing.
  • Section 4(6): Tables A to E of Schedule I. Section 4(7): no participation in divisible profits otherwise than as a member, in a guarantee company without share capital.
  • Section 10: memorandum and articles bind company and members as a statutory contract; monies payable by a member are a debt.
  • Section 6: the Act overrides both, and repugnant provisions are void.

Test yourself

1. State the six clauses of the memorandum. Name, registered office (the State), objects, liability, capital, and, for a One Person Company, the nominee: section 4(1)(a) to (f).

2. Does the memorandum give the company's address? No. Section 4(1)(b) requires only the State in which the registered office is to be situated. The address is governed by section 12.

3. For how long is a name reserved? Twenty days from the date of approval, or such other period as may be prescribed; sixty days where the application is by an existing company for reservation or change of name: section 4(5)(i) and its proviso.

4. A company obtained its reserved name by giving incorrect information, and has been incorporated. What can the Registrar do? After giving the company an opportunity of being heard, the Registrar may direct it to change its name within three months after passing an ordinary resolution, take action to strike its name off the register, or petition for its winding up: section 4(5)(ii)(b).

5. In a company limited by guarantee, for how long after resignation can a member be called on? The memorandum must state the amount he undertakes to contribute if the company is wound up while he is a member or within one year after he ceases to be a member, and then only for debts and liabilities contracted before he ceased to be a member: section 4(1)(d)(ii)(A).

munotes.in58

The Memorandum of Association

6. Can a member sue the company on the articles in a capacity other than as a member? No. Section 10 binds the company and the members as members. A person suing in another character, such as a solicitor or a landlord, is an outsider and cannot rely on the statutory contract.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in59

Chapter Eleven

The Doctrine of Ultra Vires

Syllabus topic 1.2, arising out of "Memorandum of association"

In one line

Ultra vires means "beyond the powers", and an act of a company outside the objects stated in its memorandum is void: nobody can enforce it, and no majority of the shareholders can make it good afterwards.

In exam wording: a company's capacity is limited to the objects stated in its memorandum under section 4(1)(c) and matters necessary in furtherance of them. An act outside those objects is ultra vires the company, and is void, not merely voidable, so it cannot be ratified even by a unanimous vote of the members.

Why the law has this at all

Two groups of people needed protecting, and the doctrine was built for both.

The shareholders. A person who buys shares in a tea company has consented to the risks of the tea trade. He has not consented to the directors taking his money into shipping. The objects clause is his statement of what he agreed to, and ultra vires is what makes that statement bite.

The creditors. A lender to a tea company relies on the company's assets being employed in tea. If the money can be diverted into anything at all, the assets he was relying on can vanish into a business he never assessed.

So the objects clause was made a limit on capacity, not merely on authority. That distinction is the heart of the doctrine and it is what makes the consequences so severe.

Some words this chapter uses

Ultra vires is Latin for "beyond the powers". Its opposite is intra vires, within the powers. Void means of no legal effect at all, as though it never happened; voidable means valid until somebody sets it aside. To ratify is to approve after the event, so as to make an unauthorised act binding. Capacity is the legal ability to do an act at all; authority is the permission of a particular person to do it on another's behalf. An injunction is a court order restraining somebody from doing something. Tracing is following money or property into the hands of the person who now has it.

Where the doctrine comes from in the Act

Section 4(1)(c) requires the memorandum to state the objects for which the company is proposed to be incorporated and any matter considered necessary in furtherance thereof.

Read the second half of that clause carefully, because it is the modern softener. A company whose object is manufacturing tiles does not need a separate object permitting it to buy a lorry, employ a clerk or open a bank account. Those are matters necessary in furtherance of the stated object and are within capacity without being spelled out. This is what used to be called the doctrine of implied powers, and it is now written into the clause.

munotes.in60

The Doctrine of Ultra Vires

Section 6 then makes clear that the Act overrides the memorandum, and section 10 makes the memorandum bind the company and its members as a statutory contract. So the objects clause is not a private arrangement that the parties can waive; it is a registered public limit.

The four kinds of ultra vires, and only one of them is fatal

Students lose marks by treating every irregularity as ultra vires. There are four situations and the consequences differ sharply.

1. Ultra vires the company. The act is outside the objects in the memorandum. The company had no capacity to do it. The act is void, cannot be ratified by anyone, and is the true doctrine.

2. Ultra vires the Act. The act is forbidden by the Companies Act itself, for example a buy-back in a circumstance barred by section 70. Void, and no memorandum can authorise it, because of section 6.

3. Ultra vires the articles but intra vires the memorandum. The company had capacity; its internal rules were not followed. This is curable: the members can alter the articles under section 14, or ratify.

4. Ultra vires the directors but intra vires the company. The directors exceeded their own authority. Again curable: the company in general meeting can ratify, and an outsider may in any event be protected by the rule in Turquand, which is the next chapter but one.

Only the first two are void. The third and fourth are irregularities.

The consequences of a true ultra vires act

1. The act is void and unenforceable both ways. Neither the company nor the other party can sue on it. The company cannot enforce it even if the bargain was good for the company.

2. It cannot be ratified. This is the consequence that surprises people, and the reason is logical rather than punitive: ratification presupposes that the principal could have done the act. A company that never had the capacity cannot acquire it by a vote. Even a unanimous resolution of every member fails. The proper route is to alter the objects under section 13 and act afresh, and even that does not validate the earlier act.

3. Any member may restrain it. A member can seek an injunction to stop a proposed or continuing ultra vires act. He does not need to show loss.

4. The directors are personally liable to the company. They applied the company's funds to a purpose the company could not pursue, so they must make good the loss. Their duty to act within the memorandum is now also part of the statutory duties in section 166.

munotes.in61

The Doctrine of Ultra Vires

5. The company may trace its property. Where the company's money has been spent ultra vires and is identifiable in another's hands, the company can follow it.

6. An ultra vires lender is not simply left out in the cold. A lender whose money was in fact used to pay off the company's own lawful debts may stand in the place of the creditors who were paid off, because the company has been enriched to that extent. This is the practical qualification that keeps the doctrine from being absurd, and it is worth a sentence.

7. Ultra vires torts. A company is liable for a wrong committed by its servant only where the servant was acting within the scope of employment on business the company could lawfully carry on. Where the whole activity was ultra vires, the company's liability is doubtful, and this is the least settled corner of the doctrine.

The case, and how to answer on it

Ashbury Railway Carriage and Iron Co. Ltd. v. Riche is the decision every syllabus names. It established that a company's capacity is limited to its stated objects, that a contract outside them is void, and that the shareholders cannot ratify it, however unanimous they are.

It is named here without a citation and without facts, deliberately. No law report carrying it could be opened from where this book was written, and the house rule is that a citation goes only with a report that has been read. See authorities/cases.json and FINDINGS.md section 5.1.

How to answer. State the doctrine, ground it in section 4(1)(c), name Ashbury as the decision that settled that an ultra vires contract is void and unratifiable, and then take the consequences in order. An examiner is testing whether you know that ratification is impossible and why, not whether you can recite a nineteenth century railway dispute.

How the doctrine has been weakened, and why it still matters

Drafting killed most of it. Once companies learned to write objects clauses running to forty sub-clauses ending "and to carry on any other business which in the opinion of the Board can be advantageously carried on", almost nothing was outside the objects. The doctrine survived in form and shrank in practice.

Section 4(1)(c) has narrowed the drafting trick, because the objects must be stated for which the company is proposed to be incorporated, with matters necessary in furtherance, rather than an open catalogue of everything the promoters could imagine.

Section 13(8) is the modern successor to the protection. Where a company has raised money from the public through a prospectus and still holds any unutilised amount, it shall not change its objects unless a special resolution is passed and:

munotes.in62

The Doctrine of Ultra Vires

  • (i) the prescribed details of the resolution are published in two newspapers, one English and one vernacular, in circulation where the registered office is, and placed on the company's website, with the justification for the change; and
  • (ii) the dissenting shareholders are given an exit opportunity by the promoters and controlling shareholders, in accordance with SEBI regulations.

That is the same protective idea as ultra vires, delivered by disclosure and an exit rather than by voiding the act.

Section 245(1)(b) is the members' modern weapon. In a class action, members or depositors may apply to the Tribunal to restrain the company from committing an act which is ultra vires the articles or memorandum of the company. So the doctrine has a named statutory remedy in the current Act, which is the citation to give.

A worked example

Konkan Fisheries Limited has one object: to catch, process and sell fish. Its memorandum says nothing else.

The Board resolves to lend eight crore rupees to a film production house on the view that the returns will be better than fishing. A member, Deepa, objects.

Is it ultra vires? Yes. Financing film production is not within the object of catching, processing and selling fish, and it is not a matter necessary in furtherance of that object in the section 4(1)(c) sense. Buying a lorry to move fish would be; funding a film is not.

What can Deepa do? She may seek an injunction to restrain the payment. If it has already been made, she may press the company to recover from the directors personally, and under section 245(1)(b) she may join a class action asking the Tribunal to restrain the company from an act ultra vires its memorandum.

Can the shareholders fix it? No. Even if all of them vote to approve the loan, it remains void, because the company never had the capacity. What they can do is alter the objects under section 13(1) by special resolution, after which the company may lend afresh. The earlier loan is not thereby validated.

Where does that leave the film house? It cannot sue on the contract. But if it can show that its eight crore rupees were used by the company to pay off its own lawful trade creditors, it may stand in the shoes of those creditors to that extent, because the company has been enriched.

Change one fact. Suppose the memorandum did allow investment in other businesses, but the articles required Board loans above five crore rupees to be approved in general meeting, and the Board skipped that step. That is not ultra vires the company at all. It is ultra vires the articles, the company had capacity, and the members can ratify it.

munotes.in63

The Doctrine of Ultra Vires

Distinctions that carry marks

Ultra vires the companyUltra vires the directors
What is exceededThe capacity given by the memorandumThe authority given by the articles or the Board's own limits
EffectVoidIrregular, and binding on the company as against a protected outsider
RatificationImpossible, even unanimouslyPossible, by the company in general meeting
Cure for the futureAlter the objects under section 13Alter the articles under section 14, or pass the resolution required
Member's remedyInjunction; section 245(1)(b)Ordinary internal remedies

What this does NOT mean

It does not mean every act the directors were not allowed to do is ultra vires. Most such acts are within the company's capacity and are curable.

It does not mean the company keeps a windfall. The other party is not simply robbed; tracing and the subrogation of a lender whose money paid lawful debts both cut the other way.

It does not mean the objects clause can be ignored because clauses are widely drafted. Section 13(8) and section 245(1)(b) both assume it is real, and the second gives a direct remedy for breach of it.

It does not mean altering the objects validates what was already done. Alteration operates for the future.

Quick revision

  • Meaning: beyond the powers. Capacity comes from section 4(1)(c), objects plus matters necessary in furtherance.
  • Four kinds: ultra vires the company (void); ultra vires the Act (void, section 6); ultra vires the articles (curable); ultra vires the directors (curable, ratifiable).
  • Consequences: void and unenforceable both ways; no ratification even by unanimous consent; injunction at a member's instance; directors personally liable; tracing; a lender whose money paid lawful debts may be subrogated; ultra vires torts doubtful.
  • The case: Ashbury, for void and unratifiable. Named without a citation.
  • Modern successors: section 13(8), no change of objects while prospectus money is unutilised without a special resolution, newspaper and website publication with justification, and an exit for dissenting shareholders; section 245(1)(b), class action to restrain an act ultra vires the memorandum or articles.

Test yourself

1. What does ultra vires mean, and what is its effect on a contract? Beyond the powers. A contract outside the objects stated in the memorandum under section 4(1)(c) is beyond the company's capacity and is void, so neither party can enforce it.

2. Can the shareholders ratify an ultra vires contract? No, not even unanimously. Ratification assumes the principal could have done the act; a company that lacked capacity cannot acquire it by vote. The only route forward is to alter the objects under section 13, which operates for the future.

3. Distinguish an act ultra vires the company from one ultra vires the directors. The first exceeds the company's capacity under the memorandum and is void and unratifiable. The second exceeds the directors' authority; the company had capacity, and the act can be ratified in general meeting.

munotes.in64

The Doctrine of Ultra Vires

4. What statutory remedy does a member have against an ultra vires act? Section 245(1)(b): in a class action, members or depositors may apply to the Tribunal to restrain the company from committing an act ultra vires the articles or memorandum. A member may also seek an injunction.

5. A company that raised money by prospectus still holds part of it. Can it change its objects? Only by special resolution and by complying with section 13(8): publishing the prescribed details in one English and one vernacular newspaper in circulation where the registered office is, and on its website, with the justification; and giving dissenting shareholders an exit through the promoters and controlling shareholders in accordance with SEBI regulations.

6. A company's sole object is running schools. It buys a bus to carry pupils. Ultra vires? No. Carrying pupils is a matter necessary in furtherance of the object of running schools, and section 4(1)(c) covers it expressly without a separate object clause.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in65

Chapter Twelve

The Articles of Association

Syllabus topic 1.2, label: "Articles of association"

In one line

The articles are the company's internal rulebook: how meetings are called, how directors are appointed, how shares are transferred and how the company runs itself day to day.

In exam wording: section 5(1) provides that the articles of a company shall contain the regulations for management of the company; section 5(3) to (5) permit entrenchment; section 5(6) to (8) deal with the model articles in Tables F to J of Schedule I; and section 10 gives the articles effect as a statutory contract between the company and its members.

Why the law has this at all

The memorandum tells the world what the company is and what it may do. It says nothing about how the company decides anything.

Somebody has to settle how many directors there are, how a Board meeting is called, who chairs a general meeting, what happens to a share when a member dies, and how a call on shares is made. Every company needs answers, most companies want the same answers, and no legislature wants to write them all into the Act, because different companies genuinely need different rules.

So the Act does three things at once. It requires each company to have articles. It supplies a default set in Schedule I, so a company that does not want to think about it need not. And it lets a company depart from the default, within the limits set by the Act and its own memorandum.

Some words this chapter uses

Regulations for management means the internal rules by which the company is run. Model articles are the standard sets printed in Schedule I. Entrenchment means making a provision harder to change than an ordinary special resolution would allow. A special resolution requires votes of not less than three times the votes cast against. Repugnant means inconsistent with. To modify the model articles means to change them; to exclude them means to keep them out altogether.

What the articles must contain: section 5(1) and (2)

Section 5(1). The articles shall contain the regulations for management of the company.

Section 5(2). The articles shall also contain such matters as may be prescribed, with a proviso: nothing so prescribed shall be deemed to prevent a company from including such additional matters in its articles as may be considered necessary for its management.

So there is a floor and no ceiling. The Act, through the rules, sets a minimum content; the company may add whatever else it needs. What it may not do is include anything repugnant to the Act, because of section 6, or anything beyond the memorandum, because the memorandum is the dominant document.

A private company's articles carry a compulsory content of their own. Under section 2(68) they must restrict the right to transfer shares, limit members to two hundred except in a One Person Company, and prohibit any invitation to the public to subscribe for securities. Those three are not optional and their absence costs the company its private status: see the first proviso to section 14(1).

munotes.in66

The Articles of Association

Entrenchment: section 5(3), (4) and (5)

This is the newest idea in the section and it is short enough to learn word for word.

Section 5(3). The articles may contain provisions for entrenchment to the effect that specified provisions of the articles may be altered only if conditions or procedures that are more restrictive than those applicable in the case of a special resolution are met or complied with.

The point. Ordinarily articles are altered by special resolution under section 14. Entrenchment lets a company say that a particular article can be altered only by something harder: unanimity, or the consent of a named class, or a higher majority.

Why anybody wants it. A minority investor who is promised a seat on the Board wants that promise in the articles, and wants to know it cannot be voted away by the majority who gave it. Entrenchment is how that promise is made secure.

Section 5(4): when it may be created. Entrenchment provisions shall only be made:

  • either on formation of a company; or
  • by an amendment in the articles agreed to by all the members in the case of a private company, and by a special resolution in the case of a public company.

Note the asymmetry and remember it, because it is counter-intuitive. To entrench later, a private company needs unanimity, while a public company needs only a special resolution. Students routinely get this the wrong way round on the assumption that public companies are always more heavily regulated.

Section 5(5): notice. Where the articles contain entrenchment provisions, whether made on formation or by amendment, the company shall give notice to the Registrar in the prescribed form and manner. That is what makes the entrenchment public, so an outsider can discover it.

The model articles: section 5(6), (7), (8) and (9)

Section 5(6). The articles shall be in the respective forms specified in Tables F, G, H, I and J in Schedule I as may be applicable. The memorandum uses Tables A to E under section 4(6); the articles use F to J.

Section 5(7). A company may adopt all or any of the regulations contained in the model articles applicable to it.

Section 5(8) is the default rule and the one worth quoting. For a company registered after the commencement of this Act, in so far as its registered articles do not exclude or modify the regulations in the applicable model articles, those regulations shall, so far as applicable, be the regulations of that company in the same manner and to the extent as if they were contained in the duly registered articles.

munotes.in67

The Articles of Association

Read that as a gap filler. Silence in a company's own articles is not a gap; it is an adoption. If your articles say nothing about who chairs a general meeting, the model article on that subject is your article.

Section 5(9). Nothing in this section applies to the articles of a company registered under any previous company law, unless amended under this Act. So a company incorporated in 1978 keeps its own articles and the section 5(8) default does not silently rewrite them.

The effect of the articles: section 10

Set out in full in [The Memorandum of Association], and it applies to the articles in exactly the same way. The articles, when registered, bind the company and the members as if signed by each of them and containing covenants to observe all their provisions, and monies payable by a member under them are a debt due to the company.

Two limits, both examinable:

The articles bind members as members, not as outsiders. An article providing that a named person shall be the company's solicitor does not give him a contract, even if he happens also to be a member, because he is enforcing it in a capacity other than as a member.

The articles are subordinate to the memorandum and to the Act. Section 6 makes any provision repugnant to the Act void to that extent, and no article can widen the objects.

A worked example

Sahyadri Textiles Private Limited is being incorporated by four founders and one outside investor, Renuka, who is putting in three crore rupees for twenty per cent.

The basic articles. They adopt Table F with modifications, which is what section 5(7) permits. Anything they leave alone stays as Table F by force of section 5(8).

The compulsory private company content. Because it is a private company, section 2(68) requires the articles to restrict transfer of shares, cap members at two hundred and prohibit public invitations. They put those in.

Renuka's protection. She will not invest unless the article giving her the right to nominate one director is safe from the four founders, who between them can pass any special resolution. So the articles are drafted on formation with an entrenchment provision: the nomination article may be altered only with Renuka's written consent. That is permitted by section 5(3), it is made on formation so section 5(4) is satisfied without more, and the company gives notice to the Registrar under section 5(5).

munotes.in68

The Articles of Association

Two years later the founders want to entrench a different article, about pre-emption on transfers. Now section 5(4) bites in its second limb, and because this is a private company the amendment must be agreed to by all the members, Renuka included. Had it been a public company a special resolution would have sufficed.

A member sues. One founder refuses to offer his shares to the others before selling outside, in breach of the pre-emption article. The others can enforce it, because by section 10 the articles bind the members to each other through the company as a statutory contract, in their capacity as members.

A different suit fails. Renuka's husband is named in the articles as the company's architect and is not paid. He cannot sue on the article. He is an outsider to the section 10 contract, whether or not he is a member, because he is enforcing a right in another capacity.

Distinctions that carry marks

MemorandumArticles
PurposeDefines the company to the outside worldRegulates the company internally
Required contentsSix clauses, section 4(1)Regulations for management, section 5(1), plus prescribed matters
Schedule I tablesA to E, section 4(6)F to J, section 5(6)
Default supplied by the ActNoYes, section 5(8)
AlterationSection 13; some changes need Central Government approvalSection 14, special resolution; Central Government order for public to private conversion
Can it be entrenchedNoYes, section 5(3) to (5)
HierarchyDominantSubordinate to the memorandum and the Act
Ordinary alteration of articlesEntrenched provision
RequirementSpecial resolution, section 14(1)Whatever more restrictive condition or procedure the articles specify, section 5(3)
When it can be createdNot applicableOn formation, or later: all members in a private company, special resolution in a public company, section 5(4)
RegistrarFiled under section 14(2)Notice under section 5(5)

What this does NOT mean

It does not mean the articles can do anything the members agree on. Section 6 voids anything repugnant to the Act, and the articles cannot go beyond the memorandum.

It does not mean a company that says nothing has no rule. Section 5(8) supplies the model article for a company registered after the commencement of this Act.

It does not mean entrenchment makes a provision unalterable. It makes it alterable only on a more restrictive condition. An article that could never be changed at all would sit badly with section 14 and with section 6.

It does not mean an article can create rights for outsiders. Section 10 binds the company and the members as members.

Quick revision

  • Section 5(1) and (2): regulations for management, plus prescribed matters; additional matters permitted.
  • Private company: section 2(68) forces three articles: restrict transfer, cap two hundred members, prohibit public invitation.
  • Entrenchment, section 5(3): specified provisions alterable only on conditions more restrictive than a special resolution.
  • Section 5(4): on formation, or later by all the members in a private company and by special resolution in a public company.
  • Section 5(5): notice to the Registrar.
  • Section 5(6): Tables F to J of Schedule I. 5(7): may adopt all or any. 5(8): model articles apply so far as not excluded or modified, for companies registered after the commencement of this Act. 5(9): not for companies under previous company law unless amended under this Act.
  • Section 10: statutory contract, binding on company and members as members; monies payable are a debt.
  • Section 6: the Act overrides; repugnant provisions void.
munotes.in69

The Articles of Association

Test yourself

1. What must the articles contain? The regulations for management of the company, section 5(1), and such matters as may be prescribed, section 5(2), with liberty to include any additional matters considered necessary for management.

2. What is entrenchment? A provision in the articles to the effect that specified provisions may be altered only if conditions or procedures more restrictive than those applicable to a special resolution are met: section 5(3).

3. A private company wants to add an entrenchment provision three years after incorporation. What does it need? The agreement of all the members: section 5(4). A public company in the same position would need only a special resolution.

4. A company's articles are silent on the appointment of a chairman of a general meeting. What is the rule? The applicable model article in Schedule I applies, because under section 5(8) the model regulations apply so far as the company's registered articles do not exclude or modify them, for a company registered after the commencement of this Act.

5. Which Tables of Schedule I contain the model articles? Tables F, G, H, I and J: section 5(6). Tables A to E hold the forms of memorandum under section 4(6).

6. Can a person named in the articles as the company's solicitor sue on that article? No. Section 10 binds the company and the members in their capacity as members. A person enforcing a right in another capacity is an outsider to the statutory contract, even if he is also a member.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in70

Chapter Thirteen

Alteration of the Memorandum and the Articles

Syllabus topic 1.2, arising out of "Memorandum of association" and "Articles of association"

In one line

Both documents can be changed, but the memorandum faces the world so changing it usually needs somebody outside the company to agree, while the articles are internal and a three fourths majority of the members is normally enough.

In exam wording: section 13 governs alteration of the memorandum, by special resolution and, for a change of name, the written approval of the Central Government, and for a shift of the registered office from one State to another, approval of the Central Government under section 13(4). Section 14 governs alteration of the articles, by special resolution, with a Central Government order required only where a public company converts into a private company.

Why the law has this at all

A company that could never change its constitution would die of its own founding decisions. Businesses move into new lines, outgrow their capital, relocate and change their names.

But every one of those changes affects somebody who did not vote on it. Creditors lent to a company in a particular business at a particular address. Investors bought shares on the strength of a prospectus that named an object. A rival trader has built a reputation around a name.

So the Act sorts changes by who else is affected and requires a proportionate check. Purely internal rules need only the members. A change of name is checked by the Central Government because outsiders identify the company by it. A move between States needs approval and a look at creditors, because it changes which Registrar and which High Court have the company. And a change of objects while the public's prospectus money is still unspent triggers the heaviest requirement of all.

Some words this chapter uses

A special resolution is one passed where votes in favour are not less than three times the votes against. An ordinary resolution needs a simple majority. The Regional Director is a senior officer of the Ministry of Corporate Affairs above the Registrar. Vernacular means the local language. Unutilised means not yet spent. Conversion means changing from one class of company to another, for example private to public.

Altering the memorandum: section 13

The general rule, section 13(1)

Save as provided in section 61, a company may, by a special resolution and after complying with the procedure specified in this section, alter the provisions of its memorandum.

The carve-out matters: section 61 governs alteration of the capital clause, and it needs only an ordinary resolution if the articles authorise it. So do not answer "special resolution" for every clause of the memorandum.

Change of name, section 13(2) and (3)

Any change of name is subject to section 4(2) and (3), so the new name must not be identical with or too nearly resemble an existing name, must not constitute an offence or be undesirable, and must not suggest Government connection without approval. And it shall not have effect except with the approval of the Central Government in writing.

munotes.in71

Alteration of the Memorandum and the Articles

The proviso removes one case. No such approval is necessary where the only change is the deletion or addition of the word "Private", consequent on conversion of one class of company to another under the Act.

Section 13(3): when it is complete. The Registrar shall enter the new name in the register in place of the old and issue a fresh certificate of incorporation with the new name, and the change shall be complete and effective only on the issue of such a certificate. Not on the resolution, and not on the approval.

Shifting the registered office from one State to another, section 13(4) and (5)

The alteration shall not have any effect unless it is approved by the Central Government on an application in the prescribed form and manner.

Section 13(5) puts a clock and a test on that. The Central Government shall dispose of the application within sixty days, and before passing its order may satisfy itself either that the alteration has the consent of the creditors, debenture holders and other persons concerned, or that sufficient provision has been made for the due discharge of all the company's debts and obligations, or that adequate security has been provided for such discharge.

That is a creditor protection test, and it is the reason an inter-State shift is harder than any other alteration except a change of objects funded by the public.

Filing, section 13(6) and (7)

Save as provided in section 64, the company shall file with the Registrar (a) the special resolution, and (b) the Central Government's approval, if the alteration involves a change of name.

Section 13(7). Where the alteration transfers the registered office from one State to another, a certified copy of the Central Government's order shall be filed with the Registrar of each of the States, within the prescribed time and manner, and the Registrar of the State to which the office is shifted shall issue a fresh certificate of incorporation indicating the alteration.

Change of objects after a public issue, section 13(8)

This is the heaviest requirement in the section. A company which has raised money from the public through a prospectus and still has any unutilised amount out of that money shall not change its objects unless a special resolution is passed and:

  • (i) the prescribed details of the resolution are published in the newspapers, one in English and one in the vernacular language, in circulation at the place where the registered office is situated, and placed on the company's website, if any, indicating the justification for the change; and
  • (ii) the dissenting shareholders are given an opportunity to exit by the promoters and shareholders having control, in accordance with regulations to be specified by the Securities and Exchange Board.
munotes.in72

Alteration of the Memorandum and the Articles

Two protections doing different work: disclosure with a reason, so the market can judge, and an exit, so a shareholder who disagrees is not trapped.

Registration and effect, section 13(9), (10) and (11)

Section 13(9). The Registrar shall register any alteration of the objects and certify the registration within thirty days of the filing of the special resolution.

Section 13(10). No alteration made under this section shall have any effect until it has been registered in accordance with this section. So registration, not resolution, is the operative moment throughout.

Section 13(11). In a company limited by guarantee and not having a share capital, any alteration purporting to give a person a right to participate in divisible profits otherwise than as a member is void. This mirrors section 4(7).

Altering the articles: section 14

The general rule, section 14(1)

Subject to the provisions of this Act and the conditions contained in its memorandum, if any, a company may by a special resolution alter its articles, including alterations having the effect of conversion of (a) a private company into a public company, or (b) a public company into a private company.

So conversion between the two classes is done through the articles, which is why section 14 rather than section 13 is the conversion section.

The three provisos

First proviso: losing private status by accident. Where a private company alters its articles so that they no longer include the restrictions and limitations required for a private company under the Act, the company shall, as from the date of such alteration, cease to be a private company. It happens automatically. No order, no application, no certificate. Drop the transfer restriction from your articles and you are a public company from that date.

Second proviso: converting public to private. Any alteration having the effect of conversion of a public company into a private company shall not be valid unless it is approved by an order of the Central Government on an application in the prescribed form and manner.

Note the asymmetry and it is examined. Private to public: special resolution alone. Public to private: special resolution plus a Central Government order. The reason is obvious once stated: going public adds obligations and protections, while going private removes them.

munotes.in73

Alteration of the Memorandum and the Articles

Third proviso: transitional. Any application pending before the Tribunal on the commencement of the Companies (Amendment) Act 2019 shall be disposed of by the Tribunal under the law applicable before that commencement. This records that the approving authority for public to private conversion moved from the Tribunal to the Central Government in 2019.

Filing, section 14(2)

Every alteration of the articles, and a copy of the Central Government's order approving it where required, shall be filed with the Registrar together with a printed copy of the altered articles, within fifteen days, in the prescribed manner, and the Registrar shall register the same.

Noting the alteration in every copy: section 15

Section 15(1). Every alteration made in the memorandum or articles shall be noted in every copy of the memorandum or articles.

Section 15(2). On default, the company and every officer in default shall be liable to a penalty of one thousand rupees for every copy of the memorandum or articles issued without the alteration.

The penalty is per copy, which is the sting. A company that circulates a hundred out of date copies faces a lakh of rupees.

Conversion of an existing company: section 18

Section 18(1). A company of any class registered under this Act may convert itself into a company of another class by alteration of memorandum and articles in accordance with this Chapter.

Section 18(2). On the company's application, the Registrar, after satisfying himself that the provisions applicable for registration of companies have been complied with, shall close the former registration and, after registering the documents, issue a certificate of incorporation in the same manner as its first registration.

Section 18(3) is the protective sub-section. Registration under this section shall not affect any debts, liabilities, obligations or contracts incurred or entered into by or on behalf of the company before conversion, and they may be enforced as if such registration had not been done.

So conversion changes the company's clothes, not its identity. Its creditors are exactly where they were.

A worked example

Deccan Agro Limited, a public company registered in Telangana, wants to do four things.

1. Change its name to Deccan Agri Foods Limited. Special resolution under section 13(1), and the written approval of the Central Government under section 13(2), the name being checked against section 4(2) and (3). The change takes effect only when the Registrar issues a fresh certificate of incorporation, section 13(3).

2. Move its registered office to Maharashtra. Special resolution, and Central Government approval under section 13(4). The Government has sixty days and will look for creditor consent, or sufficient provision for the debts, or adequate security, under section 13(5). A certified copy of the order goes to the Registrar of both States, and the Maharashtra Registrar issues a fresh certificate of incorporation indicating the alteration, section 13(7).

munotes.in74

Alteration of the Memorandum and the Articles

3. Add a new object, food processing. Special resolution. But the company raised forty crore rupees by a prospectus two years ago and eleven crore is still unspent, so section 13(8) applies: the details must be published in one English and one vernacular newspaper where the registered office is, and on the website, with the justification, and the dissenting shareholders must be offered an exit by the promoters and controlling shareholders under SEBI regulations. The Registrar then registers the change of objects and certifies within thirty days, section 13(9), and nothing takes effect until registration, section 13(10).

4. Convert into a private company. Special resolution altering the articles under section 14(1), plus an order of the Central Government under the second proviso. The alteration, the order and a printed copy of the altered articles go to the Registrar within fifteen days, section 14(2).

And a warning. Once converted, if the company later amends its articles and drops the restriction on transfer of shares, the first proviso to section 14(1) operates automatically: from the date of that alteration it ceases to be a private company, whether or not anybody intended it.

Distinctions that carry marks

ChangeResolutionOutside approvalWhen effective
Objects, ordinary caseSpecial, section 13(1)NoneOn registration, sections 13(9) and (10)
Objects, prospectus money unutilisedSpecialNewspapers, website, justification, and an exit for dissenters, section 13(8)On registration
NameSpecial, section 13(1)Central Government in writing, section 13(2)On the fresh certificate, section 13(3)
Registered office, another StateSpecialCentral Government, section 13(4), within sixty days, creditors consideredOn the fresh certificate from the new State's Registrar, section 13(7)
Capital clauseOrdinary, section 61 if the articles authoriseNoneOn filing under section 64
Articles, generallySpecial, section 14(1)NoneOn filing under section 14(2)
Private to publicSpecial, section 14(1)(a)NoneOn the alteration
Public to privateSpecial, section 14(1)(b)Central Government order, second provisoOn approval and filing

What this does NOT mean

It does not mean every memorandum change needs a special resolution. Section 13(1) opens "save as provided in section 61", and the capital clause is altered by ordinary resolution where the articles allow.

It does not mean the resolution changes anything by itself. Section 13(10) says no alteration has effect until registered, and section 13(3) says a name change is complete only on the fresh certificate.

It does not mean conversion creates a new company. Section 18(3) preserves every debt, liability, obligation and contract incurred before conversion.

munotes.in75

Alteration of the Memorandum and the Articles

It does not mean a private company must apply to become public. It can lose private status automatically under the first proviso to section 14(1) simply by dropping the required restrictions from its articles.

Quick revision

  • Section 13(1): special resolution, save section 61 for capital.
  • 13(2) and (3): name needs Central Government written approval, subject to section 4(2) and (3); no approval needed for merely adding or deleting "Private" on conversion; effective only on the fresh certificate.
  • 13(4) and (5): State to State shift needs Central Government approval, decided in sixty days, looking at creditor consent, provision for debts or adequate security.
  • 13(6) and (7): file the resolution and the approval; on an inter-State shift file the certified order with the Registrar of each State.
  • 13(8): unutilised prospectus money means special resolution plus two newspapers and the website with a justification, plus an exit for dissenting shareholders under SEBI regulations.
  • 13(9) and (10): objects registered and certified in thirty days; nothing effective until registration.
  • Section 14(1): articles by special resolution, including conversion either way. First proviso: dropping the private company restrictions means the company ceases to be private from that date. Second proviso: public to private needs a Central Government order. Third proviso: pending Tribunal applications under the pre 2019 law.
  • 14(2): file within fifteen days with a printed copy of the altered articles.
  • Section 15: note every alteration in every copy; one thousand rupees per copy on default.
  • Section 18: conversion by altering both documents; former registration closed, fresh certificate issued; debts, liabilities, obligations and contracts survive.

Test yourself

1. What is needed to change a company's name? A special resolution under section 13(1) and the written approval of the Central Government under section 13(2), the new name satisfying section 4(2) and (3). The change is effective only on the issue of a fresh certificate of incorporation: section 13(3).

2. Within what time must the Central Government decide an application to shift the registered office to another State, and what does it look at? Sixty days, section 13(5). It may satisfy itself that the alteration has the consent of creditors, debenture holders and other persons concerned, or that sufficient provision has been made for the discharge of the company's debts and obligations, or that adequate security has been provided.

3. A listed company that still holds unspent prospectus money wants to change its objects. What must it do? Pass a special resolution and comply with section 13(8): publish the prescribed details in one English and one vernacular newspaper in circulation where the registered office is, and on its website, with the justification; and ensure that dissenting shareholders are given an exit by the promoters and controlling shareholders in accordance with SEBI regulations.

munotes.in76

Alteration of the Memorandum and the Articles

4. How does a public company become a private company? By a special resolution altering its articles under section 14(1)(b), which is not valid unless approved by an order of the Central Government under the second proviso. The alteration, the order and a printed copy of the altered articles are filed with the Registrar within fifteen days.

5. A private company amends its articles and deletes the restriction on transfer of shares. What happens? By the first proviso to section 14(1) it ceases to be a private company from the date of that alteration. No order or application is needed; the consequence is automatic.

6. Does conversion under section 18 wipe out the company's old debts? No. Section 18(3) provides that registration under the section does not affect any debts, liabilities, obligations or contracts incurred before conversion, and they may be enforced as if the registration had not been done.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in77

Chapter Fourteen

The Registered Office and Service of Documents

Syllabus topic 1.2, "Incorporation of companies & matters incidental thereto"

In one line

Every company must have a real address at which letters can be received and acknowledged, must display its name and that address, and must tell the Registrar when either changes.

In exam wording: section 12(1) requires a company to have a registered office capable of receiving and acknowledging all communications and notices within thirty days of incorporation and at all times thereafter; section 12(3) prescribes what must be painted, engraved and printed; section 12(4) to (7) govern change of the office; and section 20 prescribes how documents are served on a company, on the Registrar and on members.

Why the law has this at all

A company has no body. You cannot knock on it, hand it a summons or ask it a question. If the law did not fix a place where the company can be found, a creditor with a claim and a court with a notice would have nowhere to send them.

The registered office is that place. It is the company's legal address, and the requirement that it be capable of receiving and acknowledging communications is doing real work: a locked room with a nameplate is not enough, because nobody there acknowledges anything.

The display requirements in section 12(3) serve the same instinct one level down. A person dealing with a shop should be able to see, from the shop, which company he is dealing with and where to write to it. And the two year rule about former names exists so that a company cannot shed a bad reputation by changing its name and hoping nobody connects the two.

Some words this chapter uses

Conspicuous means easily seen. Legible means readable. A hundi is a traditional Indian instrument of exchange. A billhead is the printed heading of a bill. The Regional Director is an officer of the Ministry of Corporate Affairs senior to a Registrar. Local limits means the boundaries of the city, town or village. Verification here means confirming the address in the prescribed manner.

The office itself: section 12(1) and (2)

Section 12(1). A company shall, within thirty days of its incorporation and at all times thereafter, have a registered office capable of receiving and acknowledging all communications and notices as may be addressed to it.

Two limbs. Within thirty days of incorporation, so a company may be incorporated before it has an office, which is why section 7(1)(d) requires an address for correspondence in the meantime. And at all times thereafter, so the obligation is continuous.

Section 12(2). The company shall furnish to the Registrar verification of its registered office within thirty days of its incorporation, in the prescribed manner.

This connects to the trap in the next chapter. Section 10A(1)(b) makes the filing of that verification one of the two conditions a company with a share capital must satisfy before it may commence business or exercise borrowing powers.

munotes.in78

The Registered Office and Service of Documents

What must be displayed: section 12(3)

Every company shall:

  • (a) paint or affix its name, and the address of its registered office, and keep them painted or affixed, on the outside of every office or place in which its business is carried on, in a conspicuous position, in legible letters, and if those characters are not those of the language, or one of the languages, in general use in that locality, also in the characters of that language;
  • (b) have its name engraved in legible characters on its seal, if any;
  • (c) get its name, the address of its registered office and the Corporate Identity Number, along with telephone number, fax number if any, e-mail and website addresses if any, printed in all its business letters, billheads, letter papers and in all its notices and other official publications; and
  • (d) have its name printed on hundies, promissory notes, bills of exchange and such other documents as may be prescribed.

Clause (b) is another casualty of 2015. It reads "on its seal, if any", because the common seal ceased to be compulsory when the words "and a common seal" were omitted from section 9 by the Companies (Amendment) Act 2015 with effect from 29 May 2015. See [The Characteristics of a Company].

Two provisos, both examinable.

The first proviso: former names. Where a company has changed its name or names during the last two years, it shall paint, affix or print, along with its name, the former name or names so changed during the last two years, as required by clauses (a) and (c).

The second proviso: One Person Company. The words "One Person Company" shall be mentioned in brackets below the name of such a company, wherever its name is printed, affixed or engraved.

Changing the office: section 12(4) to (7)

This is the part with four levels, and the level depends on how far the office moves.

Level one: anywhere, notice is required. Section 12(4). Notice of every change of the situation of the registered office after incorporation, verified in the prescribed manner, shall be given to the Registrar within thirty days of the change, and he shall record it.

Level two: outside the local limits, special resolution. Section 12(5). Except on the authority of a special resolution, the registered office shall not be changed:

  • (a) in the case of an existing company, outside the local limits of any city, town or village where it is situated at the commencement of this Act, or where it may later be situated by virtue of a special resolution; and
  • (b) in the case of any other company, outside the local limits of any city, town or village where it is first situated, or where it may later be situated by virtue of a special resolution.
munotes.in79

The Registered Office and Service of Documents

So a move within the same city needs only the section 12(4) notice. A move to a different city needs a special resolution.

Level three: to another Registrar within the same State, Regional Director. The proviso to section 12(5). No company shall change the place of its registered office from the jurisdiction of one Registrar to the jurisdiction of another Registrar within the same State unless such change is confirmed by the Regional Director on an application in the prescribed manner.

Section 12(6) puts a timetable on that confirmation. The Regional Director shall communicate it within thirty days from the date of receipt of the application; the company shall file the confirmation with the Registrar within sixty days of the date of confirmation; and the Registrar shall register it and certify the registration within thirty days of the filing.

Section 12(7). That certificate shall be conclusive evidence that all the requirements of this Act with respect to change of registered office under sub-section (5) have been complied with, and the change shall take effect from the date of the certificate.

Level four: to another State, Central Government. This is not in section 12 at all. It is an alteration of the memorandum's registered office clause under section 4(1)(b), so it goes through section 13(4) to (7), needs Central Government approval decided within sixty days with creditor protection, and ends in a fresh certificate of incorporation from the new State's Registrar. See [Alteration of the Memorandum and the Articles].

Service of documents: section 20

Section 20(1): serving the company or its officer. A document may be served by sending it to the company or the officer at the registered office by registered post, speed post, courier service, by leaving it at the registered office, or by such electronic or other mode as may be prescribed.

The proviso allows a depository, where securities are held with it, to serve the records of beneficial ownership on the company by electronic or other mode.

Section 20(2): serving the Registrar or a member. Save as provided in the Act or the rules for filing documents with the Registrar in electronic mode, a document may be served on the Registrar or any member by post, registered post, speed post, courier, delivery at his office or address, or such electronic or other mode as may be prescribed.

munotes.in80

The Registered Office and Service of Documents

The proviso is the members' option. A member may request delivery of any document through a particular mode, for which he shall pay such fees as may be determined by the company in its annual general meeting. So a member who insists on a paper copy by courier can have it, and pays for it.

The Explanation defines "courier" as a person or agency which delivers the document and provides proof of its delivery. Proof of delivery is the defining feature, which is why an ordinary messenger will not do.

A worked example

Nashik Vintners Private Limited is incorporated on 5 May 2026 with its memorandum stating Maharashtra as the State.

By 4 June 2026 it must have a registered office capable of receiving and acknowledging communications, section 12(1), and must furnish verification of it to the Registrar, section 12(2). Until then the address for correspondence filed under section 7(1)(d) does the work. And until the verification is filed the company may not commence business, because of section 10A(1)(b).

Display. Its name and the registered office address are painted outside the winery and outside its Pune sales office, in a conspicuous position and in legible letters. Because Marathi is in general use in the locality, the name also appears in Marathi characters, as clause (a) requires. Its letterhead carries the name, the registered office address, the Corporate Identity Number, telephone, e-mail and website, under clause (c).

Moving, four ways.

  1. Across Nashik city. Notice to the Registrar within thirty days, section 12(4). Nothing more.
  2. From Nashik to Dhule, both within the same Registrar's jurisdiction. It is outside the local limits of the city where the office was first situated, so a special resolution is needed under section 12(5)(b), plus the section 12(4) notice.
  3. From Nashik to a place under a different Registrar in Maharashtra. Special resolution, plus confirmation by the Regional Director under the proviso to section 12(5). He communicates within thirty days; the company files within sixty days of the confirmation; the Registrar certifies within thirty days of filing; and the change takes effect from the date of that certificate, which is conclusive evidence of compliance, section 12(6) and (7).
  4. From Maharashtra to Goa. Not section 12 at all. Alteration of the memorandum under section 13(4), Central Government approval within sixty days with creditors considered under section 13(5), certified copy filed with the Registrar of both States, and a fresh certificate of incorporation from the Goa Registrar under section 13(7).

Two years later the company changes its name to Godavari Vintners Private Limited. For the next two years, wherever its name is painted or printed under clauses (a) and (c), the former name must appear alongside it, by the first proviso to section 12(3).

munotes.in81

The Registered Office and Service of Documents

Distinctions that carry marks

MoveAuthority neededEffective when
Within the same city, town or villageNotice to the Registrar within thirty days, section 12(4)On the change, notice recorded
Outside those local limits, same RegistrarSpecial resolution, section 12(5)On the change, with notice
To another Registrar in the same StateSpecial resolution plus Regional Director confirmation, proviso to section 12(5)Date of the Registrar's certificate, section 12(7)
To another StateCentral Government approval, section 13(4), creditors considered, section 13(5)Fresh certificate of incorporation, section 13(7)

What this does NOT mean

It does not mean the memorandum contains the address. Section 4(1)(b) requires only the State. That is why moving within a State never touches the memorandum and moving between States always does.

It does not mean a company must have its office from day one. Section 12(1) gives thirty days from incorporation.

It does not mean any address will do. It must be capable of receiving and acknowledging communications, and the verification must be furnished to the Registrar.

It does not mean a company may quietly drop its old name. For two years the former name travels with the new one under the first proviso to section 12(3).

Quick revision

  • 12(1): registered office within thirty days of incorporation and at all times thereafter, capable of receiving and acknowledging communications.
  • 12(2): verification to the Registrar within thirty days. Feeds section 10A(1)(b).
  • 12(3): (a) paint or affix name and address outside every place of business, conspicuous, legible, and in the local language characters where needed; (b) name engraved on the seal, if any; (c) name, address, CIN, telephone, fax, e-mail, website on letters, billheads, letter papers, notices and official publications; (d) name on hundies, promissory notes and bills of exchange. Former name for two years. "One Person Company" in brackets below the name.
  • 12(4): notice of every change within thirty days.
  • 12(5): special resolution to move outside the local limits; Regional Director confirmation to move to another Registrar in the same State.
  • 12(6): thirty days to confirm, sixty days to file, thirty days to certify. 12(7): the certificate is conclusive evidence and the change takes effect from its date.
  • Another State: sections 13(4) to (7), Central Government.
  • Section 20: service on the company at the registered office by registered post, speed post, courier, leaving it there, or prescribed electronic mode; on the Registrar or a member by those routes; a member may demand a particular mode and pay the fee fixed in the annual general meeting; "courier" means one who provides proof of delivery.
munotes.in82

The Registered Office and Service of Documents

Test yourself

1. Within what time must a company have a registered office, and what must it be capable of? Within thirty days of incorporation and at all times thereafter, and it must be capable of receiving and acknowledging all communications and notices addressed to it: section 12(1).

2. What must a company print on its business letters? Its name, the address of its registered office and the Corporate Identity Number, along with telephone number, fax number if any, e-mail and website addresses if any: section 12(3)(c).

3. A company moves its office from one Registrar's jurisdiction to another within the same State. What is required, and when does it take effect? A special resolution under section 12(5) and confirmation by the Regional Director under the proviso. The confirmation is communicated within thirty days, filed with the Registrar within sixty days, and the Registrar certifies within thirty days of filing. The change takes effect from the date of that certificate, which is conclusive evidence of compliance: section 12(6) and (7).

4. A company changed its name eighteen months ago. What must appear outside its factory? Its present name and the address of its registered office under section 12(3)(a), and alongside them the former name, because the change was within the last two years: first proviso to section 12(3).

5. How may a document be served on a company? By sending it to the company or the officer at the registered office by registered post, speed post or courier service, by leaving it at the registered office, or by such electronic or other mode as may be prescribed: section 20(1).

6. Can a member insist on receiving documents by a particular mode? Yes. Under the proviso to section 20(2) a member may request delivery of any document through a particular mode, on paying such fees as may be determined by the company in its annual general meeting.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in83

Chapter Fifteen

Commencement of Business

Syllabus topic 1.2, label: "Commencement of Business"

In one line

A company with a share capital may not start trading or borrow until a director has filed a declaration that the subscribers have actually paid for their shares, and until the company has filed verification of its registered office.

In exam wording: section 10A of the Companies Act 2013 provides that a company incorporated after the commencement of the Companies (Amendment) Act 2019 and having a share capital shall not commence any business or exercise any borrowing powers unless a declaration is filed by a director within one hundred and eighty days of incorporation that every subscriber has paid the value of the shares agreed to be taken, and the company has filed verification of its registered office under section 12(2).

Why the law has this at all

The problem is shell companies, and it is a real one.

Anybody can subscribe to a memorandum for ten thousand shares and never pay a rupee. The company is incorporated, it appears on the register with a share capital, and to an outsider it looks like a funded business. It can then be used to open bank accounts, take credit and route money, having never held any capital at all.

Section 10A blocks that at the door. Before the company may do anything commercial, a director must certify on the record that the money is actually in, and the company must have a verified address where it can be found. Two facts, both checkable, both filed.

The history matters and is worth a sentence in an answer. The 2013 Act originally dealt with this in section 11, which required a declaration plus a minimum paid-up capital. That section was omitted in 2015 as part of the same package that abolished the minimum capital requirements in sections 2(68) and 2(71). Within four years the shell company problem made the requirement necessary again, and Parliament reinstated it in a tighter form as section 10A in 2019, this time with a striking-off consequence and without any minimum capital.

Some words this chapter uses

To commence business means to begin the trading or other activity the company was formed for. Borrowing powers are the company's powers to take loans. A declaration is a formal written statement filed with the Registrar. Verification of the registered office is the confirmation of the address required by section 12(2). Striking off is the removal of a company's name from the register of companies under Chapter XVIII. A penalty under this Act is imposed by an adjudicating officer, not by a court.

Who it applies to

Two conditions, both necessary:

  1. The company was incorporated after the commencement of the Companies (Amendment) Act 2019; and
  2. It has a share capital.
munotes.in84

Commencement of Business

So a company limited by guarantee without a share capital is outside section 10A altogether, and so is a company incorporated before the 2019 Amendment came into force. Both limits are on the face of the section and both are worth stating, because they are the easiest marks in the topic.

The two conditions: section 10A(1)

A company to which the section applies shall not commence any business or exercise any borrowing powers unless:

  • (a) a declaration is filed by a director within a period of one hundred and eighty days of the date of incorporation of the company, in such form and verified in such manner as may be prescribed, with the Registrar, that every subscriber to the memorandum has paid the value of the shares agreed to be taken by him on the date of making of such declaration; and
  • (b) the company has filed with the Registrar a verification of its registered office as provided in sub-section (2) of section 12.

Both, because the clauses are joined by "and". A company that has taken the subscription money but not verified its office may not trade, and neither may one that has verified its office but not collected the money.

Take the wording of (a) apart, because every phrase in it does work:

  • "a declaration is filed by a director": any one director will do, and it must be a director, not the auditor or the company secretary.
  • "within a period of one hundred and eighty days of the date of incorporation": the clock runs from the date on the certificate under section 9, not from the date of filing.
  • "every subscriber": not most of them, and not the majority in value.
  • "has paid the value of the shares agreed to be taken by him": the whole of what he agreed to take under section 4(1)(e)(ii), not a part.
  • "on the date of making of such declaration": the payment must be complete when the declaration is made, so a director cannot certify an intention to pay.

And note what is not there: no minimum paid-up capital. Section 10A does not require any particular amount. It requires that whatever was agreed has actually been paid. A company whose subscribers agreed to take one share of ten rupees each satisfies section 10A when those rupees are in.

The penalty: section 10A(2)

If any default is made in complying with the requirements of this section:

  • the company shall be liable to a penalty of fifty thousand rupees; and
  • every officer who is in default shall be liable to a penalty of one thousand rupees for each day during which the default continues, but not exceeding an amount of one lakh rupees.
munotes.in85

Commencement of Business

Two features to note. The company's penalty is a flat fifty thousand rupees, while the officer's is a daily one thousand rupees. And the officer's exposure is capped at one lakh rupees, which is reached after one hundred days of default.

The striking off consequence: section 10A(3)

This is the sub-section that gives the section teeth, and it did not exist in the old section 11.

Where no declaration has been filed with the Registrar under clause (a) of sub-section (1) within a period of one hundred and eighty days of the date of incorporation, and the Registrar has reasonable cause to believe that the company is not carrying on any business or operations, he may, without prejudice to the provisions of sub-section (2), initiate action for the removal of the name of the company from the register of companies under Chapter XVIII.

Three conditions before the Registrar may move:

  1. No declaration has been filed within one hundred and eighty days; and
  2. The Registrar has reasonable cause to believe that the company is not carrying on any business or operations; and
  3. He acts without prejudice to sub-section (2), so the penalties still run.

The second condition is a genuine safeguard. Failure to file is not by itself enough; the Registrar must also have reason to think the company is dormant in fact. A trading company that simply forgot to file faces the penalty, not extinction.

A worked example

Kolhapur Foundry Private Limited is incorporated on 12 January 2027. Its two subscribers, Vikas and Sameena, each agreed in the memorandum to take five thousand shares of ten rupees, so fifty thousand rupees each.

The clock. One hundred and eighty days from 12 January 2027 runs to 11 July 2027.

What must happen by then. Vikas and Sameena must actually pay their fifty thousand rupees each, and a director must file a declaration with the Registrar stating that every subscriber has paid the value of the shares agreed to be taken, as at the date of the declaration. Separately, the company must have filed verification of its registered office under section 12(2), which section 12(2) itself requires within thirty days of incorporation.

Until both are filed, the company may not commence any business or exercise any borrowing powers. So it cannot sign a supply contract as a trading company and cannot take the working capital loan the bank has offered.

Suppose Sameena pays only thirty thousand rupees. A director cannot make the declaration, because it must state that every subscriber has paid the value of the shares agreed to be taken. A declaration made anyway is a false particular filed with the Registrar and exposes the director to section 447 through the general machinery of the Act.

munotes.in86

Commencement of Business

Suppose nothing is filed by 11 July 2027 and the company has in fact never traded. Two things follow. Under section 10A(2) the company incurs a penalty of fifty thousand rupees and every officer in default incurs one thousand rupees a day, capped at one lakh rupees. And under section 10A(3), since no declaration was filed within one hundred and eighty days and the Registrar has reasonable cause to believe the company is not carrying on any business or operations, he may initiate action to remove its name from the register under Chapter XVIII.

Change one fact. Suppose the company had been trading vigorously throughout but its director simply overlooked the filing. The penalties under section 10A(2) still apply, but section 10A(3) does not, because the Registrar cannot have reasonable cause to believe it is not carrying on business.

Change another. Suppose Kolhapur Foundry had been a company limited by guarantee without a share capital. Section 10A would not apply to it at all, because it applies only to a company having a share capital.

Distinctions that carry marks

Section 11, as it wasSection 10A, as it is
StatusOmitted by the Companies (Amendment) Act 2015, with effect from 29 May 2015Inserted by the Companies (Amendment) Act 2019, and in force
Applies toCompanies with a share capital under the 2013 Act as first enactedCompanies incorporated after the 2019 Amendment and having a share capital
Minimum capitalTied to the then minimum paid-up capitalNone; only that what was agreed has been paid
Time limitBefore commencing businessOne hundred and eighty days from incorporation
ConsequencePenaltyPenalty and possible striking off under section 10A(3)

What this does NOT mean

It does not mean the company does not exist until the declaration is filed. It exists from the date on the certificate under section 9. What it may not do is commence business or exercise borrowing powers.

It does not mean every company must file it. Only a company with a share capital, incorporated after the 2019 Amendment.

It does not mean there is a minimum capital. There is none, in this section or anywhere else, since 29 May 2015.

It does not mean failing to file destroys the company. Section 10A(3) requires the Registrar to have reasonable cause to believe the company is not carrying on business as well.

And it does not mean section 11 is the answer. Section 11 is printed in the Act as omitted, in square brackets, with no text under it. Citing it is citing a provision that has not existed since 29 May 2015.

munotes.in87

Commencement of Business

Quick revision

  • Applies to: a company incorporated after the Companies (Amendment) Act 2019 and having a share capital.
  • Two conditions, section 10A(1): (a) a declaration by a director within one hundred and eighty days of incorporation, filed with the Registrar, that every subscriber has paid the value of the shares agreed to be taken, as at the date of the declaration; and (b) verification of the registered office filed under section 12(2). Both.
  • Prohibition: may not commence any business or exercise any borrowing powers.
  • Penalty, 10A(2): company fifty thousand rupees; every officer in default one thousand rupees per day, maximum one lakh rupees.
  • 10A(3): no declaration in one hundred and eighty days plus reasonable cause to believe the company is not carrying on business or operations equals action to strike off under Chapter XVIII, without prejudice to the penalty.
  • Section 11 is OMITTED, with effect from 29 May 2015.

Test yourself

1. Which section governs commencement of business, and what happened to section 11? Section 10A, inserted by the Companies (Amendment) Act 2019. Section 11 was omitted by the Companies (Amendment) Act 2015 with effect from 29 May 2015, and the Act prints it as omitted, in square brackets, with no text under it.

2. What are the two conditions in section 10A(1)? A declaration filed by a director with the Registrar within one hundred and eighty days of incorporation that every subscriber has paid the value of the shares agreed to be taken by him as at the date of the declaration; and the filing of verification of the registered office under section 12(2). Both are required.

3. What may a company not do until they are satisfied? It may not commence any business or exercise any borrowing powers: section 10A(1).

4. State the penalties. The company, fifty thousand rupees. Every officer in default, one thousand rupees for each day the default continues, subject to a maximum of one lakh rupees: section 10A(2).

5. When may the Registrar move to strike the company off? Where no declaration has been filed within one hundred and eighty days of incorporation and he has reasonable cause to believe the company is not carrying on any business or operations. He may then initiate action under Chapter XVIII, without prejudice to the penalties: section 10A(3).

6. Does section 10A apply to a company limited by guarantee with no share capital? No. The section applies only to a company having a share capital, and only to one incorporated after the commencement of the Companies (Amendment) Act 2019.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in88

Chapter Sixteen

Constructive Notice and Indoor Management

Syllabus topic 1.2, label: "Doctrine of constructive notice and indoor management"

In one line

Constructive notice says that anyone dealing with a company is taken to have read its registered documents, and indoor management says that having read them, he may assume the company followed them.

In exam wording: the doctrine of constructive notice treats every person dealing with a company as having notice of the contents of its memorandum and articles, because they are public documents open to inspection under section 399. The doctrine of indoor management, or the rule in Turquand's case, is its counterweight: an outsider who has read those documents is not bound to inquire into the internal proceedings of the company and may assume that everything required to be done internally has been done.

Why the law has this at all

Take the two doctrines in the order they were invented, because each is a response to the other.

Constructive notice comes first. The memorandum and articles are filed with the Registrar and, under section 399, any person may inspect them by electronic means on paying the fee. The law's inference is straightforward: if a document is open to the world, a person who deals with the company without reading it has only himself to blame. So he is treated as knowing it whether he read it or not.

Then the injustice appeared. Suppose the articles say a company may borrow only after a resolution of the members. An outsider reads them, sees the limit, asks the directors whether the resolution was passed and is told yes. There is no way for him to check: the resolution, if it exists, is in a minute book he cannot see. If constructive notice applied without qualification, every lender to every company would have to verify facts he has no means of verifying, and nobody would deal with companies at all.

Indoor management is the answer. It draws the line at the door. Outside the door, the registered documents, the outsider must look and is deemed to know. Inside the door, the meetings, resolutions, quorums and consents, he need not look and may assume regularity.

Some words this chapter uses

Constructive notice is knowledge the law attributes to a person whether or not he has it in fact. An outsider, or third party, is a person dealing with the company who is not part of its management. Regularity means that the internal procedure was properly followed. A forgery is a false document made to pass as genuine. Put upon inquiry means placed in a position where a reasonable person would have asked questions. Ostensible or apparent authority is authority a person appears to have because the company has held him out as having it.

munotes.in89

Constructive Notice and Indoor Management

The doctrine of constructive notice

What it says. Every person dealing with a company is deemed to have notice of the contents of its memorandum and articles, and of any other document registered with the Registrar that is open to public inspection.

Where it comes from in the Act. Not from a section that states it, but from section 399(1)(a), which gives any person the right to inspect by electronic means any documents kept by the Registrar filed or registered in pursuance of the Act, on payment of the prescribed fee, and from section 399(1)(b), which lets any person require a certified copy or extract. Because inspection is available to all, notice is imputed to all.

Section 17 points the same way for members: on request, and on payment of the prescribed fee, the company must within seven days send a member a copy of (a) the memorandum, (b) the articles, and (c) every agreement and resolution referred to in section 117(1) so far as not already embodied in them. Default costs the company and every officer in default one thousand rupees for each day, or one lakh rupees, whichever is less.

The consequence. A person who deals with the company contrary to what the registered documents say cannot plead ignorance. If the articles forbid the company from borrowing more than a stated amount, a lender who lends more is fixed with notice of the limit.

Two limits on section 399 itself, both in its proviso and both worth a mark. The right of inspection in relation to documents delivered with a prospectus under section 26 may be exercised only during the fourteen days beginning with the date of publication of the prospectus, and at other times only with the permission of the Central Government; the same applies to documents delivered under section 388(1)(b). And by section 399(2), no process to compel production of a document kept by the Registrar may issue from any court or the Tribunal except with its leave, and any such process must say on its face that it was issued with leave.

The doctrine of indoor management: the rule in Turquand's case

What it says. A person dealing with a company in good faith, having satisfied himself that the transaction is consistent with the memorandum and articles, is not bound to inquire into the regularity of the company's internal proceedings. He may assume that whatever the articles require to be done internally has been done.

Royal British Bank v. Turquand is the decision that established the rule, and it is universally cited by that name. It is named here without a citation and without facts, deliberately: no report carrying it could be opened from where this book was written, and the house rule is that a citation goes only with a report that has been read. See authorities/cases.json and FINDINGS.md section 5.1.

munotes.in90

Constructive Notice and Indoor Management

Why it is fair. The internal proceedings are within the company's own control and knowledge and outside the outsider's. The company chose its directors, kept its minute book and knows whether the resolution was passed. As between an innocent outsider and a company whose own house was disordered, the loss belongs on the company.

The exceptions to indoor management

These are where the marks are, because the rule is easy and the exceptions are the examinable part. There are five and they should be given with a reason each.

1. Knowledge of the irregularity. A person who actually knows that the internal procedure was not followed cannot rely on the rule. He is not being misled; he is taking a chance.

2. Suspicion, or being put upon inquiry. Where the circumstances are such that a reasonable person would have made inquiries, and the outsider made none, he cannot claim the benefit. A transaction that is obviously outside the ordinary course, or of extravagant size for the company, puts a person on inquiry.

3. Forgery. The rule protects against irregularity, not against nullity. A forged document is not an irregular act of the company; it is not the company's act at all, and there is nothing for the rule to regularise.

4. Negligence, or failure to read what he was bound to read. The rule presupposes that the outsider has done what constructive notice requires. A person who never looked at the articles cannot say he assumed compliance with them.

5. Acts void or ultra vires. Where the act is beyond the company's capacity under its memorandum, no assumption about internal procedure can help, because the company could not have done the act however regularly it proceeded. See [The Doctrine of Ultra Vires].

A sixth is sometimes given: no representation at all. Where the outsider did not rely on the articles or on any holding out by the company, there is nothing on which the assumption of regularity can rest.

How the two doctrines fit together

Set them side by side and the logic is clean.

Constructive notice looks outward and binds the outsider. He is deemed to know the public documents, because he could have read them.

Indoor management looks inward and protects the outsider. He is not deemed to know the private proceedings, because he could not have read them.

The dividing line is availability. Anything on the register is his responsibility; anything in the minute book is the company's.

munotes.in91

Constructive Notice and Indoor Management

A worked example

Aurangabad Springs Limited has articles providing that the Board may borrow up to fifty lakh rupees, and that any borrowing above that requires an ordinary resolution of the members in general meeting.

Case one. A bank lends eighty lakh rupees. Its officer inspects the articles, sees the limit, and asks the managing director whether the members' resolution has been passed. He is told it has. In fact no meeting was ever held.

The bank is fixed with constructive notice of the fifty lakh limit and of the requirement of a resolution, because the articles are on the register and open to inspection under section 399. But whether the resolution was actually passed is an internal proceeding. The bank could not have discovered it, and it made the inquiry it could. The rule in Turquand protects it, and the company is bound to repay the eighty lakh rupees. Its remedy is against its own directors.

Case two. Same facts, but the bank's officer is the managing director's brother-in-law and knows perfectly well that no meeting took place. Exception 1 applies. He knew of the irregularity, so the rule does not protect him.

Case three. Same facts, but the loan is for eleven crore rupees, the company's entire turnover is two crore rupees, and the money is to be paid into an account in the managing director's own name. Any reasonable lender would have asked questions. Exception 2 applies: the bank was put upon inquiry and made none.

Case four. The board resolution and the members' resolution produced to the bank are both forged by the company secretary. Exception 3 applies. A forgery is not an irregular act of the company but no act of the company at all, and the rule cannot cure a nullity.

Case five. The articles limit borrowing, but the memorandum contains no object permitting the company to lend money, and the transaction is a loan by the company to a film producer. Exception 5 applies: the act is ultra vires the company, it is void, and no assumption about internal regularity can rescue it.

Case six. The bank never looked at the articles at all. Exception 4 applies. The rule assumes the outsider has discharged the duty constructive notice imposes on him.

Distinctions that carry marks

Constructive noticeIndoor management
Whom it protectsThe companyThe outsider
What it coversThe public documents: memorandum, articles, registered documentsThe internal proceedings: meetings, resolutions, quorum, consents
FoundationPublic inspection under section 399The outsider's inability to see inside
EffectThe outsider is deemed to knowThe outsider may assume regularity
Named afterNo case; a general principleTurquand's case
ExceptionsLimited by the proviso to section 399 for prospectus documentsKnowledge, suspicion, forgery, negligence, ultra vires or void acts
munotes.in92

Constructive Notice and Indoor Management

What this does NOT mean

It does not mean the outsider must actually read the articles. He is deemed to know them whether he reads them or not. Reading them is how he protects himself; not reading them does not protect him.

It does not mean indoor management cures everything. It cures irregularity, not incapacity and not forgery.

It does not mean the company can never recover. Where the outsider is bound, the company is bound to him, but it retains its remedies against the directors who acted improperly.

It does not mean constructive notice extends to everything a company holds. It extends to what is registered and open to inspection. Minute books, registers of the company's own internal decisions and correspondence are not on the register.

Limits and criticism

Constructive notice has been criticised for a long time as a fiction that suits companies and traps outsiders. Nobody reads the articles of every company they buy from, and pretending they do produces results no commercial person would predict.

The counter is that the doctrine is now mostly defanged. Between indoor management, the doctrine of ostensible authority and the modern practice of drafting objects and powers as widely as possible, the number of cases in which constructive notice actually defeats an honest outsider is small. What remains is a rule that encourages people to look at what is genuinely available to them, which is not an unreasonable thing to ask.

Quick revision

  • Constructive notice: everyone dealing with a company is deemed to know its memorandum and articles and other registered documents, because section 399(1) gives any person the right to inspect them electronically and to take certified copies. Section 17 gives members copies within seven days.
  • Section 399 provisos: prospectus documents under section 26 and documents under section 388(1)(b) may be inspected only within fourteen days of publication, otherwise with Central Government permission. Section 399(2): no process to compel production except with the leave of the court or Tribunal.
  • Indoor management, the rule in Turquand: an outsider need not inquire into internal proceedings and may assume they were regular.
  • Five exceptions: actual knowledge of the irregularity; suspicion or being put upon inquiry; forgery; negligence in not reading the public documents; and acts void or ultra vires.
  • The line between them is availability: public documents bind the outsider, internal proceedings do not.

Test yourself

1. What is the doctrine of constructive notice and what is its statutory footing? Every person dealing with a company is deemed to have notice of its memorandum, articles and other registered documents. It rests on section 399(1), under which any person may inspect documents kept by the Registrar by electronic means and require certified copies, on payment of the prescribed fees.

munotes.in93

Constructive Notice and Indoor Management

2. State the rule in Turquand's case. A person dealing with a company in good faith, whose transaction is consistent with the memorandum and articles, is not bound to inquire into the regularity of the company's internal proceedings and may assume that everything required to be done internally has been done.

3. Give the exceptions to indoor management. Actual knowledge of the irregularity; circumstances putting the outsider upon inquiry; forgery; negligence in failing to read the public documents; and acts that are void or ultra vires the company.

4. Why is forgery an exception? Because the rule regularises an irregular act of the company. A forged document is not an act of the company at all but a nullity, and there is nothing for the rule to operate on.

5. A lender reads a company's articles, sees that a members' resolution is needed, asks and is told it was passed. It was not. Can the lender recover? Yes, subject to the exceptions. Whether the resolution was passed is an internal proceeding which the lender could not verify, so the rule in Turquand applies and the company is bound. The company's remedy is against its own directors.

6. How long may documents delivered with a prospectus be inspected under section 399? Only during the fourteen days beginning with the date of publication of the prospectus, and at other times only with the permission of the Central Government: proviso (i) to section 399(1).

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in94

Chapter Seventeen

Rectification of Name and Other Incidental Matters

Syllabus topic 1.2, label: "Rectification of name of company", and the balance of "matters incidental thereto"

In one line

If a company is registered with a name that clashes with an existing company or with somebody's trade mark, the Central Government can order it to change the name, and if it refuses, the Government simply gives it a new one.

In exam wording: section 16 empowers the Central Government, where a company has been registered by a name which is identical with or too nearly resembles the name of an existing company or a registered trade mark, to direct the company to change its name within three months by an ordinary resolution, and, on default, to allot a new name itself.

Why the law has this at all

Two different people are being protected and the section deals with them in its two clauses.

The first is the public, and the earlier company. Two companies with nearly the same name confuse customers, creditors and courts. Section 4(2)(a) tries to prevent it at the registration stage by forbidding a name identical with or too nearly resembling an existing one. But registrars are human and applicants are ingenious, so section 16(1)(a) provides the cure after the event.

The second is the owner of a trade mark. A trade mark proprietor has spent money building a name under the Trade Marks Act 1999. Somebody who cannot register that mark can still try to register a company with that name, and use the company's name as a badge of trade. Section 16(1)(b) closes that route.

Note how the section is built. It does not ask a court to injunct; it puts the remedy in the hands of the Central Government, and makes the last step self-executing. That is faster and cheaper than litigation, which is exactly what a name dispute needs.

Some words this chapter uses

Inadvertence means without intention, by oversight. A registered proprietor of a trade mark is the person in whose name a mark is registered under the Trade Marks Act 1999. To allot a name means to assign one. An ordinary resolution is passed by a simple majority. Authentication means signing so as to make a document official. Key managerial personnel is defined in section 2(51) and is taught in [Appointment of Key Managerial Personnel].

Rectification of name: section 16(1)

The section operates where, through inadvertence or otherwise, a company on its first registration or on its registration by a new name is registered by a name which falls in clause (a) or clause (b).

Clause (a): clash with an existing company

Where, in the opinion of the Central Government, the name is identical with or too nearly resembles the name by which a company in existence had been previously registered, whether under this Act or any previous company law, the Government may direct the company to change its name, and the company shall change it within three months from the issue of the direction, after adopting an ordinary resolution for the purpose.

munotes.in95

Rectification of Name and Other Incidental Matters

Three things to fix. The test is the Central Government's opinion. The earlier company must have been previously registered, so priority in time decides. And the resolution required is an ordinary one, not a special one.

Clause (b): clash with a registered trade mark

Where, on an application by a registered proprietor of a trade mark that the name is identical with or too nearly resembles a registered trade mark of his under the Trade Marks Act 1999, and in the opinion of the Central Government it is, the Government may direct a change, and the company shall change the name within three months of the direction, again after adopting an ordinary resolution.

The three year limitation is the detail that is examined. The proprietor's application must be made to the Central Government within three years of incorporation or registration or change of name of the company, whether under this Act or any previous company law. A proprietor who sleeps on his rights for four years cannot use section 16.

And note who must move. Under clause (a) the Government may act of its own motion. Under clause (b) it acts on an application by the proprietor.

Notice to the Registrar: section 16(2)

Where a company changes its name or obtains a new name under sub-section (1), it shall, within fifteen days from the date of the change, give notice of the change to the Registrar along with the order of the Central Government, and the Registrar shall carry out the necessary changes in the certificate of incorporation and the memorandum.

What happens if the company does nothing: section 16(3)

This is the sub-section with teeth.

If a company is in default in complying with any direction given under sub-section (1), the Central Government shall allot a new name to the company in such manner as may be prescribed and the Registrar shall enter the new name in the register of companies in place of the old name and issue a fresh certificate of incorporation with the new name, which the company shall use thereafter.

Read the verb: the Central Government shall allot. There is no discretion once the company defaults, and no further proceeding. The company loses the name whether it cooperates or not.

The proviso preserves choice for the future. Nothing in the sub-section prevents the company from subsequently changing its name in accordance with section 13. So a company saddled with a Government allotted name may pick a better one later, by the ordinary route: special resolution and Central Government approval under section 13(1) and (2), effective on the fresh certificate under section 13(3).

munotes.in96

Rectification of Name and Other Incidental Matters

The other closing sections of Chapter II

MU names none of these, and they are taught because the Act contains them.

Section 17: copies of the memorandum and articles to members. On a member's request, and subject to payment of the prescribed fees, the company shall within seven days send him a copy of (a) the memorandum, (b) the articles, and (c) every agreement and every resolution referred to in section 117(1), so far as they are not embodied in the memorandum or articles. On default, the company and every officer in default are liable, for each default, to a penalty of one thousand rupees for each day the default continues or one lakh rupees, whichever is less.

That section is the practical partner of constructive notice: the documents the outsider is deemed to know are the documents a member can demand within a week.

Section 19: a subsidiary may not hold shares in its holding company. Set out in [Types of Companies by Control and Purpose]. In short: no company shall hold shares in its holding company, whether itself or through nominees, and no holding company shall allot or transfer shares to its subsidiary, and any such allotment or transfer is void. The three exceptions are legal representative of a deceased member, trustee, and a shareholder who held before becoming a subsidiary, and only the first two may vote.

Section 21: authentication of documents, proceedings and contracts. Save as otherwise provided in the Act, a document or proceeding requiring authentication by a company, or contracts made by or on behalf of a company, may be signed by any key managerial personnel or an officer or employee of the company duly authorised by the Board in this behalf.

Two points. It is not confined to directors: key managerial personnel under section 2(51), or any officer or employee the Board authorises, may sign. And the authorisation must be by the Board, so a self-appointed signatory is not covered.

Section 22: execution of bills of exchange and deeds. Set out in [The Characteristics of a Company]. In short: a bill of exchange, hundi or promissory note is deemed to be made on behalf of the company if made, accepted, drawn or endorsed in the name of, or on behalf of, or on account of the company by any person acting under its authority, express or implied; a company may authorise an attorney to execute deeds under its common seal, if any, and where there is no seal, by two directors or by a director and the Company Secretary.

munotes.in97

Rectification of Name and Other Incidental Matters

A worked example

Sanjivani Pharma Limited is incorporated in Nagpur on 2 February 2026.

Case one, clause (a). A company called Sanjeevani Pharma Limited has existed in Chennai since 2011. In the Central Government's opinion the two names too nearly resemble each other, and the Chennai company was previously registered. The Government directs the Nagpur company to change its name. It must do so within three months of the direction, after passing an ordinary resolution, and must give notice with the order to the Registrar within fifteen days of the change, whereupon the Registrar amends the certificate of incorporation and the memorandum.

Case two, clause (b). Suppose instead that Sanjivani is a registered trade mark of a Hyderabad firm under the Trade Marks Act 1999. The proprietor applies to the Central Government. His application must be made within three years of the company's incorporation, so by 1 February 2029. If he applies in 2027 he is in time; if he applies in 2030 section 16 is closed to him and he must look to the Trade Marks Act instead.

Case three, default. The direction issues on 1 June 2027 and the company ignores it. Three months pass. Under section 16(3) the Central Government shall allot a new name, the Registrar enters it in place of the old, and a fresh certificate of incorporation issues with that name, which the company shall use thereafter. It has no say in the choice.

Afterwards. Two years later the company wants a name it actually likes. It may change it under section 13: special resolution, Central Government approval in writing, and effect only on the issue of a fresh certificate. The proviso to section 16(3) preserves exactly that.

And for two years after each change, wherever the company paints or prints its name under section 12(3)(a) and (c), the former name must appear alongside, by the first proviso to section 12(3).

Distinctions that carry marks

Change under section 16Change under section 13
Who initiatesThe Central Government, of its own motion or on a trade mark proprietor's applicationThe company
ResolutionOrdinarySpecial
ApprovalNot needed; the direction is the authorityCentral Government approval in writing, section 13(2)
Time limitThree months from the directionNone fixed
On defaultThe Government allots a new name, section 16(3)Not applicable
Effective onThe Registrar's changes to the certificate and memorandum, section 16(2)The fresh certificate, section 13(3)

What this does NOT mean

It does not mean any similar name can be attacked at any time. Under clause (b) the trade mark proprietor has three years from incorporation, registration or change of name.

munotes.in98

Rectification of Name and Other Incidental Matters

It does not mean a special resolution is needed. Both limbs of section 16(1) require only an ordinary resolution, because the change is being compelled rather than chosen.

It does not mean the company is stuck with the allotted name. The proviso to section 16(3) preserves a later change under section 13.

It does not mean only directors can sign for a company. Section 21 allows any key managerial personnel, or any officer or employee duly authorised by the Board.

Quick revision

  • Section 16(1)(a): name identical with or too nearly resembling a previously registered company, in the Central Government's opinion. Direction to change within three months by ordinary resolution.
  • Section 16(1)(b): on the application of a registered trade mark proprietor, made within three years of incorporation, registration or change of name. Same three months, same ordinary resolution.
  • Section 16(2): notice to the Registrar with the order within fifteen days; Registrar amends the certificate and the memorandum.
  • Section 16(3): on default the Central Government shall allot a new name; fresh certificate issues; the company shall use it. Proviso: a later change under section 13 remains open.
  • Section 17: memorandum, articles and section 117(1) agreements and resolutions to a member within seven days; default costs one thousand rupees a day or one lakh rupees, whichever is less.
  • Section 19: subsidiary may not hold shares in its holding company; such allotment or transfer is void; three exceptions; only two of them may vote.
  • Section 21: authentication by any key managerial personnel or an officer or employee duly authorised by the Board.
  • Section 22: negotiable instruments by a person acting under express or implied authority; deeds by an attorney under the seal if any, else by two directors or a director and the Company Secretary.

Test yourself

1. Who may direct a company to change its name under section 16, and on what grounds? The Central Government, where in its opinion the name is identical with or too nearly resembles the name of a previously registered company, or, on the application of a registered trade mark proprietor, a registered trade mark under the Trade Marks Act 1999.

2. What resolution and what time limit apply? An ordinary resolution, and the change must be made within three months from the issue of the direction: section 16(1).

3. Within what time must a trade mark proprietor apply? Within three years of the incorporation or registration or change of name of the company, whether under this Act or any previous company law: section 16(1)(b).

munotes.in99

Rectification of Name and Other Incidental Matters

4. What happens if the company ignores the direction? The Central Government shall allot a new name, the Registrar enters it in the register in place of the old name and issues a fresh certificate of incorporation with the new name, which the company shall use thereafter: section 16(3). The company may later change it under section 13.

5. Within what time must a company supply a member with a copy of its articles? Within seven days of the request, subject to the prescribed fee: section 17(1). Default costs the company and every officer in default one thousand rupees for each day, or one lakh rupees, whichever is less.

6. Who may sign a contract on behalf of a company? Any key managerial personnel, or an officer or employee of the company duly authorised by the Board in that behalf: section 21.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in100

Chapter Eighteen

How a Company Raises Money: Public Offer and Private Placement

Syllabus topic 1.3, "Prospectus & allotment of securities"

In one line

A company can raise money in only the ways the Act allows: a public company has three routes and a private company has two, and which route it takes decides which rules apply to it.

In exam wording: section 23(1) provides that a public company may issue securities to the public through a prospectus, through private placement, or through a rights issue or bonus issue; section 23(2) provides that a private company may issue securities only by way of rights or bonus issue or through private placement. Section 24 divides the administration of Chapters III and IV between the Securities and Exchange Board for listed companies and the Central Government for the rest.

Why the law has this at all

The two ways of raising money need completely different regulation, and section 23 exists to sort transactions into the right box before anything else happens.

A public offer is an invitation to strangers. They know nothing about the company except what it tells them, they cannot negotiate, and there may be a hundred thousand of them. The law's answer is compulsory disclosure: a prospectus, filed, dated, signed, with liability attached to what it says.

A private placement is a negotiated deal with a small number of identified people. They can ask questions, take advice and walk away. The law's answer is numerical limits and a ban on advertising, so that a public offer cannot be dressed up as a private one.

A rights or bonus issue goes to people who are already members. They already have the company's accounts and its annual return, so a prospectus would tell them little they do not have.

Section 23 is therefore the sorting hat, and section 24 is the second sorting: who regulates, SEBI or the Central Government.

Some words this chapter uses

Securities is defined by section 2(81) by reference to the Securities Contracts (Regulation) Act 1956 and covers shares, debentures and similar instruments. A public offer is defined in the Explanation to section 23. An initial public offer is a company's first offer of shares to the public; a further public offer is a later one. A rights issue is an offer to existing members in proportion to their holdings, under section 62(1)(a). A bonus issue is a free issue to existing members out of reserves, under section 63. Listed means the securities are traded on a recognised stock exchange.

The three routes for a public company: section 23(1)

A public company may issue securities:

  • (a) to public through prospectus (herein referred to as "public offer") by complying with the provisions of this Part;
  • (b) through private placement by complying with the provisions of Part II of this Chapter; or
  • (c) through a rights issue or a bonus issue in accordance with the provisions of this Act, and in the case of a listed company or a company which intends to get its securities listed, also with the provisions of the Securities and Exchange Board of India Act 1992 and the rules and regulations under it.
munotes.in101

How a Company Raises Money: Public Offer and Private Placement

The Explanation defines a public offer, and it is broader than students expect:

"public offer" includes initial public offer or further public offer of securities to the public by a company, or an offer for sale of securities to the public by an existing shareholder, through issue of a prospectus.

So an offer for sale by an existing shareholder is a public offer even though the company is issuing nothing. That is why section 25 deems the offer document to be a prospectus and why section 28 exists.

The two routes for a private company: section 23(2)

A private company may issue securities:

  • (a) by way of rights issue or bonus issue in accordance with the provisions of this Act; or
  • (b) through private placement by complying with the provisions of Part II of this Chapter.

Route (a) of section 23(1) is missing, and its absence is the point. A private company cannot make a public offer, because section 2(68) requires its articles to prohibit any invitation to the public to subscribe for its securities. Section 23(2) is the same prohibition stated from the other side.

Listing abroad: section 23(3) and (4)

Section 23(3). Such class of public companies as may be prescribed may issue such class of securities for the purposes of listing on permitted stock exchanges in permissible foreign jurisdictions, or such other jurisdictions as may be prescribed.

Section 23(4). The Central Government may, by notification, exempt any class of those companies from any of the provisions of Chapter III, Chapter IV, section 89, section 90 or section 127, and a copy of every such notification shall be laid before both Houses of Parliament as soon as may be after it is issued.

These two sub-sections are the direct listing framework. They matter for the exam mainly as an illustration of how the Act now contemplates Indian companies listing outside India, and of the parliamentary check on the exemption power.

Who administers Chapters III and IV: section 24

This section answers a question students often cannot: when is it SEBI's job and when is it the Government's?

Section 24(1). The provisions of Chapter III, Chapter IV and section 127 shall:

  • (a) in so far as they relate to (i) issue and transfer of securities and (ii) non-payment of dividend, by listed companies or those companies which intend to get their securities listed on any recognised stock exchange in India, except as provided in this Act, be administered by the Securities and Exchange Board by making regulations; and
  • (b) in any other case, be administered by the Central Government.
munotes.in102

How a Company Raises Money: Public Offer and Private Placement

The Explanation removes the doubt that follows. All powers relating to all other matters relating to prospectus, return of allotment, redemption of preference shares and any other matter specifically provided in this Act shall be exercised by the Central Government, the Tribunal or the Registrar, as the case may be.

So SEBI's writ under section 24 is narrow and precise: two subjects (issue and transfer of securities, and non-payment of dividend) for two kinds of company (listed, and intending to list). Everything else stays with the Government, the Tribunal or the Registrar.

Section 24(2) gives SEBI its enforcement toolkit: in respect of the matters in sub-section (1), and matters delegated to it under the proviso to section 458(1), it may exercise the powers conferred on it by sections 11(1), 11(2A), 11(3), 11(4), 11A, 11B and 11D of the Securities and Exchange Board of India Act 1992.

A worked example

Three companies want money. Follow each through section 23.

Vidyut Power Limited, a listed public company, wants three hundred crore rupees from the market. It is a public offer under section 23(1)(a), so Part I of Chapter III applies: a prospectus under section 26, dematerialised issue under section 29, allotment under section 39, and listing under section 40. Because it is listed and the subject is the issue of securities, SEBI administers it under section 24(1)(a)(i).

The same company later declares a dividend and fails to pay it. Non-payment of dividend by a listed company is the second subject in section 24(1)(a), so that too is SEBI's.

The same company wants to reduce its share capital. That is section 66, and it is not "issue and transfer of securities" or "non-payment of dividend". It goes to the Tribunal, and the Explanation to section 24 confirms that all other matters stay with the Central Government, the Tribunal or the Registrar.

Nashik Vintners Private Limited wants two crore rupees. It is a private company, so section 23(2) gives it two routes only. It may make a rights issue to its existing members under section 62(1)(a), or a private placement under section 42. It may not invite the public, and if it tried, it would breach both section 23(2) and its own articles under section 2(68).

Sagar Shipping Limited, an unlisted public company, has a founder who wants to sell forty per cent of his own shares to the public. The company issues nothing. Even so, by the Explanation to section 23 an offer for sale of securities to the public by an existing shareholder through issue of a prospectus is a public offer. So section 25 deems the offer document a prospectus, section 28 governs the mechanics, and prospectus liability under sections 34 to 38 attaches. The company is not listed and does not intend to be, so administration is with the Central Government under section 24(1)(b).

munotes.in103

How a Company Raises Money: Public Offer and Private Placement

Distinctions that carry marks

Public offerPrivate placementRights or bonus issue
Section23(1)(a), Part I of Chapter III23(1)(b) and 23(2)(b), Part II, section 4223(1)(c) and 23(2)(a), sections 62 and 63
Who is invitedThe public at largeIdentified persons, within the section 42 ceilingExisting members, and employees under an option scheme
Prospectus neededYes, section 26No, an offer letter insteadNo
Available to a private companyNoYesYes
AdvertisingPermitted, subject to section 30Prohibited by section 42Not applicable
Administered by SEBI, section 24(1)(a)Administered by the Central Government, section 24(1)(b)
Which companiesListed, or intending to listAll others
Which subjectsIssue and transfer of securities; non-payment of dividendThe same subjects, for unlisted companies
Everything elseCentral Government, Tribunal or Registrar, per the ExplanationThe same

What this does NOT mean

It does not mean a private company can never take outside money. It can, by private placement under section 42, which is a genuine and much used route. What it cannot do is invite the public.

It does not mean SEBI regulates everything a listed company does. Section 24(1)(a) is confined to two subjects, and the Explanation puts everything else with the Government, the Tribunal or the Registrar.

It does not mean a public offer requires the company to issue new shares. An offer for sale by an existing shareholder is a public offer under the Explanation to section 23.

It does not mean a company intending to list is treated as unlisted. Section 24(1)(a) covers companies which intend to get their securities listed, so SEBI's jurisdiction attaches before the listing does.

Quick revision

  • Section 23(1), public company, three routes: public offer through prospectus; private placement under Part II; rights or bonus issue, with the SEBI Act as well for listed companies or those intending to list.
  • Section 23(2), private company, two routes: rights or bonus issue; private placement. No public offer.
  • Explanation to section 23: public offer includes an initial or further public offer, and an offer for sale by an existing shareholder through a prospectus.
  • Section 23(3) and (4): prescribed classes may list on permitted foreign exchanges; the Central Government may exempt them from Chapter III, Chapter IV, sections 89, 90 or 127, by notification laid before both Houses.
  • Section 24(1): SEBI administers Chapters III and IV and section 127, so far as they relate to issue and transfer of securities and non-payment of dividend, for listed companies and those intending to list. Everything else, and every other company, is with the Central Government.
  • Explanation to section 24: all other matters relating to prospectus, return of allotment and redemption of preference shares are for the Central Government, the Tribunal or the Registrar.
  • Section 24(2): SEBI exercises its powers under sections 11(1), (2A), (3), (4), 11A, 11B and 11D of the SEBI Act 1992.
munotes.in104

How a Company Raises Money: Public Offer and Private Placement

Test yourself

1. What are the three ways a public company may issue securities? To the public through a prospectus, that is a public offer; through private placement under Part II of Chapter III; or through a rights issue or bonus issue, and for a listed company or one intending to list, also in accordance with the SEBI Act 1992: section 23(1).

2. May a private company make a public offer? No. Section 23(2) gives it only a rights or bonus issue and private placement, and section 2(68) requires its articles to prohibit any invitation to the public to subscribe for its securities.

3. Is an offer for sale by an existing shareholder a public offer? Yes. The Explanation to section 23 expressly includes an offer for sale of securities to the public by an existing shareholder through the issue of a prospectus.

4. Which matters does SEBI administer under section 24? Chapters III and IV and section 127, so far as they relate to the issue and transfer of securities and to non-payment of dividend, and only for listed companies or those which intend to get their securities listed. All other cases are administered by the Central Government.

5. A listed company wants to reduce its share capital. Is that SEBI's jurisdiction under section 24? No. It is neither issue and transfer of securities nor non-payment of dividend. By the Explanation to section 24, all other matters are exercised by the Central Government, the Tribunal or the Registrar; capital reduction under section 66 goes to the Tribunal.

6. What check applies to an exemption granted under section 23(4)? A copy of every such notification shall, as soon as may be after it is issued, be laid before both Houses of Parliament.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in105

Chapter Nineteen

What a Prospectus Is, and What It Must Say

Syllabus topic 1.3, label: "Matters to be stated in prospectus"

In one line

A prospectus is any document that invites the public to buy a company's securities, and the Act now regulates how it is signed, filed and vouched for, while leaving what goes in it to SEBI.

In exam wording: section 2(70) defines a prospectus as any document described or issued as a prospectus, and includes a red herring prospectus under section 32, a shelf prospectus under section 31, or any notice, circular, advertisement or other document inviting offers from the public for the subscription or purchase of any securities of a body corporate. Section 26 requires it to be dated and signed, to state such information and set out such reports on financial information as may be specified by the Securities and Exchange Board in consultation with the Central Government, and to be delivered to the Registrar for filing on or before the date of publication.

Why the law has this at all

A person deciding whether to buy shares in a company he has never heard of has one source of information: what the company chooses to tell him. He cannot inspect the factory, question the auditors or read the order book.

So the law makes the document itself the regulated object. It insists the document be dated, so its currency can be judged; signed by the directors, so somebody is answerable; delivered to the Registrar before publication, so a copy exists that cannot later be altered; and valid for only ninety days, so stale information cannot be recycled. And where an expert is quoted, it insists the expert be genuinely independent and have consented in writing.

The contents used to be regulated by the same section. Since 2018 they are not, and the reason is practical: the contents of a prospectus have to change as markets change, and a list in a statute cannot be updated without Parliament. Delegating them to SEBI lets the disclosure standard move.

Some words this chapter uses

Securities is defined in section 2(81). An expert, for section 26(5), is a person whose report or valuation is quoted, and the section defines who may not be one. To deliver for filing means to lodge a copy with the Registrar. An abridged prospectus is the short form that must accompany an application form. Underwriting is an agreement to take up securities that the public does not. Bona fide means in good faith.

The definition: section 2(70)

"prospectus" means any document described or issued as a prospectus and includes a red herring prospectus referred to in section 32 or shelf prospectus referred to in section 31 or any notice, circular, advertisement or other document inviting offers from the public for the subscription or purchase of any securities of a body corporate.

munotes.in106

What a Prospectus Is, and What It Must Say

Four things follow, and they are what the definition is for.

A document need not call itself a prospectus. The words "any notice, circular, advertisement or other document" catch a document by what it does, not by its title. A glossy pamphlet inviting the public to apply for debentures is a prospectus whatever it is headed.

It must invite offers from the public. A document circulated to four named investors is not a prospectus; it is a private placement offer letter under section 42.

It must relate to securities of a body corporate, not merely of a company, which is wider.

Two named documents are inside the definition: the red herring prospectus and the shelf prospectus. Both are dealt with in the next chapter.

And two more are deemed to be prospectuses by other sections: an offer for sale document under section 25, and the offer document in a section 28 offer for sale by members. Deeming was necessary precisely because those documents are issued by shareholders, not by the company.

What must be stated: section 26(1), as it now stands

Every prospectus issued by or on behalf of a public company, either with reference to its formation or subsequently, or by or on behalf of any person who is or has been engaged or interested in the formation of a public company, shall be dated and signed and shall:

state such information and set out such reports on financial information as may be specified by the Securities and Exchange Board in consultation with the Central Government

with a proviso: until SEBI specifies that information and those reports, the regulations already made by SEBI under the Securities and Exchange Board of India Act 1992 in respect of such financial information or reports shall apply.

And clause (c), which survives, requires the prospectus to:

make a declaration about the compliance of the provisions of this Act and a statement to the effect that nothing in the prospectus is contrary to the provisions of this Act, the Securities Contracts (Regulation) Act 1956 and the Securities and Exchange Board of India Act 1992 and the rules and regulations made thereunder.

What happened to the rest. Clauses (a), (b) and (d) of section 26(1), which contained the long catalogue of names, addresses, objects, capital structure, minimum subscription, underwriting particulars, auditors' reports and the rest, were omitted by the Companies (Amendment) Act 2017 (Act 1 of 2018), with effect from 7 May 2018.

How to answer MU's label honestly. Say that the Act no longer prescribes the contents; that section 26(1) as amended requires the prospectus to state such information and financial reports as SEBI may specify in consultation with the Central Government, with SEBI's existing regulations applying in the meantime; and that the only content requirement left in the section itself is the declaration of compliance in clause (c). Then give the machinery in sub-sections (2) to (9), which is what section 26 now mostly consists of.

munotes.in107

What a Prospectus Is, and What It Must Say

When section 26(1) does not apply: section 26(2) and (3)

Section 26(2). Nothing in sub-section (1) applies:

  • (a) to the issue to existing members or debenture holders of a prospectus or form of application relating to shares in or debentures of the company, whether or not the applicant has a right to renounce under section 62(1)(a)(ii) in favour of any other person; or
  • (b) to the issue of a prospectus or form of application relating to shares or debentures which are, or are to be, in all respects uniform with shares or debentures previously issued and for the time being dealt in or quoted on a recognised stock exchange.

Clause (a) is the rights issue exemption and clause (b) is the further issue of an identical, already quoted security. Both rest on the same idea: the recipient already has the information.

Section 26(3). Subject to sub-section (2), sub-section (1) applies to a prospectus or form of application whether issued on or with reference to the formation of a company or subsequently.

The Explanation is a small point that gets asked: the date indicated in the prospectus shall be deemed to be the date of its publication.

Filing, experts and validity: section 26(4) to (8)

Section 26(4): delivery before publication. No prospectus shall be issued by or on behalf of a company, or in relation to an intended company, unless on or before the date of its publication there has been delivered to the Registrar for filing a copy signed by every person named in it as a director or proposed director, or by his duly authorised attorney.

Section 26(5): the expert. A prospectus shall not include a statement purporting to be made by an expert unless the expert:

  • is a person who is not, and has not been, engaged or interested in the formation or promotion or management of the company; and
  • has given his written consent to the issue of the prospectus; and
  • has not withdrawn that consent before the delivery of a copy of the prospectus to the Registrar for filing,

and a statement to that effect shall be included in the prospectus.

That triple condition is the reason an expert's report carries weight, and it is the reason section 35(2)(c) gives a defence to a person who reasonably relied on such a report.

munotes.in108

What a Prospectus Is, and What It Must Say

Section 26(6): what must appear on the face of it. Every prospectus shall, on the face of it, (a) state that a copy has been delivered for filing to the Registrar as required by sub-section (4); and (b) specify any documents required to be attached to the copy so delivered, or refer to statements in the prospectus which specify those documents.

Sub-section (7) was omitted by the Companies (Amendment) Act 2019 with effect from 15 August 2019.

Section 26(8): the ninety day rule. No prospectus shall be valid if it is issued more than ninety days after the date on which a copy thereof is delivered to the Registrar under sub-section (4).

The penalty: section 26(9)

If a prospectus is issued in contravention of the section:

  • the company shall be punishable with fine not less than fifty thousand rupees and up to three lakh rupees; and
  • every person who is knowingly a party to the issue of such prospectus shall be punishable with fine not less than fifty thousand rupees and up to three lakh rupees.

Note what has gone. The words "with imprisonment for a term which may extend to three years or" were omitted by the Companies (Amendment) Act 2020 with effect from 21 December 2020, and "three lakh rupees, or with both" was substituted at the same time. So a contravention of section 26 is now punishable by fine only. That is part of the wider decriminalisation of the Act, and it is a good example to give if asked about recent reform.

Advertisement of a prospectus: section 30

Where an advertisement of any prospectus of a company is published in any manner, it shall be necessary to specify therein the contents of its memorandum as regards the objects, the liability of members and the amount of share capital of the company, and the names of the signatories to the memorandum and the number of shares subscribed for by them, and its capital structure.

Six things, and they are worth listing because this is a favourite short note: objects, liability of members, amount of share capital, names of the signatories to the memorandum, the number of shares each subscribed for, and the capital structure.

Application forms and the abridged prospectus: section 33

Section 33(1). No form of application for the purchase of any securities of a company shall be issued unless it is accompanied by an abridged prospectus.

Two exceptions in the proviso, where it is shown that the form was issued:

  • (a) in connection with a bona fide invitation to a person to enter into an underwriting agreement in respect of the securities; or
  • (b) in relation to securities which were not offered to the public.
munotes.in109

What a Prospectus Is, and What It Must Say

Section 33(2). A copy of the full prospectus shall, on request by any person before the closing of the subscription list and the offer, be furnished to him. So the abridged version is a convenience, not a substitute: anybody who wants the whole thing can have it.

Section 33(3). On default, the company shall be liable to a penalty of fifty thousand rupees for each default.

A worked example

Aravalli Cements Limited, an unlisted public company, decides to go to the market.

The document. Its offer document is a prospectus under section 2(70), whatever it is headed, because it invites offers from the public for the subscription of its securities.

Contents. Its advisers do not go to section 26 for a list, because clauses (a), (b) and (d) were omitted in 2018. They go to SEBI's regulations, because section 26(1) as amended requires the prospectus to state such information and financial reports as SEBI specifies, and the proviso applies SEBI's existing regulations in the meantime. Into the document goes the clause (c) declaration that nothing in it is contrary to this Act, the Securities Contracts (Regulation) Act 1956 or the SEBI Act 1992.

Signature and filing. It is dated, and by the Explanation to section 26(3) that date is deemed to be the date of publication. It is signed by every director and proposed director, and a signed copy is delivered to the Registrar for filing on or before the date of publication, under section 26(4). On its face it states that a copy has been so delivered, under section 26(6)(a).

The valuer's report. The prospectus quotes a valuation of the limestone reserves. The valuer must be a person not and never engaged or interested in the formation, promotion or management of the company, must have given written consent, and must not have withdrawn it before delivery to the Registrar, and the prospectus must say so: section 26(5).

The clock. The copy is delivered on 1 September 2026. The prospectus is not valid if issued after 30 November 2026, ninety days later, under section 26(8).

The advertisement. The newspaper advertisement must specify the memorandum's objects, the liability of members, the amount of share capital, the names of the signatories to the memorandum, the number of shares each subscribed for, and the capital structure: section 30.

The application form. Every form must be accompanied by an abridged prospectus, section 33(1), unless it goes with a bona fide underwriting invitation or relates to securities not offered to the public. Any person asking before the subscription list closes must be given the full prospectus, section 33(2). A default costs fifty thousand rupees each time, section 33(3).

munotes.in110

What a Prospectus Is, and What It Must Say

And if the prospectus is issued in breach of section 26? The company and every person knowingly a party to the issue face a fine of fifty thousand to three lakh rupees. There is no imprisonment, those words having been omitted with effect from 21 December 2020.

What this does NOT mean

It does not mean the Act still lists what a prospectus must contain. Clauses (a), (b) and (d) of section 26(1) were omitted on 7 May 2018. Reciting them is reciting repealed law.

It does not mean a prospectus must be called one. Section 2(70) catches any notice, circular, advertisement or other document that invites offers from the public.

It does not mean an abridged prospectus is enough. Section 33(2) gives any person the right to the full document before the subscription list closes.

It does not mean a prospectus lasts as long as the offer. Ninety days from delivery to the Registrar, under section 26(8).

Quick revision

  • Section 2(70): any document described or issued as a prospectus, and any notice, circular, advertisement or other document inviting offers from the public for securities of a body corporate. Includes red herring and shelf prospectuses.
  • Section 26(1): dated and signed; contents as SEBI may specify in consultation with the Central Government, SEBI's existing regulations applying meanwhile; clause (c) declaration of compliance. Clauses (a), (b) and (d) OMITTED w.e.f. 7 May 2018.
  • 26(2): does not apply to a rights issue to existing members or debenture holders, or to securities uniform with those already quoted.
  • 26(3) Explanation: the date in the prospectus is deemed to be the date of publication.
  • 26(4): signed copy delivered to the Registrar for filing on or before publication.
  • 26(5): an expert must be independent, must consent in writing, must not have withdrawn before delivery, and the prospectus must say so.
  • 26(6): on the face of it, state the delivery and specify the attached documents. 26(7) omitted w.e.f. 15 August 2019.
  • 26(8): invalid if issued more than ninety days after delivery.
  • 26(9): fine fifty thousand to three lakh rupees on the company and on every person knowingly a party. Imprisonment removed w.e.f. 21 December 2020.
  • Section 30: an advertisement must specify objects, liability of members, share capital, signatories, shares subscribed by them, and capital structure.
  • Section 33: application form must carry an abridged prospectus; exceptions for a bona fide underwriting invitation and for securities not offered to the public; full prospectus on request before closing; fifty thousand rupees per default.
munotes.in111

What a Prospectus Is, and What It Must Say

Test yourself

1. Define a prospectus. Section 2(70): any document described or issued as a prospectus, including a red herring prospectus under section 32 or a shelf prospectus under section 31, or any notice, circular, advertisement or other document inviting offers from the public for the subscription or purchase of any securities of a body corporate.

2. What matters must be stated in a prospectus? Since 7 May 2018 the Act no longer lists them. Section 26(1) requires the prospectus to be dated and signed and to state such information and set out such reports on financial information as may be specified by SEBI in consultation with the Central Government, with SEBI's existing regulations applying until it does; and clause (c) requires a declaration that nothing in it is contrary to this Act, the Securities Contracts (Regulation) Act 1956 or the SEBI Act 1992.

3. When must a copy be delivered to the Registrar, and by whom must it be signed? On or before the date of publication, signed by every person named in it as a director or proposed director, or by his duly authorised attorney: section 26(4).

4. What are the conditions for including an expert's statement? The expert must not be, and must never have been, engaged or interested in the formation, promotion or management of the company; must have given written consent to the issue of the prospectus; and must not have withdrawn that consent before delivery of a copy to the Registrar. A statement to that effect must appear in the prospectus: section 26(5).

5. For how long is a prospectus valid? It is not valid if issued more than ninety days after the date on which a copy was delivered to the Registrar: section 26(8).

6. Must an application form carry an abridged prospectus? Yes, unless the form was issued in connection with a bona fide invitation to enter into an underwriting agreement, or in relation to securities not offered to the public: section 33(1) and its proviso. A copy of the full prospectus must be furnished to any person who asks before the subscription list closes.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in112

Chapter Twenty

Kinds of Prospectus

Syllabus topic 1.3, label: "Shelf Prospectus, Red Herring Prospectus, Abridged Prospectus, Offer for Sale - Deemed Prospectus"

In one line

Besides the ordinary prospectus there are four variants: one filed once and used for a year, one issued before the price is known, one shortened to go with an application form, and one issued by shareholders rather than by the company.

In exam wording: section 31 provides for a shelf prospectus, section 32 for a red herring prospectus, section 33 for the abridged prospectus, section 25 deems an offer for sale document to be a deemed prospectus, and section 28 governs an offer for sale of shares by certain members.

Why the law has this at all

Each variant solves a problem the ordinary prospectus creates.

A company that comes to the market four times in a year would have to prepare, sign, file and pay for four full prospectuses, most of whose contents would be identical. The shelf prospectus lets it file once and top up with what has changed.

A company doing a book building issue does not know the price until the bids are in, so it cannot print a complete prospectus at the start. The red herring prospectus lets it go to the market with everything except the quantum and the price.

An application form with a two hundred page document stapled to it is unusable. The abridged prospectus gives the applicant the essentials, with the right to demand the full text.

And a shareholder selling his own shares to the public is not the company and issues nothing, so the prospectus rules would miss him entirely. Sections 25 and 28 pull that document into the net by deeming it a prospectus.

Some words this chapter uses

Book building is a process of discovering the price by inviting bids in a range. The subscription list is the period during which applications are accepted. An information memorandum is the update filed under section 31(2). Renunciation is a member's transfer of his right to take shares in a rights issue. Underwriting is an agreement to take up what the public does not.

Shelf prospectus: section 31

Section 31(1). Any class or classes of companies, as SEBI may provide by regulations, may file a shelf prospectus with the Registrar at the stage of the first offer of securities included in it, which shall indicate a period not exceeding one year as the period of validity, commencing from the date of opening of the first offer under that prospectus. In respect of a second or subsequent offer of such securities issued during that period of validity, no further prospectus is required.

Four points, and each is examinable: only classes SEBI provides for may use it; it is filed at the first offer; the validity is not more than one year from the opening of the first offer, not from filing; and within that year no further prospectus is needed.

munotes.in113

Kinds of Prospectus

Section 31(2): the information memorandum. A company filing a shelf prospectus shall file an information memorandum containing all material facts relating to new charges created, changes in the financial position between the first or previous offer and the succeeding offer, and such other changes as may be prescribed, with the Registrar within the prescribed time, prior to the issue of a second or subsequent offer.

The proviso protects applicants who are already in. Where the company or any other person has received applications for allotment along with advance payments of subscription before the change, it shall intimate the changes to those applicants, and if they express a desire to withdraw, shall refund all the monies received as subscription within fifteen days.

Section 31(3). Where an information memorandum is filed, every time an offer is made under sub-section (2), the memorandum together with the shelf prospectus shall be deemed to be a prospectus. So the full weight of prospectus liability attaches to the pair.

The Explanation defines it: a shelf prospectus is a prospectus in respect of which the securities or class of securities included in it are issued for subscription in one or more issues over a certain period without the issue of a further prospectus.

Red herring prospectus: section 32

Section 32(1). A company proposing to make an offer of securities may issue a red herring prospectus prior to the issue of a prospectus.

Section 32(2). It shall be filed with the Registrar at least three days prior to the opening of the subscription list and the offer.

Section 32(3). It shall carry the same obligations as are applicable to a prospectus, and any variation between the red herring prospectus and the prospectus shall be highlighted as variations in the prospectus.

Section 32(4). Upon the closing of the offer, the prospectus stating the total capital raised, whether by way of debt or share capital, the closing price of the securities, and any other details not included in the red herring prospectus, shall be filed with the Registrar and with SEBI.

The Explanation defines it: a red herring prospectus means a prospectus which does not include complete particulars of the quantum or price of the securities included therein.

Notice the shape of the process. A red herring goes out first, without quantum or price; three days later the subscription list opens; the offer closes; and only then is the final prospectus filed, with the money raised and the closing price. The name comes from the practice of printing a warning in red on the cover.

munotes.in114

Kinds of Prospectus

Abridged prospectus

Defined in section 2(1) as a memorandum containing such salient features of a prospectus as may be specified by SEBI, and made compulsory by section 33(1): no form of application for the purchase of securities may be issued unless accompanied by an abridged prospectus, save for a bona fide underwriting invitation or securities not offered to the public. Any person may demand the full prospectus before the subscription list closes, and default costs fifty thousand rupees for each default. The full treatment is in [What a Prospectus Is, and What It Must Say].

Deemed prospectus: section 25

This is the one students find hardest, so take it slowly.

The mischief. A company that wants to reach the public without issuing a prospectus can allot its whole issue to an intermediary, an issuing house, which then offers the shares on to the public. The company has issued no prospectus; the intermediary is not the company. Without section 25 the public would get no disclosure and no remedy.

Section 25(1). Where a company allots or agrees to allot any securities with a view to all or any of those securities being offered for sale to the public, any document by which the offer for sale is made shall for all purposes be deemed to be a prospectus issued by the company. All enactments and rules of law as to the contents of a prospectus and as to liability for mis-statements in and omissions from a prospectus apply, with the modifications in sub-sections (3) and (4), as if the securities had been offered to the public for subscription and as if persons accepting the offer were subscribers, but without prejudice to the liability of the persons by whom the offer is made for mis-statements in the document.

Read the two "as if" clauses. They convert a sale into a subscription and a buyer into a subscriber, which is what makes the whole prospectus machinery fit a transaction it was not designed for. And the closing words preserve the intermediary's own liability, so the deeming adds a defendant rather than substituting one.

Offer for sale by members: section 28

Section 28(1). Where certain members of a company propose, in consultation with the Board of Directors, to offer the whole or part of their holding of shares to the public, in accordance with any law for the time being in force, they may do so in accordance with such procedure as may be prescribed.

Section 28(2). Any document by which the offer of sale to the public is made shall for all purposes be deemed to be a prospectus issued by the company, and all laws and rules as to the contents of a prospectus and as to liability for mis-statements in and omissions from it apply as if it were a prospectus issued by the company.

munotes.in115

Kinds of Prospectus

Section 28(3): who pays and who authorises. The members whose shares are offered, whether individuals or bodies corporate or both, shall collectively authorise the company to take all actions in respect of the offer for sale for and on their behalf, and shall reimburse the company all expenses incurred by it on the matter.

That last provision is fair and is often asked: the company does the work, the selling shareholders take the money, so the selling shareholders bear the cost.

How section 28 differs from section 25. In section 25 the company allots to an intermediary who then sells on. In section 28 existing members sell their own shares directly to the public, in consultation with the Board. Both documents are deemed prospectuses; the routes are different.

A worked example

Godavari Infra Limited plans to raise money four times over the next year.

Shelf prospectus. If it belongs to a class SEBI has provided for, it may file a shelf prospectus at the first offer, valid for up to one year from the opening of that first offer. Before the second and each later offer it files an information memorandum with the new charges created and the changes in its financial position. Because two hundred applicants had already applied with advance payments before a change, the company must intimate them and refund within fifteen days any who ask to withdraw. Each time, the information memorandum and the shelf prospectus together are deemed to be a prospectus.

Red herring prospectus. For its main equity issue it uses book building, so it issues a red herring prospectus without the quantum or price, files it with the Registrar at least three days before the subscription list opens, and carries the same obligations as a full prospectus. When the offer closes it files the prospectus with the Registrar and SEBI, stating the total capital raised, the closing price and everything the red herring omitted, with any variations highlighted.

Application forms. Every form carries an abridged prospectus, and anybody who asks before closing gets the full document.

Deemed prospectus. Suppose instead the company allots its entire issue to Konkan Issuing House Limited, which then offers the shares to the public. The company has issued no prospectus. Section 25 deems the issuing house's offer document to be a prospectus issued by the company, buyers are treated as subscribers, and the company and its directors carry prospectus liability, without prejudice to the issuing house's own liability.

munotes.in116

Kinds of Prospectus

Offer for sale by members. Two years later the founders wish to sell thirty per cent of their own shares to the public. In consultation with the Board, they do so under section 28. Their offer document is deemed a prospectus issued by the company, they must collectively authorise the company to act for them, and they must reimburse the company its expenses.

Distinctions that carry marks

Shelf prospectus, section 31Red herring prospectus, section 32
PurposeOne filing, several offersGo to market before the price is fixed
Who may use itClasses SEBI provides for by regulationsAny company proposing an offer
FilingWith the Registrar at the first offerWith the Registrar at least three days before the subscription list opens
ValidityNot more than one year from the opening of the first offerUntil the prospectus is filed after closing
UpdateInformation memorandum before each later offerFinal prospectus with capital raised and closing price
What is missing from itNothing; it is completeQuantum or price of the securities
Deemed prospectus, section 25Offer for sale by members, section 28
Who sells to the publicAn allottee, typically an issuing houseExisting members
Does the company allot?Yes, to the intermediary, with a view to onward saleNo
Board's roleNone statedThe members act in consultation with the Board
Whose document is deemed a prospectusThe offer for sale documentThe offer of sale document
CostsNot addressedMembers reimburse the company, section 28(3)

What this does NOT mean

It does not mean a red herring prospectus is a draft. By section 32(3) it carries the same obligations as a prospectus, so liability attaches to it fully.

It does not mean a shelf prospectus lasts a year from filing. The year runs from the date of opening of the first offer under it.

It does not mean an abridged prospectus limits what the applicant can see. Section 33(2) gives any person the full prospectus on request before closing.

It does not mean a deemed prospectus lets the intermediary off. Section 25(1) preserves the liability of the persons by whom the offer is made, without prejudice.

Quick revision

  • Shelf, section 31: classes SEBI provides for; filed at the first offer; validity up to one year from the opening of the first offer; information memorandum before each later offer with new charges and financial changes; applicants who paid in advance must be intimated and refunded within fifteen days if they withdraw; memorandum plus shelf prospectus deemed a prospectus.
  • Red herring, section 32: issued before the prospectus; filed at least three days before the subscription list opens; same obligations as a prospectus; variations highlighted; after closing, the prospectus with total capital raised and closing price filed with the Registrar and SEBI; lacks quantum or price.
  • Abridged, section 2(1) and section 33: must accompany every application form; exceptions for bona fide underwriting and securities not offered to the public; full prospectus on request; fifty thousand rupees per default.
  • Deemed, section 25: company allots with a view to onward sale to the public; the offer for sale document is deemed a prospectus issued by the company; buyers deemed subscribers; the offerors' own liability preserved.
  • Offer for sale by members, section 28: members offer their own holding in consultation with the Board; document deemed a prospectus issued by the company; members must collectively authorise the company and reimburse its expenses.
munotes.in117

Kinds of Prospectus

Test yourself

1. What is a shelf prospectus and how long is it valid? A prospectus in respect of which the securities included in it are issued for subscription in one or more issues over a certain period without a further prospectus. It indicates a period not exceeding one year as its validity, commencing from the date of opening of the first offer under it: section 31(1) and its Explanation.

2. What must a company do before a second offer under a shelf prospectus? File an information memorandum with the Registrar containing all material facts about new charges created and changes in the financial position since the first or previous offer, within the prescribed time and prior to the issue: section 31(2).

3. What is a red herring prospectus and when must it be filed? A prospectus that does not include complete particulars of the quantum or price of the securities. It must be filed with the Registrar at least three days prior to the opening of the subscription list and the offer: section 32(2) and the Explanation.

4. What must be filed after a red herring issue closes? The prospectus stating the total capital raised, whether by debt or share capital, the closing price of the securities and any other details not in the red herring prospectus, filed with the Registrar and with SEBI: section 32(4).

5. What is a deemed prospectus? Where a company allots or agrees to allot securities with a view to their being offered for sale to the public, the document by which that offer for sale is made is deemed for all purposes to be a prospectus issued by the company, buyers being treated as subscribers, without prejudice to the liability of the persons making the offer: section 25(1).

munotes.in118

Kinds of Prospectus

6. Who bears the cost of an offer for sale by members under section 28? The members whose shares are offered. They must collectively authorise the company to act for them and shall reimburse the company all expenses incurred by it on the matter: section 28(3).

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in119

Chapter Twenty-One

The Golden Rule, or Golden Legacy

Syllabus topic 1.3, label: "The Golden Rule or Golden Legacy"

In one line

The golden rule is that a prospectus must tell the truth about the company in a way that is complete and not misleading, because the investor has nothing else to go on.

In exam wording: the golden rule for framing a prospectus, sometimes called the golden legacy, requires that those who issue a prospectus make a full, frank and honest disclosure of every material fact, so that the investor is not misled by what is said, by what is left out, or by the arrangement of what is said. It is expressed in the Act through section 26, which prescribes how a prospectus is made and vouched for, and enforced by sections 34, 35 and 36.

Why the law has this at all

The relationship between a company inviting subscriptions and the public it invites is not an ordinary bargain between equals.

In an ordinary sale the buyer can inspect the goods. Here the buyer is being asked to hand over money against a description of a business he cannot see, written by the people who want his money. He has no way to check the order book, the litigation, the state of the machinery or the promoters' other ventures.

So the law departs from the ordinary rule that a seller need not volunteer information. It imposes a positive duty to disclose, and it makes the duty strict, because half a truth in a prospectus is more dangerous than an outright lie: it survives inspection and it invites reliance.

The phrase "golden rule" comes from a nineteenth century judgment, and the phrase "golden legacy" is a later gloss on it. New Brunswick and Canada Railway and Land Co. v. Muggeridge is the decision usually named as its source. It is named here without a citation and without facts, because no report carrying it could be opened from where this book was written and the house rule is that a citation goes only with a report that has been read. See authorities/cases.json.

Some words this chapter uses

Material means capable of influencing the decision of a reasonable investor. Full, frank and honest is the traditional formulation of the standard. A half truth is a statement true so far as it goes but misleading because of what is not said. Concealment is the deliberate withholding of a fact. An exit offer is a chance for a dissenting shareholder to sell out.

What the rule requires

The rule has four limbs, and the way to earn marks is to give them separately with an example each.

1. Everything material must be disclosed. Not everything the directors know, but everything a reasonable investor would want to weigh: pending litigation that could sink a contract, the fact that the main plant is leased and the lease expires next year, the promoters' interest in a property the company is buying.

munotes.in120

The Golden Rule, or Golden Legacy

2. Nothing may be stated that is untrue. The obvious limb, and the one that is easiest to prove.

3. Nothing may be so stated as to mislead, even if literally true. This is the limb the phrase exists for. "The company has an order from a public sector undertaking" may be true and still misleading if the order was cancelled last month. Section 34 is drafted to catch exactly this: it applies where a statement is untrue or misleading in form or context in which it is included, or where any inclusion or omission of any matter is likely to mislead.

4. The arrangement must not mislead. Burying a material qualification in a footnote while the claim it qualifies is in bold on the cover offends the rule even though both appear.

Where the rule lives in the Act

Section 26(1) carries the modern disclosure standard. Since 7 May 2018 the contents themselves are specified by SEBI in consultation with the Central Government, with SEBI's existing regulations applying meanwhile, and the surviving clause (c) requires a declaration of compliance with this Act, the Securities Contracts (Regulation) Act 1956 and the SEBI Act 1992. See [What a Prospectus Is, and What It Must Say] and FINDINGS.md section 3.6.

Section 26(5) protects the reader against a dressed up expert: an expert's statement may not be included unless the expert is not and has never been engaged or interested in the formation, promotion or management of the company, has consented in writing, and has not withdrawn that consent before delivery to the Registrar, and the prospectus must say so.

Section 34 enforces the rule criminally, section 35 civilly, and section 36 catches fraudulent inducement even outside a prospectus. Those three have their own chapters.

Section 27: the rule after the money is raised

The golden rule would be worth little if a company could tell the truth in the prospectus and then spend the money on something else. Section 27 closes that gap, and MU's syllabus reaches it through the same topic.

Section 27(1). A company shall not at any time vary the terms of a contract referred to in the prospectus, or the objects for which the prospectus was issued, except subject to the approval of, or authority given by, the company in general meeting by way of special resolution.

The first proviso adds publicity with a reason. The prescribed details of the notice of that resolution to shareholders shall also be published in the newspapers, one in English and one in the vernacular language, in the city where the registered office is situated, indicating clearly the justification for such variation.

munotes.in121

The Golden Rule, or Golden Legacy

The second proviso is a flat prohibition and is easy to miss: such a company shall not use any amount raised through the prospectus for buying, trading or otherwise dealing in equity shares of any other listed company. So prospectus money cannot be turned into a share portfolio.

Section 27(2): the exit. Dissenting shareholders, being those who have not agreed to the proposal to vary the terms of contracts or objects referred to in the prospectus, shall be given an exit offer by promoters or controlling shareholders, at such exit price and in such manner and conditions as SEBI may specify by regulations.

Compare section 13(8), which does the same work for a change of objects while prospectus money is unutilised: special resolution, newspaper and website publication with a justification, and an exit for dissenters. The two sections are deliberately parallel, and an answer that notices the parallel reads well.

A worked example

Palghar Textiles Limited issues a prospectus to raise sixty crore rupees. It states three objects: building a dyeing unit, buying looms, and general corporate purposes. It also refers to a supply contract with a large garment exporter.

A half truth. The prospectus says "the company has a long term supply arrangement with a leading garment exporter". True when written. But the exporter served a termination notice a fortnight before the prospectus was dated, and that is not mentioned. The statement is literally true and misleading in the context in which it is included, which is precisely what section 34 covers, and the omission is one likely to mislead. Every person who authorised the issue is liable under section 447 unless he proves the omission was immaterial or that he had reasonable grounds to believe, and did believe up to the time of issue, that the inclusion or omission was necessary.

Concealment. The prospectus does not mention that the land for the dyeing unit is subject to a pending title suit. That is a material fact a reasonable investor would weigh, so the golden rule is broken by silence.

Varying the contract. A year later the company wants to replace the supply contract referred to in the prospectus with a different one on worse terms. Section 27(1) requires a special resolution. The prescribed details of the notice must be published in one English and one vernacular newspaper in the city of the registered office, with the justification. And section 27(2) requires the promoters or controlling shareholders to offer an exit to shareholders who did not agree, at the price and on the conditions SEBI specifies.

munotes.in122

The Golden Rule, or Golden Legacy

And a flat prohibition. The company has eleven crore rupees of prospectus money left and its treasurer proposes to park it in the shares of a listed cement company. The second proviso to section 27(1) forbids it outright: prospectus money may not be used for buying, trading or otherwise dealing in equity shares of any other listed company. No resolution can authorise it.

Distinctions that carry marks

Ordinary contract of saleA prospectus
Duty to volunteer informationGenerally nonePositive duty of full disclosure
Effect of a literally true half truthUsually noneActionable, section 34
Who may complainThe other contracting partyAny person, group or association affected, section 37
RemediesContractualCompensation under section 35, prosecution under sections 34 and 36
Section 27Section 13(8)
What is being changedTerms of a contract referred to in the prospectus, or the objects for which it was issuedThe objects in the memorandum
TriggerAny variation, at any timeOnly while unutilised prospectus money remains
ResolutionSpecialSpecial
PublicityTwo newspapers, with the justificationTwo newspapers and the website, with the justification
Exit for dissentersYes, section 27(2)Yes, section 13(8)(ii)
Extra prohibitionNo dealing in equity shares of another listed companyNone

What this does NOT mean

It does not mean everything must be disclosed. The test is materiality. A prospectus that recited every fact about a company would be unreadable and would conceal by volume.

It does not mean an honest belief is always a defence. Under the proviso to section 34 the belief must be held on reasonable grounds and up to the time of issue.

It does not mean the rule stops at the date of issue. Section 27 keeps the company to the contracts and objects the prospectus described, and section 13(8) keeps it to the objects while the money is unspent.

It does not mean only subscribers can sue. Section 37 allows a suit or any other action under sections 34, 35 or 36 by any person, group of persons or association of persons affected.

Quick revision

  • The rule: full, frank and honest disclosure of every material fact; nothing untrue; nothing misleading in form or context; nothing misleading by arrangement or omission.
  • The case named for it: New Brunswick and Canada Railway and Land Co. v. Muggeridge. Named without a citation.
  • In the Act: section 26(1), contents as SEBI specifies plus the clause (c) declaration; section 26(5), the independent, consenting expert; enforced by sections 34, 35 and 36; complainants defined by section 37.
  • Section 27(1): no variation of a contract referred to in the prospectus, or of the objects for which it was issued, except by special resolution; notice details published in one English and one vernacular newspaper in the city of the registered office with the justification; and prospectus money may not be used to buy, trade or deal in equity shares of any other listed company.
  • Section 27(2): dissenting shareholders get an exit offer from promoters or controlling shareholders at the price and on the conditions SEBI specifies.
  • Parallel: section 13(8) for a change of objects while prospectus money is unutilised.
munotes.in123

The Golden Rule, or Golden Legacy

Test yourself

1. State the golden rule for framing a prospectus. Those who issue a prospectus must make a full, frank and honest disclosure of every material fact. Nothing untrue may be stated, nothing may be stated so as to mislead even if literally true, and nothing material may be concealed or buried.

2. Which provision catches a statement that is literally true but misleading? Section 34, which applies where a statement is untrue or misleading in form or context in which it is included, or where any inclusion or omission of any matter is likely to mislead.

3. What is needed to vary the terms of a contract referred to in a prospectus? A special resolution of the company in general meeting, with the prescribed details of the notice published in one English and one vernacular newspaper in the city where the registered office is situated, clearly indicating the justification: section 27(1) and its first proviso.

4. What must be offered to shareholders who do not agree to such a variation? An exit offer by the promoters or controlling shareholders, at such exit price and in such manner and conditions as SEBI may specify by regulations: section 27(2).

5. May a company invest its unspent prospectus money in the shares of a listed company? No. The second proviso to section 27(1) prohibits a company from using any amount raised through a prospectus for buying, trading or otherwise dealing in the equity shares of any other listed company.

6. Who may take action for a misleading prospectus? Any person, group of persons or association of persons affected by the misleading statement or by the inclusion or omission of any matter, by suit or any other action under sections 34, 35 or 36: section 37.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in124

Chapter Twenty-Two

Civil Liability for Mis-statements in a Prospectus

Syllabus topic 1.3, label: "Civil liability for mis-statements in prospectus"

In one line

If somebody buys securities because a prospectus misled him and he loses money, the company and the people behind the prospectus must compensate him, unless they can bring themselves within one of three defences.

In exam wording: section 35(1) provides that where a person has subscribed for securities acting on a misleading statement, or on the inclusion or omission of any matter, in the prospectus and has sustained loss or damage, the company and five categories of person shall be liable to pay compensation to every person who sustained the loss. Section 35(2) gives three defences and section 35(3) imposes personal liability without any limitation where the prospectus was issued with intent to defraud.

Why the law has this at all

Criminal punishment does not give an investor his money back. A man who put four lakh rupees into a company on the strength of a false prospectus is not made whole by the promoter going to jail.

So the Act runs two remedies in parallel. Section 34 and section 36 punish; section 35 compensates. And section 35 does it without making the investor prove the elements of the tort of deceit, which would require him to establish a fraudulent state of mind in people he has never met.

The section instead names the defendants in a list, presumes their responsibility, and puts the burden on them to escape through a defence. That reversal is the whole point of the section, and it is why the defences in sub-section (2) are drafted so carefully.

Some words this chapter uses

To subscribe means to apply for and take securities. Compensation here means damages for the loss actually sustained. An expert is defined for this purpose by section 26(5). To authorise the issue means to give the go-ahead for the prospectus to be published. Without any limitation of liability means the person's whole estate is exposed, not merely the amount he invested.

Who is liable: section 35(1)

Where a person has subscribed for securities of a company acting on any statement included, or the inclusion or omission of any matter, in the prospectus which is misleading, and has sustained any loss or damage as a consequence, then the company and every person who:

  • (a) is a director of the company at the time of the issue of the prospectus;
  • (b) has authorised himself to be named and is named in the prospectus as a director of the company, or has agreed to become such director, either immediately or after an interval of time;
  • (c) is a promoter of the company;
  • (d) has authorised the issue of the prospectus; and
  • (e) is an expert referred to in sub-section (5) of section 26,
munotes.in125

Civil Liability for Mis-statements in a Prospectus

shall, without prejudice to any punishment to which any person may be liable under section 36, be liable to pay compensation to every person who has sustained such loss or damage.

Take the list apart, because each entry catches a different person.

(a) Directors at the time of issue. The date of issue fixes the class. A person who resigned the day before is outside it, subject to (b).

(b) Named or agreed to be named. This catches the person lent to a prospectus for respectability. He is liable because he authorised himself to be named and was named, even though he never acted as a director, and even where he agreed to become one only after an interval of time.

(c) Promoters. Defined by section 2(69), and dealt with in [Promoters: Position, Duties and Liabilities].

(d) Anyone who authorised the issue. The widest limb, and it catches persons who hold no office at all. It is the same expression used in section 34.

(e) The expert. But only an expert within section 26(5), that is, a person independent of the formation, promotion and management of the company who gave written consent to the issue and did not withdraw it. An expert is liable for his own statement, not for the rest of the prospectus.

Three elements the claimant must show, and they are the marks in a problem question:

  1. He subscribed for securities of the company;
  2. He acted on the misleading statement, inclusion or omission, so there is reliance; and
  3. He sustained loss or damage as a consequence, so there is causation.

Note who is not on the list. A person who bought the shares in the market from an earlier subscriber has not subscribed on the faith of the prospectus, and section 35(1) does not reach him. His remedies lie elsewhere.

The three defences: section 35(2)

No person shall be liable under sub-section (1) if he proves one of the following. The burden is squarely on the defendant.

Defence (a): withdrawal of consent before issue. That, having consented to become a director, he withdrew his consent before the issue of the prospectus, and that it was issued without his authority or consent. Both limbs are needed: withdrawing is not enough if the prospectus went out with his blessing anyway.

Defence (b): issued without knowledge or consent, plus a public notice. That the prospectus was issued without his knowledge or consent, and that on becoming aware of its issue, he forthwith gave a reasonable public notice that it was issued without his knowledge or consent.

The word "forthwith" carries the defence. A director who learns of the prospectus in March and publishes a notice in July has not acted forthwith, and the defence fails however genuine his ignorance was. And the notice must be public and reasonable, so a letter to the Board is not enough.

munotes.in126

Civil Liability for Mis-statements in a Prospectus

Defence (c): reasonable reliance on an expert. That, as regards every misleading statement purporting to be made by an expert, or contained in what purports to be a copy of or an extract from a report or valuation of an expert:

  • it was a correct and fair representation of the statement, or a correct copy of, or a correct and fair extract from, the report or valuation; and
  • he had reasonable ground to believe, and did up to the time of the issue of the prospectus believe, that the person making the statement was competent to make it, and that the expert had given the consent required by section 26(5) and had not withdrawn it before filing of a copy of the prospectus with the Registrar, or, to the defendant's knowledge, before allotment thereunder.

This is the defence that makes the expert regime in section 26(5) work. A director may rely on a valuer's report, but only if he reproduced it accurately and reasonably believed the valuer was competent and had consented.

Fraud: section 35(3)

Notwithstanding anything contained in this section, where it is proved that a prospectus has been issued with intent to defraud the applicants for the securities of a company or any other person or for any fraudulent purpose, every person referred to in sub-section (1) shall be personally responsible, without any limitation of liability, for all or any of the losses or damages that may have been incurred by any person who subscribed to the securities on the basis of such prospectus.

Three things change when fraud is proved.

The defences go. The sub-section opens "notwithstanding anything contained in this section", which sweeps away sub-section (2).

Liability becomes unlimited. "Personally responsible, without any limitation of liability" means the whole of the person's estate answers, not a proportionate share.

The class of losses widens. "All or any of the losses or damages that may have been incurred by any person who subscribed" is broader than the loss flowing from the particular misstatement.

Note also the wording of the trigger. It is enough that the prospectus was issued with intent to defraud the applicants or any other person, or for any fraudulent purpose. The intent need not be aimed at the particular claimant.

Who may sue: section 37

A suit may be filed or any other action may be taken under section 34 or section 35 or section 36 by any person, group of persons or any association of persons affected by any misleading statement or the inclusion or omission of any matter in the prospectus.

munotes.in127

Civil Liability for Mis-statements in a Prospectus

Short, and it does two useful things. It confirms that the same facts can support proceedings under the criminal sections and the civil one. And it lets a group or association act together, which is the practical answer to the problem that each individual investor's loss may be too small to be worth a suit on its own. Read it with the class action in section 245.

A worked example

Chandrapur Steels Limited issues a prospectus in June 2026. It says the company holds a mining lease valid to 2041. In fact the lease expired in 2025 and the renewal was refused.

The prospectus names five directors; Mr Deshpande, who agreed to become a director three months after listing and consented to be named; and it carries a valuer's report on the ore body by an independent valuer who consented in writing. Ms Rane, a promoter, approved the issue. Mr Bhatt, a consultant holding no office, gave the final instruction to print and publish.

Amol subscribes for two lakh rupees of shares relying on the lease statement, and loses most of it when the truth emerges.

Who is liable under section 35(1)? The company; the five directors under clause (a); Mr Deshpande under clause (b), because he authorised himself to be named and agreed to become a director after an interval; Ms Rane under clause (c) as a promoter; Mr Bhatt under clause (d) as a person who authorised the issue; and the valuer under clause (e), but only for his own statement, which was accurate.

Amol must show that he subscribed, that he acted on the statement, and that he lost money as a result.

Defences. One director, Ms Fernandes, had resigned and withdrawn her consent before the prospectus was issued, and it went out without her authority. She is protected by defence (a). Another, Mr Iyer, was abroad and knew nothing of the issue; he learned of it on 2 July and published a reasonable public notice on 4 July. He is protected by defence (b). Had he waited until September, he would not be.

The remaining directors say they relied on the valuer. That is defence (c), but it protects them only as regards the valuer's statement, which was correct. It does nothing about the lease statement, which was the company's own. They remain liable.

Now suppose it is proved that the lease statement was inserted deliberately to induce subscriptions. Section 35(3) applies. The defences fall away, and every person named in sub-section (1) is personally responsible without any limitation of liability for the losses of everyone who subscribed on the faith of the prospectus.

munotes.in128

Civil Liability for Mis-statements in a Prospectus

And Amol need not sue alone. Under section 37 any person, group of persons or association of persons affected may sue or take action under sections 34, 35 or 36.

Distinctions that carry marks

Civil liability, section 35Criminal liability, section 34
PurposeCompensation to the investorPunishment
Who is liableThe company and the five categories in section 35(1)Every person who authorises the issue
TriggerA misleading statement, inclusion or omission, plus reliance and lossA statement untrue or misleading in form or context, or an inclusion or omission likely to mislead
DefencesThe three in section 35(2)The proviso: immateriality, or reasonable belief held up to the time of issue
Where fraud is provedSection 35(3): unlimited personal liability, defences swept awayLiability under section 447
Who may actAny person, group or association affected, section 37The same

What this does NOT mean

It does not mean every investor who lost money can recover. He must have subscribed, must have acted on the misleading matter, and must show the loss was a consequence of it. A person who bought in the market, or who never read the prospectus, fails on the first or second element.

It does not mean a named director escapes because he never acted. Clause (b) catches a person who authorised himself to be named, even if he was to become a director only later.

It does not mean an expert answers for the whole prospectus. He is liable under clause (e) for his own statement.

It does not mean the defences survive fraud. Section 35(3) begins "notwithstanding anything contained in this section".

Quick revision

  • Section 35(1), five categories plus the company: (a) a director at the time of issue; (b) a person who authorised himself to be named and is named as a director, or agreed to become one, immediately or after an interval; (c) a promoter; (d) a person who authorised the issue; (e) an expert under section 26(5).
  • Claimant must show: subscription, reliance, and loss as a consequence.
  • Section 35(2), three defences: (a) consent withdrawn before issue and issued without his authority or consent; (b) issued without his knowledge or consent and he forthwith gave reasonable public notice; (c) an expert's statement correctly and fairly represented, with reasonable belief in the expert's competence and consent up to the time of issue.
  • Section 35(3): prospectus issued with intent to defraud or for a fraudulent purpose means every person in sub-section (1) is personally responsible without any limitation of liability, and the defences do not apply.
  • Section 37: any person, group of persons or association of persons affected may sue or act under sections 34, 35 or 36.
munotes.in129

Civil Liability for Mis-statements in a Prospectus

Test yourself

1. Who is liable to pay compensation under section 35(1)? The company, and every person who is a director at the time of the issue; who authorised himself to be named and is named as a director or agreed to become one, immediately or after an interval; who is a promoter; who authorised the issue of the prospectus; and who is an expert referred to in section 26(5).

2. What must the claimant prove? That he subscribed for securities of the company acting on a misleading statement, or on the inclusion or omission of a matter, in the prospectus, and that he sustained loss or damage as a consequence.

3. State the three defences. That, having consented to become a director, he withdrew his consent before the issue and the prospectus was issued without his authority or consent; that it was issued without his knowledge or consent and, on becoming aware, he forthwith gave a reasonable public notice to that effect; and, as regards an expert's statement, that it was correctly and fairly represented and that he had reasonable ground to believe, and did believe up to the time of issue, that the expert was competent and had given and not withdrawn his consent.

4. A director who knew nothing of the prospectus publishes a public notice four months after learning of it. Is he protected? No. Defence (b) requires him to have given the notice forthwith on becoming aware of the issue. A delay of four months is not forthwith, however genuine his ignorance.

5. What is the effect of proving that the prospectus was issued with intent to defraud? Section 35(3) applies notwithstanding anything else in the section: every person referred to in sub-section (1) becomes personally responsible, without any limitation of liability, for all or any of the losses incurred by any person who subscribed on the basis of the prospectus, and the sub-section (2) defences fall away.

6. Can a group of investors act together? Yes. Section 37 permits a suit to be filed or any other action to be taken under sections 34, 35 or 36 by any person, group of persons or association of persons affected.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in130

Chapter Twenty-Three

Criminal Liability, Fraudulent Inducement and Personation

Syllabus topic 1.3, labels: "Criminal liability for mis-statements in prospectus", "Punishment for fraudulently inducing persons to invest money", "Punishment for personation for acquisition, etc., of securities"

In one line

Three offences protect an investor: lying in a prospectus, talking somebody into investing by false promises, and applying for shares in a false name. All three are punished as fraud under section 447.

In exam wording: section 34 imposes criminal liability on every person who authorises the issue of a prospectus containing an untrue or misleading statement, or a misleading inclusion or omission; section 36 punishes fraudulently inducing persons to invest money; section 38 punishes personation for the acquisition of securities; and each of the three makes the offender liable for action under section 447, the Act's general fraud provision.

Why the law has this at all

Compensation under section 35 is a remedy between the investor and the people who misled him. It does nothing about the harm to the market itself.

An investor who has been cheated once tells forty people, and each of them becomes slower to put money into any company. Confidence is a shared resource, and a false prospectus depletes it for everyone. That is why the Act treats these as offences and not merely as wrongs.

Section 38 protects something slightly different: the integrity of the allotment process. An issue is allotted proportionately, so a person who applies fifty times in fifty false names takes shares away from honest applicants. It is a fraud on other investors rather than on the company.

Some words this chapter uses

To authorise the issue means to give the go-ahead for the prospectus to be published. Recklessly means without caring whether a statement is true or false. A fictitious name is a name that does not belong to a real applicant. Disgorgement is an order to give up a gain. The Investor Education and Protection Fund is the fund established under section 125. Undue advantage means a benefit a person is not entitled to.

Section 34: criminal liability for mis-statements

Where a prospectus, issued, circulated or distributed under this Chapter, includes any statement which is untrue or misleading in form or context in which it is included or where any inclusion or omission of any matter is likely to mislead, every person who authorises the issue of such prospectus shall be liable under section 447.

Four things to notice.

"Issued, circulated or distributed" is wider than issued alone, so a person who circulates a prospectus he did not write is within the section's reach if he authorised its issue.

"Untrue or misleading in form or context in which it is included" is the golden rule in statutory language. A literally true statement placed so as to mislead is caught.

"Any inclusion or omission of any matter is likely to mislead" covers silence and covers arrangement. And note "likely to mislead": nobody need actually have been misled.

munotes.in131

Criminal Liability, Fraudulent Inducement and Personation

"Every person who authorises the issue" identifies the defendant. It is not limited to directors, promoters or officers.

The proviso gives the defence:

nothing in this section shall apply to a person if he proves that such statement or omission was immaterial or that he had reasonable grounds to believe, and did up to the time of issue of the prospectus believe, that the statement was true or the inclusion or omission was necessary.

Two routes out, and the burden is on the accused. Immateriality, which is an objective question. Or honest belief on reasonable grounds, held up to the time of issue. A belief formed carelessly will not do, and a belief abandoned before issue will not do either.

Section 36: fraudulently inducing persons to invest money

Any person who, either knowingly or recklessly makes any statement, promise or forecast which is false, deceptive or misleading, or deliberately conceals any material facts, to induce another person to enter into, or to offer to enter into,

(a) any agreement for, or with a view to, acquiring, disposing of, subscribing for, or underwriting securities; or

(b) any agreement, the purpose or the pretended purpose of which is to secure a profit to any of the parties from the yield of securities or by reference to fluctuations in the value of securities; or

(c) any agreement for, or with a view to obtaining credit facilities from any bank or financial institution,

shall be liable for action under section 447.

Section 36 is much wider than section 34 and the differences are the marks.

No prospectus is needed. Section 36 catches a statement made in a telephone call, an advertisement, a message or a meeting.

The mental element is spelled out: knowingly or recklessly. Recklessness is enough, so a person who makes a confident forecast without caring whether it is true is within the section.

The conduct includes forecasts and promises, not merely statements of existing fact, and includes deliberate concealment of material facts.

Clause (c) is not about securities at all. An agreement for obtaining credit facilities from any bank or financial institution is covered, so a person who lies to get a company loan is caught by a section that sits in the prospectus chapter. Students consistently miss this.

Section 38: personation for acquisition of securities

Section 38(1). Any person who:

  • (a) makes or abets making of an application in a fictitious name to a company for acquiring or subscribing for its securities; or
  • (b) makes or abets making of multiple applications to a company in different names or in different combinations of his name or surname for acquiring or subscribing for its securities; or
  • (c) otherwise induces directly or indirectly a company to allot, or register any transfer of, securities to him, or to any other person in a fictitious name,
munotes.in132

Criminal Liability, Fraudulent Inducement and Personation

shall be liable for action under section 447.

Clause (b) is the one to read twice. It catches not only different names but different combinations of his own name or surname. So "R. K. Sharma", "Rajesh Sharma" and "Rajesh Kumar Sharma", all the same man, are multiple applications.

And note "makes or abets making" in both (a) and (b): the person who arranges the applications is as liable as the person who signs them.

Section 38(2): a warning that must be printed. The provisions of sub-section (1) shall be prominently reproduced in every prospectus issued by a company and in every form of application for securities. This is why the warning appears on application forms, and it makes ignorance of the offence very hard to plead.

Section 38(3): disgorgement and seizure. Where a person has been convicted under the section, the Court may also order:

  • disgorgement of gain, if any, made by such person; and
  • seizure and disposal of the securities in his possession.

Section 38(4): where the money goes. The amount received through disgorgement or disposal shall be credited to the Investor Education and Protection Fund, which is constituted under section 125. So it does not go to the company; it goes to a fund that exists for investors generally.

Section 447: the punishment all three lead to

Since sections 34, 36 and 38 all say "shall be liable for action under section 447", the punishment is in that section and it must be learned.

The main punishment. Without prejudice to any liability including repayment of any debt, any person found guilty of fraud involving an amount of at least ten lakh rupees or one per cent of the turnover of the company, whichever is lower, shall be punishable with:

  • imprisonment for not less than six months and up to ten years; and
  • a fine not less than the amount involved in the fraud and up to three times that amount.

First proviso: public interest. Where the fraud involves public interest, the term of imprisonment shall not be less than three years.

Second proviso: small frauds. Where the fraud involves an amount less than ten lakh rupees or one per cent of turnover, whichever is lower, and does not involve public interest, the punishment is imprisonment up to five years, or a fine up to fifty lakh rupees, or both. Note that here there is no minimum imprisonment and imprisonment is not compulsory.

munotes.in133

Criminal Liability, Fraudulent Inducement and Personation

The Explanation defines fraud, and it is worth quoting because it is unusually wide:

"fraud", in relation to affairs of a company or any body corporate, includes any act, omission, concealment of any fact or abuse of position committed by any person or any other person with the connivance in any manner, with intent to deceive, to gain undue advantage from, or to injure the interests of, the company or its shareholders or its creditors or any other person, whether or not there is any wrongful gain or wrongful loss.

The closing words are the point: "whether or not there is any wrongful gain or wrongful loss". Fraud under this Act does not require anybody to have gained or lost. The intent to deceive is enough. The Explanation goes on to define wrongful gain as gain by unlawful means of property to which the person is not legally entitled, and wrongful loss as loss by unlawful means of property to which the person losing is legally entitled.

A worked example

Nagothane Chemicals Limited issues a prospectus. It states that the company holds environmental clearance for a new plant. The clearance application was in fact rejected.

Section 34. The statement is untrue. Every person who authorised the issue of the prospectus is liable under section 447. A director who can prove the matter was immaterial, or that he had reasonable grounds to believe, and did believe up to the time of issue, that the clearance had been granted, escapes under the proviso.

Section 36, and note that no prospectus is needed. The company's marketing head telephones two hundred wealthy individuals and tells them, recklessly, that the plant will be commissioned in six months and will triple the share price. That is a statement, promise or forecast which is false, deceptive or misleading, made recklessly, to induce them to enter into an agreement for subscribing for securities. He is liable under section 447, whatever happens to the prospectus.

And clause (c). The same man tells a bank that the clearance exists, to obtain a term loan. That is an agreement for, or with a view to obtaining credit facilities from a bank, and section 36(c) catches it even though no securities are involved.

Section 38. An applicant, Mr Salvi, wants a larger allotment. He applies as "P. Salvi", "Prakash Salvi" and "Prakash D. Salvi", and gets his driver to apply in a name that belongs to nobody. He is caught by clause (b) for the multiple applications in different combinations of his own name, and by clause (a), as an abettor, for the application in a fictitious name. On conviction the Court may order disgorgement of his gain and seizure and disposal of the securities in his possession, and the proceeds go to the Investor Education and Protection Fund.

munotes.in134

Criminal Liability, Fraudulent Inducement and Personation

And note where the warning was. The text of section 38(1) was prominently reproduced in the prospectus and on the application form, as section 38(2) requires.

Punishment. If the amounts involved are ten lakh rupees or more, or one per cent of turnover, whichever is lower, section 447 gives six months to ten years' imprisonment and a fine of one to three times the amount, with a minimum of three years if public interest is involved. If the amount is below that threshold and there is no public interest, the second proviso applies: up to five years, or a fine up to fifty lakh rupees, or both.

Distinctions that carry marks

Section 34Section 36Section 38
What is punishedAn untrue or misleading prospectusFraudulently inducing investment or creditPersonation and multiple applications
Prospectus neededYesNoNo
Who is liableEvery person who authorises the issueAny personAny person, including an abettor
Mental elementPresumed, subject to the provisoKnowingly or recklesslyMaking or abetting the application
Defence in the sectionImmateriality, or reasonable belief up to issueNone statedNone stated
Extra consequencesNoneNoneDisgorgement, seizure and disposal, proceeds to the IEPF
PunishmentSection 447Section 447Section 447
Section 34, criminalSection 35, civil
ObjectPunishmentCompensation
DefendantEvery person who authorises the issueThe company and five categories
Proof of lossNot needed; "likely to mislead" sufficesLoss or damage must be sustained
OutcomeSection 447 punishmentPayment of compensation

What this does NOT mean

It does not mean somebody must actually have been misled under section 34. The section applies where the inclusion or omission is likely to mislead.

It does not mean section 36 is confined to securities. Clause (c) covers agreements for obtaining credit facilities from any bank or financial institution.

It does not mean fraud under section 447 requires a gain or a loss. The Explanation says "whether or not there is any wrongful gain or wrongful loss".

It does not mean multiple applications are only in other people's names. Section 38(1)(b) catches different combinations of the applicant's own name or surname.

Quick revision

  • Section 34: a prospectus issued, circulated or distributed with a statement untrue or misleading in form or context, or an inclusion or omission likely to mislead, makes every person who authorises the issue liable under section 447. Proviso: immateriality, or reasonable grounds for belief held up to the time of issue.
  • Section 36: any person who knowingly or recklessly makes a false, deceptive or misleading statement, promise or forecast, or deliberately conceals material facts, to induce another to enter into (a) an agreement for acquiring, disposing of, subscribing for or underwriting securities, (b) an agreement to secure a profit from the yield of securities or from fluctuations in their value, or (c) an agreement for obtaining credit facilities from a bank or financial institution, is liable under section 447.
  • Section 38: (a) application in a fictitious name; (b) multiple applications in different names or different combinations of his own name or surname; (c) otherwise inducing allotment or transfer to himself or another in a fictitious name. Making or abetting both caught. 38(2): the sub-section must be prominently reproduced in every prospectus and application form. 38(3): on conviction the Court may order disgorgement and seizure and disposal. 38(4): proceeds to the Investor Education and Protection Fund.
  • Section 447: fraud of at least ten lakh rupees or one per cent of turnover, whichever is lower: six months to ten years and a fine of one to three times the amount. Public interest: minimum three years. Below the threshold and no public interest: up to five years, or fine up to fifty lakh rupees, or both. Fraud is defined to include act, omission, concealment or abuse of position with intent to deceive, whether or not there is any wrongful gain or wrongful loss.
munotes.in135

Criminal Liability, Fraudulent Inducement and Personation

Test yourself

1. Who is criminally liable for a misleading prospectus, and what must be shown? Every person who authorises the issue of the prospectus, where it includes a statement untrue or misleading in the form or context in which it is included, or where an inclusion or omission is likely to mislead: section 34. Nobody need actually have been misled.

2. What defences does section 34 give? That the statement or omission was immaterial, or that the accused had reasonable grounds to believe, and did up to the time of issue of the prospectus believe, that the statement was true or that the inclusion or omission was necessary.

3. Does section 36 require a prospectus? No. It applies to any person who knowingly or recklessly makes a false, deceptive or misleading statement, promise or forecast, or deliberately conceals material facts, to induce another into the agreements listed in clauses (a) to (c), which include an agreement for obtaining credit facilities from a bank or financial institution.

4. A man applies for shares as "S. Kulkarni", "Sanjay Kulkarni" and "Sanjay R. Kulkarni". Which provision does that offend? Section 38(1)(b), which covers multiple applications in different names or in different combinations of his name or surname. He is liable for action under section 447.

munotes.in136

Criminal Liability, Fraudulent Inducement and Personation

5. What may a Court order on conviction under section 38, and where does the money go? Disgorgement of any gain made, and seizure and disposal of the securities in the convict's possession: section 38(3). The amount received is credited to the Investor Education and Protection Fund: section 38(4).

6. Define fraud under section 447 and state the punishment for a fraud of fifty lakh rupees not involving public interest. Fraud includes any act, omission, concealment of any fact or abuse of position committed with intent to deceive, to gain undue advantage from, or to injure the interests of the company, its shareholders, its creditors or any other person, whether or not there is any wrongful gain or wrongful loss. Fifty lakh rupees exceeds the ten lakh threshold, so the punishment is imprisonment of not less than six months and up to ten years, and a fine of not less than the amount involved and up to three times it.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in137

Chapter Twenty-Four

Allotment of Securities

Syllabus topic 1.3, labels: "Allotment of securities by company", "Securities to be dealt with in stock exchanges", "Public offer of securities to be in dematerialized form"

In one line

A company may not allot shares to the public until the minimum subscription named in the prospectus has actually come in, it must apply for listing before it makes the offer, and it must issue the securities in electronic form.

In exam wording: section 39 forbids allotment unless the minimum amount stated in the prospectus has been subscribed and the application money received; section 40 requires a company making a public offer to apply for and obtain stock exchange permission before making the offer and to keep the application monies in a separate bank account; and section 29 requires every company making a public offer to issue its securities only in dematerialised form.

Why the law has this at all

Each of the three answers a specific way in which an issue can go wrong.

Minimum subscription, section 39. A company raising money for a factory needs the whole amount. If it raises a third and spends it, the investors have paid for a third of a factory, which is worth nothing. So the Act says: if the minimum does not come in, nobody is allotted anything and the money goes back.

Listing, section 40. An investor in a public issue expects to be able to sell. If the company applies for listing after the money is collected and permission is refused, he holds a security he cannot trade. So the application must be made before the offer, and the monies must sit in a separate account until permission is known.

Dematerialisation, section 29. Paper certificates can be forged, lost and transferred outside the register. Electronic holding through a depository removes all three problems and makes ownership traceable, which is also why it matters for insider trading and for significant beneficial ownership.

Some words this chapter uses

Allotment is the act of appropriating securities to an applicant, which turns his offer into a contract. Minimum subscription is the least amount that must be raised for the issue to proceed, stated in the prospectus. Nominal amount of a security is its face value. Dematerialised means held in electronic form with a depository. A scheduled bank is one listed in the Second Schedule to the Reserve Bank of India Act 1934. Return of allotment is the filing telling the Registrar who was allotted what.

Dematerialised form: section 29

Section 29(1). Notwithstanding anything in any other provision of this Act:

  • (a) every company making public offer; and
  • (b) such other class or classes of companies as may be prescribed,

shall issue the securities only in dematerialised form by complying with the Depositories Act 1996 and the regulations under it.

Note the word that was removed. Clause (b) used to read "such other class or classes of public companies as may be prescribed". The word "public" was omitted by the Companies (Amendment) Act 2019 with effect from 15 August 2019, so the power to prescribe now reaches private companies too.

munotes.in138

Allotment of Securities

Section 29(1A) carries that further: in the case of such class or classes of unlisted companies as may be prescribed, the securities shall be held or transferred only in dematerialised form in the manner laid down in the Depositories Act 1996 and its regulations. Note the difference in verb: sub-section (1) is about issue, sub-section (1A) about holding or transfer.

Section 29(2). Any other company may convert its securities into dematerialised form, or issue them in physical form in accordance with this Act, or in dematerialised form in accordance with the Depositories Act 1996. So for companies outside sub-sections (1) and (1A) it is a choice.

Allotment: section 39

Section 39(1): the minimum subscription rule.

No allotment of any securities of a company offered to the public for subscription shall be made unless the amount stated in the prospectus as the minimum amount has been subscribed and the sums payable on application for the amount so stated have been paid to and received by the company by cheque or other instrument.

Two conditions, both necessary. The minimum has been subscribed, that is, applied for. And the application money for that amount has been paid to and received by the company, and by cheque or other instrument, which excludes cash.

Section 39(2): how much must be paid on application. The amount payable on application on every security shall not be less than five per cent of the nominal amount of the security, or such other percentage or amount as SEBI may specify by regulations.

Section 39(3): what happens if the minimum does not come in. If the stated minimum amount has not been subscribed and the sum payable on application is not received within thirty days from the date of issue of the prospectus, or such other period as SEBI may specify, the amount received under sub-section (1) shall be returned within such time and manner as may be prescribed.

Section 39(4): the return of allotment. Whenever a company having a share capital makes any allotment of securities, it shall file with the Registrar a return of allotment in the prescribed manner.

Section 39(5): the penalty. In case of any default under sub-section (3) or sub-section (4), the company and its officer who is in default shall be liable to a penalty, for each default, of one thousand rupees for each day during which the default continues, or one lakh rupees, whichever is less.

munotes.in139

Allotment of Securities

Note that the penalty attaches to failures under (3) and (4) only, that is, failure to refund and failure to file the return.

Stock exchange dealings: section 40

Section 40(1): apply before you offer. Every company making public offer shall, before making such offer, make an application to one or more recognised stock exchange or exchanges and obtain permission for the securities to be dealt with in that exchange or those exchanges.

Section 40(2): say where. Where a prospectus states that such an application has been made, the prospectus shall also state the name or names of the stock exchange in which the securities shall be dealt with.

Section 40(3): the separate account. All monies received on application from the public for subscription to the securities shall be kept in a separate bank account in a scheduled bank and shall not be utilised for any purpose other than:

  • (a) for adjustment against allotment of securities, where the securities have been permitted to be dealt with in the stock exchange specified in the prospectus; or
  • (b) for the repayment of monies within the time specified by SEBI, received from applicants in pursuance of the prospectus, where the company is for any other reason unable to allot securities.

Read (a) and (b) together and the design is clear: the money may be used only if listing permission has come, and must otherwise be returned. There is no third option.

Section 40(4): no contracting out. Any condition purporting to require or bind any applicant for securities to waive compliance with any of the requirements of this section shall be void. So a clause in an application form asking the applicant to give up these protections is worth nothing.

Section 40(5): the penalty. On default:

  • the company shall be punishable with a fine of not less than five lakh rupees and up to fifty lakh rupees; and
  • every officer of the company who is in default shall be punishable with a fine of not less than fifty thousand rupees and up to three lakh rupees.

Section 40(6): commission. A company may pay commission to any person in connection with the subscription to its securities, subject to such conditions as may be prescribed. So underwriting and brokerage commission are lawful, within the prescribed conditions.

A worked example

Latur Solar Limited issues a prospectus on 1 October 2026 offering forty crore rupees of equity, stating a minimum subscription of thirty crore rupees. Each share has a nominal value of ten rupees.

Before the offer. Under section 40(1) the company must already have applied to one or more recognised stock exchanges and obtained permission for the securities to be dealt with. The prospectus states that the application has been made and names the exchanges, as section 40(2) requires. Under section 29(1)(a), being a company making a public offer, it must issue the securities only in dematerialised form under the Depositories Act 1996.

munotes.in140

Allotment of Securities

Application money. Under section 39(2) the amount payable on application on each share must be at least five per cent of ten rupees, that is fifty paise, unless SEBI has specified otherwise.

The money comes in. All application monies go into a separate bank account in a scheduled bank under section 40(3) and may be touched only for adjustment against allotment once listing permission is in hand, or for repayment.

Case one, the issue succeeds. Applications for thirty four crore rupees are received and the application money is paid by cheque. The minimum of thirty crore has been subscribed and the money received, so section 39(1) is satisfied and the company may allot. It then files a return of allotment with the Registrar under section 39(4).

Case two, the issue fails. Only twenty two crore rupees is subscribed and by 31 October 2026, thirty days from the date of issue of the prospectus, the balance has not come in. Under section 39(3) the amount received must be returned in the prescribed time and manner. If the company delays, section 39(5) imposes on the company and every officer in default a penalty of one thousand rupees a day, or one lakh rupees, whichever is less, for each default.

Case three, listing is refused. The exchange declines permission. The money in the separate account cannot be used for adjustment against allotment, because clause (a) of section 40(3) applies only where the securities have been permitted to be dealt with. It must be repaid under clause (b) within the time SEBI specifies. A clause in the application form by which applicants purported to waive this is void under section 40(4). Default costs the company five to fifty lakh rupees and every officer in default fifty thousand to three lakh rupees under section 40(5).

Distinctions that carry marks

Section 39, minimum subscriptionSection 40, stock exchange
What must happen, and whenThe minimum stated in the prospectus must be subscribed and received before allotmentListing must be applied for and permitted before the offer is made
Money held howNot addressed by section 39Separate account in a scheduled bank, section 40(3)
If it failsRefund within the prescribed time, section 39(3)Repay within the time SEBI specifies, section 40(3)(b)
WaiverNot addressedVoid, section 40(4)
PenaltyOne thousand rupees a day or one lakh rupees, whichever is less, for defaults under (3) and (4)Company five to fifty lakh rupees; officer in default fifty thousand to three lakh rupees
munotes.in141

Allotment of Securities

Public offerPrivate placement
Minimum subscriptionSection 39(1) appliesNot applicable
ListingSection 40(1) appliesNot applicable
Dematerialised issueCompulsory, section 29(1)(a)Only if prescribed
Return of allotmentSection 39(4), prescribed mannerSection 42(8), within fifteen days, with a complete list of allottees

What this does NOT mean

It does not mean a company can allot as soon as the applications add up. The application money for the minimum amount must actually have been paid to and received by the company, and not in cash.

It does not mean listing permission can be sought afterwards. Section 40(1) requires the application to be made and permission obtained before making the offer.

It does not mean the company may use the money while listing is pending. Section 40(3)(a) permits use only where the securities have been permitted to be dealt with.

It does not mean dematerialisation is only for listed companies. Section 29(1)(a) covers every company making a public offer, and since 15 August 2019 the power to prescribe under clause (b) is no longer limited to public companies.

Quick revision

  • Section 29(1): every company making a public offer, and such other classes as may be prescribed, shall issue securities only in dematerialised form under the Depositories Act 1996. The word "public" was omitted from clause (b) w.e.f. 15 August 2019. 29(1A): prescribed classes of unlisted companies must hold or transfer only in demat form. 29(2): others may choose.
  • Section 39(1): no allotment unless the minimum amount stated in the prospectus is subscribed and the application money received by cheque or other instrument, not cash.
  • 39(2): application money at least five per cent of nominal value, or as SEBI specifies.
  • 39(3): if not received within thirty days of the issue of the prospectus, or as SEBI specifies, the money must be returned.
  • 39(4): return of allotment to the Registrar whenever a company having share capital allots.
  • 39(5): default under (3) or (4) costs one thousand rupees a day or one lakh rupees, whichever is less, for each default, on the company and the officer in default.
  • Section 40(1) and (2): apply for and obtain stock exchange permission before making the offer, and name the exchanges in the prospectus.
  • 40(3): monies in a separate account in a scheduled bank, usable only for adjustment against allotment where permission has been given, or for repayment.
  • 40(4): any waiver is void. 40(5): company five to fifty lakh rupees; officer in default fifty thousand to three lakh rupees. 40(6): commission payable subject to prescribed conditions.
munotes.in142

Allotment of Securities

Test yourself

1. When may a company allot securities offered to the public? Only when the amount stated in the prospectus as the minimum amount has been subscribed, and the sums payable on application for that amount have been paid to and received by the company by cheque or other instrument: section 39(1). Cash is excluded.

2. What is the minimum application money per security? Not less than five per cent of the nominal amount of the security, or such other percentage or amount as SEBI may specify: section 39(2).

3. The minimum subscription is not received within thirty days. What follows? The amount received must be returned within such time and manner as may be prescribed: section 39(3). Default attracts a penalty of one thousand rupees for each day, or one lakh rupees, whichever is less, on the company and every officer in default: section 39(5).

4. When must a company apply for listing? Before making the public offer. Section 40(1) requires it to apply to one or more recognised stock exchanges and obtain permission for the securities to be dealt with, before making the offer.

5. For what may the monies in the separate account be used? Only for adjustment against allotment where the securities have been permitted to be dealt with in the exchange specified in the prospectus, or for repayment where the company is for any other reason unable to allot: section 40(3).

6. An application form says the applicant waives the requirements of section 40. Is that effective? No. Section 40(4) makes void any condition purporting to require or bind an applicant to waive compliance with any requirement of the section.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in143

Chapter Twenty-Five

Private Placement and Global Depository Receipts

Syllabus topic 1.3, label: "Private placement"

In one line

A private placement is an offer of securities to a small group of named people chosen by the Board, made without a prospectus and without advertising, and if the company exceeds the permitted number the whole thing is treated as a public offer.

In exam wording: section 42 permits a company to make a private placement of securities to a select group of identified persons not exceeding fifty, or such higher number as may be prescribed, in a financial year, excluding qualified institutional buyers and employees offered securities under an employees stock option scheme, by a private placement offer cum application carrying no right of renunciation, without any public advertisement.

Why the law has this at all

A company often needs money from a handful of investors who know exactly what they are buying: a venture fund, a strategic partner, a bank. Forcing it to publish a prospectus for that would be pointless expense, and the investors are perfectly able to demand information for themselves.

But the moment the group stops being small, the transaction is a public offer in everything but name, and the public needs a prospectus. So the whole architecture of section 42 is about holding the line: a number, a named list, a ban on advertising, a ban on renunciation, and a deeming provision for anybody who crosses it.

The reason the ban on renunciation matters is subtle and is worth knowing. If an identified person could pass his entitlement to somebody else, the company could offer to fifty people who each renounce to a hundred more, and the fifty person limit would mean nothing.

Some words this chapter uses

Identified persons are those named by the Board under section 42(2). A qualified institutional buyer is defined by Explanation II by reference to SEBI's Issue of Capital and Disclosure Requirements Regulations 2009. Renunciation is giving up your entitlement in favour of another person. A private placement offer cum application is the single combined document section 42(3) requires. A depository receipt is an instrument issued abroad representing shares held in India.

Global depository receipts: section 41

Short, and easily learned.

A company may, after passing a special resolution in its general meeting, issue depository receipts in any foreign country in such manner, and subject to such conditions, as may be prescribed.

Three elements: a special resolution, an issue in any foreign country, and the manner and conditions as may be prescribed. It is the route by which Indian companies raise money from foreign investors who want an instrument governed by their own market's practice rather than Indian shares directly.

munotes.in144

Private Placement and Global Depository Receipts

The permitted group: section 42(1), (2) and (3)

Section 42(1). A company may, subject to the provisions of this section, make a private placement of securities.

Section 42(2): the number. A private placement shall be made only to a select group of persons who have been identified by the Board, called identified persons, whose number shall not exceed fifty or such higher number as may be prescribed, excluding the qualified institutional buyers and employees of the company being offered securities under a scheme of employees stock option in terms of section 62(1)(b), in a financial year, subject to such conditions as may be prescribed.

Four things to hold on to. The persons must be identified by the Board, so the company cannot advertise for takers. The number is fifty or such higher number as prescribed. Qualified institutional buyers and ESOP employees are excluded from the count, which is why a company can place with several institutions without eating into its allowance. And the count is per financial year, not per issue.

Section 42(3): the document. A company making a private placement shall issue a private placement offer and application in the prescribed form and manner to identified persons whose names and addresses are recorded by the company in the prescribed manner.

The proviso is the anti-avoidance rule: the private placement offer and application shall not carry any right of renunciation.

Explanation I defines it: private placement means any offer or invitation to subscribe or issue of securities to a select group of persons by a company, other than by way of public offer, through private placement offer cum application, which satisfies the conditions specified in this section.

Explanation II defines a qualified institutional buyer by reference to SEBI's Issue of Capital and Disclosure Requirements Regulations 2009, as amended.

Explanation III is the deeming rule and it is drafted very widely. If a company, listed or unlisted, makes an offer to allot, or invites subscription, or allots, or enters into an agreement to allot, securities to more than the prescribed number of persons, whether the payment has been received or not, and whether the company intends to list or not, in or outside India, the same shall be deemed to be an offer to the public and shall be governed by Part I of this Chapter, that is, the prospectus rules.

Read the three "whethers". They close every escape route a clever adviser might look for.

The money: section 42(4), (5) and (6)

Section 42(4): how it is paid. Every identified person willing to subscribe shall apply in the private placement and application issued to him, with the subscription money paid by cheque or demand draft or other banking channel and not by cash.

munotes.in145

Private Placement and Global Depository Receipts

The proviso: a company shall not utilise monies raised through private placement unless allotment is made and the return of allotment is filed with the Registrar under sub-section (8). So the money is frozen until the paperwork is done.

Section 42(5): one offer at a time. No fresh offer or invitation shall be made unless the allotments with respect to any offer or invitation made earlier have been completed, or that offer or invitation has been withdrawn or abandoned.

The proviso softens it: subject to the maximum number of identified persons in sub-section (2), a company may at any time make more than one issue of securities to such class of identified persons as may be prescribed.

Section 42(6): sixty days, then fifteen, then interest. A company making an offer under this section shall allot its securities within sixty days from the date of receipt of the application money. If it cannot, it shall repay the application money within fifteen days from the expiry of the sixty days. If it fails to repay within that period, it is liable to repay the money with interest at twelve per cent per annum from the expiry of the sixtieth day.

The proviso requires the monies received on application to be kept in a separate bank account in a scheduled bank, usable only (a) for adjustment against allotment, or (b) for repayment where the company is unable to allot. That mirrors section 40(3) for public offers.

No advertising: section 42(7)

No company issuing securities under this section shall release any public advertisements or utilise any media, marketing or distribution channels or agents to inform the public at large about such an issue.

Four prohibited routes, and the last one matters: agents. A company cannot keep its own hands clean by hiring somebody to spread the word.

Filing and penalties: section 42(8), (9), (10) and (11)

Section 42(8): the return of allotment. A company making any allotment under this section shall file with the Registrar a return of allotment within fifteen days from the date of the allotment, in the prescribed manner, including a complete list of all allottees, with their full names, addresses, number of securities allotted and such other relevant information as may be prescribed.

Section 42(9): late return. On default in filing within the prescribed period, the company, its promoters and directors shall be liable to a penalty for each default of one thousand rupees for each day the default continues, not exceeding twenty-five lakh rupees.

Section 42(10): offer or acceptance in contravention. Subject to sub-section (11), if a company makes an offer or accepts monies in contravention of this section, the company, its promoters and directors shall be liable to a penalty which may extend to the amount raised through the private placement or two crore rupees, whichever is lower, and the company shall also refund all monies with interest as specified in sub-section (6) to subscribers within thirty days of the order imposing the penalty.

munotes.in146

Private Placement and Global Depository Receipts

Section 42(11): the deeming provision. Notwithstanding sub-sections (9) and (10), any private placement issue not made in compliance with sub-section (2) shall be deemed to be a public offer, and all the provisions of this Act, the Securities Contracts (Regulation) Act 1956 and the SEBI Act 1992 shall be applicable.

That is the real sanction. Breaking the numerical limit does not merely cost a penalty. It converts the transaction into a public offer retrospectively, so the company is treated as having made a public offer without a prospectus, without listing permission under section 40, and without any of the protections Part I requires, with the criminal and civil consequences that follow.

A worked example

Ratnagiri Marine Foods Private Limited wants eighteen crore rupees.

Route. As a private company it cannot make a public offer, so under section 23(2)(b) its choices are a rights issue or a private placement under section 42.

The list. The Board identifies thirty two investors by name and records their names and addresses. It also approaches two mutual funds, which are qualified institutional buyers, and offers shares to eleven employees under an employees stock option scheme under section 62(1)(b). Neither the funds nor the employees count towards the fifty, by the express exclusion in section 42(2), so the company has used thirty two of its allowance for that financial year.

The document. A private placement offer and application goes to each identified person. It carries no right of renunciation, by the proviso to section 42(3). No advertisement is placed, no agent is engaged, and no marketing channel is used, because section 42(7) forbids all of it.

The money. Subscriptions come in by cheque and bank transfer, not cash, into a separate account in a scheduled bank. The company cannot touch the money until allotment is made and the return of allotment is filed, by the proviso to section 42(4).

The clock. Application money is received on 1 November 2026. Allotment must be made within sixty days, by 31 December 2026. If it is not, the money must be repaid within fifteen days of that, by 15 January 2027. If the company still fails, it must repay with interest at twelve per cent per annum from 31 December 2026.

munotes.in147

Private Placement and Global Depository Receipts

The filing. Allotment is made on 20 December 2026, so the return of allotment, with the full names, addresses and number of securities of every allottee, must be filed by 4 January 2027. A late filing costs the company, its promoters and its directors one thousand rupees a day, capped at twenty-five lakh rupees.

Now change one fact. Suppose the company had offered to sixty three identified persons in the same financial year, ignoring the limit. Section 42(11) applies notwithstanding the penalties: the issue is deemed to be a public offer, and the whole of this Act, the Securities Contracts (Regulation) Act 1956 and the SEBI Act 1992 apply to it. The company, a private company, is then in the position of having made a public offer it was never permitted to make, in breach of section 23(2) and of its own articles under section 2(68), with no prospectus, no section 40 listing application and no separate account compliance.

And under section 42(10) the company, its promoters and its directors face a penalty of up to the amount raised or two crore rupees, whichever is lower, and the company must refund all monies with interest within thirty days of the order.

Distinctions that carry marks

Public offerPrivate placement
Section23(1)(a), Part I of Chapter III23(1)(b), 23(2)(b), section 42
DocumentProspectus, section 26Private placement offer cum application, section 42(3)
Who is invitedThe public at largeIdentified persons named by the Board
NumberUnlimitedFifty or as prescribed, per financial year, excluding QIBs and ESOP employees
AdvertisingPermitted, section 30Prohibited, section 42(7)
RenunciationPermitted in a rights issueProhibited, proviso to section 42(3)
Available to a private companyNoYes
Return of allotmentSection 39(4), prescribed mannerSection 42(8), fifteen days, full list of allottees
Breach of the limitNot applicableDeemed a public offer, section 42(11)

What this does NOT mean

It does not mean fifty is the number of investors. Qualified institutional buyers and employees offered securities under an ESOP are excluded from the count.

It does not mean the limit is per issue. It is per financial year.

It does not mean the company may spend the money on allotment. The proviso to section 42(4) also requires the return of allotment to be filed before the monies may be utilised.

It does not mean a breach is just a fine. Section 42(11) converts a non compliant placement into a public offer, which is a far larger problem than the penalty in section 42(10).

Quick revision

  • Section 41: depository receipts in any foreign country, after a special resolution, in the prescribed manner and on prescribed conditions.
  • 42(2): identified by the Board; not more than fifty or as prescribed; excluding QIBs and ESOP employees; per financial year.
  • 42(3): private placement offer and application to identified persons whose names and addresses are recorded; no right of renunciation. Explanation III: exceeding the number, whether or not paid, whether or not listing is intended, is deemed an offer to the public.
  • 42(4): payment by cheque, demand draft or banking channel, not cash; monies not to be used until allotment is made and the return filed.
  • 42(5): no fresh offer until earlier allotments are complete, or the offer is withdrawn or abandoned.
  • 42(6): allot within sixty days; else repay within fifteen days; else twelve per cent per annum from the sixtieth day. Separate account in a scheduled bank.
  • 42(7): no public advertisement, media, marketing or distribution channels or agents.
  • 42(8): return of allotment within fifteen days, with a complete list of allottees.
  • 42(9): late return, one thousand rupees a day, cap twenty-five lakh rupees, on the company, promoters and directors.
  • 42(10): offer or acceptance in contravention, penalty up to the amount raised or two crore rupees, whichever is lower, plus refund with interest within thirty days of the order.
  • 42(11): non compliance with sub-section (2) means the issue is deemed a public offer, and this Act, the SCRA 1956 and the SEBI Act 1992 all apply.
munotes.in148

Private Placement and Global Depository Receipts

Test yourself

1. To how many persons may a private placement be made? A select group of persons identified by the Board, not exceeding fifty or such higher number as may be prescribed, in a financial year, excluding qualified institutional buyers and employees offered securities under an employees stock option scheme under section 62(1)(b): section 42(2).

2. May the offer be renounced in favour of somebody else? No. The proviso to section 42(3) provides that the private placement offer and application shall not carry any right of renunciation.

3. When may the company use the money it raises? Only after allotment is made and the return of allotment is filed with the Registrar under section 42(8): proviso to section 42(4). Until then the monies stay in a separate account in a scheduled bank.

4. What is the timetable for allotment and refund? Allotment within sixty days of receipt of the application money; failing that, repayment within fifteen days of the expiry of the sixty; failing that, repayment with interest at twelve per cent per annum from the expiry of the sixtieth day: section 42(6).

5. What happens if a company places securities with more than the permitted number of persons? Section 42(11) applies notwithstanding the penalty provisions: the issue is deemed to be a public offer, and all the provisions of this Act, the Securities Contracts (Regulation) Act 1956 and the SEBI Act 1992 become applicable.

munotes.in149

Private Placement and Global Depository Receipts

6. What is required before a company may issue global depository receipts? A special resolution passed in general meeting; the issue is then made in any foreign country in such manner and subject to such conditions as may be prescribed: section 41.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in150

Chapter Twenty-Six

Kinds of Share Capital and the Nature of a Share

Syllabus topic 1.4, labels: "Kinds of share capital", "Nature of shares or debentures", "Equity Shares with Differential Voting Rights"

In one line

A company limited by shares has only two kinds of share capital, equity and preference, and a share of either kind is movable property that can be sold.

In exam wording: section 43 provides that the share capital of a company limited by shares shall be of two kinds, equity share capital, either with voting rights or with differential rights as to dividend, voting or otherwise in accordance with such rules as may be prescribed, and preference share capital. Section 44 provides that shares, debentures or other interest of any member are movable property transferable in the manner provided by the articles.

Why the law has this at all

Different investors want different things from the same company.

Some want control and upside: a say in who runs it and everything left over after the creditors are paid. Others want certainty: a fixed return, paid before anybody else gets anything, and their capital back before the ordinary shareholders. A company that could offer only one kind of share would have to turn one of those investors away.

So the Act allows exactly two kinds and defines each by what it prefers. Preference share capital is capital that has a preferential right as to dividend, or as to repayment of capital, or both. Equity share capital is everything else, defined residually.

Why only two? Because a longer list would let promoters invent instruments that look like shares, carry no risk, and dilute everybody. Two kinds, with the contents of each policed by the Act and the rules, is the compromise.

Some words this chapter uses

Share capital is the money raised by issuing shares. A preferential right is a right to be paid before somebody else. Participating preference shares share in the surplus as well as taking their preference. Cumulative preference shares carry unpaid dividends forward. A poll is a vote counted by shares rather than by heads. Nominal or face value is the amount printed on the share.

The two kinds: section 43

The share capital of a company limited by shares shall be of two kinds, namely:

(a) equity share capital: (i) with voting rights; or (ii) with differential rights as to dividend, voting or otherwise in accordance with such rules as may be prescribed; and

(b) preference share capital.

The proviso protects vested rights: nothing in the Act shall affect the rights of preference shareholders who are entitled to participate in the proceeds of winding up before the commencement of this Act.

Note first that section 43 applies to a company limited by shares. A guarantee company without share capital has none of this.

munotes.in151

Kinds of Share Capital and the Nature of a Share

Equity share capital, and shares with differential rights

Explanation (i) defines it residually: all share capital which is not preference share capital. So you identify preference capital first and everything left is equity.

Clause (a)(ii) is MU's separate label, "Equity Shares with Differential Voting Rights". Equity shares may carry differential rights as to dividend, voting or otherwise, in accordance with such rules as may be prescribed.

Three points to make about them. The differential may be as to dividend, as to voting, or otherwise, so the category is wider than the popular name suggests. The conditions are in the rules, not in the section, so a company cannot simply invent a class. And the commercial reason for them is control: a founder can raise equity capital without surrendering proportionate control, by issuing shares with lower voting rights, or can attract income investors with shares carrying a higher dividend and fewer votes.

Preference share capital

Explanation (ii) defines it as that part of the issued share capital which carries or would carry a preferential right with respect to:

  • (a) payment of dividend, either as a fixed amount or an amount calculated at a fixed rate, which may be free of or subject to income tax; and
  • (b) repayment, in the case of a winding up or repayment of capital, of the amount of the share capital paid-up or deemed to have been paid-up, whether or not there is a preferential right to payment of any fixed premium or premium on any fixed scale specified in the memorandum or articles.

Explanation (iii): participating preference shares are still preference shares. Capital shall be deemed to be preference capital notwithstanding that it is entitled to either or both of:

  • (a) in respect of dividends, in addition to its preferential right, a right to participate, whether fully or to a limited extent, with capital not entitled to the preferential right; and
  • (b) in respect of capital, in addition to the preferential right to repayment on winding up, a right to participate, whether fully or to a limited extent, in any surplus remaining after the entire capital has been repaid.

That Explanation exists to stop an argument. A shareholder who has both a preference and a share of the surplus looks like an equity holder, and Explanation (iii) says he is not: he remains a preference shareholder.

The nature of a share: sections 44 and 45

Section 44.

The shares or debentures or other interest of any member in a company shall be movable property transferable in the manner provided by the articles of the company.

Movable property, so it passes like goods and not like land. Transferable, which is what gives an investor an exit. In the manner provided by the articles, which is what lets a private company restrict transfer under section 2(68) while remaining a company.

munotes.in152

Kinds of Share Capital and the Nature of a Share

And notice the three words "or other interest". The section is not confined to shares and debentures; it covers whatever interest a member has.

Section 45: numbering.

Every share in a company having a share capital shall be distinguished by its distinctive number.

The proviso disapplies it for a share held by a person whose name is entered as holder of beneficial interest in such share in the records of a depository, that is, a dematerialised share. Since section 29 makes dematerialisation compulsory for public offers, the proviso now covers most shares in the market, and distinctive numbers survive mainly in unlisted companies holding physical certificates.

What a share actually is. Putting sections 43, 44 and 45 together: a share is a unit of the share capital, measured in money, carrying a bundle of rights against the company (to vote, to dividend when declared, to a share in the surplus on winding up), constituting movable property, transferable as the articles provide, and identified by a distinctive number unless held in electronic form.

Voting rights: section 47

MU does not label this separately but it is the practical meaning of the two kinds, so it belongs here.

Section 47(1). Subject to section 43, section 50(2) and section 188(1):

  • (a) every member of a company limited by shares holding equity share capital shall have a right to vote on every resolution placed before the company; and
  • (b) his voting right on a poll shall be in proportion to his share in the paid-up equity share capital.

The opening words matter. Section 43 lets equity shares carry differential voting rights, so 47(1) yields to a validly created class. Section 50(2) deals with a member who has paid calls in advance and provides that he does not get extra voting rights for it. Section 188(1) stops an interested related party voting on its own contract.

Section 47(2): preference shareholders vote only sometimes. Every member holding preference share capital shall, in respect of that capital, have a right to vote only on resolutions which directly affect the rights attached to his preference shares, and on any resolution for the winding up of the company or for the repayment or reduction of its equity or preference share capital. His voting right on a poll is in proportion to his share in the paid-up preference share capital.

The first proviso fixes the relative weight: the proportion of the voting rights of equity shareholders to those of preference shareholders shall be in the same proportion as the paid-up capital in respect of the equity shares bears to the paid-up capital in respect of the preference shares.

munotes.in153

Kinds of Share Capital and the Nature of a Share

The second proviso is the one to remember. Where the dividend in respect of a class of preference shares has not been paid for a period of two years or more, that class shall have a right to vote on all the resolutions placed before the company.

That is the bargain stated plainly. A preference shareholder gives up his vote in exchange for a preferential dividend. If the dividend stops for two years, the consideration has failed and the vote comes back.

A worked example

Belgaum Bearings Limited has a paid-up capital of three crore rupees: two crore rupees of equity shares of ten rupees each, and one crore rupees of nine per cent preference shares of one hundred rupees each.

Kinds. Under section 43 there are exactly two kinds and both are present. The preference shares carry a preferential right to a dividend at a fixed rate of nine per cent and to repayment of capital on winding up, so they satisfy Explanation (ii). The rest is equity share capital by Explanation (i), because it is not preference capital.

Participating shares. Suppose the preference shares also entitle their holders to share in any surplus after all capital is repaid. By Explanation (iii)(b) they are still preference shares, notwithstanding that additional right.

Differential rights. The founders want to raise sixty lakh rupees without losing control. They issue equity shares with differential rights under section 43(a)(ii), carrying a higher dividend and one vote for every ten shares, in accordance with the prescribed rules.

Voting in an ordinary year. On a resolution to appoint an auditor, the equity shareholders vote, in proportion to their paid-up equity capital on a poll, under section 47(1). The preference shareholders do not, because the resolution does not directly affect the rights attached to their shares.

Voting on a capital reduction. Now the company proposes to reduce its share capital. The preference shareholders do vote, because section 47(2) expressly covers a resolution for the repayment or reduction of equity or preference share capital. Their votes on a poll are in proportion to their paid-up preference capital, and the relative weight of the two classes is fixed by the first proviso: two crore to one crore, so two to one.

Two bad years. The company pays no preference dividend for two years. By the second proviso to section 47(2) the preference shareholders now have a right to vote on all resolutions placed before the company, not merely those affecting their own class.

munotes.in154

Kinds of Share Capital and the Nature of a Share

Transfer. A preference shareholder sells. His shares are movable property transferable in the manner provided by the articles under section 44, and if the shares are in physical form each carries a distinctive number under section 45. Had they been held with a depository, the proviso to section 45 would disapply the numbering requirement.

Distinctions that carry marks

Equity share capitalPreference share capital
DefinitionAll share capital which is not preference capital, Explanation (i)Capital carrying a preferential right to dividend and to repayment of capital, Explanation (ii)
DividendWhatever is declared, after preferenceFixed amount or fixed rate, paid first
Repayment on winding upAfter preference capitalBefore equity capital
VotingOn every resolution, section 47(1)Only on resolutions directly affecting their rights, and on winding up or repayment or reduction of capital, section 47(2)
Voting if dividend unpaid two yearsNot applicableVotes on all resolutions, second proviso to section 47(2)
Differential rightsPermitted, section 43(a)(ii), as prescribedNot applicable
ShareDebenture
Holder isA member and part ownerA creditor
ReturnDividend, only out of profitsInterest, whether or not there are profits
VotingYes, subject to section 47No
Priority on winding upLastBefore members
NatureBoth are movable property, transferable in the manner provided by the articles, section 44

What this does NOT mean

It does not mean there are many kinds of share capital. Section 43 says two. Everything else is a variety within one of the two.

It does not mean participating preference shares are equity. Explanation (iii) expressly deems them preference capital.

It does not mean every equity share carries one vote. Section 43(a)(ii) permits differential rights as to voting, and section 47(1) is expressly subject to section 43.

It does not mean preference shareholders never vote. They vote on resolutions directly affecting their rights, on winding up, on repayment or reduction of capital, and on everything once the dividend has been unpaid for two years.

Quick revision

  • Section 43: two kinds only. (a) equity, with voting rights or with differential rights as to dividend, voting or otherwise as prescribed; (b) preference.
  • Explanation (i): equity is all capital that is not preference.
  • Explanation (ii): preference carries a preferential right to dividend at a fixed amount or fixed rate and to repayment of capital on winding up.
  • Explanation (iii): participating shares are still preference shares.
  • Section 44: shares, debentures or other interest are movable property transferable in the manner provided by the articles.
  • Section 45: every share must have a distinctive number, except a share held in a depository.
  • Section 47(1): equity holders vote on every resolution; on a poll, in proportion to paid-up equity capital. Subject to sections 43, 50(2) and 188(1).
  • Section 47(2): preference holders vote only on resolutions directly affecting their rights, and on winding up or repayment or reduction of capital. Relative weight in proportion to paid-up capital of each class. If the dividend is unpaid for two years or more, they vote on all resolutions.
munotes.in155

Kinds of Share Capital and the Nature of a Share

Test yourself

1. What are the kinds of share capital? Two: equity share capital, with voting rights or with differential rights as to dividend, voting or otherwise in accordance with the prescribed rules; and preference share capital: section 43.

2. How is preference share capital defined? As that part of the issued share capital carrying a preferential right to payment of dividend, either as a fixed amount or at a fixed rate, and to repayment on a winding up or repayment of capital of the amount paid-up or deemed paid-up: Explanation (ii) to section 43.

3. Are participating preference shares equity shares? No. Explanation (iii) to section 43 provides that capital is deemed preference capital notwithstanding a right to participate in dividends beyond the preference, or in the surplus after all capital is repaid.

4. What is the nature of a share? Movable property, transferable in the manner provided by the articles of the company: section 44. Every share in a company having share capital must carry a distinctive number, unless held in dematerialised form with a depository: section 45.

5. When may preference shareholders vote? On resolutions that directly affect the rights attached to their preference shares, and on any resolution for winding up or for the repayment or reduction of the company's equity or preference share capital: section 47(2). Their voting right on a poll is in proportion to their paid-up preference capital.

6. What happens if a preference dividend is not paid for two years? By the second proviso to section 47(2) that class of preference shareholders acquires a right to vote on all the resolutions placed before the company.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in156

Chapter Twenty-Seven

Issue and Redemption of Preference Shares

Syllabus topic 1.4, label: "Issue and Redemption of Preference Shares"

In one line

Preference shares must be redeemable within twenty years, can be redeemed only out of profits or a fresh issue, and only if they are fully paid.

In exam wording: section 55(1) prohibits a company limited by shares from issuing irredeemable preference shares. Section 55(2) permits redeemable preference shares, if authorised by the articles, redeemable within a period not exceeding twenty years, with an exception for infrastructure projects, and subject to four conditions in the second proviso, of which the most important are that redemption must be out of profits available for dividend or out of the proceeds of a fresh issue, that the shares must be fully paid, and that a Capital Redemption Reserve Account must be created where profits are used.

Why the law has this at all

A preference share is a hybrid. It looks like a share, because the holder is a member and the money is capital. It behaves like a loan, because the return is fixed and the capital comes back.

That hybrid quality is useful and it is also dangerous. Useful, because a company can raise money without giving away control and without the fixed obligations of a debt. Dangerous, because if the capital can be handed back at will, the creditors' cushion evaporates. Creditors lend against the capital, and capital that walks out of the door is not a cushion.

So the Act allows redemption but polices the source of the money. Redemption may come only out of profits that could otherwise have been paid out as dividend, or out of the proceeds of a fresh issue. In the first case the shareholders give up a dividend to buy the capital back; in the second, new capital replaces old. Either way the total capital available to creditors does not fall. And where profits are used, an equal sum is locked into a Capital Redemption Reserve Account which is treated as if it were paid-up capital, so it cannot be distributed.

That is the whole design, and an answer that explains it reads far better than one that lists the conditions.

Some words this chapter uses

Redeemable means repayable by the company. Irredeemable means never repayable, so the capital stays out forever. Profits available for dividend are the distributable profits. A fresh issue is a new issue of shares made for the purpose of the redemption. Fully paid means nothing remains unpaid on the share. Premium on redemption is an amount paid over and above the face value when the share is repaid. Pari passu means ranking equally.

The prohibition: section 55(1)

No company limited by shares shall, after the commencement of this Act, issue any preference shares which are irredeemable.

munotes.in157

Issue and Redemption of Preference Shares

Three points. It binds a company limited by shares. It applies to shares issued after the commencement of this Act, so irredeemable preference shares issued long ago under earlier law are untouched, and the proviso to section 43 protects the winding-up rights of such holders. And it is absolute: no resolution, no article and no approval can authorise an irredeemable preference share.

The permission and the twenty year rule: section 55(2)

A company limited by shares may, if so authorised by its articles, issue preference shares which are liable to be redeemed within a period not exceeding twenty years from the date of their issue subject to such conditions as may be prescribed.

Two threshold requirements. The articles must authorise it, so a company whose articles are silent must first alter them under section 14. And redemption must be within twenty years from the date of issue.

The first proviso, infrastructure. A company may issue preference shares for a period exceeding twenty years for infrastructure projects, subject to the redemption of such percentage of shares as may be prescribed on an annual basis at the option of such preferential shareholders.

Read that carefully, because it is often misstated. The exception does not create a perpetual share. It allows a longer term for infrastructure, and it gives the shareholder an annual option to have a prescribed percentage redeemed. The choice is his, not the company's.

The four conditions: the second proviso to section 55(2)

(a) The source of the money. No such shares shall be redeemed except out of the profits of the company which would otherwise be available for dividend, or out of the proceeds of a fresh issue of shares made for the purposes of such redemption.

Two permitted sources, and no third. In particular, redemption may not be made out of borrowed money or out of ordinary capital.

(b) Fully paid. No such shares shall be redeemed unless they are fully paid. A company cannot return capital on a share while part of it is still owed to the company.

(c) The Capital Redemption Reserve Account. Where the shares are redeemed out of profits, there shall out of such profits be transferred a sum equal to the nominal amount of the shares to be redeemed to a reserve called the Capital Redemption Reserve Account, and the provisions of this Act relating to reduction of share capital shall, except as provided in this section, apply as if that Account were paid-up share capital of the company.

This is the sub-clause that makes the whole scheme work. Profits that could have been paid out as dividend are converted into something that is treated as capital, and can be touched only by going through section 66. The creditors' cushion is preserved in substance even though preference shares have gone.

munotes.in158

Issue and Redemption of Preference Shares

Note that (c) applies only where profits are used. Where the redemption is funded by a fresh issue, no transfer is needed, because new capital has already replaced the old.

(d) The premium on redemption. Where a premium is payable on redemption:

  • (i) in the case of such class of companies as may be prescribed, whose financial statements comply with the accounting standards prescribed under section 133, the premium shall be provided for out of the profits of the company, before the shares are redeemed. A further proviso allows the premium on preference shares issued on or before the commencement of this Act by such a company to be provided out of profits or out of the securities premium account.
  • (ii) in any other case, the premium shall be provided for out of the profits of the company or out of the company's securities premium account, before the shares are redeemed.

So the general rule permits the securities premium account to be used, and the prescribed class of companies is confined to profits for shares issued after the Act. Section 52(2)(d) is the matching provision on the securities premium side, permitting that account to be applied in providing for the premium payable on redemption of redeemable preference shares.

A worked example

Sangli Sugars Limited has articles authorising redeemable preference shares.

The issue. On 1 April 2027 it issues two lakh, ten per cent redeemable preference shares of one hundred rupees each, redeemable at par at the end of eight years. That is within twenty years, so section 55(2) is satisfied, and because they are redeemable, section 55(1) is not offended.

Could it have issued them irredeemable? No. Section 55(1) is absolute for a company limited by shares.

Could it have issued them for thirty years? Only for an infrastructure project, under the first proviso, and then the shareholders would have an annual option to have a prescribed percentage redeemed.

Redemption, case one, out of profits. In 2035 the company redeems the whole two crore rupees out of distributable profits. Conditions: the shares must be fully paid, by proviso (b); the money must come from profits which would otherwise be available for dividend, by proviso (a); and a sum equal to the nominal amount redeemed, two crore rupees, must be transferred out of those profits to the Capital Redemption Reserve Account, by proviso (c). That Account is then treated as paid-up share capital, so it can be reduced only under section 66.

munotes.in159

Issue and Redemption of Preference Shares

Redemption, case two, out of a fresh issue. Instead the company issues two crore rupees of new equity for the purposes of the redemption and uses the proceeds. Proviso (a) is satisfied by the second limb. No transfer to the Capital Redemption Reserve Account is required, because the capital has been replaced rather than paid away.

Redemption, case three, out of a bank loan. Not permitted. Proviso (a) allows only profits available for dividend or the proceeds of a fresh issue.

A premium. Suppose the shares are redeemable at a premium of ten rupees each, twenty lakh rupees in all. Under proviso (d)(ii) that premium must be provided for out of profits or out of the securities premium account, before redemption, and section 52(2)(d) expressly allows the securities premium account to be applied for exactly that. If the company falls in the prescribed class under (d)(i), it must use profits for shares issued after the commencement of the Act.

Partly paid shares. Ten thousand of the preference shares have twenty rupees unpaid. Those shares cannot be redeemed until they are fully paid, by proviso (b).

And note the voting consequence. If the company fails to pay the preference dividend for two years or more, the second proviso to section 47(2) gives that class a right to vote on all resolutions, which is a real lever when redemption is being negotiated.

Distinctions that carry marks

Redemption out of profitsRedemption out of a fresh issue
SourceProfits otherwise available for dividendProceeds of a fresh issue made for the purpose
Capital Redemption Reserve AccountRequired, equal to the nominal amount redeemedNot required
Effect on capitalDistributable profit is converted into something treated as capitalNew capital replaces the old
Effect on shareholdersThey forgo a dividendThey are diluted by the new issue
Preference shareDebenture
HolderA memberA creditor
ReturnPreferential dividend, only if there are profitsInterest, payable whether or not there are profits
RepaymentOn redemption, from profits or a fresh issue onlyOn the due date, from any source
Maximum termTwenty years, longer for infrastructureNo statutory limit
VotingLimited, section 47(2), full after two years of unpaid dividendNone
Priority on winding upAfter creditors, before equityBefore all members

What this does NOT mean

It does not mean preference shares must be redeemed within twenty years. They must be liable to be redeemed within that period. The company and the terms decide when within it.

It does not mean infrastructure preference shares are irredeemable. The first proviso allows a longer period, with an annual redemption option for the shareholder of a prescribed percentage.

munotes.in160

Issue and Redemption of Preference Shares

It does not mean a Capital Redemption Reserve is always needed. Only where the redemption is out of profits.

It does not mean the premium can always come from the securities premium account. For a prescribed class of companies whose statements comply with section 133 standards, the premium on shares issued after the commencement of this Act must come out of profits.

Quick revision

  • 55(1): no company limited by shares may issue irredeemable preference shares after the commencement of this Act. Absolute.
  • 55(2): redeemable preference shares, if authorised by the articles, redeemable within twenty years of issue, on prescribed conditions.
  • First proviso: longer than twenty years for infrastructure projects, with annual redemption of a prescribed percentage at the shareholder's option.
  • Second proviso, four conditions:
  • (a) redeem only out of profits otherwise available for dividend or the proceeds of a fresh issue made for the purpose;
  • (b) only if the shares are fully paid;
  • (c) where profits are used, transfer a sum equal to the nominal amount to the Capital Redemption Reserve Account, which is treated as paid-up share capital;
  • (d) the premium on redemption is provided before redemption, out of profits for a prescribed class under section 133, and otherwise out of profits or the securities premium account.
  • Section 52(2)(d) permits the securities premium account to be applied to that premium.
  • Section 47(2) second proviso: dividend unpaid for two years gives the class a vote on all resolutions.

Test yourself

1. May a company issue irredeemable preference shares? No. Section 55(1) prohibits a company limited by shares from issuing any irredeemable preference shares after the commencement of this Act.

2. What is the maximum period for redemption, and what is the exception? Twenty years from the date of issue: section 55(2). The exception, in the first proviso, is for infrastructure projects, where a longer period is permitted subject to redemption of such percentage as may be prescribed on an annual basis at the option of the preference shareholders.

3. Out of what may preference shares be redeemed? Only out of the profits of the company which would otherwise be available for dividend, or out of the proceeds of a fresh issue of shares made for the purposes of the redemption: proviso (a) to section 55(2).

4. When must a Capital Redemption Reserve Account be created, and what is its effect? Where the shares are redeemed out of profits. A sum equal to the nominal amount of the shares redeemed is transferred out of those profits to the Account, and the provisions relating to reduction of share capital apply as if the Account were paid-up share capital: proviso (c).

munotes.in161

Issue and Redemption of Preference Shares

5. Can partly paid preference shares be redeemed? No. Proviso (b) to section 55(2) requires that no such shares shall be redeemed unless they are fully paid.

6. Out of what may the premium on redemption be provided? Generally out of the profits of the company or the securities premium account, before redemption: proviso (d)(ii), and section 52(2)(d) permits the latter. For a prescribed class of companies whose financial statements comply with the section 133 standards, it must come out of profits for shares issued after the commencement of this Act.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in162

Chapter Twenty-Eight

Sweat Equity, Share Premium and the Ban on Shares at a Discount

Syllabus topic 1.4, labels: "Issue of sweat equity shares", "Application of premiums received on issue of shares", "Prohibition on issue of shares at discount"

In one line

A company may issue shares above their face value and must lock the excess away, may not issue them below face value except in two situations, and may issue them for work done rather than for money.

In exam wording: section 52 requires the premium on shares issued at a premium to be transferred to a securities premium account, which is treated as paid-up share capital, and lists the purposes for which it may be applied. Section 53 prohibits the issue of shares at a discount and makes any such share void, save for sweat equity under section 54 and a conversion of debt into shares under section 53(2A). Section 54 permits sweat equity shares on four conditions.

Why the law has this at all

All three rules protect the same thing: the integrity of the stated capital.

A company's balance sheet says its shares have a face value of ten rupees each. Creditors and investors read that as a statement about the money that came in.

If shares could be issued below face value, the statement would be false. A company showing one crore rupees of ten rupee shares might have received only forty lakh rupees. Hence section 53.

If shares are issued above face value, the extra is genuinely money the company received and it must not be treated as ordinary profit and paid out as dividend. It is capital in substance. Hence section 52, which locks it into an account treated as paid-up share capital and lists the narrow purposes for which it may be used.

And sweat equity is the recognised exception. A person who gives the company valuable know-how, or works for years for nothing, has contributed something real. The Act lets that be paid for in shares, but only under controls, because otherwise "sweat equity" becomes a name for issuing free shares to insiders.

Some words this chapter uses

At par means at face value. At a premium means above face value; at a discount means below it. The securities premium account is the account created by section 52(1). Sweat equity shares are defined in section 2(88). Preliminary expenses are the costs of forming the company. A statutory resolution plan is a plan approved under the insolvency legislation. Pari passu means ranking equally.

The securities premium account: section 52

Section 52(1): the lock.

Where a company issues shares at a premium, whether for cash or otherwise, a sum equal to the aggregate amount of the premium received on those shares shall be transferred to a "securities premium account" and the provisions of this Act relating to reduction of share capital of a company shall, except as provided in this section, apply as if the securities premium account were the paid-up share capital of the company.

munotes.in163

Sweat Equity, Share Premium and the Ban on Shares at a Discount

"Whether for cash or otherwise" matters: a premium on shares issued for a consideration other than cash goes into the account too.

And the deeming is the whole point. By treating the account as paid-up share capital, the Act makes it reducible only by going through section 66, the capital reduction procedure, with the Tribunal and the creditors' objections. It cannot be distributed as dividend.

Section 52(2): the five permitted applications. Notwithstanding sub-section (1), the securities premium account may be applied by the company:

  • (a) towards the issue of unissued shares to the members as fully paid bonus shares;
  • (b) in writing off the preliminary expenses of the company;
  • (c) in writing off the expenses of, or the commission paid or discount allowed on, any issue of shares or debentures;
  • (d) in providing for the premium payable on the redemption of any redeemable preference shares or of any debentures; or
  • (e) for the purchase of its own shares or other securities under section 68.

Learn these five. They are a closed list, and any other use is a reduction of capital requiring section 66.

Section 52(3): a narrower list for a prescribed class. Notwithstanding sub-sections (1) and (2), the account may be applied by such class of companies as may be prescribed, whose financial statements comply with the accounting standards prescribed under section 133, only:

  • (a) in paying up unissued equity shares to be issued to members as fully paid bonus shares;
  • (b) in writing off the expenses of, or the commission paid or discount allowed on, any issue of equity shares; or
  • (c) for the purchase of its own shares or other securities under section 68.

Compare the two lists. For the prescribed class, writing off preliminary expenses and providing for the premium on redemption are not available, and the surviving items are confined to equity shares. So the prescribed class has three uses, not five.

The ban on shares at a discount: section 53

Section 53(1). Except as provided in section 54, a company shall not issue shares at a discount.

Section 53(2). Any share issued by a company at a discount shall be void.

Not voidable, not irregular: void. So the allottee acquires nothing.

Section 53(2A): the one statutory exception besides sweat equity. Notwithstanding sub-sections (1) and (2), a company may issue shares at a discount to its creditors when its debt is converted into shares in pursuance of any statutory resolution plan or debt restructuring scheme in accordance with any guidelines, directions or regulations specified by the Reserve Bank of India under the Reserve Bank of India Act 1934 or the Banking Regulation Act 1949.

munotes.in164

Sweat Equity, Share Premium and the Ban on Shares at a Discount

This is the rescue exception. When a failing company's debt is converted into equity, insisting on face value would defeat the restructuring, because the shares are not worth face value.

Section 53(3): the penalty. Where a company fails to comply:

  • the company and every officer in default shall be liable to a penalty which may extend to an amount equal to the amount raised through the issue of shares at a discount, or five lakh rupees, whichever is less; and
  • the company shall also refund all monies received, with interest at twelve per cent per annum from the date of issue of the shares, to the persons to whom the shares were issued.

Note the second limb. Because the shares are void, the money must go back, and it goes back with interest.

Sweat equity shares: section 54

Section 54(1). Notwithstanding anything contained in section 53, a company may issue sweat equity shares of a class of shares already issued, if the following conditions are fulfilled:

  • (a) the issue is authorised by a special resolution passed by the company;
  • (b) the resolution specifies the number of shares, the current market price, consideration, if any, and the class or classes of directors or employees to whom the shares are to be issued;
  • (d) where the equity shares are listed on a recognised stock exchange, the sweat equity shares are issued in accordance with SEBI's regulations, and if not so listed, in accordance with such rules as may be prescribed.

Clause (c) was omitted, which is why the surviving clauses run (a), (b), (d). It used to require a minimum period of one year since the company had commenced business, and its removal means a young company may now issue sweat equity.

Note "of a class of shares already issued": sweat equity cannot be used to create a new class.

Section 54(2): they are ordinary equity shares. The rights, limitations, restrictions and provisions applicable to equity shares shall be applicable to sweat equity shares, and the holders shall rank pari passu with other equity shareholders.

So sweat equity is not a lesser share. Once issued, it is equity, with the same votes and the same dividend rights.

What sweat equity is. Section 2(88) defines sweat equity shares as equity shares issued by a company to its directors or employees at a discount or for consideration other than cash, for providing their know-how or making available rights in the nature of intellectual property rights or value additions, by whatever name called. That definition explains why section 54 opens "notwithstanding section 53": sweat equity is by definition capable of being issued at a discount.

munotes.in165

Sweat Equity, Share Premium and the Ban on Shares at a Discount

A worked example

Ratnagiri Robotics Limited has equity shares of ten rupees each.

A premium issue. It issues ten lakh shares at twenty-five rupees. The face value is ten rupees, so the premium is fifteen rupees a share, one crore fifty lakh rupees in all. Under section 52(1) that whole sum goes into the securities premium account and is thereafter treated as paid-up share capital, so it can be reduced only under section 66.

Using it. The company may apply that account to issue fully paid bonus shares to members, to write off its preliminary expenses, to write off the commission on the share issue, to provide for the premium on redemption of its redeemable preference shares, or to buy back its own shares under section 68: the five uses in section 52(2). It may not pay a dividend out of it, and it may not use it for working capital.

If it falls in the prescribed class under section 52(3), only three of those uses remain, confined to equity shares, and writing off preliminary expenses and providing for redemption premium are not among them.

A discount issue. The company's shares are quoted at four rupees. It proposes to issue new shares at six rupees, below the ten rupee face value. That is an issue at a discount, prohibited by section 53(1), and any share so issued is void under section 53(2). The company and every officer in default face a penalty up to the amount raised or five lakh rupees, whichever is less, and the company must refund all monies with interest at twelve per cent per annum from the date of issue: section 53(3).

The one way it could be lawful. If the company's bank debt were being converted into shares under a statutory resolution plan or a debt restructuring scheme in accordance with Reserve Bank guidelines, section 53(2A) would permit the issue to the creditors at a discount.

Sweat equity. Its chief engineer has developed a control algorithm the company now owns. The company wishes to give her one lakh equity shares for it. Under section 54 it passes a special resolution specifying the number of shares, the current market price, the consideration and the class of employees. Being unlisted, it complies with the prescribed rules; had it been listed, with SEBI's regulations. The shares are of a class already issued. Once issued, by section 54(2) they carry the same rights as other equity shares and rank pari passu with them.

munotes.in166

Sweat Equity, Share Premium and the Ban on Shares at a Discount

Why is that not caught by section 53? Because section 54(1) opens "notwithstanding anything contained in section 53", and sweat equity is by definition issued at a discount or for consideration other than cash.

Distinctions that carry marks

Shares at a premiumShares at a discount
PermittedYes, section 52No, section 53(1)
Treatment of the differenceInto the securities premium account, treated as paid-up capitalNot applicable
Effect if doneLawfulThe share is void, section 53(2)
ExceptionsNot applicableSweat equity, section 54; debt conversion under an RBI scheme, section 53(2A)
Consequence of breachNot applicablePenalty up to the amount raised or five lakh rupees, whichever is less, plus refund with twelve per cent interest
Section 52(2), general listSection 52(3), prescribed class
Bonus sharesYes, unissued shares as fully paid bonus sharesYes, but equity shares only
Preliminary expensesYesNo
Issue expenses, commission, discountYes, shares or debenturesYes, equity shares only
Premium on redemptionYesNo
Buy-back under section 68YesYes

What this does NOT mean

It does not mean a company may never issue shares below face value. Sweat equity under section 54 and a debt conversion under section 53(2A) are lawful.

It does not mean the securities premium is profit. It is treated as paid-up share capital, so it cannot be distributed and can be reduced only under section 66.

It does not mean sweat equity shares are a separate class. Section 54(2) makes them subject to the same rights and restrictions as equity shares and ranks them pari passu.

It does not mean a share issued at a discount is merely voidable. Section 53(2) makes it void.

Quick revision

  • 52(1): premium, whether for cash or otherwise, into the securities premium account, treated as paid-up share capital, so reducible only under section 66.
  • 52(2), five uses: fully paid bonus shares; preliminary expenses; issue expenses, commission or discount on shares or debentures; premium on redemption of redeemable preference shares or debentures; buy-back under section 68.
  • 52(3): for a prescribed class complying with section 133 standards, only three uses, and confined to equity shares.
  • 53(1) and (2): no issue at a discount; any such share is void.
  • 53(2A): exception for conversion of debt into shares under a statutory resolution plan or debt restructuring scheme under RBI guidelines.
  • 53(3): penalty up to the amount raised or five lakh rupees, whichever is less, on the company and every officer in default, plus refund with interest at twelve per cent per annum from the date of issue.
  • 54(1): sweat equity, notwithstanding section 53, of a class already issued, on special resolution specifying number, current market price, consideration and class of directors or employees; SEBI regulations if listed, prescribed rules if not. Clause (c) omitted.
  • 54(2): same rights and restrictions as equity shares; pari passu.
  • 2(88): sweat equity means equity shares issued to directors or employees at a discount or for consideration other than cash, for know-how, intellectual property rights or value additions.
munotes.in167

Sweat Equity, Share Premium and the Ban on Shares at a Discount

Test yourself

1. What must a company do with a premium received on shares? Transfer a sum equal to the aggregate premium to a securities premium account, which is then treated as if it were the paid-up share capital of the company for the purposes of the provisions on reduction of capital: section 52(1).

2. Name the five purposes for which the securities premium account may be applied. Issuing unissued shares as fully paid bonus shares; writing off preliminary expenses; writing off the expenses of, or commission paid or discount allowed on, any issue of shares or debentures; providing for the premium payable on redemption of redeemable preference shares or debentures; and the purchase of its own shares or other securities under section 68: section 52(2).

3. What is the consequence of issuing a share at a discount? The share is void: section 53(2). The company and every officer in default are liable to a penalty up to the amount raised or five lakh rupees, whichever is less, and the company must refund all monies received with interest at twelve per cent per annum from the date of issue: section 53(3).

4. Are there any exceptions to the ban on shares at a discount? Two. Sweat equity shares under section 54, and an issue at a discount to creditors on conversion of debt into shares under a statutory resolution plan or debt restructuring scheme in accordance with Reserve Bank of India guidelines, directions or regulations: section 53(2A).

5. State the conditions for issuing sweat equity shares. The issue must be authorised by a special resolution; the resolution must specify the number of shares, the current market price, the consideration if any, and the class or classes of directors or employees; and, where the equity shares are listed, the issue must comply with SEBI's regulations, and where they are not listed, with the prescribed rules: section 54(1).

6. What rights do sweat equity shares carry? The same rights, limitations, restrictions and provisions as are applicable to equity shares, and their holders rank pari passu with other equity shareholders: section 54(2).

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in168

Chapter Twenty-Nine

Share Certificates, Calls and Variation of Shareholders' Rights

Syllabus topic 1.4, "Share capital & debentures"

In one line

The certificate is the company's statement that you own the shares, calls must be made evenly across a class, and the rights of a class of shares cannot be changed without that class agreeing.

In exam wording: section 46 makes a share certificate prima facie evidence of title; section 48 allows the rights attached to a class of shares to be varied only with the consent of three fourths of that class or by a special resolution of that class, and gives a ten per cent minority the right to apply to the Tribunal; sections 49 to 51 govern calls, unpaid capital and dividend in proportion to paid-up amounts; section 57 punishes personation of a shareholder; and section 60 requires authorised capital never to be published without the subscribed and paid-up figures.

Why the law has this at all

Each of these is a small rule solving a specific unfairness.

Section 46 exists because ownership of an intangible thing needs evidence. Section 48 exists because a company's majority is usually the holders of one class, and without protection they could vote away another class's rights. Section 49 exists because calls could otherwise be used to squeeze out chosen shareholders. Section 50 exists because a member who pays early should not thereby buy extra votes. Section 57 exists because impersonating a shareholder is a way of stealing shares. And section 60 exists because "authorised capital: fifty crore rupees" on a letterhead tells a creditor nothing if the company has actually received two lakh rupees.

Some words this chapter uses

Prima facie evidence is evidence sufficient to establish a fact unless disproved. A call is a demand by the company for part of the unpaid amount on a share. Calls in advance is money paid before a call is made. A class of shares is a group carrying the same rights. To personate is to pretend to be somebody. Authorised capital is the maximum the company may issue; subscribed capital is what members have agreed to take; paid-up capital is what has actually been paid.

The share certificate: section 46

Section 46(1). A certificate issued under the common seal, if any, of the company, or signed by two directors or by a director and the Company Secretary where the company has appointed one, specifying the shares held by any person, shall be prima facie evidence of the title of that person to those shares.

Note the 2015 change. The words used to require the common seal. They now read "under the common seal, if any, ... or signed by two directors or by a director and the Company Secretary", because the common seal ceased to be compulsory when the words "and a common seal" were omitted from section 9 with effect from 29 May 2015. See [The Characteristics of a Company].

munotes.in169

Share Certificates, Calls and Variation of Shareholders' Rights

And note "prima facie". The certificate is not conclusive. It establishes title unless the contrary is shown, and the register of members is the primary record.

Section 46(2): duplicates. A duplicate certificate may be issued if the certificate:

  • (a) is proved to have been lost or destroyed; or
  • (b) has been defaced, mutilated or torn and is surrendered to the company.

Section 46(3). Notwithstanding anything in the articles, the manner of issue of a certificate or a duplicate, the form, the particulars to be entered in the register of members and other matters shall be such as may be prescribed.

Section 46(4): dematerialised shares. Where a share is held in depository form, the record of the depository is the prima facie evidence of the interest of the beneficial owner. So for most listed shares the depository record, not a certificate, is the evidence.

Section 46(5): fraudulent duplicates. If a company with intent to defraud issues a duplicate certificate, the company shall be punishable with a fine of not less than five times the face value of the shares involved and up to ten times that face value, or rupees ten crores, whichever is higher, and every officer in default shall be liable for action under section 447.

That is one of the heaviest fines in the Act, and the reason is obvious: a fraudulent duplicate creates a second owner of the same share.

Variation of shareholders' rights: section 48

Section 48(1): the consent needed. Where the share capital is divided into different classes of shares, the rights attached to the shares of any class may be varied with the consent in writing of the holders of not less than three fourths of the issued shares of that class, or by means of a special resolution passed at a separate meeting of the holders of the issued shares of that class, and:

  • (a) if provision with respect to such variation is contained in the memorandum or articles; or
  • (b) in the absence of any such provision, if the variation is not prohibited by the terms of issue of the shares of that class.

The proviso: knock-on effects. If variation by one class affects the rights of any other class, the consent of three fourths of that other class shall also be obtained, and the section applies to that variation too.

Section 48(2): the minority's right to go to the Tribunal. Where the holders of not less than ten per cent of the issued shares of a class did not consent to the variation or vote in favour of the special resolution, they may apply to the Tribunal to have the variation cancelled, and where such an application is made, the variation shall not have effect unless and until it is confirmed by the Tribunal.

munotes.in170

Share Certificates, Calls and Variation of Shareholders' Rights

The proviso: twenty-one days. The application shall be made within twenty-one days after the date on which the consent was given or the resolution was passed, and may be made on behalf of the shareholders entitled to make it by one or more of their number appointed in writing for the purpose.

Section 48(3). The decision of the Tribunal shall be binding on the shareholders.

Section 48(4). The company shall within thirty days of the order file a copy with the Registrar.

Two numbers to memorise: three fourths to vary, ten per cent to challenge, and twenty-one days to apply.

Calls and unpaid capital: sections 49, 50 and 51

Section 49: uniformity.

Where any calls for further share capital are made on the shares of a class, such calls shall be made on a uniform basis on all shares falling under that class.

The Explanation matters. Shares of the same nominal value on which different amounts have been paid-up shall not be deemed to fall under the same class. So a company with ten rupee shares, some paid up to ten rupees and some to six, has two classes for this purpose, and a call may be made on one without the other.

Section 50: calls in advance.

  • (1) A company may, if so authorised by its articles, accept from any member the whole or part of the amount remaining unpaid on any shares held by him, even if no part of that amount has been called up.
  • (2) A member shall not be entitled to any voting rights in respect of the amount paid by him under sub-section (1) until that amount has been called up.

Sub-section (2) is the fair part and it is why section 47(1) is expressly made subject to it: paying early is a convenience to the company, not a way of buying votes.

Section 51: dividend on paid-up amounts.

A company may, if so authorised by its articles, pay dividends in proportion to the amount paid-up on each share.

So where some shares are paid up to ten rupees and others to six, the dividend can follow the money actually contributed. Note that it is permissive and depends on the articles.

Personation of a shareholder: section 57

If any person deceitfully personates as an owner of any security or interest in a company, or of any share warrant or coupon issued in pursuance of this Act, and thereby obtains or attempts to obtain any such security or interest or any such share warrant or coupon, or receives or attempts to receive any money due to any such owner, he shall be punishable with imprisonment for a term which shall not be less than one year but which may extend to three years and with fine which shall not be less than one lakh rupees but which may extend to five lakh rupees.

munotes.in171

Share Certificates, Calls and Variation of Shareholders' Rights

Distinguish it from section 38, which students confuse with it. Section 38 is about applying for securities in a fictitious name or making multiple applications, and it routes into section 447. Section 57 is about pretending to be an existing owner in order to get his securities or his money, and it carries its own punishment: one to three years' imprisonment and a fine of one to five lakh rupees. Note that attempts are covered as well as completed acts.

Publication of capital: section 60

Section 60(1). Where any notice, advertisement or other official publication, or any business letter, billhead or letter paper of a company contains a statement of the amount of the authorised capital, it shall also contain a statement, in an equally prominent position and in equally conspicuous characters, of the amount of the capital which has been subscribed and the amount paid-up.

Section 60(2). On default, the company shall be liable to a penalty of ten thousand rupees and every officer in default to five thousand rupees, for each default.

The mischief is impression management. A company with authorised capital of fifty crore rupees and paid-up capital of one lakh may look substantial on a letterhead; section 60 requires the three figures to travel together, and in equally prominent position and equally conspicuous characters, so the qualification cannot be hidden in small type.

A worked example

Kolhapur Alloys Limited has two classes of equity shares: Class A with full voting rights, and Class B with differential rights under section 43(a)(ii). It also has ten rupee shares, some paid up to ten rupees and some to six.

Certificates. Its certificates are signed by two directors, which section 46(1) permits since the company has no common seal, and each is prima facie evidence of the holder's title. Where shares are held with a depository, section 46(4) makes the depository's record the prima facie evidence instead.

A lost certificate. A holder proves his certificate was destroyed in a flood. Under section 46(2)(a) a duplicate may be issued, in the prescribed manner under section 46(3). If the company were to issue a duplicate with intent to defraud, the fine would be five to ten times the face value of the shares, or ten crore rupees, whichever is higher, and every officer in default would face section 447.

munotes.in172

Share Certificates, Calls and Variation of Shareholders' Rights

Varying Class B rights. The company wants to remove Class B's right to a preferential dividend. That is a variation of the rights attached to a class, so section 48(1) requires the written consent of holders of three fourths of the issued Class B shares, or a special resolution at a separate meeting of Class B holders, and either a provision in the memorandum or articles permitting variation, or, failing that, that variation is not prohibited by the terms of issue.

A knock-on effect. Removing Class B's preferential dividend increases what is available to Class A. If the change also affects Class A's rights, the proviso requires the consent of three fourths of Class A as well.

The minority. Holders of twelve per cent of the Class B shares voted against. Since that is not less than ten per cent, they may apply to the Tribunal within twenty-one days of the resolution to have the variation cancelled, and the variation does not take effect unless and until the Tribunal confirms it: section 48(2). The Tribunal's decision binds all the shareholders, and the company must file a copy of the order with the Registrar within thirty days.

A call. The company calls two rupees a share on its partly paid shares. By section 49 the call must be uniform across the class, and by the Explanation the six rupee paid shares and the ten rupee paid shares are not the same class, so the call may be made on the former alone.

Calls in advance. One member offers to pay the remaining four rupees before any call. The articles permit it, so section 50(1) allows the company to accept. But under section 50(2) he gets no voting rights on that amount until it is called up.

Dividend. The articles permit dividends in proportion to the amount paid-up, so under section 51 the fully paid shares receive proportionately more.

The letterhead. Its letter paper says "Authorised capital: fifty crore rupees". Under section 60(1) it must also state the subscribed and paid-up amounts, in an equally prominent position and equally conspicuous characters. If it does not, the company pays ten thousand rupees and every officer in default five thousand rupees, for each default.

Distinctions that carry marks

Section 38Section 57
ConductApplying in a fictitious name, or multiple applicationsDeceitfully personating an existing owner
ObjectTo acquire or subscribe for securitiesTo obtain the owner's securities, warrant, coupon or money
PunishmentAction under section 447One to three years' imprisonment and one to five lakh rupees fine
AttemptsNot expressly mentionedExpressly covered
Extra ordersDisgorgement, seizure and disposal, section 38(3)None
munotes.in173

Share Certificates, Calls and Variation of Shareholders' Rights

Consent to vary, section 48(1)Challenge, section 48(2)
ThresholdThree fourths of the issued shares of the class, in writing, or a special resolution of that classTen per cent who did not consent or vote in favour
Time limitNoneTwenty-one days from the consent or resolution
EffectThe variation is madeThe variation does not take effect until confirmed by the Tribunal
FilingNot applicableCopy of the order to the Registrar within thirty days

What this does NOT mean

It does not mean a share certificate proves ownership conclusively. It is prima facie evidence only, and for depository shares the depository's record is the evidence.

It does not mean a class's rights can never change. They can, with three fourths' consent, subject to the Tribunal's power on a ten per cent application.

It does not mean paying calls early buys influence. Section 50(2) denies voting rights on the amount until it is called up.

It does not mean all shares of the same face value are one class for calls. The Explanation to section 49 says shares of the same nominal value with different amounts paid up are not the same class.

Quick revision

  • 46(1): certificate under the seal if any, or signed by two directors or a director and the Company Secretary, is prima facie evidence of title. 46(2): duplicate if lost or destroyed, or defaced, mutilated or torn and surrendered. 46(4): for depository shares the depository's record is the evidence. 46(5): fraudulent duplicate, fine five to ten times face value or ten crore rupees, whichever is higher, and officers under section 447.
  • 48(1): vary class rights by three fourths in writing or a special resolution of the class, plus a provision in the memorandum or articles, or absence of prohibition in the terms of issue. Proviso: three fourths of any other class affected.
  • 48(2): ten per cent who did not consent may apply to the Tribunal within twenty-one days; the variation does not take effect until confirmed. 48(3): binding. 48(4): file the order in thirty days.
  • 49: calls uniform across a class; shares of the same nominal value with different amounts paid up are not the same class.
  • 50: calls in advance if the articles allow; no voting rights on that amount until called up.
  • 51: dividend in proportion to the amount paid-up, if the articles allow.
  • 57: deceitful personation of an owner: one to three years and one to five lakh rupees, attempts included.
  • 60: authorised capital never published without subscribed and paid-up, equally prominent and conspicuous; ten thousand rupees on the company and five thousand rupees on each officer in default, per default.
munotes.in174

Share Certificates, Calls and Variation of Shareholders' Rights

Test yourself

1. What is the evidentiary value of a share certificate? It is prima facie evidence of the title of the person named to the shares specified: section 46(1). Where a share is held in depository form, the record of the depository is the prima facie evidence of the beneficial owner's interest: section 46(4).

2. How may the rights attached to a class of shares be varied? With the consent in writing of the holders of not less than three fourths of the issued shares of that class, or by a special resolution passed at a separate meeting of that class, and either where the memorandum or articles provide for variation, or, in the absence of such a provision, where variation is not prohibited by the terms of issue: section 48(1).

3. What can a dissenting minority do? Holders of not less than ten per cent of the issued shares of the class who did not consent or vote in favour may apply to the Tribunal within twenty-one days to have the variation cancelled, and the variation does not take effect unless and until the Tribunal confirms it: section 48(2).

4. Must a call be made on all shareholders equally? On a uniform basis on all shares of the class: section 49. But by the Explanation, shares of the same nominal value on which different amounts have been paid up are not deemed to fall under the same class.

5. A member pays the unpaid amount on his shares before any call. Does he gain votes? No. Section 50(2) provides that he is not entitled to any voting rights in respect of that amount until it has been called up.

6. What must accompany a statement of authorised capital on a company's letterhead? A statement, in an equally prominent position and in equally conspicuous characters, of the amount of capital subscribed and the amount paid-up: section 60(1). Default costs the company ten thousand rupees and every officer in default five thousand rupees, for each default.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in175

Chapter Thirty

Transfer and Transmission of Securities

Syllabus topic 1.4, label: "Transfer and transmission of securities"

In one line

Transfer is when a shareholder sells or gives his shares to somebody; transmission is when the law moves them because he has died or become insolvent.

In exam wording: section 56(1) requires a proper instrument of transfer, duly stamped, dated and executed by or on behalf of both transferor and transferee, delivered to the company within sixty days of execution with the certificate; section 56(2) preserves the company's power to register a transmission by operation of law without any such instrument; section 58 governs refusal of registration and appeal to the Tribunal; and section 59 allows rectification of the register of members.

Why the law has this at all

A share is intangible. Nobody can hand it over. So the law has to say what act moves it, and it has to record the move somewhere, because the company must know whom to pay a dividend to and whom to call to a meeting.

For a voluntary transfer the law insists on a document. It must be stamped, so the State gets its duty; dated, so the sequence can be established; executed by both parties, so neither can deny it; and delivered with the certificate, so the same shares cannot be sold twice.

For a transmission none of that is possible. A dead man cannot execute an instrument. So section 56(2) opens a second route: an intimation of a right transmitted by operation of law.

And there has to be a remedy when the company refuses to register, which is section 58, and when the register is simply wrong, which is section 59.

Some words this chapter uses

An instrument of transfer is the document by which a share is transferred, usually a transfer deed. To execute means to sign and complete. Duly stamped means bearing the stamp duty the law requires. Transmission by operation of law is the passing of property automatically, as on death or insolvency. A legal representative is the person who represents a deceased person's estate. Rectification is the correction of the register. Free transferability means shares may be transferred without the company's leave.

Transfer: section 56(1)

A company shall not register a transfer of securities, or of the interest of a member in a company having no share capital, other than a transfer between persons both of whose names are entered as holders of beneficial interest in the records of a depository, unless:

  • a proper instrument of transfer in the prescribed form,
  • duly stamped, dated and executed by or on behalf of the transferor and the transferee,
  • specifying the name, address and occupation, if any, of the transferee,
  • has been delivered to the company by the transferor or the transferee,
  • within sixty days from the date of execution,
  • along with the certificate relating to the securities, or, if no certificate exists, along with the letter of allotment.
munotes.in176

Transfer and Transmission of Securities

Note the depository carve-out at the start. Where both parties hold in dematerialised form, no instrument is needed at all, because the depository's records do the work. That is why in practice the instrument survives mainly for unlisted companies.

The proviso saves a lost deed. Where the instrument of transfer has been lost, or has not been delivered within the prescribed period, the company may register the transfer on such terms as to indemnity as the Board may think fit.

Section 56(3): partly paid shares. Where the application is made by the transferor alone and relates to partly paid shares, the transfer shall not be registered unless the company gives notice of the application to the transferee in the prescribed manner, and the transferee gives no objection within two weeks of receiving the notice.

The reason is that a transferee of partly paid shares takes on a liability for the unpaid amount, so he must be given a chance to object before being fixed with it.

Transmission: section 56(2)

Nothing in sub-section (1) shall prejudice the power of the company to register, on receipt of an intimation of transmission of any right to securities by operation of law from any person to whom such right has been transmitted.

That is the whole of transmission in the section, and its brevity is the point. No instrument, no stamp, no execution by two parties. An intimation from the person to whom the right has passed is enough, supported by whatever evidence the company reasonably requires, such as a succession certificate or a probate.

Section 56(5) completes it for a deceased holder:

The transfer of any security or other interest of a deceased person in a company made by his legal representative shall, even if the legal representative is not a holder thereof, be valid as if he had been the holder at the time of the execution of the instrument of transfer.

So a legal representative may transfer the deceased's shares directly to a buyer without first having himself registered as a member, and the transfer is good.

Delivery of certificates: section 56(4)

Every company shall, unless prohibited by any provision of law or any order of a Court, Tribunal or other authority, deliver the certificates of all securities allotted, transferred or transmitted:

  • (a) within two months from the date of incorporation, to subscribers to the memorandum;
  • (b) within two months from the date of allotment, on any allotment of shares;
  • (c) within one month from the date of receipt by the company of the instrument of transfer, or of the intimation of transmission, on a transfer or transmission;
  • (d) within six months from the date of allotment, on any allotment of debentures.
munotes.in177

Transfer and Transmission of Securities

The proviso: where the securities are dealt with in a depository, the company shall intimate the details of allotment to the depository immediately on allotment.

Four periods to learn: two months, two months, one month, six months.

Penalties: section 56(6) and (7)

Section 56(6). Where any default is made in complying with sub-sections (1) to (5), the company and every officer in default shall be liable to a penalty of fifty thousand rupees.

Section 56(7). Without prejudice to any liability under the Depositories Act 1996, where any depository or depository participant, with an intention to defraud a person, has transferred shares, it shall be liable under section 447.

Refusal to register, and appeal: section 58

Section 58(1): private companies. If a private company limited by shares refuses, whether under a power in its articles or otherwise, to register a transfer or a transmission, it shall within thirty days from the date the instrument of transfer or the intimation of transmission was delivered, send notice of the refusal to the transferor and the transferee, or to the person giving intimation of the transmission, giving reasons for the refusal.

Two points. The power to refuse comes from the articles, which a private company must have under section 2(68). And the refusal must be reasoned and notified within thirty days.

Section 58(2): public companies. Without prejudice to sub-section (1), the securities or other interest of any member in a public company shall be freely transferable.

The proviso is important and modern: any contract or arrangement between two or more persons in respect of transfer of securities shall be enforceable as a contract. So free transferability does not prevent shareholders agreeing among themselves to restrictions such as pre-emption rights; those agreements bind the parties as contracts even though the company must still register a transfer made in breach.

Section 58(3): the transferee's appeal where notice is given. The transferee may appeal to the Tribunal against the refusal within thirty days from the receipt of the notice, or, where no notice has been sent by the company, within sixty days from the date on which the instrument of transfer or intimation of transmission was delivered.

Section 58(4): a public company's refusal. If a public company without sufficient cause refuses to register a transfer within thirty days of delivery, the transferee may appeal to the Tribunal within sixty days of such refusal, or, where no intimation has been received from the company, within ninety days of the delivery.

munotes.in178

Transfer and Transmission of Securities

Four periods to keep apart: thirty and sixty for a private company under sub-section (3); sixty and ninety for a public company under sub-section (4).

Section 58(5): what the Tribunal may do. After hearing the parties it may dismiss the appeal, or by order direct that the transfer or transmission shall be registered, and the company shall comply within ten days of receipt of the order, or make such other order as the sub-section provides, including directing rectification and payment of damages.

Rectification of the register: section 59

Section 59 is the companion remedy. Where the name of a person is without sufficient cause entered in the register of members, or omitted from it, or where default is made or unnecessary delay takes place in entering the fact of any person having ceased to be a member, the person aggrieved, any member, or the company may appeal to the Tribunal, or in the case of a foreign member or debenture holder to a competent court outside India, for rectification of the register.

The Tribunal may dismiss the appeal or direct that the transfer or transmission be registered and the register rectified, and may direct the company to pay damages, if any, sustained by the aggrieved party.

Section 58 and section 59 answer different questions. Section 58 is about a refusal to register a particular transfer. Section 59 is about the register being wrong, whether by a wrong entry, an omission or a delay.

A worked example

Nanded Ceramics Private Limited has articles restricting transfer, as section 2(68) requires.

A transfer. Mr Jadhav agrees to sell two thousand fully paid shares to Ms Pinto. They execute a transfer deed, duly stamped and dated, specifying Ms Pinto's name, address and occupation, and deliver it to the company with the share certificate within sixty days of execution. Section 56(1) is satisfied.

A lost deed. Suppose the executed deed is lost in the post and more than sixty days pass. The proviso to section 56(1) allows the company to register the transfer on such terms as to indemnity as the Board thinks fit.

Partly paid shares. Suppose the shares were partly paid and only Mr Jadhav applied. Under section 56(3) the company must give notice to Ms Pinto and may not register unless she raises no objection within two weeks.

Refusal. The Board refuses to register the transfer under its articles. Under section 58(1) it must send notice of refusal, with reasons, to both Mr Jadhav and Ms Pinto within thirty days of delivery of the instrument. Ms Pinto may appeal to the Tribunal within thirty days of receiving that notice; had the company sent no notice at all, she would have sixty days from delivery of the instrument: section 58(3).

munotes.in179

Transfer and Transmission of Securities

Now make the company public. Under section 58(2) the shares are freely transferable, and a refusal without sufficient cause within thirty days lets the transferee appeal within sixty days of the refusal, or within ninety days of delivery if the company said nothing: section 58(4). If the Tribunal directs registration, the company must comply within ten days of receiving the order.

A shareholders' agreement. The founders of the public company have agreed among themselves that none will sell without offering to the others first. Free transferability under section 58(2) does not destroy that promise: by the proviso, a contract or arrangement between two or more persons in respect of transfer of securities is enforceable as a contract between them.

A transmission. Mr Jadhav dies. His shares pass to his son by operation of law. No instrument of transfer is needed: the son sends an intimation of transmission with the evidence of his title, and the company registers it under section 56(2). Alternatively, Mr Jadhav's legal representative may transfer the shares directly to a purchaser without being registered himself, and by section 56(5) the transfer is as valid as if he had been the holder.

Certificates. On the transfer the company must deliver the certificate within one month of receiving the instrument; on an allotment, within two months; to subscribers to the memorandum, within two months of incorporation; and on an allotment of debentures, within six months: section 56(4). Default costs the company and every officer in default fifty thousand rupees: section 56(6).

The register is wrong. Two years later the company's register still shows Mr Jadhav as a member. That is not a refusal to register a transfer; it is an error. The remedy is section 59, rectification of the register, with power in the Tribunal to direct rectification and to award damages.

Distinctions that carry marks

TransferTransmission
How it happensVoluntary act of the partiesBy operation of law, on death or insolvency
InstrumentRequired, stamped, dated, executed by both, section 56(1)Not required; an intimation suffices, section 56(2)
Stamp dutyPayableNot applicable
Who initiatesTransferor or transfereeThe person to whom the right has been transmitted
ConsiderationUsually presentNone
Time limitDeliver within sixty days of executionNone stated
Certificate to be deliveredWithin one month of the instrumentWithin one month of the intimation
munotes.in180

Transfer and Transmission of Securities

Private companyPublic company
Power to refuseYes, under the articles, section 58(1)Only for sufficient cause; shares are freely transferable, section 58(2)
Notice of refusalWithin thirty days, with reasonsRefusal within thirty days is the trigger
Appeal by transfereeThirty days from notice, or sixty days from delivery if no noticeSixty days from refusal, or ninety days from delivery if no intimation
Compliance with a Tribunal orderTen daysTen days

What this does NOT mean

It does not mean an instrument is always needed. Section 56(1) excludes transfers between two persons both holding beneficial interest with a depository, and section 56(2) excludes transmission.

It does not mean a public company can never refuse. Section 58(4) speaks of refusal without sufficient cause, so a refusal with sufficient cause is possible; what a public company cannot do is impose a general restriction on transferability.

It does not mean a shareholders' agreement is void in a public company. The proviso to section 58(2) makes such a contract enforceable as a contract.

It does not mean section 58 and section 59 are alternatives for the same complaint. Section 58 attacks a refusal; section 59 corrects a wrong register.

Quick revision

  • 56(1): proper instrument, stamped, dated, executed by both, with the transferee's name, address and occupation, delivered within sixty days of execution with the certificate or letter of allotment. Not required for a depository to depository transfer. Proviso: lost or late instrument, register on indemnity as the Board thinks fit.
  • 56(2): transmission by operation of law on an intimation; no instrument.
  • 56(3): partly paid shares, transferor alone: notice to the transferee, no objection within two weeks.
  • 56(4): certificates in two months from incorporation for subscribers, two months from allotment, one month from the instrument or intimation, six months for debentures. Depository intimated immediately.
  • 56(5): a legal representative may transfer a deceased member's shares though not himself a holder.
  • 56(6): default, fifty thousand rupees on the company and every officer in default. 56(7): a depository or participant transferring with intent to defraud is liable under section 447.
  • 58(1): a private company must give reasoned notice of refusal within thirty days. 58(2): a public company's securities are freely transferable, but a contract between persons about transfer is enforceable as a contract.
  • 58(3): appeal thirty days from notice, sixty days from delivery if none. 58(4): public company, sixty days from refusal, ninety days from delivery if no intimation. 58(5): Tribunal may dismiss or direct registration, company to comply in ten days.
  • 59: rectification of the register where a name is entered without sufficient cause or omitted, or there is default or unnecessary delay; the Tribunal may direct rectification and damages.
munotes.in181

Transfer and Transmission of Securities

Test yourself

1. Distinguish transfer from transmission. Transfer is the voluntary act of a member passing his shares to another, and requires a proper instrument of transfer, stamped, dated and executed by both parties, delivered within sixty days of execution under section 56(1). Transmission is the passing of the right by operation of law, as on death or insolvency, and requires only an intimation under section 56(2).

2. Within what time must the instrument of transfer be delivered, and what if it is lost? Within sixty days from the date of execution. Where the instrument has been lost, or has not been delivered within the prescribed period, the company may register the transfer on such terms as to indemnity as the Board thinks fit: proviso to section 56(1).

3. What extra step is required for a transfer of partly paid shares applied for by the transferor alone? The company must give notice of the application to the transferee in the prescribed manner, and may not register the transfer unless the transferee gives no objection within two weeks of receiving the notice: section 56(3).

4. Within what periods must share certificates be delivered? Two months from incorporation for subscribers to the memorandum; two months from allotment on an allotment of shares; one month from receipt of the instrument of transfer or the intimation of transmission; and six months from allotment for debentures: section 56(4).

5. Are shares in a public company freely transferable? Yes. Section 58(2) provides that the securities or other interest of any member in a public company shall be freely transferable, but the proviso preserves the enforceability, as a contract, of any contract or arrangement between two or more persons in respect of the transfer of securities.

6. What is the remedy where a person's name is wrongly entered in or omitted from the register of members? An application under section 59 for rectification of the register, made by the person aggrieved, any member or the company, on which the Tribunal may direct rectification and may order the company to pay damages.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in182

Chapter Thirty-One

Power of a Limited Company to Alter its Share Capital

Syllabus topic 1.4, label: "Power of limited company to alter its share capital"

In one line

A limited company can rearrange its share capital in five ways, and none of them needs the Tribunal, because none of them takes money away from creditors.

In exam wording: section 61(1) permits a limited company having a share capital, if so authorised by its articles, to alter its memorandum in general meeting so as to increase its authorised capital, consolidate and divide, convert shares into stock and back, sub-divide, or cancel unsubscribed shares. Section 61(2) provides that the cancellation of shares under the section shall not be deemed to be a reduction of share capital, and section 64 requires notice to the Registrar.

Why the law has this at all

There are two completely different things a company might mean by "changing our capital", and the Act keeps them far apart.

The first is rearranging. Turning ten thousand shares of one hundred rupees into one lakh shares of ten rupees changes nothing about the money in the company. It makes the shares easier to trade. Nobody is worse off, so the law asks only for the members' consent and a filing.

The second is giving capital back. That does make creditors worse off, because the fund they lent against shrinks. So it needs section 66, the Tribunal, and a chance for creditors to object.

Section 61 is the first kind, and section 61(2) is there to stop somebody arguing that the fifth item, cancelling shares, is really the second kind. It is not, because those shares were never taken by anybody, so no money ever came in and none goes out.

Some words this chapter uses

Authorised capital is the ceiling in the memorandum's capital clause. Consolidation is combining several small shares into one larger one. Sub-division is splitting one share into several smaller ones. Stock is share capital expressed as a single holding of a money amount rather than as a number of units. Denomination is the face value of a share. Diminution of capital, in clause (e), is the reduction of the authorised figure by cancelling shares nobody took.

The five powers: section 61(1)

A limited company having a share capital may, if so authorised by its articles, alter its memorandum in its general meeting to:

(a) Increase authorised share capital

By such amount as it thinks expedient. This is the routine step before any large issue: the capital clause sets a ceiling and the company must raise the ceiling before it can issue past it.

(b) Consolidate and divide

Consolidate and divide all or any of its share capital into shares of a larger amount than its existing shares.

The proviso is the examinable part. No consolidation and division which results in changes in the voting percentage of shareholders shall take effect unless it is approved by the Tribunal on an application made in the prescribed manner.

munotes.in183

Power of a Limited Company to Alter its Share Capital

Why? Because consolidation can be used as a squeeze. Turn every hundred ten rupee shares into one thousand rupee share, and a member holding sixty shares is left with a fraction, which the company then buys out. His votes vanish. The proviso puts any consolidation that shifts voting percentages in front of the Tribunal.

(c) Convert shares into stock, and back

Convert all or any of its fully paid-up shares into stock, and reconvert that stock into fully paid-up shares of any denomination.

Note fully paid-up: partly paid shares cannot be converted, because stock is not divided into units on which calls can be made.

(d) Sub-divide

Sub-divide its shares, or any of them, into shares of smaller amount than is fixed by the memorandum, so, however, that in the sub-division the proportion between the amount paid and the amount, if any, unpaid on each reduced share shall be the same as it was in the case of the share from which the reduced share is derived.

The condition preserves the company's claim for unpaid capital. A hundred rupee share with forty rupees paid, split into ten shares of ten rupees, must produce ten shares each with four rupees paid and six unpaid. A company cannot use sub-division to write off a liability.

(e) Cancel unsubscribed shares

Cancel shares which, at the date of the passing of the resolution in that behalf, have not been taken or agreed to be taken by any person, and diminish the amount of its share capital by the amount of the shares so cancelled.

Two conditions on the face of it. The shares must not have been taken or agreed to be taken by anybody, and the test is applied at the date of the resolution.

Section 61(2): and it is not a reduction.

The cancellation of shares under sub-section (1) shall not be deemed to be a reduction of share capital.

That single sentence is the whole reason section 61 does not need the Tribunal for clause (e). Nobody ever subscribed for those shares, so no capital ever existed to be returned.

What resolution is needed

Section 61(1) says "alter its memorandum in its general meeting" and does not itself name a resolution. Section 13(1) opens with "save as provided in section 61", which takes an alteration of the capital clause out of the special resolution requirement that governs the rest of the memorandum.

So the resolution is an ordinary resolution unless the articles require more, and the two threshold conditions are that the company must be authorised by its articles and must act in general meeting. A company whose articles do not authorise it must first alter its articles under section 14, by special resolution.

munotes.in184

Power of a Limited Company to Alter its Share Capital

This is a favourite comparison question: the memorandum generally needs a special resolution under section 13(1), but the capital clause is altered under section 61 by ordinary resolution, and reduction of capital needs a special resolution plus the Tribunal under section 66.

Notice to the Registrar: section 64

Where a company alters its share capital in any manner specified in section 61(1), or an order of the Government increasing the authorised capital takes effect under section 62(4), or a company redeems any redeemable preference shares, the company shall file a notice with the Registrar in the prescribed form and manner within thirty days, together with an altered memorandum, and the Registrar shall record the notice and make the necessary alteration in the memorandum and articles.

On default, the company and every officer in default shall be liable to a penalty of one thousand rupees for each day during which the default continues, or five lakh rupees, whichever is less.

So the pattern is: resolution in general meeting, then notice to the Registrar within thirty days with the altered memorandum.

Reserve capital: section 65

An unlimited company having a share capital may, by a resolution passed in that behalf, if so provided by its articles, on conversion into a limited company, increase the nominal amount of its share capital by increasing the nominal amount of each of its shares, subject to the condition that no part of the increased capital shall be capable of being called up except in the event and for the purposes of the company being wound up; or provide that a specified portion of its uncalled share capital shall not be capable of being called up except in the event and for the purposes of the company being wound up.

This is reserve capital, and it is a small but favourite short note. An unlimited company converting into a limited one may set aside part of its capital so that it can be called only in a winding up and for the purposes of the winding up. The effect is to create a guaranteed fund for creditors that the directors cannot touch while the company is a going concern.

Distinguish reserve capital from capital reserve. Reserve capital is uncalled share capital locked away for a winding up under section 65. A capital reserve is an accounting reserve of a capital nature. They are not related and the similarity of the names is a trap.

munotes.in185

Power of a Limited Company to Alter its Share Capital

A worked example

Amravati Textiles Limited has an authorised capital of five crore rupees divided into fifty lakh shares of ten rupees each, of which forty lakh have been issued.

Increase. It wants to issue another twenty lakh shares, which would take it past the ceiling. Under section 61(1)(a), being authorised by its articles, it passes a resolution in general meeting increasing the authorised capital to eight crore rupees, and files notice with the Registrar with the altered memorandum within thirty days under section 64.

Sub-division. Its shares trade at nine hundred rupees and it wants them accessible to small investors. Under section 61(1)(d) it sub-divides each ten rupee share into ten shares of one rupee. On its partly paid shares, where six rupees is paid and four unpaid, each resulting one rupee share must carry sixty paise paid and forty paise unpaid, preserving the proportion.

Consolidation. Later it consolidates every ten one rupee shares back into a ten rupee share under section 61(1)(b). Because some members hold numbers not divisible by ten, the consolidation would change voting percentages. By the proviso it does not take effect unless approved by the Tribunal on an application in the prescribed manner.

Conversion into stock. It converts its fully paid shares into stock under section 61(1)(c), and may reconvert into fully paid shares of any denomination later. Its partly paid shares cannot be converted.

Cancellation. Ten lakh shares of the increased authorised capital were never taken or agreed to be taken by anybody. Under section 61(1)(e) the company cancels them at the date of the resolution and diminishes its authorised capital accordingly. This is not a reduction of capital under section 61(2), so the Tribunal is not involved and creditors have nothing to object to: no money ever came in on those shares.

Contrast. Now suppose the company wanted to return two rupees a share to its members on fully paid shares. That is a reduction: money leaves the company. It would need section 66, a special resolution and confirmation by the Tribunal, with creditors entitled to object.

Reserve capital. Had the company been an unlimited company converting to limited, it could under section 65 have increased the nominal amount of each share on the footing that the increase is callable only in a winding up and for its purposes, or set aside a specified portion of uncalled capital on the same terms.

Distinctions that carry marks

Alteration under section 61Reduction under section 66
What happens to the capitalRearranged; nothing leaves the companyReturned or written off
ResolutionOrdinary, unless the articles require more; section 13(1) opens "save as provided in section 61"Special resolution
TribunalNot required, except a consolidation that changes voting percentagesRequired, with creditors' objections
Authorised by articlesRequiredNot the gateway condition
FilingNotice to the Registrar with the altered memorandum, thirty days, section 64As section 66 provides
Is cancellation of unsubscribed shares a reduction?No, section 61(2)Not applicable
munotes.in186

Power of a Limited Company to Alter its Share Capital

ConsolidationSub-division
EffectSeveral shares become one larger shareOne share becomes several smaller shares
Clause61(1)(b)61(1)(d)
Special conditionTribunal approval if voting percentages changeThe paid to unpaid proportion must be preserved

What this does NOT mean

It does not mean any company may do this. Section 61 applies to a limited company having a share capital, and only if so authorised by its articles.

It does not mean the capital clause needs a special resolution. Section 13(1) is expressly "save as provided in section 61".

It does not mean sub-division can extinguish a liability. The proportion of paid to unpaid must be preserved.

It does not mean cancellation of unsubscribed shares affects creditors. Section 61(2) declares it is not a reduction of share capital.

Quick revision

  • Section 61(1), five powers, for a limited company with share capital, authorised by its articles, in general meeting: (a) increase authorised capital; (b) consolidate and divide, Tribunal approval if voting percentages change; (c) convert fully paid shares into stock and back into shares of any denomination; (d) sub-divide, preserving the paid to unpaid proportion; (e) cancel shares not taken or agreed to be taken at the date of the resolution, and diminish capital accordingly.
  • Section 61(2): that cancellation is not a reduction of share capital.
  • Resolution: ordinary, because section 13(1) opens "save as provided in section 61".
  • Section 64: notice to the Registrar within thirty days with the altered memorandum, also on a Government order under section 62(4) and on redemption of redeemable preference shares. Default, one thousand rupees a day or five lakh rupees, whichever is less.
  • Section 65: an unlimited company converting to limited may create reserve capital, callable only in a winding up and for its purposes. Not the same as a capital reserve.

Test yourself

1. In what five ways may a limited company alter its share capital under section 61? Increase its authorised share capital; consolidate and divide into shares of a larger amount; convert fully paid shares into stock and reconvert; sub-divide into shares of smaller amount; and cancel shares not taken or agreed to be taken and diminish the capital accordingly.

2. When does a consolidation require the Tribunal's approval? Where the consolidation and division results in changes in the voting percentage of shareholders. It does not take effect unless approved by the Tribunal on an application made in the prescribed manner: proviso to section 61(1)(b).

munotes.in187

Power of a Limited Company to Alter its Share Capital

3. What condition attaches to a sub-division? The proportion between the amount paid and the amount, if any, unpaid on each reduced share must be the same as it was on the share from which the reduced share is derived: section 61(1)(d).

4. Is cancelling unsubscribed shares a reduction of capital? No. Section 61(2) provides expressly that the cancellation of shares under sub-section (1) shall not be deemed to be a reduction of share capital, because no money was ever received on those shares.

5. What resolution is needed to alter the capital clause, and why is it not a special resolution? An ordinary resolution in general meeting, unless the articles require more, because section 13(1), which requires a special resolution for alteration of the memorandum, opens with the words "save as provided in section 61".

6. What is reserve capital? Under section 65, an unlimited company having a share capital may, on conversion into a limited company and if its articles so provide, increase the nominal amount of its shares, or set aside a specified portion of its uncalled capital, on the footing that it shall not be capable of being called up except in the event and for the purposes of the company being wound up.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in188

Chapter Thirty-Two

Further Issue of Share Capital and Bonus Shares

Syllabus topic 1.4, labels: "Further issue of share capital", "Issue of bonus shares"

In one line

When a company issues more shares it must offer them to its existing members first, and a bonus issue is not really an issue of new money at all but the conversion of reserves the members already own into shares.

In exam wording: section 62(1) requires that where a company having a share capital proposes to increase its subscribed capital by the issue of further shares, those shares shall be offered to existing equity shareholders in proportion, or to employees under an employees stock option scheme by special resolution, or to any persons by special resolution at a price determined by the valuation report of a registered valuer. Section 63 permits fully paid bonus shares out of free reserves, the securities premium account or the capital redemption reserve account, on six conditions, and forbids a bonus issue in lieu of dividend.

Why the law has this at all

Section 62 protects against dilution. A member with a quarter of the shares has a quarter of the votes and a quarter of the dividends. If the directors can issue new shares to whomever they choose, they can reduce him to a tenth without his agreeing to anything, and they can do it to entrench themselves. The pre-emptive right in section 62(1)(a) is the answer: new shares go first to the people who already own the company, in proportion, so a member who wants to keep his share can.

Section 63 protects against a different trick. A company sitting on large reserves may want to capitalise them, turning reserves into shares. That is legitimate and useful. What is not legitimate is using a bonus issue to dress up a distribution the company cannot afford, or to capitalise a paper gain from revaluing its own assets. Hence the closed list of three sources, the ban on revaluation reserves, and the flat prohibition in section 63(3) on bonus shares in lieu of dividend.

Some words this chapter uses

Subscribed capital is the part of the issued capital taken by members. A pre-emptive right is a right of first refusal. Renunciation is giving up your entitlement in favour of another. A letter of offer is the notice under section 62(1)(a). A registered valuer is a valuer registered under section 247. Free reserves are defined in section 2(43) as reserves available for distribution as dividend. To capitalise a reserve is to convert it into share capital.

Further issue: section 62(1)

Where at any time a company having a share capital proposes to increase its subscribed capital by the issue of further shares, those shares shall be offered:

(a) To existing equity shareholders, in proportion

To persons who, at the date of the offer, are holders of equity shares of the company, in proportion, as nearly as circumstances admit, to the paid-up share capital on those shares, by sending a letter of offer, subject to three conditions:

munotes.in189

Further Issue of Share Capital and Bonus Shares

  • (i) the offer shall be made by notice specifying the number of shares offered and limiting a time not less than fifteen days, or such lesser number of days as may be prescribed, and not exceeding thirty days from the date of the offer, within which, if not accepted, the offer shall be deemed to have been declined;
  • (ii) unless the articles otherwise provide, the offer shall be deemed to include a right to renounce the shares in favour of any other person, and the notice shall contain a statement of this right;
  • (iii) after the expiry of the time specified, or on earlier intimation of declining, the Board may dispose of them in such manner which is not disadvantageous to the shareholders and the company.

Three numbers and one default to remember. Not less than fifteen days, not more than thirty days; silence is a refusal; and renunciation is the default unless the articles exclude it.

Section 62(2): how the notice goes out. The notice under clause (a)(i) shall be dispatched through registered post or speed post or through electronic mode or courier or any other mode having proof of delivery to all the existing shareholders at least three days before the opening of the issue.

(b) To employees under a stock option scheme

To employees under a scheme of employees' stock option, subject to a special resolution passed by the company and subject to such conditions as may be prescribed.

(c) To any persons, on a special resolution and a valuation

To any persons, if authorised by a special resolution, whether or not those persons include the persons referred to in clause (a) or clause (b), either for cash or for a consideration other than cash, if the price of such shares is determined by the valuation report of a registered valuer, subject to compliance with the applicable provisions of Chapter III and any other prescribed conditions.

Clause (c) is the preferential allotment route, and the two safeguards are the special resolution and the registered valuer's price. The valuer requirement exists precisely so that shares cannot be issued cheaply to friends of the Board.

Conversion of debentures and loans: section 62(3) to (6)

Section 62(3): a term already agreed. Nothing in the section applies to an increase of subscribed capital caused by the exercise of an option attached to debentures issued or a loan raised by the company to convert them into shares, provided that the terms of issue containing that option were approved before the issue or the raising of the loan by a special resolution in general meeting.

munotes.in190

Further Issue of Share Capital and Bonus Shares

So a conversion right agreed in advance, with the members' consent, escapes the pre-emption rules. The members have already voted for the dilution.

Section 62(4): Government conversion. Notwithstanding sub-section (3), where debentures have been issued or a loan obtained from any Government, and that Government considers it necessary in the public interest, it may by order direct that the debentures or loan or part of it shall be converted into shares on such terms as appear reasonable, even if the terms of issue contain no conversion option.

The proviso gives an appeal: where the terms are not acceptable, the company may within sixty days of communication of the order appeal to the Tribunal, which shall, after hearing the company and the Government, pass such order as it deems fit.

Section 62(5): what the Government must weigh. In determining the terms of conversion the Government shall have due regard to the financial position of the company, the terms of issue of the debentures or loan, the rate of interest payable, and such other matters as it may consider necessary.

Section 62(6): the memorandum alters itself. Where such an order has been made and no appeal has been preferred, or the appeal has been dismissed, then where the order has the effect of increasing the authorised share capital, the memorandum shall stand altered and the authorised capital shall stand increased by the value of the shares into which the debentures or loan has been converted.

Note how unusual that is: the memorandum is altered by force of statute, without a resolution.

Bonus shares: section 63

Section 63(1): the three sources. A company may issue fully paid-up bonus shares to its members, in any manner whatsoever, out of:

  • (i) its free reserves;
  • (ii) the securities premium account; or
  • (iii) the capital redemption reserve account.

The proviso: no issue of bonus shares shall be made by capitalising reserves created by the revaluation of assets.

That proviso is the heart of the section. A revaluation reserve is an unrealised paper gain: the company has not received a rupee. Turning it into share capital would inflate the capital with money that does not exist.

Note the consistency across the Act. Section 52(2)(a) permits the securities premium account to be applied towards fully paid bonus shares, and section 55(2) proviso (c) creates the capital redemption reserve account and treats it as paid-up capital. Section 63(1) lists exactly those two, plus free reserves.

munotes.in191

Further Issue of Share Capital and Bonus Shares

Section 63(2): six conditions. No company shall capitalise its profits or reserves for the purpose of issuing fully paid-up bonus shares unless:

  • (a) it is authorised by its articles;
  • (b) it has, on the recommendation of the Board, been authorised in the general meeting;
  • (c) it has not defaulted in payment of interest or principal in respect of fixed deposits or debt securities issued by it;
  • (d) it has not defaulted in respect of the payment of statutory dues of the employees, such as contribution to provident fund, gratuity and bonus;
  • (e) the partly paid-up shares, if any, outstanding on the date of allotment, are made fully paid-up;
  • (f) it complies with such conditions as may be prescribed.

Conditions (c) and (d) are the fairness conditions, and they are worth a sentence in an answer: a company that has not paid its depositors, its debenture holders or its employees' provident fund may not hand free shares to its members.

Condition (e) prevents a mixed capital structure: the partly paid shares must be brought up to fully paid first.

Section 63(3): the prohibition.

The bonus shares shall not be issued in lieu of dividend.

Short and absolute. A company that has promised a dividend and cannot pay it may not discharge the promise in paper.

A worked example

Solapur Pumps Limited has a subscribed capital of two crore rupees in twenty lakh equity shares of ten rupees each, held as to five lakh shares by Ms Kulkarni.

A rights issue. The company needs one crore rupees. Under section 62(1)(a) it must first offer the new shares to existing equity shareholders in proportion to the paid-up capital on their shares. Ms Kulkarni holds a quarter, so she is offered a quarter of the new shares. The letter of offer specifies the number and gives her not less than fifteen and not more than thirty days; if she does not accept in time the offer is deemed to have been declined. Unless the articles say otherwise, the notice must tell her she may renounce in favour of anybody else. The notice goes out by a mode carrying proof of delivery, at least three days before the issue opens: section 62(2).

She declines. The Board may then dispose of her shares in a manner not disadvantageous to the shareholders and the company: section 62(1)(a)(iii).

An employees' scheme. The company wants to give options to its engineers. That is section 62(1)(b) and needs a special resolution and compliance with the prescribed conditions.

A strategic investor. A private equity fund offers to take shares worth four crore rupees. That is section 62(1)(c): a special resolution, and the price determined by the valuation report of a registered valuer, with Chapter III complied with.

munotes.in192

Further Issue of Share Capital and Bonus Shares

A convertible debenture. Two years ago the company issued debentures with a conversion option, and the terms were approved by a special resolution before the issue. When the holders convert, section 62(3) applies and the pre-emption rules do not, because the members have already consented.

A Government loan. A State Government loan is converted into shares by order in the public interest under section 62(4), even though the loan carried no conversion term. The company thinks the terms unfair and appeals to the Tribunal within sixty days. If the appeal is dismissed and the order increases the authorised capital, the memorandum stands altered by force of section 62(6).

A bonus issue. The company has free reserves of six crore rupees, a securities premium account of one crore, a capital redemption reserve of fifty lakh, and a revaluation reserve of three crore from revaluing its land.

It may capitalise the free reserves, the securities premium account and the capital redemption reserve account: section 63(1). It may not touch the revaluation reserve, by the proviso.

Before doing so it must check the six conditions of section 63(2): the articles authorise it; the general meeting has authorised it on the Board's recommendation; there is no default on fixed deposits or debt securities; there is no default on employees' provident fund, gratuity or bonus; and any partly paid shares are made fully paid on the date of allotment.

And a trap. The Board had announced a dividend it now cannot fund, and proposes to issue bonus shares instead. Section 63(3) forbids it outright: bonus shares shall not be issued in lieu of dividend.

Distinctions that carry marks

Rights issue, section 62(1)(a)Bonus issue, section 63
Does money come in?Yes, members pay for the sharesNo, reserves are capitalised
Who gets themExisting equity shareholders, in proportionMembers
Are they paid up?To the extent paidFully paid, by definition
ResolutionBoard, following the section 62 procedureGeneral meeting on the Board's recommendation, and the articles must authorise
Can it be declinedYes, and it may be renounced unless the articles say otherwiseNot applicable
SourceNew subscription moneyFree reserves, securities premium, capital redemption reserve only
Section 62(1)(b), ESOPSection 62(1)(c), preferential allotment
To whomEmployees under a stock option schemeAny persons, including existing members
ResolutionSpecialSpecial
PriceAs the scheme and the prescribed conditions provideValuation report of a registered valuer

What this does NOT mean

It does not mean every further issue must go to members first. Clauses (b) and (c) of section 62(1) are alternatives, each with its own safeguard.

munotes.in193

Further Issue of Share Capital and Bonus Shares

It does not mean the right of renunciation is absolute. It applies unless the articles otherwise provide.

It does not mean a bonus issue makes members richer. Their proportionate ownership is unchanged; the same value is spread over more shares.

It does not mean any reserve can be capitalised. Only the three in section 63(1), and never a revaluation reserve.

Quick revision

  • 62(1)(a): offer to existing equity shareholders in proportion; notice specifying the number, not less than fifteen nor more than thirty days; silence is a decline; renunciation is included unless the articles provide otherwise; the Board may then dispose not disadvantageously.
  • 62(2): notice by a mode with proof of delivery, at least three days before the issue opens.
  • 62(1)(b): employees under an ESOP, special resolution, prescribed conditions.
  • 62(1)(c): any persons, special resolution, price by a registered valuer's report, Chapter III complied with.
  • 62(3): conversion options approved by special resolution before issue are outside the section.
  • 62(4) to (6): a Government may order conversion in the public interest; sixty days to appeal to the Tribunal; the memorandum stands altered if the order increases authorised capital.
  • 63(1): bonus shares, fully paid, out of free reserves, the securities premium account, or the capital redemption reserve account. Never out of a revaluation reserve.
  • 63(2), six conditions: articles; general meeting on the Board's recommendation; no default on fixed deposits or debt securities; no default on employees' statutory dues; partly paid shares made fully paid; prescribed conditions.
  • 63(3): not in lieu of dividend.

Test yourself

1. To whom must further shares be offered, and within what time must the offer be accepted? To existing equity shareholders in proportion to the paid-up capital on their shares, by a letter of offer specifying the number of shares and limiting a time not less than fifteen days, or such lesser number as may be prescribed, and not exceeding thirty days from the date of the offer, failing which the offer is deemed declined: section 62(1)(a)(i).

2. Is a rights offer renounceable? Yes, unless the articles otherwise provide. The offer is deemed to include a right to renounce in favour of any other person, and the notice must contain a statement of that right: section 62(1)(a)(ii).

3. How may a company allot shares to an outside investor? Under section 62(1)(c), if authorised by a special resolution, to any persons, for cash or for a consideration other than cash, if the price is determined by the valuation report of a registered valuer, subject to compliance with Chapter III and any prescribed conditions.

munotes.in194

Further Issue of Share Capital and Bonus Shares

4. Out of what may bonus shares be issued? Free reserves, the securities premium account, or the capital redemption reserve account: section 63(1). No bonus issue may be made by capitalising reserves created by the revaluation of assets.

5. State the conditions in section 63(2). Authorisation by the articles; authorisation in general meeting on the Board's recommendation; no default in payment of interest or principal on fixed deposits or debt securities; no default in payment of employees' statutory dues such as provident fund, gratuity and bonus; partly paid shares outstanding on the date of allotment made fully paid; and compliance with prescribed conditions.

6. May bonus shares be issued instead of a dividend? No. Section 63(3) provides flatly that bonus shares shall not be issued in lieu of dividend.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in195

Chapter Thirty-Three

Reduction of Share Capital

Syllabus topic 1.4, label: "Reduction of share capital"

In one line

A company can give capital back to its members or write off capital it has lost, but only by special resolution and only if the Tribunal confirms it, because the money the creditors lent against is going out of the door.

In exam wording: section 66(1) provides that, subject to confirmation by the Tribunal on an application by the company, a company limited by shares or limited by guarantee and having a share capital may, by a special resolution, reduce the share capital in any manner, and in particular may extinguish or reduce liability on unpaid capital, cancel paid-up capital which is lost or unrepresented by available assets, or pay off paid-up capital in excess of the wants of the company.

Why the law has this at all

The share capital of a limited company is the price of limited liability. Members are not personally answerable for the company's debts, and in exchange the money they put in stays in, available to creditors. That is the bargain the whole of company law rests on, and it is called the maintenance of capital.

Reduction is a deliberate exception to it, and there are three honest reasons for wanting one.

Capital that has been lost. A company whose accumulated losses have swallowed half its capital shows a balance sheet that says one thing and means another. Writing the capital down brings the figure into line with reality and lets the company pay dividends again out of future profits, instead of first making up old losses.

Capital in excess of the wants of the company. A company that has sold a division may have more money than its business needs. Sitting on it depresses returns; giving it back is rational.

Unpaid liability nobody will ever call. A company that will never need the uncalled amount can release the members from it.

Because all three take something away from creditors, the Act does not leave the decision to the members alone. It requires a special resolution and, on top of it, confirmation by the Tribunal, with notice to the Central Government, the Registrar, SEBI for listed companies, and the creditors.

Some words this chapter uses

Maintenance of capital is the principle that a company's stated capital must not be returned to members except as the law allows. Unrepresented by available assets means the capital has been lost and no asset corresponds to it. In excess of the wants of the company means more capital than the business needs. A minute approved by the Tribunal is the short statement of the reduced capital structure filed with the Registrar. To discharge or determine a claim means to pay it or to have it fixed by adjudication.

munotes.in196

Reduction of Share Capital

Who may reduce, and how: section 66(1)

Subject to confirmation by the Tribunal on an application by the company, a company limited by shares or limited by guarantee and having a share capital may, by a special resolution, reduce the share capital in any manner, and in particular may:

  • (a) extinguish or reduce the liability on any of its shares in respect of the share capital not paid-up; or
  • (b) either with or without extinguishing or reducing liability on any of its shares,
  • (i) cancel any paid-up share capital which is lost or is unrepresented by available assets; or
  • (ii) pay off any paid-up share capital which is in excess of the wants of the company,

and alter its memorandum by reducing the amount of its share capital and of its shares accordingly.

Three points on the opening words. The phrase "reduce the share capital in any manner" makes the three clauses illustrative, not exhaustive, which is why they are introduced by "and in particular". A company limited by guarantee without a share capital is outside the section. And the alteration of the memorandum happens as part of the reduction, not by a separate section 13 process.

The proviso is an absolute bar. No such reduction shall be made if the company is in arrears in the repayment of any deposits accepted by it, either before or after the commencement of this Act, or the interest payable thereon.

Learn that proviso. A company that owes its depositors cannot reduce its capital at all, however good its reasons and however willing its members. No Tribunal discretion is involved.

Who is heard: section 66(2)

The Tribunal shall give notice of every application to:

  • the Central Government;
  • the Registrar;
  • the Securities and Exchange Board, in the case of listed companies; and
  • the creditors of the company,

and shall take into consideration the representations, if any, made by them within three months from the date of receipt of the notice.

The proviso supplies a deeming rule. Where no representation has been received from any of them within that period, it shall be presumed that they have no objection to the reduction.

So the three month period is not merely a deadline; silence is consent.

What the Tribunal must be satisfied of: section 66(3)

The Tribunal may, if it is satisfied that the debt or claim of every creditor of the company has been discharged or determined or has been secured or his consent is obtained, make an order confirming the reduction on such terms and conditions as it deems fit.

munotes.in197

Reduction of Share Capital

Four alternatives for each creditor, and only one need be satisfied for each: the claim has been discharged, or determined, or secured, or the creditor's consent has been obtained.

The proviso adds an accounting gate. No application for reduction shall be sanctioned unless the accounting treatment proposed by the company is in conformity with the accounting standards specified in section 133 or any other provision of this Act, and a certificate to that effect by the company's auditor has been filed with the Tribunal.

That proviso exists because a reduction can be used to make a balance sheet say something untrue, and the auditor's certificate is the check.

After the order: section 66(4) and (5)

Section 66(4). The order of confirmation shall be published by the company in such manner as the Tribunal may direct.

Section 66(5): filing. The company shall deliver to the Registrar within thirty days of receipt of the copy of the order a certified copy of the order and of a minute approved by the Tribunal showing:

  • (a) the amount of share capital;
  • (b) the number of shares into which it is to be divided;
  • (c) the amount of each share; and
  • (d) the amount, if any, at the date of registration deemed to be paid-up on each share,

and the Registrar shall register the same and issue a certificate to that effect.

Two savings: section 66(6) and (7)

Section 66(6). Nothing in this section shall apply to buy-back of its own securities by a company under section 68.

That is a clean division of labour. A buy-back also returns money to members, but it has its own code in sections 68 to 70, with its own limits and its own safeguards, and it does not go to the Tribunal.

Section 66(7): the members' liability afterwards. A member, past or present, shall not be liable to any call or contribution in respect of any share held by him exceeding the amount of the difference, if any, between the amount paid on the share, or the reduced amount deemed to have been paid on it, and the amount of the share as fixed by the order of reduction.

In plain terms: once the reduction is confirmed, a member's exposure is measured against the reduced figure, not the old one.

The creditor who was left off the list: section 66(8)

Where the name of a creditor entitled to object is not entered on the list of creditors by reason of his ignorance of the proceedings or of their nature and effect with respect to his debt or claim, and the company afterwards commits a default in paying his debt or claim, the section provides for that creditor's protection, the persons who were members at the date of the registration of the order being liable to contribute up to the amount by which their liability was reduced.

munotes.in198

Reduction of Share Capital

The principle is simple even where the drafting is not: a creditor cannot be deprived of his security by a process he never heard about.

A worked example

Wardha Engineering Limited has a paid-up capital of ten crore rupees in one crore shares of ten rupees each. Accumulated losses stand at four crore rupees. It also holds two crore rupees of cash it no longer needs after selling a division, and it has an uncalled liability of two rupees a share on a class of partly paid shares.

Three reductions, one section. It may cancel four crore rupees of paid-up capital which is lost or unrepresented by available assets, under section 66(1)(b)(i). It may pay off two crore rupees as capital in excess of the wants of the company, under section 66(1)(b)(ii). And it may extinguish the uncalled two rupees a share, under section 66(1)(a).

First, a bar to check. Does the company owe anything on deposits it has accepted, or interest on them? If it is in arrears, the proviso to section 66(1) forbids the reduction outright.

The resolution. A special resolution, and an application to the Tribunal for confirmation.

Who is heard. The Tribunal gives notice to the Central Government, the Registrar, SEBI if the company is listed, and the creditors, and considers any representations made within three months. A creditor who says nothing in that period is presumed to have no objection.

What the Tribunal looks for. That every creditor's claim has been discharged, determined or secured, or his consent obtained. And, by the proviso to section 66(3), that the accounting treatment conforms to the section 133 standards, certified by the company's auditor and filed with the Tribunal.

After confirmation. The company publishes the order as the Tribunal directs, and within thirty days of receiving the copy delivers to the Registrar a certified copy of the order and the Tribunal approved minute showing the amount of share capital, the number of shares, the amount of each share and the amount deemed paid up on each. The Registrar registers it and issues a certificate.

A member's position afterwards. Ms Salunkhe holds partly paid shares on which two rupees was uncalled and is now extinguished. By section 66(7) she cannot be called on beyond the difference between what she has paid and the amount of the share as fixed by the order of reduction.

munotes.in199

Reduction of Share Capital

A forgotten creditor. A supplier with an old disputed bill never heard of the proceedings and was left off the list. If the company later defaults on his claim, section 66(8) protects him, and the persons who were members at the date of registration of the order may be called on up to the amount by which their liability was reduced.

And a contrast. Had the company instead wished to buy back its own shares, section 66 would not apply at all: section 66(6) excludes a buy-back under section 68, which has its own limits and needs no Tribunal.

Distinctions that carry marks

Alteration, section 61Reduction, section 66
What happensCapital is rearrangedCapital is returned or written off
ResolutionOrdinary, if the articles authoriseSpecial
TribunalOnly for a consolidation that changes voting percentagesConfirmation required in every case
CreditorsNot involvedNotified and heard, three months
Absolute barNoneArrears on deposits or interest, proviso to section 66(1)
FilingNotice in thirty days, section 64Certified order and Tribunal approved minute in thirty days, section 66(5)
Is cancelling unsubscribed shares within it?Yes, and section 61(2) says it is not a reductionNot applicable
Reduction, section 66Buy-back, section 68
AppliesSection 66Section 66(6) excludes buy-back
TribunalRequiredNot required
LimitsNone stated; any mannerQuantitative limits in section 68
CreditorsHeard by the TribunalProtected by the section's own conditions

What this does NOT mean

It does not mean the three clauses are the only ways to reduce. Section 66(1) says "in any manner" and introduces them with "and in particular".

It does not mean creditors must all consent. For each creditor it is enough that the claim is discharged, determined or secured, or his consent obtained, and silence for three months is presumed to be no objection.

It does not mean a reduction can be used to tidy up a balance sheet freely. The proviso to section 66(3) requires conformity with the section 133 accounting standards and an auditor's certificate.

It does not mean a company in arrears on deposits can reduce with the Tribunal's leave. The proviso to section 66(1) is an absolute bar.

Quick revision

  • 66(1): company limited by shares, or by guarantee and having a share capital; special resolution; confirmation by the Tribunal; reduce in any manner, and in particular (a) extinguish or reduce unpaid liability, (b)(i) cancel paid-up capital lost or unrepresented by available assets, (b)(ii) pay off capital in excess of the wants of the company; memorandum altered accordingly. Proviso: absolute bar where the company is in arrears on deposits or interest.
  • 66(2): notice to the Central Government, Registrar, SEBI for listed companies, and creditors; representations within three months; silence presumed to be no objection.
  • 66(3): Tribunal satisfied that every creditor's claim is discharged, determined or secured, or his consent obtained. Proviso: accounting treatment conforming to section 133 standards, certified by the auditor and filed.
  • 66(4): publish the order as the Tribunal directs.
  • 66(5): certified copy and the Tribunal approved minute (capital, number of shares, amount of each, amount deemed paid up) to the Registrar within thirty days; Registrar registers and certifies.
  • 66(6): does not apply to a buy-back under section 68.
  • 66(7): a past or present member is not liable beyond the amount fixed by the order of reduction.
  • 66(8): a creditor left off the list through ignorance of the proceedings is protected if the company later defaults.
munotes.in200

Reduction of Share Capital

Test yourself

1. What are the three particular modes of reduction in section 66(1)? Extinguishing or reducing the liability on shares in respect of capital not paid up; cancelling paid-up capital which is lost or unrepresented by available assets; and paying off paid-up capital in excess of the wants of the company. The section permits reduction in any manner, so these are illustrative.

2. What is the absolute bar on a reduction? The proviso to section 66(1): no reduction shall be made if the company is in arrears in the repayment of any deposits accepted by it, before or after the commencement of this Act, or of the interest payable on them.

3. To whom must the Tribunal give notice, and what happens if nobody replies? To the Central Government, the Registrar, SEBI in the case of listed companies, and the creditors. Representations are considered if made within three months of receipt of the notice, and where none is received it is presumed that there is no objection: section 66(2) and its proviso.

4. Of what must the Tribunal be satisfied before confirming a reduction? That the debt or claim of every creditor has been discharged or determined or secured, or his consent obtained: section 66(3). By the proviso it must also have an auditor's certificate that the accounting treatment conforms to the accounting standards specified in section 133.

5. What must be filed after the order, and within what time? A certified copy of the Tribunal's order and of the minute approved by the Tribunal showing the amount of share capital, the number of shares, the amount of each share and the amount deemed paid up on each, delivered to the Registrar within thirty days of receipt of the copy of the order: section 66(5).

6. Does section 66 apply to a buy-back? No. Section 66(6) provides that nothing in the section applies to a buy-back of its own securities by a company under section 68.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in201

Chapter Thirty-Four

Restrictions on Purchase of Own Shares, and Buy-back

Syllabus topic 1.4, labels: "Restrictions on purchase by company or giving of loans by it for purchase of its Shares", "Power of company to purchase its own securities", "Prohibition for buy-back in certain circumstances"

In one line

A company generally may not buy its own shares or lend money to anybody to buy them, but section 68 lets it buy them back out of specified funds, within limits, and section 70 lists the situations where even that is forbidden.

In exam wording: section 67(1) prohibits a company limited by shares or by guarantee and having a share capital from buying its own shares unless the consequent reduction is effected under this Act; section 67(2) prohibits a public company from giving financial assistance for the purchase of or subscription for its own or its holding company's shares; section 68 permits a buy-back out of free reserves, the securities premium account or the proceeds of a fresh issue subject to seven conditions; and section 70 prohibits a buy-back through subsidiaries or investment companies, or where the company is in default.

Why the law has this at all

The maintenance of capital principle explains section 67 completely. If a company buys its own shares, the shareholder gets his money back and the capital fund shrinks without anybody's leave. Worse, if the company can lend the money to a buyer, it can achieve the same result at one remove: the buyer's shares are bought with the company's money and the company holds only a debt from a person whose only asset is the shares.

That is the mischief of financial assistance, and it is why section 67(2) is drafted so widely: directly or indirectly, by loan, guarantee, the provision of security or otherwise.

Then why permit buy-back at all? Because there are honest commercial reasons: returning surplus cash, correcting an undervalued share price, and improving return on equity. So section 68 permits it but replaces the Tribunal's supervision with a set of hard numerical limits, a declaration of solvency, and compulsory destruction of the shares bought. The protections are different from section 66's, not absent, which is why section 66(6) excludes buy-back from the reduction procedure.

Some words this chapter uses

Financial assistance means money or credit support given to enable somebody to buy shares. Specified securities includes employees stock options or other securities notified by the Central Government. Free reserves are reserves available for distribution as dividend, section 2(43). A declaration of solvency is the sworn statement under section 68(6). To extinguish shares is to cancel them so they cease to exist.

The prohibition: section 67

Section 67(1): no buying your own shares. No company limited by shares or by guarantee and having a share capital shall have power to buy its own shares unless the consequent reduction of share capital is effected under the provisions of this Act.

So the general position is a prohibition with a gateway: the purchase is lawful only where it is part of a reduction under the Act, and section 68 is the other lawful route.

munotes.in202

Restrictions on Purchase of Own Shares, and Buy-back

Section 67(2): no financial assistance, and only for public companies. No public company shall give, whether directly or indirectly and whether by means of a loan, guarantee, the provision of security or otherwise, any financial assistance for the purpose of, or in connection with, a purchase or subscription made or to be made, by any person of or for any shares in the company or in its holding company.

Four things to notice. It binds a public company only. It covers direct and indirect assistance. It lists loan, guarantee, provision of security or otherwise, so the list is open. And it covers shares in the company or in its holding company.

Section 67(3): three exceptions. Nothing in sub-section (2) applies to:

  • (a) the lending of money by a banking company in the ordinary course of its business. A bank that lends to a customer who happens to buy shares is doing its job.
  • (b) the provision by a company of money in accordance with a scheme approved by special resolution and in accordance with prescribed requirements, for the purchase of or subscription for fully paid-up shares in the company or its holding company, where the shares are held by trustees for the benefit of the employees, or held by the employee of the company.
  • (c) the giving of loans by a company to persons in the employment of the company, other than its directors or key managerial personnel, for an amount not exceeding their salary or wages for a period of six months, to enable them to purchase or subscribe for fully paid-up shares in the company or its holding company to be held by them by way of beneficial ownership.

The proviso adds transparency: disclosures in respect of voting rights not exercised directly by the employees in respect of shares to which the scheme relates shall be made in the Board's report in the prescribed manner.

Note the limits inside clause (c): not directors, not key managerial personnel, six months' salary, fully paid-up shares, beneficial ownership.

Section 67(4): preference shares are untouched. Nothing in the section affects the right of a company to redeem any preference shares issued under this Act or any previous company law. Redemption is governed by section 55.

Section 67(5): the penalty. On contravention, the company shall be punishable with a fine of not less than one lakh rupees and up to twenty-five lakh rupees, and every officer in default shall be punishable with imprisonment up to three years and with a fine of not less than one lakh rupees and up to twenty-five lakh rupees.

munotes.in203

Restrictions on Purchase of Own Shares, and Buy-back

Buy-back: section 68

Section 68(1): the three sources. Notwithstanding anything in this Act, but subject to sub-section (2), a company may purchase its own shares or other specified securities out of:

  • (a) its free reserves;
  • (b) the securities premium account; or
  • (c) the proceeds of the issue of any shares or other specified securities.

The proviso: no buy-back of any kind of shares or other specified securities shall be made out of the proceeds of an earlier issue of the same kind of shares or securities.

Otherwise a company could issue equity and immediately use the money to buy equity back, which is circular and achieves nothing except moving money between shareholders.

Section 68(2): seven conditions. No company shall buy back unless:

  • (a) the buy-back is authorised by its articles;
  • (b) a special resolution has been passed at a general meeting authorising it. Proviso: no special resolution is needed where (i) the buy-back is ten per cent or less of the total paid-up equity capital and free reserves, and (ii) it has been authorised by the Board by a resolution passed at its meeting;
  • (c) the buy-back is twenty-five per cent or less of the aggregate of paid-up capital and free reserves. Proviso: for a buy-back of equity shares in any financial year, the twenty-five per cent is construed with respect to its total paid-up equity capital in that financial year;
  • (d) the ratio of the aggregate of secured and unsecured debts owed by the company after buy-back is not more than twice the paid-up capital and its free reserves. Proviso: the Central Government may notify a higher ratio for a class of companies;
  • (e) all the shares or other specified securities for buy-back are fully paid-up;
  • (f) a buy-back of listed securities is in accordance with SEBI's regulations; and
  • (g) a buy-back of other securities is in accordance with such rules as may be prescribed.

And a proviso to the sub-section as a whole: no offer of buy-back shall be made within a period of one year reckoned from the date of the closure of the preceding offer of buy-back.

Four numbers to memorise: ten per cent for the Board route, twenty-five per cent as the ceiling, two to one as the debt to capital ratio, and one year between offers.

Section 68(3): the explanatory statement. The notice of the meeting at which the special resolution is proposed shall be accompanied by an explanatory statement stating:

  • (a) a full and complete disclosure of all material facts;
  • (b) the necessity for the buy-back;
  • (c) the class of shares or securities intended to be purchased;
  • (d) the amount to be invested under the buy-back; and
  • (e) the time-limit for completion of buy-back.
munotes.in204

Restrictions on Purchase of Own Shares, and Buy-back

Section 68(4): the deadline. Every buy-back shall be completed within one year from the date of passing the special resolution or, as the case may be, the Board resolution under the proviso to sub-section (2)(b).

Section 68(5): the three permitted routes. The buy-back may be:

  • (a) from the existing shareholders or security holders on a proportionate basis;
  • (b) from the open market;
  • (c) by purchasing the securities issued to employees of the company pursuant to a scheme of stock option or sweat equity.

Section 68(6): the declaration of solvency. Before making the buy-back the company shall file with the Registrar and with SEBI a declaration of solvency signed by at least two directors, one of whom shall be the managing director, if any, in the prescribed form and verified by an affidavit, to the effect that the Board has made a full inquiry into the affairs of the company and formed the opinion that it is capable of meeting its liabilities and will not be rendered insolvent within one year of the date of the declaration.

The proviso: no declaration of solvency shall be filed with SEBI by a company whose shares are not listed on any recognised stock exchange.

Section 68(7): destruction. Where a company buys back its shares or securities, it shall extinguish and physically destroy them within seven days of the last date of completion of the buy-back.

That is what stops a company holding its own shares as an asset and voting them.

The capital redemption reserve: section 69

Section 69(1). Where a company purchases its own shares out of free reserves or the securities premium account, a sum equal to the nominal value of the shares so purchased shall be transferred to the capital redemption reserve account, and details of the transfer shall be disclosed in the balance sheet.

The logic is identical to section 55(2) proviso (c) for redeemable preference shares: distributable reserves are converted into something treated as capital, so the fund available to creditors does not fall.

Note when it applies. Only where the buy-back is out of free reserves or the securities premium account. A buy-back out of the proceeds of a fresh issue needs no transfer, because new capital has replaced the old.

Section 69(2). The capital redemption reserve account may be applied by the company in paying up unissued shares to be issued to members as fully paid bonus shares. That is the same permission section 63(1)(iii) gives from the other side.

When buy-back is forbidden: section 70

Section 70(1). No company shall directly or indirectly purchase its own shares or other specified securities:

munotes.in205

Restrictions on Purchase of Own Shares, and Buy-back

  • (a) through any subsidiary company, including its own subsidiary companies;
  • (b) through any investment company or group of investment companies; or
  • (c) if a default is made by the company in the repayment of deposits accepted either before or after the commencement of this Act, interest payment thereon, redemption of debentures or preference shares, or payment of dividend to any shareholder, or repayment of any term loan or interest payable thereon to any financial institution or banking company.

The proviso to clause (c): the buy-back is not prohibited if the default is remedied and a period of three years has lapsed after such default ceased to subsist.

Clauses (a) and (b) stop the company doing indirectly what it may not do directly. Clause (c) is the fairness rule: a company that has not paid its depositors, its debenture holders, its preference shareholders, its ordinary shareholders' dividends or its bank may not spend money buying its own shares. And the bar does not lift the moment the default is cured; three years must pass.

Section 70(2). No company shall buy back where it has not complied with sections 92, 123, 127 and 129, that is, the annual return, the declaration of dividend, the punishment for failure to distribute dividends, and the financial statement.

A worked example

Panvel Polymers Limited, a listed public company, has paid-up equity capital of ten crore rupees and free reserves of thirty crore rupees. Its total debt after any buy-back would be sixty crore rupees.

The general rule first. By section 67(1) it cannot simply buy its own shares. Two lawful routes exist: a reduction under section 66, or a buy-back under section 68.

Financial assistance. A director proposes that the company guarantee a bank loan to a friendly investor who will then buy its shares. That is financial assistance by way of a guarantee, indirectly, in connection with a purchase of shares in the company, and section 67(2) forbids it. The company faces one to twenty-five lakh rupees and every officer in default up to three years' imprisonment and one to twenty-five lakh rupees.

A lawful employee loan. The company instead lends its factory supervisors, none of them a director or key managerial personnel, an amount not exceeding six months' salary each, to buy fully paid shares to be held by them beneficially. That is within section 67(3)(c).

The buy-back arithmetic.

  • Source. Out of free reserves, the securities premium account, or the proceeds of a fresh issue, but not out of the proceeds of an earlier issue of the same kind: section 68(1).
  • Ceiling, clause (c). Twenty-five per cent of paid-up capital plus free reserves is twenty-five per cent of forty crore, that is ten crore rupees. But for equity shares in a financial year the proviso measures the twenty-five per cent against total paid-up equity capital, that is twenty-five per cent of ten crore, two crore fifty lakh rupees.
  • Debt ratio, clause (d). After buy-back, debt of sixty crore must not exceed twice paid-up capital plus free reserves. Twice forty crore is eighty crore, so sixty crore is within the limit.
  • Resolution, clause (b). A special resolution, unless the buy-back is ten per cent or less of paid-up equity capital and free reserves, that is four crore rupees or less, and the Board authorises it by resolution at its meeting.
  • Fully paid, clause (e). All the securities bought must be fully paid.
  • Listed, clause (f). SEBI's regulations apply.
  • One year gap. No offer within one year of the closure of the preceding buy-back offer.
munotes.in206

Restrictions on Purchase of Own Shares, and Buy-back

Process. The notice of the general meeting carries the explanatory statement with the five items in section 68(3). Before buying, the company files a declaration of solvency with the Registrar and SEBI, signed by at least two directors including the managing director, verified by affidavit. The buy-back is completed within one year of the resolution, and the securities bought are extinguished and physically destroyed within seven days of the last date of completion.

The reserve. Because the buy-back is funded from free reserves, a sum equal to the nominal value of the shares bought is transferred to the capital redemption reserve account and disclosed in the balance sheet: section 69(1). That account may later be applied to issue fully paid bonus shares: section 69(2).

Now a bar. Suppose the company defaulted on a term loan to a bank eighteen months ago and cured it twelve months ago. Section 70(1)(c) prohibits the buy-back, and the proviso does not help, because three years have not lapsed since the default ceased to subsist.

Another bar. Suppose the company has not filed its annual return under section 92. Section 70(2) prohibits the buy-back outright.

Distinctions that carry marks

Reduction, section 66Buy-back, section 68
TribunalRequiredNot required; section 66(6) excludes buy-back
ResolutionSpecialSpecial, or Board if ten per cent or less
Quantitative limitsNoneTwenty-five per cent ceiling, two to one debt ratio, one year between offers
Creditor protectionNotice and objections before the TribunalDeclaration of solvency, debt ratio, section 70 bars
What happens to the sharesCapital reducedShares extinguished and physically destroyed within seven days
Reserve createdNot applicableCapital redemption reserve where funded from free reserves or securities premium, section 69
munotes.in207

Restrictions on Purchase of Own Shares, and Buy-back

Section 67(2) financial assistanceSection 68 buy-back
Who buysA third partyThe company itself
Whose moneyThe company's, by loan, guarantee or securityThe company's, from three named sources
Lawful?No, for a public company, save the three exceptions in section 67(3)Yes, on the section 68 conditions
Applies to private companiesNo, section 67(2) binds a public companyYes

What this does NOT mean

It does not mean a private company may give financial assistance freely. Section 67(2) binds public companies, but section 67(1) binds any company limited by shares or by guarantee with a share capital, and the prescribed rules impose their own conditions.

It does not mean a buy-back always needs a special resolution. Ten per cent or less of paid-up equity capital and free reserves, authorised by a Board resolution, is enough.

It does not mean the twenty-five per cent is always measured the same way. For equity shares in a financial year it is measured against total paid-up equity capital, not against capital plus free reserves.

It does not mean curing a default reopens the door at once. Three years must pass after the default ceased to subsist.

Quick revision

  • 67(1): no company limited by shares or by guarantee with share capital may buy its own shares unless the consequent reduction is effected under the Act.
  • 67(2): no public company may give financial assistance, directly or indirectly, by loan, guarantee, provision of security or otherwise, for a purchase of or subscription for shares in it or its holding company.
  • 67(3): exceptions for a banking company lending in the ordinary course; a scheme approved by special resolution for fully paid shares held by trustees for employees or by employees; and loans to employees other than directors and KMP, up to six months' salary, for fully paid shares held beneficially. Board's report to disclose voting rights not exercised directly by employees.
  • 67(4): does not affect redemption of preference shares. 67(5): company one to twenty-five lakh rupees; officer in default up to three years and one to twenty-five lakh rupees.
  • 68(1): buy-back out of free reserves, securities premium account or the proceeds of an issue; not out of the proceeds of an earlier issue of the same kind.
  • 68(2), seven conditions: articles; special resolution, or Board where ten per cent or less of paid-up equity capital and free reserves; twenty-five per cent ceiling, measured against paid-up equity capital for equity in a financial year; debt not more than twice capital plus free reserves; fully paid; SEBI regulations if listed; prescribed rules otherwise. No offer within one year of the closure of the last one.
  • 68(3): explanatory statement, five items. 68(4): complete within one year. 68(5): proportionate, open market, or from employees' stock option or sweat equity securities.
  • 68(6): declaration of solvency to the Registrar and SEBI, two directors including the managing director, verified by affidavit, not insolvent within one year. Not filed with SEBI by an unlisted company.
  • 68(7): extinguish and physically destroy within seven days.
  • 69: transfer the nominal value to the capital redemption reserve account where funded from free reserves or securities premium, disclosed in the balance sheet; usable for fully paid bonus shares.
  • 70(1): no buy-back through a subsidiary, through an investment company or group, or where there is default on deposits, interest, redemption of debentures or preference shares, dividend, or a term loan or interest to a financial institution or bank; the bar lifts three years after the default ceases. 70(2): no buy-back where sections 92, 123, 127 or 129 have not been complied with.
munotes.in208

Restrictions on Purchase of Own Shares, and Buy-back

Test yourself

1. May a public company lend money to a person to buy its own shares? No. Section 67(2) prohibits a public company from giving, directly or indirectly, by loan, guarantee, provision of security or otherwise, any financial assistance for the purpose of or in connection with a purchase of or subscription for shares in it or in its holding company, subject only to the three exceptions in section 67(3).

2. Out of what may a buy-back be funded? Free reserves, the securities premium account, or the proceeds of the issue of any shares or other specified securities, but not out of the proceeds of an earlier issue of the same kind of shares or securities: section 68(1) and its proviso.

3. When may a buy-back be done without a special resolution? Where the buy-back is ten per cent or less of the total paid-up equity capital and free reserves and has been authorised by the Board by a resolution passed at its meeting: proviso to section 68(2)(b).

4. What is the debt condition? The ratio of the aggregate of secured and unsecured debts owed by the company after the buy-back must not be more than twice the paid-up capital and its free reserves, unless the Central Government notifies a higher ratio for a class of companies: section 68(2)(d).

5. What must the company do with the shares bought back, and when? Extinguish and physically destroy them within seven days of the last date of completion of the buy-back: section 68(7).

6. Name three circumstances in which a buy-back is prohibited. Through any subsidiary company; through any investment company or group of investment companies; and where the company is in default in repayment of deposits or interest, redemption of debentures or preference shares, payment of dividend, or repayment of a term loan or interest to a financial institution or bank, unless the default has been remedied and three years have lapsed: section 70(1).

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in209

Chapter Thirty-Five

Debentures and the Power to Nominate

Syllabus topic 1.4, labels: "Debentures", "Power to nominate"

In one line

A debenture is a written acknowledgement of a company's debt, it can be made convertible into shares, it never carries a vote, and section 72 lets any securities holder name the person who is to get his securities when he dies.

In exam wording: section 2(30) defines a debenture to include debenture stock, bonds or any other instrument of a company evidencing a debt, whether constituting a charge on the assets of the company or not. Section 71 permits convertible debentures by special resolution, forbids voting rights, requires a debenture redemption reserve and, above the thresholds, debenture trustees, and gives the Tribunal powers where the company's assets are insufficient or it defaults. Section 72 confers a power to nominate.

Why the law has this at all

A company that needs money has two choices. It can sell part of itself, which is a share, or it can borrow, which is a debenture. The two are legally opposite and the Act keeps them apart.

The debenture holder is a creditor. He gets interest whether or not there are profits, he is paid before members on a winding up, and he takes no part in running the company. Section 71(2) guards that boundary absolutely: no company shall issue any debentures carrying any voting rights. If debentures could vote, a company could be controlled by people who bear none of the risk of ownership.

And a debenture holder needs protection the shareholder does not. He usually has no vote, no seat and no information rights, and there may be tens of thousands of him. So the Act supplies a trustee to act for him collectively, a reserve out of profits so that redemption money is set aside rather than spent, and direct access to the Tribunal when things go wrong.

Some words this chapter uses

A debenture is an instrument acknowledging a debt. Convertible means capable of becoming shares. Secured debentures are backed by a charge on the company's assets. A debenture trust deed is the document by which a trustee holds the security for all the holders. A debenture redemption reserve is money set aside out of distributable profits to repay debentures. To vest means to pass to somebody as owner. Testamentary disposition means a will.

Convertible debentures: section 71(1)

Section 71(1). A company may issue debentures with an option to convert such debentures into shares, either wholly or partly, at the time of redemption.

The proviso: the issue of debentures with such an option shall be approved by a special resolution passed at a general meeting.

The reason for the special resolution is dilution. A conversion right means the existing members' holdings may be diluted later, so they must consent in advance by the higher majority. Read this with section 62(3), which takes such a conversion outside the pre-emption rules provided the terms were approved by special resolution before the issue.

munotes.in210

Debentures and the Power to Nominate

No voting rights: section 71(2)

No company shall issue any debentures carrying any voting rights.

Absolute, with no proviso and no exception. It is the clearest statement in the Act of the difference between ownership and lending.

Secured debentures and the reserve: section 71(3) and (4)

Section 71(3). Secured debentures may be issued by a company subject to such terms and conditions as may be prescribed.

Where a debenture is secured on the company's assets it creates a charge, which must be registered under section 77. That is Module II territory.

Section 71(4): the debenture redemption reserve. Where debentures are issued under this section, the company shall create a debenture redemption reserve account out of the profits of the company available for payment of dividend, and the amount credited to that account shall not be utilised by the company except for the redemption of debentures.

Two features. The reserve comes out of distributable profits, so shareholders give up dividend to fund it. And it is ring-fenced: it may be used for nothing but redemption. Section 71(13) lets the Central Government prescribe the quantum of the reserve.

Debenture trustees: section 71(5), (6) and (7)

Section 71(5): when a trustee is compulsory. No company shall issue a prospectus or make an offer or invitation to the public or to its members exceeding five hundred for the subscription of its debentures, unless the company has, before such issue or offer, appointed one or more debenture trustees, on prescribed conditions.

The trigger is two-limbed: a prospectus or public offer, or an offer or invitation to more than five hundred members. Below that, no trustee is compelled.

Section 71(6): what the trustee does. A debenture trustee shall take steps to protect the interests of the debenture-holders and redress their grievances in accordance with the prescribed rules.

Section 71(7): the trustee cannot contract out of care. Any provision in a trust deed securing the issue of debentures, or in any contract with the debenture-holders secured by a trust deed, shall be void in so far as it would have the effect of exempting a trustee from, or indemnifying him against, any liability for breach of trust where he fails to show the degree of care and due diligence required of him as a trustee, having regard to the provisions of the trust deed conferring on him any power, authority or discretion.

The proviso allows a collective relaxation: the trustee's liability shall be subject to such exemptions as may be agreed upon by a majority of debenture-holders holding not less than three fourths in value of the total debentures at a meeting held for the purpose.

munotes.in211

Debentures and the Power to Nominate

So the protection cannot be signed away by the company in the trust deed, but it can be relaxed by the holders themselves, by a three fourths value majority at a meeting.

Payment, and the Tribunal: section 71(8), (9) and (10)

Section 71(8). A company shall pay interest and redeem the debentures in accordance with the terms and conditions of their issue.

Section 71(9): the early warning power. Where at any time the debenture trustee comes to the conclusion that the assets of the company are insufficient, or are likely to become insufficient, to discharge the principal amount as and when it becomes due, the trustee may file a petition before the Tribunal, and the Tribunal may, after hearing the company and any other interested person, by order impose such restrictions on the incurring of any further liabilities by the company as it may consider necessary in the interests of the debenture-holders.

This is preventive, and it is unusual. The trustee does not have to wait for a default. He acts on the likelihood of one, and the Tribunal's remedy is to stop the company taking on more debt.

Section 71(10): the remedy after default. Where a company fails to redeem the debentures on the date of their maturity, or fails to pay interest when it is due, the Tribunal may, on the application of any or all of the debenture-holders, or of the debenture trustee, and after hearing the parties, direct by order that the company redeem the debentures forthwith on payment of principal and interest due.

Sub-section (11) was omitted by the Companies (Amendment) Act 2020 with effect from 21 December 2020, as part of the decriminalisation of the Act.

Specific performance, and rules: section 71(12) and (13)

Section 71(12). A contract with the company to take up and pay for any debentures of the company may be enforced by a decree for specific performance.

This is a real exception to the ordinary law. A contract to lend money is not usually specifically enforceable, because damages are an adequate remedy. Section 71(12) makes an agreement to subscribe for debentures enforceable in specie, which matters when a company is relying on a committed subscription.

Section 71(13). The Central Government may prescribe the procedure for securing the issue of debentures, the form of the debenture trust deed, the procedure for holders to inspect the trust deed and obtain copies, the quantum of the debenture redemption reserve required to be created, and such other matters.

munotes.in212

Debentures and the Power to Nominate

The power to nominate: section 72

Section 72(1): the basic power. Every holder of securities of a company may, at any time, nominate, in the prescribed manner, any person to whom his securities shall vest in the event of his death.

Note "every holder of securities", so it covers shares and debentures alike, and "at any time".

Section 72(2): joint holders. Where securities are held by more than one person jointly, the joint holders may together nominate any person to whom all the rights shall vest in the event of death of all the joint holders.

So a nomination by joint holders operates only when all of them have died. While one survives, the ordinary rules of joint holding apply.

Section 72(3): the nomination overrides a will. Notwithstanding anything contained in any other law for the time being in force, or in any disposition, whether testamentary or otherwise, in respect of the securities, where a nomination made in the prescribed manner purports to confer on a person the right to vest the securities, the nominee shall, on the death of the holder or of all the joint holders, become entitled to all the rights in the securities to the exclusion of all other persons, unless the nomination is varied or cancelled in the prescribed manner.

This is the sub-section that is examined. A validly made nomination prevails over a will and over the general law, and the nominee takes to the exclusion of all other persons. The only escape is that the nomination is varied or cancelled in the prescribed manner.

Section 72(4): a minor nominee. Where the nominee is a minor, it is lawful for the holder making the nomination to appoint, in the prescribed manner, any person to become entitled to the securities in the event of the holder's death during the minority of the nominee.

A worked example

Bhandara Steel Limited raises forty crore rupees by issuing debentures to the public.

Convertibility. It wants the debentures convertible into equity at redemption. Under the proviso to section 71(1) that needs a special resolution at a general meeting. Having passed it before the issue, the later conversion is also outside the pre-emption rules by section 62(3).

Votes. A large subscriber asks for one vote per debenture. Section 71(2) forbids it absolutely. No resolution can grant it.

Security. The debentures are secured on the company's plant. They are secured debentures under section 71(3), and the charge must be registered under section 77.

The reserve. Under section 71(4) the company must create a debenture redemption reserve account out of profits available for payment of dividend, and may use that money for nothing but redemption. The quantum is as prescribed under section 71(13).

munotes.in213

Debentures and the Power to Nominate

Trustees. Because the company is issuing a prospectus to the public, section 71(5) requires it to appoint one or more debenture trustees before the issue. The trustee's duty under section 71(6) is to protect the holders' interests and redress their grievances.

A clause in the trust deed says the trustee shall not be liable for any loss however caused. To the extent it exempts him from liability for breach of trust where he fails to show the required degree of care and due diligence, it is void under section 71(7). The holders themselves could relax his liability, but only by a three fourths in value majority at a meeting.

Trouble. Two years later the trustee concludes that the company's assets are likely to become insufficient to meet the principal at maturity. He does not wait for a default. He petitions the Tribunal under section 71(9), and the Tribunal, after hearing the company, may restrict the company from incurring further liabilities.

Default. The company then misses an interest payment. Under section 71(10) any or all of the debenture-holders, or the trustee, may apply to the Tribunal, which may direct the company to redeem the debentures forthwith on payment of principal and interest due.

A committed subscriber refuses to pay. An institution that contracted to take five crore rupees of the debentures walks away. Under section 71(12) the contract may be enforced by a decree for specific performance.

Nomination. Mr Fernandes holds ten thousand of the debentures and two thousand equity shares. He nominates his sister under section 72(1), in the prescribed manner. His will leaves everything to his son.

On his death the sister takes the securities, because section 72(3) gives the nominee all the rights notwithstanding any testamentary disposition and to the exclusion of all other persons, unless the nomination was varied or cancelled in the prescribed manner. Had the securities been held jointly by Mr Fernandes and his wife with a joint nomination, it would have operated only on the death of both: section 72(2). And had the nominee been a minor, he could have appointed under section 72(4) a person to become entitled if he died during the nominee's minority.

Distinctions that carry marks

ShareDebenture
The holder isA member and ownerA creditor
ReturnDividend, only out of profits, if declaredInterest, payable whether or not there are profits, section 71(8)
VotingYes, subject to section 47Never, section 71(2)
Priority on winding upLastBefore members
SecurityNoneMay be secured on assets, section 71(3)
Reserve requiredNot applicableDebenture redemption reserve out of distributable profits, section 71(4)
TrusteeNoneCompulsory above the section 71(5) thresholds
Specific performance of a contract to take themNot provided forExpressly available, section 71(12)
Certificate to be deliveredTwo months from allotmentSix months from allotment, section 56(4)(d)
munotes.in214

Debentures and the Power to Nominate

Section 71(9)Section 71(10)
WhenAssets insufficient or likely to become insufficientCompany fails to redeem or to pay interest
Who appliesThe debenture trusteeAny or all debenture-holders, or the trustee
ReliefRestrictions on incurring further liabilitiesOrder to redeem forthwith with principal and interest
CharacterPreventiveRemedial

What this does NOT mean

It does not mean every debenture issue needs a trustee. Only an issue by prospectus or public offer, or an offer or invitation to members exceeding five hundred: section 71(5).

It does not mean a debenture can be given a vote by agreement. Section 71(2) is absolute.

It does not mean the debenture redemption reserve is available capital. Section 71(4) ring-fences it for redemption alone.

It does not mean a nomination is a will. It overrides a will under section 72(3), and it is varied or cancelled only in the prescribed manner.

Quick revision

  • 2(30): a debenture includes debenture stock, bonds or any other instrument evidencing a debt, whether or not constituting a charge on assets.
  • 71(1): convertible debentures, wholly or partly, at redemption; special resolution required.
  • 71(2): no voting rights, absolutely.
  • 71(3): secured debentures on prescribed terms. 71(4): debenture redemption reserve out of profits available for dividend, usable only for redemption.
  • 71(5): debenture trustees before any prospectus or public offer, or offer or invitation to members exceeding five hundred.
  • 71(6): trustee protects interests and redresses grievances. 71(7): an exemption or indemnity for failure to show due care and diligence is void; the holders may relax it by three fourths in value at a meeting.
  • 71(8): pay interest and redeem per the terms. 71(9): trustee may petition the Tribunal where assets are or are likely to become insufficient, and the Tribunal may restrict further liabilities. 71(10): on failure to redeem or pay interest, the Tribunal may order redemption forthwith. Sub-section (11) omitted w.e.f. 21 December 2020.
  • 71(12): a contract to take up and pay for debentures is enforceable by specific performance. 71(13): Central Government may prescribe procedure, the trust deed form, inspection, and the quantum of the reserve.
  • 72(1): every holder of securities may nominate at any time. 72(2): joint holders nominate together, operating on the death of all. 72(3): the nominee takes notwithstanding any testamentary disposition and to the exclusion of all other persons, unless varied or cancelled. 72(4): a person may be appointed where the nominee is a minor.
munotes.in215

Debentures and the Power to Nominate

Test yourself

1. Define a debenture and state whether it can carry a vote. Section 2(30) defines a debenture to include debenture stock, bonds or any other instrument of a company evidencing a debt, whether or not constituting a charge on the assets of the company. No company shall issue any debentures carrying any voting rights: section 71(2).

2. What is required to issue convertible debentures? A special resolution passed at a general meeting: proviso to section 71(1). The debentures may be convertible wholly or partly into shares at the time of redemption.

3. What is the debenture redemption reserve, and out of what is it created? An account created under section 71(4) out of the profits of the company available for payment of dividend, the amount credited to which shall not be utilised except for the redemption of debentures. Its quantum may be prescribed by the Central Government under section 71(13).

4. When must a company appoint debenture trustees? Before issuing a prospectus, or making an offer or invitation to the public, or to its members exceeding five hundred, for the subscription of its debentures: section 71(5).

5. What may the Tribunal do before any default has occurred? On a petition by the debenture trustee, who has concluded that the assets of the company are insufficient or likely to become insufficient to discharge the principal when due, the Tribunal may, after hearing the company and any interested person, impose restrictions on the incurring of further liabilities in the interests of the debenture-holders: section 71(9).

6. A shareholder nominates his brother and later leaves his shares to his daughter by will. Who takes? The brother. Section 72(3) provides that, notwithstanding any other law and any disposition, testamentary or otherwise, the nominee becomes entitled to all the rights in the securities to the exclusion of all other persons, unless the nomination is varied or cancelled in the prescribed manner.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in216

Module II

munotes.in

Chapter Thirty-Six

Acceptance of Deposits: What a Deposit Is and Who May Take One

Syllabus topic 2.1, "Acceptances of deposits", labels: "Definition of Deposits", "Eligibility to accept Deposits", "Applicability", "Conditions for acceptance of Deposits from its members", "Time period & Acceptance Limit for Deposit"

In one line

A company may not take money from the public as a deposit at all, and may take it from its own members only after telling them the truth about its finances, setting aside a fifth of next year's repayments, and having a clean record.

In exam wording: section 73(1) prohibits a company from inviting, accepting or renewing deposits from the public except as this Chapter provides; section 73(2) allows a company to accept deposits from its members on a resolution in general meeting and on five conditions; and section 76 allows a public company of prescribed net worth or turnover to accept deposits from persons other than its members, with a credit rating and a charge on its assets.

Why the law has this at all

A deposit is a loan from somebody who is not a bank and is not equipped to assess the borrower.

A bank lending to a company has a credit committee, security, covenants and the ability to call the loan. A retired schoolteacher who puts three lakh rupees into a company's fixed deposit scheme because the advertised rate was two points better than her bank has none of that. She cannot read the balance sheet, cannot take security, and will not know the company is failing until it stops paying.

India has had repeated waves of companies collecting public money on that basis and losing it. So the 2013 Act does something blunt: it closes the public deposit route to ordinary companies altogether, leaves it open only to members, who at least own the company and get its accounts, and opens it to the public only for large public companies that must buy a credit rating every year and secure the money with a charge.

Everything in section 73(2) is a disclosure or a cushion. Read each condition and ask which of the two it is.

Some words this chapter uses

A deposit is defined in section 2(31). A member is a person on the register of members; for a company, that is its shareholders. A circular here is the notice a company must send its members before taking their money. A credit rating is an independent assessment of the borrower's ability to repay. A scheduled bank is one in the Second Schedule to the Reserve Bank of India Act 1934. Net worth is defined in section 2(57). To secure a deposit is to give the depositor a claim over specific assets.

The definition: section 2(31)

"deposit" includes any receipt of money by way of deposit or loan or in any other form by a company, but does not include such categories of amount as may be prescribed in consultation with the Reserve Bank of India.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in217

The rest of this chapter

Module one is free. The rest of LL.B. 3 Years Semester 3 is part of the bundle.

You are reading a chapter from a later module. Everything in module one of every subject stays free, and so does every question paper and the syllabus.

See the semester for ₹798 Already bought it? Sign in

Or just the notes: ₹499

Free either way: question papers, the syllabus, and module one of every subject.

Chapter Thirty-Seven

Repayment, Damages for Fraud, and Punishment

Syllabus topic 2.1, label: "Damages for fraud"

In one line

Deposits taken before the 2013 Act had to be cleared out, a company that fails to repay faces very large fines, and where the deposits were taken to defraud, the officers responsible pay personally without any limit.

In exam wording: section 74 required deposits accepted before the commencement of this Act to be declared to the Registrar and repaid within three years or by the end of their term, whichever is earlier; section 75 makes every officer responsible for accepting a deposit personally responsible without any limitation of liability where the deposits were accepted with intent to defraud; and section 76A punishes any contravention of section 73 or section 76.

Why the law has this at all

Three different problems, one after the other.

Section 74 is a transition. When the 2013 Act closed the public deposit route, companies were already holding public money taken under the 1956 Act. Simply banning new deposits would have left the old ones outstanding indefinitely. So section 74 forced companies to declare what they were holding and get it repaid on a deadline, and gave the Tribunal power to extend where repayment at once would destroy the company and everybody's money with it.

Section 75 is about the officer, not the company. A company that cannot repay is often a company with nothing left. Suing it is pointless. Where the money was taken dishonestly, the depositors need a defendant with assets, and section 75 gives them the officers who were responsible, without any cap.

Section 76A is the general penalty, and its numbers are among the highest in the Act. That is deliberate: deposit-taking frauds are the kind that ruin thousands of small savers at once.

Some words this chapter uses

Commencement of this Act means the date the 2013 Act came into force for the provision in question. Renewal is extending an existing deposit rather than taking a new one. Personally responsible means liable out of one's own property. Without any limitation of liability means no cap, not even the amount involved. Wilfully means deliberately. Officer in default is defined in section 2(60).

Old deposits: section 74

Section 74(1): declare and repay. Where, in respect of any deposit accepted by a company before the commencement of this Act, the amount or part of it, or any interest due, remains unpaid on such commencement or becomes due at any time thereafter, the company shall:

  • (a) file with the Registrar, within three months from such commencement or from the date on which the payments are due, a statement of all the deposits accepted by the company and the sums remaining unpaid with the interest payable, along with the arrangements made for such repayment, notwithstanding anything in any other law, in the terms on which the deposit was accepted, or in any scheme framed under any law; and
  • (b) repay within three years from such commencement, or on or before the expiry of the period for which the deposits were accepted, whichever is earlier.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in224

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the semester

Chapter Thirty-Eight

Registration of Charges: Creation and Registration

Syllabus topic 2.2, "Registration of charges", label: "Creation, Modification & Satisfaction of Charges"

In one line

A company that mortgages or pledges its property must tell the Registrar within thirty days, and if it does not, the security is worthless against a liquidator and against other creditors even though the debt itself survives.

In exam wording: section 2(16) defines a charge as an interest or lien created on the property or assets of a company or any of its undertakings or both as security, and includes a mortgage. Section 77(1) makes it the duty of every company creating a charge to register its particulars with the Registrar within thirty days of creation, and section 77(3) provides that an unregistered charge shall not be taken into account by the liquidator or any other creditor.

Why the law has this at all

A company's assets are the only thing its creditors can look to, and a charge quietly takes some of them out of the pool.

Suppose a supplier is deciding whether to sell forty lakh rupees of steel on credit. He looks at the company's balance sheet and sees a factory worth six crore rupees. What he cannot see, unless somebody tells him, is that the whole factory was mortgaged to a bank last month. If he could not find that out, every unsecured creditor in India would be lending blind.

So the Act builds a public register of charges, and enforces it with a penalty aimed exactly at the person who benefits from secrecy: the chargeholder loses his priority. Section 77(3) does not cancel the debt and does not fine anybody. It simply says that a liquidator and other creditors need not take the charge into account, which turns a secured creditor into an unsecured one at the worst possible moment.

Section 80 completes the design. Once the charge is registered, anybody acquiring the property is deemed to have notice of it. So registration protects the chargeholder and warns the world in the same act.

Some words this chapter uses

A charge is defined in section 2(16). A lien is a right to hold another's property until a debt is paid. A mortgage is a transfer of an interest in specific property as security. The chargeholder is the person in whose favour the charge is created, usually the lender. Ad valorem fees are calculated as a percentage of the value involved. A liquidator is the officer who realises a company's assets in a winding up or a liquidation. Deemed to have notice means treated as knowing whether or not he did.

What a charge is: section 2(16)

"charge" means an interest or lien created on the property or assets of a company or any of its undertakings or both as security and includes a mortgage.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in231

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the semester

Chapter Thirty-Nine

Fixed Charges, Floating Charges and Crystallisation

Syllabus topic 2.2, labels: "Floating Charge", "Fixed Charges", "Crystallization of Charge"

In one line

A fixed charge fastens on identified property the moment it is made; a floating charge hovers over a shifting class of assets and lets the company keep trading with them until something makes it settle, and that settling is called crystallisation.

In exam wording: the Companies Act 2013 does not define either kind, but section 85(1) requires a company's own register to include "all charges and floating charges", and section 332 provides that a floating charge created within the twelve months immediately preceding the commencement of a winding up is invalid unless the company was solvent immediately after its creation, except for cash actually paid at or after its creation in consideration for it, with interest at five per cent per annum or such other rate as the Central Government may notify.

Why the law has this at all

Think about what a manufacturer can offer a lender.

Its factory is easy: it does not move, it can be identified in a document, and nobody minds if the company cannot sell it without the bank's consent. A fixed charge works perfectly.

Its stock of raw material and finished goods is a different matter. That is where the company's real value sits, and it is also the thing the company must be free to sell every single day. A fixed charge over it would either be useless to the lender, because the goods are gone by lunchtime, or fatal to the company, because it would need the bank's consent for every sale.

The floating charge is the answer that commerce invented and the courts accepted. It covers a class of assets as it exists from time to time, and it deliberately leaves the company free to deal with those assets in the ordinary course of business until something happens to stop it. When that happens the charge crystallises: it stops floating and fastens on whatever assets are in the class at that moment, becoming in effect a fixed charge over them.

And then the law has to guard the obvious abuse. A company that knows it is sinking can give a floating charge to a friendly creditor, usually a director, for a debt that already exists, and thereby convert an unsecured claim into a secured one at the expense of everybody else. Section 332 exists to stop precisely that.

Some words this chapter uses

To crystallise is to convert a floating charge into a fixed one over the assets then in the class. In the ordinary course of business means the routine trading the company was set up to do. A receiver is a person appointed to take charge of property subject to a charge. A debenture holder here is a secured lender. Solvent means able to pay debts as they fall due. Preferential payments are the claims section 327 puts ahead of others in a winding up.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in238

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the semester

Chapter Forty

Modification, Satisfaction and Rectification of Charges

Syllabus topic 2.2, completing the label "Creation, Modification & Satisfaction of Charges"

In one line

A charge that changes must be re-registered, a charge that is paid off must be reported so the register stops showing it, and where somebody has missed a deadline the Central Government can put the register right.

In exam wording: section 79(b) applies the registration machinery to any modification of a registered charge; section 82 requires a company to intimate satisfaction in full within thirty days, extendable to three hundred days on additional fees; section 83 lets the Registrar enter satisfaction or release without any intimation from the company; section 85 requires the company to keep its own register of charges; section 86 punishes contravention of the Chapter; and section 87 lets the Central Government order rectification of the register.

Why the law has this at all

A register is only useful if it is current. A register that records charges but never records their discharge tells a lender that a company's factory is mortgaged when in truth the loan was repaid four years ago, and the company cannot borrow again against it.

So the Act makes discharge reportable, and it does so with two safeguards pulling in opposite directions.

The chargeholder must be protected against a false satisfaction. A company that simply told the Registrar the debt was paid could wipe out a genuine security by a form. Hence section 82(2): the Registrar gives the chargeholder notice to show cause before recording it.

But the company must be protected against an obstructive chargeholder who has been paid and will not confirm it. Hence section 83, which lets the Registrar act on evidence without any intimation from the company at all.

And section 87 is the safety valve. Deadlines get missed, forms get filled in wrongly, and the consequence under section 77(3) is severe. The Central Government can extend time or correct an error where the failure was accidental or where it is just and equitable to relieve.

Some words this chapter uses

Modification means a change in the terms, conditions, extent or operation of a charge. Satisfaction means the charge has been discharged because the debt has been paid. Release means particular property has been freed from a charge that continues over the rest. A memorandum of satisfaction is the entry the Registrar makes to record discharge. To show cause is to give reasons why something should not be done. Rectification is correcting the register.

Modification: section 79(b)

Section 79 applies the provisions of section 77 relating to registration, so far as may be, to:

  • (a) a company acquiring any property subject to a charge; and
  • (b) any modification in the terms or conditions or the extent or operation of any charge registered under that section.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in245

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the semester

Chapter Forty-One

The Register of Members, and Significant Beneficial Owners

Syllabus topic 2.3, labels: "Register of Members & other Security Holders", "Significant Beneficial Owners"

In one line

A company must keep a list of who owns its shares, must record who really owns them behind a nominee, and must identify anybody holding a quarter or more or exercising control, on pain of the Tribunal freezing the shares.

In exam wording: section 88 requires every company to keep a register of members, of debenture holders and of other security holders; section 89 requires a declaration of beneficial interest where the registered holder is not the beneficial owner; section 90 requires an individual holding not less than twenty-five per cent of beneficial interest, or exercising significant influence or control, to declare himself a significant beneficial owner; section 91 limits closure of the register; and sections 94 and 95 govern where the registers are kept and their evidentiary value.

Why the law has this at all

Ownership of a company and the name on its register are not the same thing, and the gap between them is where a good deal of mischief lives.

Shares can be held by a nominee, by a trustee, by a shell company owned by another shell company, or by a relative who has never seen a share certificate. Somebody, somewhere, actually decides how those shares vote and receives the money they produce. If the law looks only at the register, that person is invisible: to the other shareholders, to creditors, to the tax authorities and to anybody investigating where money came from.

So the Act builds three layers:

Section 88 records the legal owner, the name on the register. Section 89 records the beneficial owner behind a registered holder who is only a nominee. Section 90 goes further and hunts for the significant beneficial owner, the human being at the end of any chain of companies and trusts who holds a quarter or more or who controls the company.

And section 90 has teeth section 89 does not, because the person it is looking for usually does not want to be found. The company can be made to go looking, and the Tribunal can suspend all the rights attached to the shares until the answer comes.

Some words this chapter uses

A member is a person whose name is on the register of members. Beneficial interest is defined in section 89(10). A nominee holds in his own name for somebody else. Significant influence or control takes its meaning from section 2(27). To freeze shares is to suspend the rights attached to them. An index is the alphabetical list that makes a register usable.

The registers: section 88

Section 88(1). Every company shall keep and maintain the following registers in the prescribed form and manner:

  • (a) a register of members, indicating separately for each class of equity and preference shares held by each member residing in or outside India;
  • (b) a register of debenture holders; and
  • (c) a register of any other security holders.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in253

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the semester

Chapter Forty-Two

The Annual Return

Syllabus topic 2.3, label: "Annual Return"

In one line

Once a year every company must draw up a single document describing itself, its owners, its officers and its meetings, put it on its website, and file it with the Registrar.

In exam wording: section 92(1) requires every company to prepare an annual return in the prescribed form containing the particulars as they stood on the close of the financial year, signed by a director and the company secretary, or by a company secretary in practice where there is none; section 92(3), as substituted, requires the company to place a copy on its website and to disclose the web-link in the Board's report; and section 92(4) requires it to be filed with the Registrar within sixty days of the annual general meeting.

Why the law has this at all

A company changes constantly and its constitutional documents do not. The memorandum tells you what it was set up to do; it says nothing about who owns it now, who runs it now, what it paid them, or whether it has been penalised.

The annual return is the yearly photograph. It fixes the position as it stood on the close of the financial year and puts it on a public file, so that anybody dealing with the company can see the same picture at the same date.

And notice what the Act did in 2018. It stopped requiring an extract of the return to be pasted into the Board's report and required instead that the whole return be put on the company's website with the web-link disclosed in the report. The reason is obvious once stated: an extract is chosen by the company, and a link is to the whole document.

Some words this chapter uses

A financial year is defined in section 2(41). The close of the financial year is the date the particulars are taken as at. A company secretary in practice is one holding a certificate of practice, as against one employed by the company. To certify the return is to state professionally that it is correct and that the Act has been complied with. A web-link is the address at which a document can be found.

What goes into it: section 92(1)

Every company shall prepare a return, in the prescribed form, containing the particulars as they stood on the close of the financial year, regarding:

  • (a) its registered office, principal business activities, and particulars of its holding, subsidiary and associate companies;
  • (b) its shares, debentures and other securities and shareholding pattern;
  • (d) its members and debenture holders, along with changes since the close of the previous financial year;
  • (e) its promoters, directors and key managerial personnel, along with changes since the close of the previous financial year;
  • (f) meetings of members or a class of them, of the Board and of its various committees, with attendance details;
  • (g) remuneration of directors and key managerial personnel;
  • (h) penalty or punishment imposed on the company, its directors or officers, details of compounding of offences and appeals made against any such penalty or punishment;
  • (i) matters relating to certification of compliances and disclosures as may be prescribed;
  • (j) details, as may be prescribed, in respect of shares held by or on behalf of the Foreign Institutional Investors; and
  • (k) such other matters as may be prescribed.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in263

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the semester

Chapter Forty-Three

Kinds of Meetings: The Annual General Meeting and the Extraordinary General Meeting

Syllabus topic 2.3, label: "Meetings Kinds of Meetings"

In one line

A company must hold one general meeting of its members every year, within fixed time limits, and may hold others whenever the Board thinks fit or whenever a tenth of the voting members demand one.

In exam wording: section 96 requires every company other than a One Person Company to hold an annual general meeting each year, with not more than fifteen months between one and the next, the first within nine months of the close of the first financial year and any other within six months of the close of the financial year; and section 100 provides for an extraordinary general meeting, called by the Board or on the requisition of members holding not less than one-tenth of the paid-up capital carrying voting rights.

Why the law has this at all

Members own the company but do not run it. The directors run it, and between meetings the members have no way of asking them anything.

The annual general meeting is the one occasion in the year when that is reversed. The accounts are laid, the auditor is appointed, directors retire and stand again, dividends are declared, and the members can ask questions in a room. Everything about section 96 is designed to make sure that occasion actually happens: a compulsory meeting, an outer limit between meetings, and a fixed period after the year end so the accounts are still current.

The extraordinary general meeting exists because a year is a long time. If something needs the members' consent in March, the company cannot wait until September. And because the Board might prefer never to ask, section 100(2) lets a minority of members compel a meeting, and section 100(4) lets them hold it themselves if the Board still will not.

Sections 97 and 98 are the backstop: where a company simply will not meet, or cannot practicably do so, the Tribunal can order a meeting, and can go so far as to declare that one member present shall be a meeting.

Some words this chapter uses

A general meeting is a meeting of the members, as against a meeting of the Board. A requisition is a formal demand. Requisitionists are the members who make it. Suo motu means on the Tribunal's own initiative, without an application. A National Holiday is defined in the Explanation to section 96(2). Impracticable in section 98 means not reasonably capable of being done, not merely inconvenient.

The annual general meeting: section 96(1)

Every company other than a One Person Company shall in each year hold, in addition to any other meetings, a general meeting as its annual general meeting, and shall specify the meeting as such in the notices calling it, and not more than fifteen months shall elapse between the date of one annual general meeting and that of the next.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in270

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the semester

Chapter Forty-Four

Notice, Quorum, Chairman and Proxy

Syllabus topic 2.3, label: "Notice, Quorum, Poll, Chairman, Proxy" and "Meeting and Agenda"

In one line

A meeting needs twenty-one clear days' notice saying where, when and what, an explanatory statement for anything out of the ordinary, a minimum number of people actually in the room, a chairman, and a rule about who may send somebody in their place.

In exam wording: section 101 requires not less than clear twenty-one days' notice, in writing or electronically; section 102 requires a statement of material facts to be annexed for every item of special business; section 103 fixes the quorum; section 104 provides for the chairman; and section 105 governs proxies.

Why the law has this at all

A general meeting is the members' only chance to act collectively, and it can be defeated in four quiet ways.

Give too little notice, and the members who would have objected cannot arrange to come. Hence twenty-one clear days.

Give notice that says nothing, and a member cannot tell whether the meeting matters to him. "To transact such other business as may arise" tells him nothing. Hence section 102, which forces the company to explain every item of special business and to disclose who among the directors and their relatives is interested in it.

Hold the meeting with three people in the room, and a handful of insiders decide everything. Hence the quorum.

Stop members voting unless they attend in person, and anybody living far away is disenfranchised. Hence the proxy.

Each of the five sections in this chapter closes one of those gaps.

Some words this chapter uses

Clear days means the period excluding both the day of service and the day of the meeting. Ordinary business is the four items in section 102(2)(a). Special business is everything else. A quorum is the minimum number who must be present for the meeting to be valid. Personally present means in the person's own body, not by proxy. A proxy is both the person appointed and the instrument appointing him. An appointer is the member who appoints.

Notice: section 101

Section 101(1). A general meeting may be called by giving not less than clear twenty-one days' notice, either in writing or through electronic mode, in the prescribed manner.

"Clear" is the word that is examined. Twenty-one clear days excludes both the day of service and the day of the meeting, so in practice the gap is longer than twenty-one calendar days.

The first proviso: shorter notice. A meeting may be called on shorter notice if consent, in writing or by electronic mode, is given:

  • (i) for an annual general meeting, by not less than ninety-five per cent of the members entitled to vote at it; and
  • (ii) for any other general meeting, by members:
  • (a) holding, where the company has a share capital, a majority in number of members entitled to vote and who represent not less than ninety-five per cent of such part of the paid-up share capital as gives a right to vote at the meeting; or
  • (b) having, where the company has no share capital, not less than ninety-five per cent of the total voting power exercisable at that meeting.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in278

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the semester

Chapter Forty-Five

Voting and its Types, and Types of Resolutions

Syllabus topic 2.3, labels: "Voting and its types-vote on show of hands, Poll, E-Voting, Postal ballot", "Types of Resolutions"

In one line

A resolution is normally decided by counting hands, but any substantial minority can demand a poll in which votes are counted by shares, and some business can be done by post or electronically without a meeting at all.

In exam wording: section 107 decides a resolution on a show of hands unless a poll is demanded under section 109 or the voting is electronic; section 108 empowers the Central Government to prescribe electronic voting; section 110 provides for a postal ballot; and section 114 defines an ordinary resolution, carried by votes in favour exceeding votes against, and a special resolution, requiring votes in favour to be not less than three times the votes against.

Why the law has this at all

A show of hands is quick, and it is also unfair. One member holding a single share has one hand; another holding forty per cent of the company has one hand too. For routine business that does not matter, and the speed is worth having.

For anything contested it matters a great deal, so the Act gives a minority the right to insist on a poll, in which votes are counted by shareholding under section 47. Notice that the poll is available on demand by one-tenth of the voting power, not by a majority: a rule requiring a majority to demand a poll would be useless, because a majority does not need one.

Electronic voting and the postal ballot answer a different problem. A member in another State cannot attend, and a proxy cannot speak for him or vote on a show of hands. Both mechanisms let him vote without being in the room, and the postal ballot goes further and dispenses with the meeting altogether for defined business.

And section 114 exists because the Act is full of the phrases "ordinary resolution" and "special resolution". Without a definition section, every one of those references would be ambiguous.

Some words this chapter uses

A show of hands is a count of persons present. A poll is a count of votes by shareholding. A casting vote is an extra vote given to the chairman to break a tie. A postal ballot is defined in section 2(65) as voting by post or through any electronic mode. A scrutiniser is a person appointed to check a poll. Special notice is the advance notice required by section 115.

Restriction on voting rights: section 106

Section 106(1). Notwithstanding anything in this Act, the articles may provide that no member shall exercise any voting right in respect of shares registered in his name on which any calls or other sums presently payable by him have not been paid, or in regard to which the company has exercised any right of lien.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in287

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the semester

Chapter Forty-Six

Circulation of Members' Resolutions, and Minutes

Syllabus topic 2.3, labels: "Circulation of Members' Resolutions etc.", "Signing and Inspection of Minutes"

In one line

Members with enough support can force the company to circulate their own resolution and their reasons, and everything that happens at a meeting must be written into a minute book within thirty days, which is then evidence of what was done.

In exam wording: section 111 requires a company, on the requisition of the members specified in section 100, to give notice of a members' resolution and to circulate a statement about it; and section 118 requires minutes of every general meeting, every postal ballot resolution and every meeting of the Board and its committees to be prepared, signed and kept within thirty days, in books with consecutively numbered pages, and makes them evidence of the proceedings.

Why the law has this at all

Section 111 answers a simple unfairness. The Board controls the notice of a meeting. If a member wants to propose something the Board dislikes, the Board simply leaves it out, and the member arrives at the meeting with a proposal nobody has heard of and nobody has thought about. Section 111 makes the company circulate the member's resolution and his statement at his expense, so that the argument reaches the other members before they decide.

And it guards against the obvious abuse of that right, which is to use the company's circulation machinery to publish something defamatory. Hence section 111(3), which lets the Central Government stop it.

Section 118 answers a different problem: proof. A meeting is an event that leaves no trace. A year later nobody can say who attended, what was resolved, or whether the chairman declared a resolution carried. The minute book is the record, and the Act therefore controls when it is written, who signs it, what may be left out, and what it proves.

Some words this chapter uses

A requisition is a formal demand by members. To circulate is to send to all members. Needless publicity for defamatory matter is the ground in section 111(3). A minute book is the bound record of proceedings. Consecutively numbered pages prevent substitution of a page. Secretarial standards are the standards issued by the Institute of Company Secretaries of India.

Circulation of members' resolutions: section 111

Section 111(1): the duty. A company shall, on requisition in writing of such number of members as required in section 100:

  • (a) give notice to members of any resolution which may properly be moved and is intended to be moved at a meeting; and
  • (b) circulate to members any statement with respect to the matters referred to in the proposed resolution or business to be dealt with at that meeting.

The threshold is borrowed from section 100, so it is one-tenth of the paid-up capital carrying voting rights, or one-tenth of the total voting power where there is no share capital.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in296

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the semester

Chapter Forty-Seven

Resolutions to be Filed, and the Report on the Annual General Meeting

Syllabus topic 2.3, labels: "Resolutions and agreements to be filed", "Report on annual general meeting"

In one line

Some resolutions are too important to stay inside the company, so copies go to the Registrar within thirty days and onto the public file, and a listed company must additionally file a report certifying that its annual general meeting was properly held.

In exam wording: section 117(1) requires a copy of every resolution or agreement in respect of the matters specified in section 117(3), together with the explanatory statement under section 102, to be filed with the Registrar within thirty days; and section 121 requires every listed public company to prepare a report on each annual general meeting and to file it within thirty days of the conclusion of the meeting.

Why the law has this at all

The register exists so that a stranger can find out what a company has done without asking it. Most of what a company does never needs to be there. But some decisions change the company's constitution, its management or its very survival, and anybody dealing with it afterwards needs to be able to discover them.

So section 117(3) is a list, and every item on it is a decision an outsider has a legitimate interest in: the special resolutions that alter the company's basic documents, the appointment and terms of the managing director, decisions binding a class of members, and the resolution to wind the company up.

And section 117(1)'s proviso does something separate and clever. A resolution altering the articles must be embodied in or annexed to every copy of the articles issued afterwards. Filing tells the register; the proviso tells anybody who asks the company for its articles. Without it, a company could hand out a clean, out-of-date set of articles for years.

Section 121 answers a different question: not what was decided, but whether the meeting was properly held at all. For a listed company, with thousands of shareholders who were not there, that assurance is worth having on the public file.

Some words this chapter uses

An agreement in section 117 means a contract having the effect the sub-section describes, filed alongside resolutions. A specified majority means a majority the Act or the articles requires for a particular purpose. The public domain is the Registrar's public file. A liquidator is included among the officers who may be in default under section 117(2). Convened, held and conducted are the three things section 121 requires to be confirmed.

What must be filed: section 117(3)

The section applies to:

  • (a) special resolutions;
  • (b) resolutions agreed to by all the members of a company which, if not so agreed, would not have been effective unless passed as special resolutions;
  • (c) any resolution of the Board, or agreement executed by the company, relating to the appointment, re-appointment or renewal of the appointment, or variation of the terms of appointment, of a managing director;
  • (d) resolutions or agreements agreed to by any class of members which, if not so agreed, would not have been effective unless passed by a specified majority or in some particular manner; and all resolutions or agreements which effectively bind such a class of members though not agreed to by all of them;
  • (f) resolutions requiring a company to be wound up voluntarily passed in pursuance of section 59 of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code 2016;
  • (g) resolutions passed in pursuance of section 179(3); and
  • (h) any other resolution or agreement as may be prescribed and placed in the public domain.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in305

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the semester

Chapter Forty-Eight

Meetings of the Board and its Committees

Syllabus topic 2.3, labels: "Meetings of Board and its Committees", "Frequency, Convening and Proceedings of Board and Committee meetings", "Quorum; Resolution by Circulation"

In one line

A Board must meet within thirty days of incorporation and four times a year with no more than a hundred and twenty days between meetings, on seven days' notice, with a third of its strength or two directors present, and it may pass a resolution without meeting only by circulating it to everybody.

In exam wording: section 173 requires the first Board meeting within thirty days of incorporation and a minimum of four meetings every year, with not more than one hundred and twenty days between consecutive meetings, on not less than seven days' notice in writing; section 174 fixes the quorum at one-third of total strength or two directors, whichever is higher; and section 175 governs a resolution by circulation.

Why the law has this at all

The members meet once a year. The Board is what actually runs the company, and a Board that never meets is a company run by whoever happens to be in the office.

So the Act insists on a rhythm: four times a year, and never more than four months apart. That is not arbitrary. A company that met twice, in January and December, would satisfy a bare "twice a year" rule while leaving eleven months unsupervised. The one hundred and twenty day cap is what makes the frequency real.

Notice matters for a different reason. A meeting called at two hours' notice is a meeting of whoever is nearby, which in practice means the executive directors. Seven days' notice in writing to every director at his registered address is what gives the non-executive and independent directors a chance to attend, and the provisos to section 173(3) are carefully drawn so that urgency cannot be used to exclude them.

And section 175 exists because business does not wait. A resolution can be passed without a meeting, but only if every director gets the draft, and any one-third of them can insist on a proper meeting instead.

Some words this chapter uses

Total strength in section 174 means the total number of directors, excluding vacancies. An interested director is one concerned or interested in a contract or arrangement, as section 184(2) describes. Resolution by circulation is a resolution approved in writing without a meeting. A chairperson is the director who presides. Video conferencing or other audio visual means must be capable of recording and recognising participation and of storing the proceedings.

Frequency: section 173(1)

Every company shall hold:

  • the first meeting of the Board within thirty days of the date of its incorporation; and
  • thereafter a minimum number of four meetings of its Board every year, in such a manner that not more than one hundred and twenty days shall intervene between two consecutive meetings.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in312

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the semester

Chapter Forty-Nine

Declaration and Payment of Dividend

Syllabus topic 2.4, "Dividend Declaration of dividend Unpaid Dividend Account Investor Education and Protection Fund Punishment for failure to distribute dividends"

In one line

A dividend may be paid only out of profits, must be put in a separate bank account within five days, must reach the shareholder within thirty days, and if it is not claimed for seven years it stops being his and goes to a government fund.

In exam wording: section 123(1) permits a dividend to be declared or paid only out of the profits of the company for that year after providing for depreciation, or out of undistributed profits of previous years, or out of both, or out of money provided by a Government for a guaranteed dividend; section 124 requires unpaid dividend to be moved to an Unpaid Dividend Account and, after seven years, to the Investor Education and Protection Fund under section 125; and section 127 punishes failure to pay within thirty days.

Why the law has this at all

A dividend is the one moment when money leaves the company and goes to the members. Everybody else with a claim on the company, every creditor, every employee, every depositor, is worse off by exactly that amount.

So the Act does two things.

It controls the source. Dividend comes out of profits, never out of capital. That is the maintenance of capital principle in its most direct application, and the provisos to section 123(1) close the obvious routes around it: no dividend out of unrealised or notional gains or revaluation, none out of reserves other than free reserves, and none at all until carried-forward losses and unprovided depreciation have been set off.

It controls the delivery. A declared dividend is a debt owed to the shareholder, and a company that declares one and keeps the money is using its members' money as working capital. Hence the five days to put it in a separate account, the thirty days to pay it, and the eighteen per cent interest and imprisonment in section 127.

And the seven year rule answers what to do with money nobody claims. It cannot stay with the company forever, because that would reward the company for not finding the shareholder. It goes to a fund that exists to educate and protect investors generally.

Some words this chapter uses

A dividend includes an interim dividend, by section 2(35). Free reserves are defined in section 2(43) as reserves available for distribution as dividend. Unrealised gains are increases in value not yet turned into money. An interim dividend is one declared by the Board between annual general meetings. A warrant is the instrument by which a dividend is paid. The Fund is the Investor Education and Protection Fund under section 125.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in319

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the semester

Chapter Fifty

Books of Account and Financial Statements

Syllabus topic 2.5, "Accounts, Audit & Auditors", labels: "Books of Accounts", "Financial Statements"

In one line

A company must keep proper books at its registered office for eight years and produce financial statements that give a true and fair view, and once those statements are adopted they can be changed only by order of a court or the Tribunal.

In exam wording: section 128 requires every company to prepare and keep books of account and financial statements at its registered office for every financial year, giving a true and fair view, on the accrual basis and according to the double entry system, preserved for not less than eight financial years; and section 129 requires the financial statements to give a true and fair view, comply with the accounting standards notified under section 133, and be in the form provided in Schedule III.

Why the law has this at all

Everything else in company law depends on the accounts being right.

A dividend may be paid only out of profits, so the profit figure decides what may leave the company. A buy-back is capped by reference to free reserves. Managerial remuneration is a percentage of net profits. A creditor deciding whether to supply on credit reads the balance sheet. If the accounts are wrong, every one of those decisions is wrong.

So the Act does four things. It prescribes how the books are kept: accrual basis, double entry, at the registered office, for eight years. It prescribes what the statements must show: a true and fair view, in Schedule III form, complying with the accounting standards. It gives directors a right of inspection, because a director who cannot see the books cannot discharge his duties. And it makes the statements very hard to change afterwards, because accounts that can be quietly rewritten are not accounts at all.

Some words this chapter uses

Accrual basis means transactions are recorded when they occur, not when cash moves. Double entry means every transaction is recorded twice, as a debit and a credit. A true and fair view is the overriding standard the accounts must meet. Consolidated financial statements combine the parent with its subsidiaries and associates. To recast accounts is to redraw them. A limited review is a lighter form of examination than a full audit.

Books of account: section 128

Section 128(1): what, where and how. Every company shall prepare and keep at its registered office books of account and other relevant books and papers and financial statement for every financial year which:

  • give a true and fair view of the state of the affairs of the company, including that of its branch offices;
  • explain the transactions effected both at the registered office and at its branches; and
  • are kept on accrual basis and according to the double entry system of accounting.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in328

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the semester

Chapter Fifty-One

The Board's Report, the Annual Report and Integrated Reporting

Syllabus topic 2.5, labels: "Annual Report & Directors Reports", "Integrated Reporting"

In one line

Every year the directors must attach to the accounts a report that explains the company's affairs, discloses what the Board did, and states in their own words that the accounts are properly prepared.

In exam wording: section 134(1) requires the financial statements to be approved by the Board and signed in the manner prescribed before submission to the auditor; section 134(3) requires a report by the Board to be attached to the statements laid in general meeting, containing seventeen specified matters; and section 134(5) prescribes the Directors' Responsibility Statement.

Why the law has this at all

The financial statements are numbers. They say what happened but not why, and they say nothing about how the company was governed.

The Board's report is the narrative that goes with them, and everything in the section 134(3) list is there because a member cannot get it from the accounts: how many times the Board met, what the auditors qualified and what the Board says about it, what related party contracts were entered into, what risks may threaten the company's existence, what the company did about corporate social responsibility, and how the Board evaluated its own performance.

And section 134(5) does something different again. The accounts are prepared by the management and audited by an outsider. The Directors' Responsibility Statement makes the directors say, in the first person and on the public file, that the accounting standards were followed, that the judgments were prudent, that adequate records were kept, that the going concern basis was used, and, in a listed company, that internal financial controls were adequate and operating effectively. It converts a diffuse responsibility into a signed assertion.

Some words this chapter uses

A qualification in an auditor's report is a reservation about the accounts. A disclaimer is a statement that the auditor cannot form an opinion. Going concern means the company is expected to continue in business. Internal financial controls are defined in the Explanation to section 134(5)(e). Integrated reporting is a practice of reporting financial and non-financial performance together; it is not a term of the Act.

Approval and signature: section 134(1) and (2)

Section 134(1). The financial statement, including the consolidated financial statement, if any, shall be approved by the Board of Directors before they are signed on behalf of the Board by:

  • the chairperson of the company where he is authorised by the Board, or by two directors, of whom one shall be the managing director, if any; and
  • the Chief Executive Officer, the Chief Financial Officer and the company secretary, wherever they are appointed;
  • or, in the case of a One Person Company, only by one director,

for submission to the auditor for his report thereon.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in337

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the semester

Chapter Fifty-Two

The National Financial Reporting Authority

Syllabus topic 2.5, label: "National Financial Reporting Authority"

In one line

The National Financial Reporting Authority is the statutory regulator of accounting and auditing standards, and it can investigate an auditor, fine him and bar him from auditing for up to ten years.

In exam wording: section 132(1) empowers the Central Government to constitute a National Financial Reporting Authority to provide for matters relating to accounting and auditing standards; section 132(2) gives it four functions; section 132(4) gives it power to investigate professional or other misconduct by chartered accountants, the powers of a civil court, and, on proof, power to impose penalties and to debar; and section 132(5) gives an appeal to the Appellate Tribunal.

Why the law has this at all

Until 2013 the accountancy profession in India was regulated almost entirely by itself. The Institute of Chartered Accountants of India set the standards, admitted the members and disciplined them.

Self-regulation works while the profession's interest and the public's coincide. It comes under strain when a large audit failure occurs, because the body deciding whether the auditor was at fault is composed of that auditor's colleagues and competitors, and because the loss falls on investors who have no voice in it.

So section 132 creates an outside regulator with three deliberate features. It is statutory, so its standards bind. Its investigative jurisdiction ousts the professional institutes once it starts, so there cannot be two inquiries with different answers. And its sanctions reach beyond a reprimand to money and debarment, which is what actually affects an audit firm.

The independence provisions in section 132(3) are the other half of the design. A regulator staffed by people who are simultaneously partners in audit firms would be no improvement, so the Act requires declarations of no conflict and a two year cooling off period after leaving.

Some words this chapter uses

Accounting standards are the standards notified under section 133. Auditing standards govern how an audit is carried out. Professional or other misconduct takes its meaning from section 22 of the Chartered Accountants Act 1949. To debar is to prohibit a person from practising in a defined way. Suo motu means on its own initiative. The Appellate Tribunal is the National Company Law Appellate Tribunal.

Constitution: section 132(1) and (1A)

Section 132(1). The Central Government may, by notification, constitute a National Financial Reporting Authority to provide for matters relating to accounting and auditing standards under this Act.

Section 132(1A). The Authority shall perform its functions through such divisions as may be prescribed.

The four functions: section 132(2)

Notwithstanding anything contained in any other law for the time being in force, the Authority shall:

  • (a) make recommendations to the Central Government on the formulation and laying down of accounting and auditing policies and standards for adoption by companies or classes of companies or their auditors;
  • (b) monitor and enforce the compliance with accounting standards and auditing standards in such manner as may be prescribed;
  • (c) oversee the quality of service of the professions associated with ensuring compliance with such standards, and suggest measures required for improvement in quality of service and such other related matters as may be prescribed; and
  • (d) perform such other functions relating to clauses (a), (b) and (c) as may be prescribed.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in345

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the semester

Chapter Fifty-Three

Auditors: Appointment, Rotation, Resignation, Removal and Disqualification

Syllabus topic 2.5, label: "Auditors-Appointment, Resignation and Procedure relating to Removal, Qualification and Disqualification"

In one line

An auditor is appointed for five years at a time, cannot be removed before his term ends without a special resolution and the Central Government's approval, and is disqualified if he has almost any financial or personal connection with the company.

In exam wording: section 139(1) requires every company to appoint an auditor at its first annual general meeting to hold office till the conclusion of the sixth annual general meeting; section 139(2) imposes rotation on listed and prescribed companies; section 140(1) allows removal before the term only by special resolution with the previous approval of the Central Government; and section 141(3) lists nine disqualifications.

Why the law has this at all

The auditor is appointed by the members but paid by the company and works with the management every day. That is a structural conflict, and the Act attacks it from four directions.

Security of tenure. An auditor who can be dismissed at will is an auditor who will not qualify a report. So he is appointed for five years and can be removed early only with a special resolution and the Central Government's approval, after being heard.

But not too much security. An auditor who audits the same company for thirty years stops being an outsider. So section 139(2) forces rotation on listed and prescribed companies, with a cooling off period.

Independence by disqualification. Section 141(3) removes anybody with a financial interest, a business relationship, a relative inside the company, or too many audits already.

And a voice on the way out. Sections 140(2) and 140(4) make sure that an auditor who resigns must say why, and that one who is being replaced can have his representation circulated to the members.

Some words this chapter uses

A casual vacancy is a vacancy arising otherwise than by expiry of the term. Rotation means compulsory change of auditor after a fixed period. Special notice is the members' advance notice under section 115. A relative is defined in section 2(77). A business relationship is of such nature as may be prescribed. The Comptroller and Auditor-General appoints auditors for Government companies.

Appointment: section 139(1)

Every company shall, at the first annual general meeting, appoint an individual or a firm as auditor, who shall hold office from the conclusion of that meeting till the conclusion of its sixth annual general meeting, and thereafter till the conclusion of every sixth meeting, the manner and procedure of selection being as prescribed.

So the term is five years, expressed as first meeting to sixth meeting.

The first proviso was omitted with effect from 7 May 2018. It had required the appointment to be ratified by the members at every annual general meeting. It is no longer necessary, and stating otherwise is an error of live law.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in352

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the semester

Chapter Fifty-Four

Rights, Duties and Liabilities of Auditors

Syllabus topic 2.5, label: "Rights, Duties and Liabilities"

In one line

An auditor may see everything, must inquire into six specified questions, must report fraud to the Government, may not do the company's accounting or internal audit, and pays personally if he gets it wrong.

In exam wording: section 143(1) gives the auditor a right of access at all times to the books and vouchers and to require information and explanation from the officers, with six inquiries he must inquire into; section 143(12) requires him to report fraud; section 144 forbids him nine services; section 146 entitles him to attend and be heard at general meetings; and section 147 imposes fine, imprisonment, refund of remuneration and damages.

Why the law has this at all

An audit is an opinion given by one person on somebody else's account of themselves. Three things have to be true for it to be worth anything.

He must be able to see everything. Hence the right of access at all times to books and vouchers wherever kept, the right to require information and explanation from officers, and the holding company auditor's right of access to the records of subsidiaries and associates.

He must be independent. Hence section 144, which stops an auditor auditing his own work by forbidding him to keep the accounts, run the internal audit, design the financial information system, or provide management services.

And he must be answerable. Hence section 147, which makes him liable in fine, and in a knowing case in prison, and requires him to refund his remuneration and pay damages, not only to the company but to statutory authorities, members and creditors.

Section 143(12) is the newest idea and the most important. Traditionally an auditor who found fraud told the Board, which was sometimes the very body committing it. The Act now makes him report to the Central Government above a threshold, and to the audit committee or the Board below it, with disclosure in the Board's report.

Some words this chapter uses

Vouchers are the underlying documents for entries in the books. A qualification is a reservation in the audit report. A branch auditor audits a branch office. A supplementary audit is a second audit by the Comptroller and Auditor-General. A test audit is a sample audit under section 19A of the Comptroller and Auditor-General's (Duties, Powers and Conditions of Service) Act 1971. Auditing standards are those notified under section 143(10).

Rights: section 143(1)

Every auditor shall have a right of access at all times to the books of account and vouchers of the company, whether kept at the registered office or at any other place, and shall be entitled to require from the officers of the company such information and explanation as he may consider necessary for the performance of his duties.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in362

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the semester

Chapter Fifty-Five

The Audit Report, Internal Audit and Cost Audit

Syllabus topic 2.5, labels: "Audit and Auditor's Report", "Internal Audit", "Cost Audit"

In one line

There are three audits in this Act, and they answer different questions: the statutory audit says whether the accounts are true and fair, the internal audit checks the company's own systems from inside, and the cost audit checks what things actually cost to make.

In exam wording: the statutory audit report is governed by section 143(2) to (4); section 138 requires prescribed classes of companies to appoint an internal auditor, who shall be a chartered accountant or a cost accountant or such other professional as the Board may decide; and section 148 empowers the Central Government to direct the maintenance of cost records and the conduct of a cost audit by a cost accountant appointed by the Board.

Why the law has this at all

The statutory audit is an annual, external, backward-looking examination of one thing: whether the financial statements give a true and fair view. It is done once a year by somebody outside the company, and by the time it is finished the year is over.

That leaves two gaps.

The first gap is time and process. A yearly check cannot catch a control that has been failing since April. The internal audit runs continuously, inside the company, and reports to the Board. It is about whether the systems work, not about whether the final numbers add up.

The second gap is cost. Financial accounts show what a company earned and spent in total. They do not show what it costs to make one tonne of cement, and in industries where prices are regulated or where the public interest is engaged, that number matters a great deal. The cost audit examines it, and the report goes to the Central Government.

And note who each reports to, because that is the cleanest way to keep them apart: the statutory auditor reports to the members, the internal auditor to the Board, and the cost auditor to the Board and then to the Central Government.

Some words this chapter uses

Cost records are the particulars of material, labour and other items of cost. Cost auditing standards are those issued by the Institute of Cost Accountants of India with the Central Government's approval. A reservation is a qualification in a report. Net worth is defined in section 2(57). Remuneration in section 142 includes expenses and facilities but not fees for other services.

The statutory audit report, in outline

The full treatment is in [Rights, Duties and Liabilities of Auditors]. In short: the auditor reports to the members under section 143(2) on whether the accounts give a true and fair view of the state of affairs, the profit or loss and the cash flow; the report must also state the ten matters in section 143(3); and where any of them is answered in the negative or with a qualification, the reasons must be given under section 143(4). The report is attached to every financial statement under section 134(2), and its qualifications are read out at the general meeting under section 145.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in372

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the semester

Module III

munotes.in

Chapter Fifty-Six

Who is a Director, and the Director Identification Number

Syllabus topic 3.1, "Directors DIN, Types of Directors"

In one line

A director must be a natural person, every company must have a Board of a minimum size, and nobody can be appointed a director without first obtaining a unique number from the Central Government.

In exam wording: section 2(34) defines a director as a director appointed to the Board of a company; section 149(1) requires every company to have a Board of Directors consisting of individuals, with a minimum of three, two or one and a maximum of fifteen; and section 152(3) forbids the appointment of any person as a director unless he has been allotted a Director Identification Number under section 154.

Why the law has this at all

A company acts through its Board, so the law has to answer two questions before anything else: who may sit on it, and how many.

Who is answered by the single word individuals in section 149(1). A company cannot be a director of another company. If it could, a chain of companies could be run with no human being answerable anywhere in it, and every duty in section 166 would be owed by an artificial person to another artificial person.

How many is answered by minimums and a maximum. A minimum, because a Board of one can be a company run by one man with no check. A maximum of fifteen, because a Board large enough to be a public meeting decides nothing, and because a very large Board is a way of diluting responsibility.

And the Director Identification Number answers a question nobody had asked until it became a problem. The same man could be a director of forty companies under forty spellings of his name, and no register could connect them. The DIN gives each individual one number for life, which is why section 155 forbids a second one and why section 158 requires the number to appear on every filing that mentions a director.

Some words this chapter uses

The Board is the body of directors. An individual is a natural person. A nominee director is one appointed by an institution or under an agreement. Rotation means retiring and standing again by turns. To intimate is to inform formally. An officer in default is defined in section 2(60).

The definition, and what it leaves out

Section 2(34): "director" means a director appointed to the Board of a company.

That is circular on its face, and deliberately so. The Act does not define a director by what he does, because directors do very different things: some run the company daily, some attend four meetings a year. It defines him by office.

But the Act does reach people who are not appointed. Section 2(60) makes an officer in default include a person in accordance with whose advice, directions or instructions the Board is accustomed to act, and section 2(69) uses the same idea for a promoter. So a person who directs the Board from outside carries a director's liabilities without holding a director's office.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in379

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the semester

Chapter Fifty-Seven

Types of Directors

Syllabus topic 3.1, "Types of Directors"

In one line

Directors are classified by how they got there and by what they do: some are elected by the members, some appointed by the Board between meetings, some sent by an institution, and some are independent of the company altogether.

In exam wording: besides ordinary directors appointed in general meeting under section 152, the Act recognises independent directors under section 149(6), a woman director under the second proviso to section 149(1), a resident director under section 149(3), a small shareholders' director under section 151, and, under section 161, an additional director, an alternate director, a nominee director and a director appointed to fill a casual vacancy.

Why the law has this at all

A Board has to do two things that pull against each other. It must be stable, so that the company is governed continuously, and it must be answerable to the members, who appoint it once a year.

Every category in this chapter is a compromise between those two.

The Board cannot wait for a general meeting when a director dies in March or when it needs another pair of hands. So sections 161(1) and 161(4) let the Board appoint, and then cut the appointee's tenure short so the members get the final say.

A director who goes abroad for six months should not leave his seat empty, but neither should he be able to install a permanent substitute. So section 161(2) allows an alternate, whose office ends the moment the original returns.

A lender or a Government that has put money in wants somebody on the Board watching it. So section 161(3) recognises the nominee director.

And the members who own very little would never elect anybody. So section 151 gives listed companies a small shareholders' director.

Some words this chapter uses

An executive director works in the company; a non-executive director does not. Whole-time director is defined in section 2(94) as a director in the whole-time employment of the company. Managing director is defined in section 2(54). A casual vacancy is one arising before a term expires in the normal course. Proportional representation is a voting system giving minorities seats in proportion to their votes. Small shareholders are defined in the Explanation to section 151.

The broad classification

Before the statutory categories, the practical one, which an answer should give first.

By involvement. An executive director is in the whole-time employment of the company: the managing director under section 2(54) and the whole-time director under section 2(94). A non-executive director attends the Board but does not run the business.

By independence. An independent director under section 149(6) is a non-executive director who additionally satisfies a long list of tests designed to ensure he has no material connection with the company.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in386

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the semester

Chapter Fifty-Eight

Appointment and Reappointment of Directors

Syllabus topic 3.1, "Appointment/ Reappointment"

In one line

Directors are appointed by the members, and in a public company two-thirds of them must be liable to go out by turns, a third of that group retiring at each annual general meeting so the members get a regular say.

In exam wording: section 152(2) provides that, save as otherwise expressly provided, every director shall be appointed by the company in general meeting; and section 152(6) requires that, unless the articles provide for the retirement of all directors at every annual general meeting, not less than two-thirds of the total number of directors of a public company shall be liable to determination by retirement by rotation and be appointed in general meeting, one-third of those liable to retire going out at each annual general meeting.

Why the law has this at all

The members appoint the Board once and then have no further say until something goes wrong. Two obvious solutions both fail.

Appoint the whole Board every year, and no director has any security. A director who knows he may be gone in eleven months will not take an unpopular decision, and the company loses institutional memory annually.

Appoint them for life, and the members' power is a formality. A Board that never faces re-election is accountable to nobody.

Rotation is the compromise. Two-thirds of the Board is exposed to the members, but only a third of that two-thirds in any one year, so roughly a fifth of the Board faces the members annually while the rest carries on. And the rule that the longest-serving go first means the exposure is even over time rather than being aimed at whoever the Board finds inconvenient.

Independent directors are excluded from the count because they have their own tenure regime under section 149(10) and (11), and subjecting them to rotation as well would make their position turn on the majority's goodwill, which is the opposite of independence.

Some words this chapter uses

Liable to determination by retirement by rotation means the office comes to an end by turn. Rotational directors are those so liable; non-rotational directors are the rest. By lot means by drawing lots. A national holiday is one declared as such by the Central Government. Total number of directors, for section 152(6), excludes independent directors.

The first directors: section 152(1)

Where no provision is made in the articles for the appointment of the first director, the subscribers to the memorandum who are individuals shall be deemed to be the first directors until directors are duly appointed; and in a One Person Company, an individual being member shall be deemed to be its first director until directors are duly appointed by the member.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in394

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the semester

Chapter Fifty-Nine

Disqualification, Vacation of Office, Resignation and Removal

Syllabus topic 3.1, "Disqualifications, Vacation of Office, Retirement, Resignation and Removal"

In one line

There are four different ways a director stops being one: he was never eligible, his office falls vacant automatically, he resigns, or the members throw him out.

In exam wording: section 164(1) lists the personal disqualifications, section 164(2) the defaulting company disqualification; section 167 lists the events on which the office becomes vacant; section 168 governs resignation; and section 169 allows the members to remove a director by ordinary resolution on special notice, after a reasonable opportunity of being heard.

Why the law has this at all

Take the four in turn and the design is clear.

Disqualification is about who should never be there. A person of unsound mind, an undischarged insolvent, a recent convict, a man who has not paid his calls. These are all matters personal to him, and the law simply excludes him.

Section 164(2) is different and more aggressive. It is aimed not at the man but at companies that stop filing and stop paying, which is the commonest form of corporate failure in India. Making the directors of such a company unappointable everywhere else for five years gives every director a strong personal reason to keep his company's filings current. It is a blunt instrument and it is meant to be.

Vacation of office is about what happens automatically. No resolution, no meeting: the seat empties by force of section 167 the moment the event occurs. That matters because a company should not have to act to remove a man who is already disqualified.

Resignation is about the director's own exit, and section 168 makes it effective on his terms while keeping him liable for what happened on his watch.

And removal is the members' power, deliberately kept as an ordinary resolution, because a Board that could only be removed by a special resolution would be very hard to shift.

Some words this chapter uses

Moral turpitude means conduct contrary to accepted standards of honesty or morality. An undischarged insolvent is a person adjudged insolvent who has not been discharged. Calls are demands for unpaid amounts on shares. To vacate office is to cease to hold it, automatically. Special notice is the members' advance notice under section 115. A dormant company is one under section 455.

Personal disqualifications: section 164(1)

A person shall not be eligible for appointment as a director if:

  • (a) he is of unsound mind and stands so declared by a competent court;
  • (b) he is an undischarged insolvent;
  • (c) he has applied to be adjudicated as an insolvent and his application is pending;
  • (d) he has been convicted by a court of any offence, whether involving moral turpitude or otherwise, and sentenced to imprisonment for not less than six months, and a period of five years has not elapsed from the date of expiry of the sentence. Proviso: if he was sentenced to imprisonment for seven years or more, he shall not be eligible to be appointed as a director in any company at all;
  • (e) an order disqualifying him for appointment as a director has been passed by a court or Tribunal and is in force;
  • (f) he has not paid any calls on any shares of the company held by him, alone or jointly, and six months have elapsed from the last day fixed for payment;
  • (g) he has been convicted of the offence dealing with related party transactions under section 188 at any time during the last preceding five years;
  • (h) he has not complied with section 152(3), that is, he has no Director Identification Number; and
  • (i) he has not complied with section 165(1), the limit on the number of directorships.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in400

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the semester

Chapter Sixty

Duties of Directors

Syllabus topic 3.1, "Duties of Directors"

In one line

The Act now writes down what a director owes his company: obey the articles, act in good faith for everybody's benefit, use care and independent judgment, avoid conflicts, take no secret gain, and never hand the job to somebody else.

In exam wording: section 166 codifies the duties of a director. He shall act in accordance with the articles; act in good faith to promote the objects of the company for the benefit of its members as a whole, and in the best interests of the company, its employees, the shareholders, the community and for the protection of the environment; exercise his duties with due and reasonable care, skill and diligence and independent judgment; avoid conflicts of interest; make no undue gain; and not assign his office.

Why the law has this at all

Before 2013 a director's duties in India came from decided cases. They were real, but they were scattered, they had to be extracted from judgments about particular facts, and a director who wanted to know what was expected of him had nowhere to look.

Section 166 puts them in one place, and that is its main achievement. It also does three things the old law did not.

It widens who the director must consider. Sub-section (2) names the employees, the community and the environment alongside the members. That is a deliberate move away from the pure shareholder model, and it is the most discussed sentence in the section.

It requires independent judgment. Sub-section (3) means a director cannot simply follow the managing director or the person who nominated him. A nominee director owes his duties to the company, not to his nominator, and that is where sub-section (3) bites hardest.

And it attaches a money remedy to secret profit. Sub-section (5) does not merely prohibit an undue gain: it makes the director liable to pay an amount equal to that gain to the company, which is a restitutionary remedy written into the statute.

Some words this chapter uses

Good faith means honestly and for the proper purpose. Independent judgment means forming one's own view rather than adopting another's. A conflict of interest is a situation where a person's own interest may pull against his duty. Undue gain is a benefit obtained without justification. To assign an office is to transfer it to somebody else. Relatives are defined in section 2(77).

The seven duties: section 166

(1) Act in accordance with the articles

Subject to the provisions of this Act, a director of a company shall act in accordance with the articles of the company.

Two limits in one sentence. The articles are the director's instructions, and he must follow them. But the duty is subject to the provisions of this Act, so an article that conflicts with the Act gives him no authority, which is what section 6 already provides.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in409

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the semester

Chapter Sixty-One

Rights of Directors, and the Registers Kept About Them

Syllabus topic 3.1, labels: "Rights of Directors", "Register of directors and key managerial personnel and their shareholding"

In one line

A director has rights the Act gives him personally, chiefly to be told about meetings, to see the books and to be paid, and the company must keep a public register of who its directors are and what they own.

In exam wording: the Act confers on a director, among others, the right to notice of Board meetings under section 173(3), the right of inspection of the books of account under section 128(3), the right to participate and vote, the right to be heard before removal under section 169, and the right to remuneration under section 197. Section 170 requires a register of directors and key managerial personnel and their shareholding, section 171 gives members a right to inspect it, and section 172 supplies the residual penalty for Chapter XI.

Why the law has this at all

A director's duties in section 166 are demanding, and several of them are impossible to discharge without corresponding rights.

He must act with due and reasonable care, skill and diligence. He cannot, unless he is told when the Board meets and can see the books. So section 173(3) gives him seven days' notice and section 128(3) gives him access.

He must exercise independent judgment. He cannot, unless he may speak and vote and, when the company turns against him, be heard before he is removed. So section 169(1) and (3) protect him.

The registers exist for the opposite reason. A director's rights are personal; the register is public. Anybody dealing with a company needs to know who its directors are and what they hold, and section 170 read with section 171 makes that discoverable, by the members free of charge and, through the section 170(2) return, by the world through the Registrar.

Some words this chapter uses

Key managerial personnel is defined in section 2(51). Securities held means the shares, debentures and other securities a director or KMP holds. An extract is a copy of part of a register. Residual penalty means one that applies where no other is provided. Free of cost means without charge, which is unusual: most inspections in the Act carry a prescribed fee.

The rights of a director, gathered

The Act has no single section of rights, so an answer must assemble them and cite each.

1. The right to notice of Board meetings. Section 173(3): not less than seven days' notice in writing to every director at his registered address, by hand, post or electronic means. The officer whose duty it is to give notice and fails is liable to twenty-five thousand rupees under section 173(4). A meeting at shorter notice for urgent business needs at least one independent director present, or ratification afterwards.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in416

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the semester

Chapter Sixty-Two

Loans to Directors

Syllabus topic 3.1, "Loans to Directors"

In one line

A company may not lend to its own directors or their close connections at all, but it may lend to entities in which a director is merely interested if the members pass a special resolution and the money is used for the borrower's main business.

In exam wording: section 185(1) prohibits a company, directly or indirectly, from advancing any loan, giving any guarantee or providing any security to a director of the company or of its holding company, a partner or relative of such a director, or a firm in which such a director or relative is a partner; section 185(2) permits such a facility to a person in whom a director is interested, on a special resolution and on the condition that the loan is used for the borrower's principal business activities; and section 185(3) lists four exemptions.

Why the law has this at all

A loan from a company to its own director is the simplest way to take money out of a company without calling it remuneration or a dividend. It escapes the limits in section 197, it escapes the profit requirement in section 123, and it appears in the balance sheet as an asset rather than as a distribution.

Worse, the director is on both sides. He decides whether the company lends, on what security, at what rate and whether to enforce repayment. There is no arm's length bargaining anywhere in the transaction.

So the Act draws two circles.

The inner circle is absolutely barred. The director himself, his relatives and partners, and firms in which they are partners. No resolution can authorise it, because the conflict is total.

The outer circle is permitted but policed. A company in which the director happens to be a member or which he can influence is a genuine commercial counterparty as well as a possible conduit. So section 185(2) lets the company lend, but only if the members are told the full particulars and approve by special resolution, and only if the money goes into the borrower's principal business, not into the director's pocket.

Some words this chapter uses

A book debt is a debt due to the company recorded in its books; a "loan represented by a book debt" is a loan dressed up as a trade receivable. A relative is defined in section 2(77). A guarantee is a promise to answer for another's debt; security here means property pledged for it. Principal business activities are the borrower's main business. Government security yield is the return on Government bonds of the stated tenor.

The absolute prohibition: section 185(1)

No company shall, directly or indirectly, advance any loan, including any loan represented by a book debt, to, or give any guarantee or provide any security in connection with any loan taken by:

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in423

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the semester

Chapter Sixty-Four

Loan and Investment by a Company

Syllabus topic 3.1, label: "Loan and Investment by a Company"

In one line

A company may lend, guarantee, secure and invest, but not beyond a ceiling fixed by its own capital and reserves without a special resolution, not through more than two layers of investment companies, not below a floor rate of interest, not while it is in default on deposits, and not in anybody's name but its own.

In exam wording: section 186(2) caps loans, guarantees, securities and acquisitions at sixty per cent of paid-up share capital, free reserves and securities premium account, or one hundred per cent of free reserves and securities premium account, whichever is more; section 186(3) allows the cap to be crossed only with a special resolution; and section 187(1) requires all investments to be made and held by the company in its own name.

Why the law has this at all

A company's money belongs to its members, and a director who cannot lend it to himself under section 185 may still be tempted to lend it to a company he is interested in, or to bury it under a chain of investment companies until nobody can trace it. The Act's answer has three parts, and it is worth seeing them as three separate ideas.

A ceiling. Beyond a certain proportion of the company's own resources, lending and investing stops being incidental to the business and becomes the business. Past that point the members, not the Board, must decide.

A limit on layering. Investment through investment companies stacked one above another hides the ultimate destination of the money. The Act allows two layers and no more.

A rule about the name. Money invested in a nominee's name is money the company may find hard to prove is its own. Section 187 requires the company's own name, with narrow exceptions.

Some words this chapter uses

Free reserves are reserves available for distribution as dividend, defined in section 2(43). Securities premium account is the account under section 52 holding the premium on shares issued above par. A layer, in relation to a holding company, means a subsidiary or subsidiaries: section 2(87), Explanation (d). An investment company is defined in the Explanation to section 186. A special resolution is one passed by a three-fourths majority under section 114(2). A public financial institution is defined in section 2(72).

Two layers of investment companies: section 186(1)

Without prejudice to the provisions contained in this Act, a company shall unless otherwise prescribed, make investment through not more than two layers of investment companies.

The proviso saves two situations.

  • (i) a company acquiring any other company incorporated in a country outside India where that other company has investment subsidiaries beyond two layers as per the laws of that country; and
  • (ii) a subsidiary company having any investment subsidiary for the purposes of meeting the requirements under any law, rule or regulation for the time being in force.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in440

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the semester

Chapter Sixty-Five

Board Composition and Independent Directors

Syllabus topic 3.1, labels: "Board of Directors", "Independent Directors"

In one line

Every company must have a Board of a fixed minimum and maximum size, with a resident director, in prescribed cases a woman director, and in a listed public company at least one third independent directors, who must satisfy a long test of independence, declare it every year, follow a statutory code, hold office for a term of five years renewable once, and bear a liability narrower than that of an executive director.

In exam wording: section 149(1) fixes the numbers, section 149(4) requires at least one third independent directors in every listed public company, section 149(6) defines independence, section 149(10) and (11) fix the tenure at five consecutive years, twice at most, section 149(12) narrows the liability, and Schedule IV is the Code for Independent Directors.

Why the law has this at all

A Board that is entirely made up of the people who run the company cannot check the people who run the company. That is the whole problem of corporate governance in one line, and the Act's answer is structural rather than moral: put people on the Board who are not part of management, do not owe management money, and are not related to the promoters, and give them a code that tells them what they are for.

The other composition rules answer smaller problems. A maximum of fifteen prevents an unwieldy Board. A resident director ensures somebody the regulator can reach is actually in India. A woman director in prescribed companies answers the plain fact that boards were closed to half the population. A small shareholders' director gives the smallest holders a voice they could never win by voting.

And section 149(12) answers the objection to the whole scheme. If an independent director carried the same liability as the managing director, nobody worth having would take the job. So the Act narrows his liability, and the narrowing is the price of getting good people to sit.

Some words this chapter uses

A nominee director is defined in the Explanation to section 149(7). A relative is defined in section 2(77). A key managerial personnel is defined in section 2(51). Retirement by rotation is the scheme in section 152(6) and (7). A small shareholder is defined in the Explanation to section 151. A term here means the period of appointment, not a financial year.

The size and shape of the Board: section 149(1) and (2)

Every company shall have a Board of Directors consisting of individuals as directors.

Individuals, so a company cannot be a director of a company.

The minimum, under clause (a): three directors for a public company, two for a private company, one for a One Person Company.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in450

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the semester

Chapter Sixty-Six

Powers of the Board, and the Restrictions on Them

Syllabus topic 3.1, labels: "Powers of the Board", "Restrictions on the powers of the Board"

In one line

The Board may do everything the company itself may do, except what the Act or the constitution reserves to the general meeting; ten kinds of decision must be taken at a Board meeting by resolution; four kinds need a special resolution of the members; and charitable, political and defence contributions each have their own rule.

In exam wording: section 179(1) gives the Board the company's whole authority subject to the Act, the memorandum and the articles; section 179(3) lists eleven powers exercisable only by resolution at a Board meeting; section 180(1) lists four powers exercisable only with the consent of the company by special resolution; section 181 caps charitable contributions at five per cent of average net profits of three preceding financial years without the members' prior permission; section 182 governs political contributions; and section 183 permits contributions to the National Defence Fund free of all three.

Why the law has this at all

A company is an artificial person and can act only through people, so somebody must be given the whole of its authority. That is the Board, and section 179(1) says so in the widest possible words.

But a general authority needs three kinds of limit.

A limit of subject matter. Some decisions are so important that the members must take them. Selling the undertaking, or borrowing beyond the company's own capital and reserves, changes what the members invested in. Section 180 reserves those.

A limit of procedure. Some decisions may stay with the Board, but must not be made casually by one director signing a paper. Section 179(3) requires them to be made by resolution at a meeting, so there is a record, a quorum and a chance to dissent.

A limit of purpose. The company's money is not the directors' money to give away. Sections 181 and 182 fix who may authorise a gift and how large it may be.

Some words this chapter uses

An undertaking is defined in the Explanation to section 180(1)(a). Substantially the whole of the undertaking is defined in the same Explanation. Temporary loans are defined in the Explanation to section 180(1)(c). Free reserves are defined in section 2(43). A political party means one registered under section 29A of the Representation of the People Act, 1951. A resolution by circulation is the procedure in section 175.

The general grant: section 179(1) and (2)

The Board of Directors of a company shall be entitled to exercise all such powers, and to do all such acts and things, as the company is authorised to exercise and do.

That is the widest formula the Act could have used, and it means the Board's powers are the company's powers. The two provisos then cut it back.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in463

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the semester

Chapter Sixty-Seven

Board Committees

Syllabus topic 3.1, labels: "Audit Committee", "Nomination and Remuneration Committee", "Stakeholders Relationship Committee", "Vigil mechanism"

In one line

A listed public company and other prescribed companies must have an Audit Committee of at least three directors with a majority of independent directors, and a Nomination and Remuneration Committee of three or more non-executive directors half of them independent; a company with more than a thousand security holders must have a Stakeholders Relationship Committee; and a listed company must have a vigil mechanism giving whistleblowers direct access to the Audit Committee's chairperson.

In exam wording: section 177 creates the Audit Committee and the vigil mechanism; section 178 creates the Nomination and Remuneration Committee and the Stakeholders Relationship Committee.

Why the law has this at all

A Board of a dozen people meeting a few times a year cannot itself examine the auditor's independence, read every related party contract, design a remuneration policy and answer a shareholder whose dividend warrant never arrived. So the Act carves out the work that most needs sustained attention and gives it to standing committees, each with a composition designed for its task.

The design of each committee follows from its job.

The Audit Committee checks the numbers and the people who certify them, so it needs a majority of independent directors and members who can read and understand a financial statement.

The Nomination and Remuneration Committee decides who joins the Board and what everybody is paid, so it must contain no executive directors at all and at least half independent ones. Nobody should be setting his own salary.

The Stakeholders Relationship Committee answers complaints, so it needs only a non-executive chairperson and whatever members the Board decides.

And the vigil mechanism exists because the person who knows about a fraud is usually junior to the person committing it, which is why the Act gives that person direct access to the chairperson of the Audit Committee and safeguards against victimisation.

Some words this chapter uses

Independent director is defined in section 149(6). Non-executive director means a director who is not a managing or whole-time director. Senior management is defined in the Explanation to section 178. Omnibus approval is a standing approval for a class of transactions rather than a single one. A vigil mechanism is what is commonly called a whistleblower policy.

Who must have an Audit Committee: section 177(1) to (3)

The Board of Directors of every listed public company and such other class or classes of companies as may be prescribed shall constitute an Audit Committee.

Note the words "listed public company". They were substituted for "listed company", so a listed private company, if such a thing exists in a given case, is outside the compulsion.

Section 177(2): the composition. The Audit Committee shall consist of a minimum of three directors with independent directors forming a majority.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in474

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the semester

Chapter Sixty-Eight

Other Provisions About the Board and its Officers

Syllabus topic 3.1, the residue of Chapter XII of the Act that the syllabus labels do not name individually but that the module's coverage of "Board of Directors" carries with it.

In one line

An act done by a person as a director stands even if his appointment turns out to have been defective; a director may not take a payment for loss of office on a transfer of the undertaking or of shares without disclosure to and approval by the members; a company may not swap assets with a director for anything other than cash without the members' prior approval on a registered valuer's valuation; and a One Person Company must record in writing every contract it makes with its sole member who is also its director.

In exam wording: section 176 validates the acts of a defectively appointed director; section 191 governs payment to a director for loss of office; section 192 restricts non-cash transactions involving directors; and section 193 governs the contract by a One Person Company with its sole member.

Why the law has this at all

Each of the four answers a different problem, and it is worth naming them separately, because that is how an answer should open.

Section 176 protects the outsider. A person dealing with a company cannot audit whether the director who signed was validly appointed. If a defect in appointment unravelled every act, no contract with a company would ever be safe.

Section 191 closes the takeover bribe. When a company is being sold, the easiest way to buy the directors' cooperation is to pay them personally for giving up office, out of money that would otherwise have improved the price to the shareholders. So the payment must be disclosed to the members and approved by them.

Section 192 closes the valuation trick. Sections 185 and 188 catch loans and contracts, but a company could still transfer land to a director in exchange for shares in his private company, and nobody would know what either was worth. So a non-cash swap needs the members' prior approval and a registered valuer's figure.

Section 193 answers the peculiar problem of the One Person Company, where the company, its only member and its director may all be the same human being. Without a record there would be no evidence at all of what was agreed, and nobody on the other side to give it.

Some words this chapter uses

A person connected with a director is the expression used in section 192; the Act elsewhere uses "person in whom the director is interested", as in section 185. A registered valuer is a valuer registered under section 247. Restitution means giving back what was received. Bona fide for value and without notice is the ordinary equitable formula protecting an innocent purchaser.

Defects in appointment: section 176

No act done by a person as a director shall be deemed to be invalid, notwithstanding that it was subsequently noticed that his appointment was invalid by reason of any defect or disqualification or had terminated by virtue of any provision contained in this Act or in the articles of the company.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in483

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the semester

Chapter Sixty-Nine

Appointment of Key Managerial Personnel

Syllabus topic 3.2, label: "Key Managerial Personnel"

In one line

Prescribed companies must appoint, as whole-time key managerial personnel, a managing director or Chief Executive Officer or manager and in their absence a whole-time director, a company secretary and a Chief Financial Officer; each must be appointed by a Board resolution stating the terms, may not hold office in more than one company except a subsidiary, and a vacancy must be filled within six months.

In exam wording: section 2(51) defines key managerial personnel; section 203 governs their appointment.

Why the law has this at all

Until 2013 the Act named a few managerial offices but did not gather them into a class, so an obligation could be imposed on "the managing director" and quietly avoided by a company that had none.

Section 2(51) creates the class, and once the class exists the Act can use it everywhere: for disclosure of interest under section 189(2), for the right to be heard before the Audit Committee under section 177(7), for the definition of a related party under section 2(76)(ii), for the officer in default under section 2(60), and for the narrowed liability of a non-executive director under section 149(12), which expressly excludes a key managerial personnel from its protection.

Section 203 then does three things. It says which companies must actually have these officers, so that the class is not empty where it matters. It requires the appointment to be by a Board resolution stating the terms, so nobody is a key managerial personnel by accident. And it forbids holding office in more than one company, because an office that is by definition whole-time cannot be held twice over.

Some words this chapter uses

Whole-time, in "whole-time key managerial personnel", means the office is a full-time occupation. A manager is defined in section 2(53), a managing director in section 2(54), a whole-time director in section 2(94), a Chief Executive Officer in section 2(18), a Chief Financial Officer in section 2(19) and a company secretary in section 2(24). An officer in default is defined in section 2(60).

Who is a key managerial personnel: section 2(51)

"Key managerial personnel", in relation to a company, means:

  • (i) the Chief Executive Officer or the managing director or the manager;
  • (ii) the company secretary;
  • (iii) the whole-time director;
  • (iv) the Chief Financial Officer;
  • (v) such other officer, not more than one level below the directors who is in whole-time employment, designated as key managerial personnel by the Board; and
  • (vi) such other officer as may be prescribed.

Clauses (v) and (vi) were added by the Companies (Amendment) Act, 2017, and clause (v) is the interesting one: the Board may designate a whole-time officer not more than one level below the directors as key managerial personnel. So the class is partly closed by the Act and partly open to the Board.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in492

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the semester

Chapter Seventy

Managing Directors, Whole-Time Directors and Managers

Syllabus topic 3.2, labels: "Managing Director", "Whole-time Director", "Manager"

In one line

A company may not have a managing director and a manager at the same time; none of the three may be appointed for more than five years at a time; a person below twenty-one or aged seventy or more, an insolvent, one who has compounded with creditors, or one sentenced to more than six months, cannot hold any of these offices except in the case of age by a special resolution; and compensation for loss of office may be paid to these three and to nobody else, capped at the remuneration for the unexpired term or three years, whichever is shorter.

In exam wording: section 2(54) defines a managing director, section 2(53) a manager, and section 2(94) a whole-time director; section 196 governs their appointment; and section 202 governs compensation for loss of office.

Why the law has this at all

Every other provision about directors assumes a body deciding collectively. But a company cannot be run by a committee meeting once a quarter, so somebody must have day-to-day authority, and the Act's problem is that the person who has it can do the most damage.

Hence three kinds of control, and each explains a part of section 196.

Control of duration. A five year maximum term means the members revisit the appointment regularly, and no one acquires the office for life.

Control of the person. The disqualifications in sub-section (3) keep out the insolvent, the person who has compounded with creditors and the person sentenced to more than six months, because a company's day-to-day authority should not sit with someone whose own affairs failed or whose honesty a court has doubted.

Control by the members. Sub-section (4) requires the appointment and its terms to be approved by the Board at a meeting, then by the members at the next general meeting, and, where the terms depart from Schedule V, by the Central Government.

Section 202 answers a different problem. A severance payment is the easiest way to pay somebody more than the remuneration rules allow, so the Act names who may receive it, lists six situations in which it may not be paid at all, and caps the amount.

Some words this chapter uses

Substantial powers of management is the phrase in section 2(54), qualified by its Explanation. Reconstruction and amalgamation are the schemes dealt with in sections 230 to 232. Schedule V contains the conditions for managerial appointment and remuneration, including where profits are absent or inadequate. An undischarged insolvent is a person adjudged insolvent who has not obtained a discharge.

The three definitions

Managing director: section 2(54)

"Managing director" means a director who, by virtue of the articles of a company or an agreement with the company or a resolution passed in its general meeting, or by its Board of Directors, is entrusted with substantial powers of management of the affairs of the company, and includes a director occupying the position of managing director, by whatever name called.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in499

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the semester

Chapter Seventy-One

Remuneration of Managerial Personnel

Syllabus topic 3.2, label: "Remuneration of Managerial Personnel"

In one line

A public company may pay its directors and manager together no more than eleven per cent of its net profits, and within that no more than five per cent to one managing or whole-time director or manager, ten per cent to all of them together, one per cent to the other directors where there is a managing or whole-time director or manager, and three per cent where there is not; the members may authorise more; net profits are computed under section 198; excess drawn must be refunded and is held in trust until it is; and where there are no profits or they are inadequate, Schedule V governs.

In exam wording: section 197 fixes the overall maximum managerial remuneration; section 198 tells you how to calculate the profits on which those percentages bite; section 199 requires recovery on a restatement of accounts; section 200 lets the company fix the remuneration where profits are absent or inadequate; and section 201 prescribes the form and procedure for applications.

Why the law has this at all

Managerial remuneration is the one payment a company makes where the recipients sit on the body that decides it. Left alone, a board could pay itself the whole of the profit and leave the members with nothing, and the members would learn of it only after the year had closed.

So the Act does four things.

It fixes a ceiling as a share of profit, so that pay rises only when the members' returns rise.

It defines the profit, in section 198, because a ceiling expressed as a percentage is worthless if the company may choose what the denominator means. Without section 198 a company could revalue its land, call the increase profit, and pay eleven per cent of it.

It makes the excess recoverable, in section 197(9) and (10), and holds it in trust until it is refunded, which gives the company a proprietary remedy and not merely a claim in debt.

And it deals with the awkward case of a company with no profits, where a percentage ceiling means nothing, by sending it to Schedule V.

Some words this chapter uses

Net profits here means profits computed under section 198, not book profit or taxable profit. Sitting fees are the fees under section 197(5). Managerial remuneration covers directors, including the managing and whole-time directors, and the manager. Restatement of financial statements means their revision to correct an error or a fraud. Median employee's remuneration is the middle figure in the ranked list of employees' pay.

The overall ceiling: section 197(1)

The total managerial remuneration payable by a public company to its directors, including managing director and whole-time director, and its manager in respect of any financial year shall not exceed eleven per cent of the net profits of that company for that financial year computed in the manner laid down in section 198, except that the remuneration of the directors shall not be deducted from the gross profits.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in510

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the semester

Chapter Seventy-Two

The Company Secretary

Syllabus topic 3.2, label: "Company Secretary"

In one line

A company secretary is a member of the Institute of Company Secretaries of India appointed by a company to perform the functions of a company secretary under the Act; he is one of the key managerial personnel; his statutory functions are to report to the Board on compliance, to ensure the company observes the secretarial standards, and to discharge such other duties as may be prescribed.

In exam wording: section 2(24) defines the company secretary, section 2(25) the company secretary in practice, and section 205 states his functions.

Why the law has this at all

A company is under a very large number of continuing obligations, and almost none of them is a single act. Registers must be kept, meetings called on the right notice, resolutions filed within the right number of days, disclosures taken from directors every financial year. Directors cannot do that work, and auditors come once a year and look at the accounts.

So the Act creates an officer whose whole job is compliance, gives him a professional qualification so that the job is done by somebody trained to do it, and makes him one of the key managerial personnel so that the Act's other obligations can attach to him by name.

And then it does something more interesting. It requires him to report to the Board on compliance. That is not a duty to comply; it is a duty to tell the Board where the company stands, which turns a private failure into something the Board is on notice of, and therefore something for which the directors can be held answerable.

Some words this chapter uses

The Company Secretaries Act, 1980 is the statute governing the profession. The Institute of Company Secretaries of India is constituted under section 3 of that Act. Secretarial standards are defined in the Explanation to section 205. In practice means practising the profession rather than being employed by one company.

Who is a company secretary: section 2(24)

"Company secretary" or "secretary" means a company secretary as defined in clause (c) of sub-section (1) of section 2 of the Company Secretaries Act, 1980, who is appointed by a company to perform the functions of a company secretary under this Act.

Two conditions, and both must hold.

A qualification. He must be a company secretary as defined in the Company Secretaries Act, 1980, that is to say a member of the Institute.

An appointment. He must be appointed by a company to perform the functions of a company secretary under this Act.

So the definition is not satisfied by either half alone. A member of the Institute working as a company's finance manager is not its company secretary; and an employee called "secretary" who is not a member of the Institute is not one either.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in523

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the semester

Chapter Seventy-Three

Majority Rule, Minority Rights and the Principle of Non-interference

Syllabus topic 3.3, labels: "Majority Rule", "Minority Rights", "Principle of non-interference (Rule in Foss v. Harbottle)"

In one line

What the majority of members decides binds the company, so a court will not interfere in the internal management of a company at the suit of a member; but that rule fails where the act complained of is illegal or ultra vires, needs a special majority, invades a member's personal right, or is a fraud on the minority, and the Act now supplies statutory remedies of its own.

In exam wording: the rule in Foss v. Harbottle has two branches, the proper plaintiff rule and the internal management rule; the exceptions are the source of minority protection; and sections 241 to 246 are the modern statutory route.

Why the law has this at all

A company decides by voting, and voting means the larger holding prevails. That is not an accident of the Act; it is what buying more shares is for.

But majority rule creates two problems, and the law's answer to each is different.

The first problem is litigation. If any one of ten thousand members could sue the directors whenever he disagreed with them, the company would never be out of court, and the same complaint could be litigated by each member in turn. So the courts developed the rule in Foss v. Harbottle, which sends the complaint back to the company, whose own majority may decide whether to sue.

The second problem is abuse. A majority that can do anything can help itself to the company at the minority's expense, and telling the minority to persuade the majority to sue is telling them to ask the wrongdoer for permission. So the rule has exceptions, and the Act, building on them, gives the minority its own standing under sections 241 and 245.

The Act keeps both halves. Nothing in it abolishes majority rule; what it does is name the situations in which a member may go to the Tribunal in his own name.

Some words this chapter uses

The proper plaintiff is the person in whom the cause of action is vested. Internal management means the conduct of the company's affairs in matters the company itself can regulate. Ratification is the company's approval, after the event, of something done without authority. A fraud on the minority is a use of majority power to appropriate to the majority what belongs to the company or to the members generally. A qualified majority means a special resolution or other prescribed majority. A personal right is one a member holds in his own capacity, as against a right of the company.

The rule in Foss v. Harbottle

Facts. Foss v. Harbottle arose out of a company formed to lay out and sell land as a park. Two members sued the directors and promoters, alleging that they had applied the company's property improperly and had wasted it, and asked the court to make them make good the loss. The company itself was not the plaintiff; the two members sued on their own behalf and on behalf of the other members.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in529

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the semester

Chapter Seventy-Four

Prevention of Oppression and Mismanagement

Syllabus topic 3.3, label: "Prevention of Oppression and Mismanagement"

In one line

A qualified minority may complain to the Tribunal that the company's affairs are being conducted in a manner prejudicial to the public interest, to the company or oppressively to any member, or that a change in management makes such conduct likely; and the Tribunal, if it is satisfied and if winding up would unfairly prejudice the complainants although the facts would justify a just and equitable winding up, may make any order it thinks fit to bring the matter to an end.

In exam wording: section 241 states the grounds, section 242 the powers of the Tribunal, section 243 the consequences of terminating an agreement, and section 244 the right to apply.

Why the law has this at all

The exceptions to the rule in Foss v. Harbottle gave the minority a remedy only if it could fit its complaint into one of them, and even then the remedy was usually damages, which does nothing about a course of conduct that will continue tomorrow.

And the only other remedy was the harshest one. A member could petition to wind the company up on the just and equitable ground, which ended the oppression by ending the company, destroying the value of his own shares along with everybody else's.

Section 242(1)(b) is the sentence that solves that problem, and it is worth reading twice: the Tribunal may act where winding up would unfairly prejudice the complaining members, but the facts would otherwise justify a winding-up order on the just and equitable ground. In other words, the section is for the case that deserves a winding up but should not have one, and it substitutes a tailored order for the blunt one.

And because the mischief is a course of conduct, the relief in section 242(2) is largely prospective: regulate the affairs in future, buy the minority out, remove the managing director, appoint directors who report to the Tribunal.

Some words this chapter uses

Oppression is conduct that is burdensome, harsh and wrongful to a member in his character as a member. Mismanagement is the second limb, conduct prejudicial to the interests of the company or to the public interest. Just and equitable is the ground of winding up in section 271(e). A fraudulent preference is a transfer that would, in an individual's insolvency, be set aside as preferring one creditor over others. Fit and proper is the standard the Tribunal applies under section 242(4A).

Who may complain, and of what: section 241(1)

Any member of a company who complains:

  • (a) that the affairs of the company have been or are being conducted in a manner prejudicial to public interest, or in a manner prejudicial or oppressive to him or any other member or members, or in a manner prejudicial to the interests of the company; or
  • (b) that a material change, not being one brought about by or in the interests of any creditors including debenture holders or any class of shareholders, has taken place in the management or control of the company, whether by an alteration in the Board of Directors or manager, or in the ownership of the company's shares, or, if it has no share capital, in its membership, or in any other manner whatsoever, and that by reason of that change it is likely that the affairs will be conducted in a manner prejudicial to the company's interests or to its members or any class of members,

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in537

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the semester

Chapter Seventy-Five

Class Action

Syllabus topic 3.3, label: "Class Action"

In one line

A prescribed number of members or depositors who think the company's affairs are being conducted prejudicially may apply to the Tribunal on behalf of all of them for orders restraining ultra vires or unlawful acts, declaring a resolution obtained by suppression or misstatement void, and claiming damages from the company, its directors, its auditors including the audit firm, or any expert, adviser or consultant.

In exam wording: section 245 is the class action, and it is the one provision of the Act under which a depositor may sue and an auditor or expert may be made liable to the class.

Why the law has this at all

Section 241 has three limits that a modern remedy has to overcome.

It is for members only. A depositor who has lent the company money has no standing under it, though he may lose everything.

It is against the company's own management. It cannot reach the auditor who certified accounts he should not have certified, or the valuer or consultant whose report induced the loss.

And it does not award damages. Section 242 regulates, removes, buys out and sets aside; it is not designed to compensate.

Section 245 answers all three. It admits depositors as applicants; it names the auditor including the audit firm and any expert, adviser or consultant as respondents; and it lets the class claim damages or compensation.

And it adds the machinery a group remedy needs: public notice to the class, consolidation of parallel applications, a lead applicant, a bar on two applications for the same cause, and costs borne by the company or the person responsible, so that the cost of suing does not fall on the small holders who bring it.

Some words this chapter uses

A class here means the members or the depositors, or any class of them. A depositor is a person who has made a deposit with the company under Chapter V. A lead applicant is the person in charge of the proceedings from the applicants' side. An expert is defined in section 2(38) and includes an engineer, a valuer, a chartered accountant, a company secretary, a cost accountant and any other person having the power or authority to issue a certificate under any law. Frivolous or vexatious describes an application without substance or brought to harass.

Who may apply, and on what opinion: section 245(1)

Such number of member or members, depositor or depositors, or any class of them, as is indicated in sub-section (2) may, if they are of the opinion that the management or conduct of the affairs of the company are being conducted in a manner prejudicial to the interests of the company or its members or depositors, file an application before the Tribunal on behalf of the members or depositors for all or any of the following orders.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in549

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the semester

Chapter Seventy-Six

Compromises and Arrangements

Syllabus topic 3.4, labels: "Compromise", "Arrangement"

In one line

Where a company proposes a compromise with its creditors or an arrangement with its members, the Tribunal may order meetings of each class; if a majority of persons representing three-fourths in value of each class agree and the Tribunal sanctions it, the scheme binds everybody, including dissentients and, in a winding up, the liquidator and contributories.

In exam wording: section 230 is the power to compromise or make arrangements, section 231 the Tribunal's power to enforce it, and section 232 its application to mergers and amalgamations.

Why the law has this at all

A company that owes more than it can pay has two ways out. It can be wound up, which sells the assets in a hurry and pays a few paise in the rupee. Or it can agree with its creditors to take less, or to take shares, or to wait, and go on trading.

The second is almost always better for everybody, and the obstacle to it is not commercial but legal: a company cannot vary a debt without the creditor's consent, so one creditor out of two hundred can refuse and defeat the arrangement, whatever the other hundred and ninety-nine think.

Section 230 removes that obstacle in a controlled way. It lets a qualified majority of each class bind the rest, but only after the Tribunal has ordered the meetings, full disclosure has been made, the regulators have been given thirty days to object, and the Tribunal has sanctioned the result. The majority's power over the minority is real, and it is fenced.

Section 231 then keeps the Tribunal in the picture after sanction, because a scheme is a thing to be carried out over years, not an order that exhausts itself when made.

And section 232 exists because the same machinery, meetings plus sanction, is the natural way to move an undertaking from one company to another, so the Act uses it for mergers and amalgamations with the additional disclosures such a scheme needs.

Some words this chapter uses

A compromise presupposes a dispute or a difficulty and settles it. An arrangement is wider, and by the Explanation to section 230(1) includes a reorganisation of the company's share capital by the consolidation of shares of different classes, or by their division into shares of different classes, or both. A class is a group whose rights are so similar that they can consult together with a common interest. Corporate debt restructuring is the rescheduling of a company's borrowings. A registered valuer is one registered under section 247. The appointed date is the date from which a scheme under section 232 takes effect.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in558

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the semester

Chapter Seventy-Seven

Mergers, Amalgamations and the Acquisition of Minority Shares

Syllabus topic 3.4, labels: "Merger", "Amalgamation", "Acquisition of shares of dissenting shareholders", "Purchase of minority shareholding"

In one line

Small companies and a holding company with its wholly owned subsidiary may merge by a fast track route needing no Tribunal order; a company may merge with a foreign company in a notified jurisdiction with the Reserve Bank's approval; a transferee whose offer has been accepted by nine-tenths in value may compulsorily buy out the dissentients; a person who comes to hold ninety per cent of the equity must offer to buy the rest at a registered valuer's price; and the Central Government may order an amalgamation in the public interest.

In exam wording: section 233 is the fast track merger, section 234 the cross-border merger, section 235 the acquisition of dissenting shareholders' shares, section 236 the purchase of minority shareholding, and section 237 the amalgamation in the public interest.

Why the law has this at all

Section 232 is a good procedure and an expensive one. Meetings of every class, notice to eight regulators, a valuation report and a Tribunal hearing are proportionate when a listed company absorbs another, and absurd when a holding company absorbs a wholly owned subsidiary whose only shareholder is the holding company itself. Section 233 is the Act's answer: the same result, with the Central Government and the Registrar in place of the Tribunal, for companies where nobody outside can be hurt.

Sections 235 and 236 answer the opposite problem, the holdout. After a takeover in which nine-tenths of the shareholders have accepted, the last few per cent can refuse to sell and leave the acquirer with a company it cannot integrate. Section 235 lets it buy them out on the same terms. And where an acquirer already holds ninety per cent, the remaining holders are locked into a company with no market for their shares; section 236 makes the acquirer offer to buy them out at a valuer's price, and lets the minority require the purchase.

Section 237 is different in kind. It is not a bargain at all but a public interest power, exercised by order in the Official Gazette, with compensation for any member or creditor left worse off.

Some words this chapter uses

A small company is defined in section 2(85). A wholly owned subsidiary is one all of whose shares are held by the holding company. A declaration of solvency is a statement that the company can pay its debts. A dissenting shareholder is defined in the Explanation to section 235. An acquirer and a person acting in concert take their meanings, by the Explanation to section 236, from the Securities and Exchange Board of India (Substantial Acquisition of Shares and Takeovers) Regulations, 1997. Depository Receipts are instruments representing shares, issued outside the country of the issuer.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in571

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the semester

Module IV

munotes.in

Chapter Seventy-Eight

Corporate Social Responsibility

Syllabus topic 4.1, label: "Corporate Social Responsibility"

In one line

A company above any one of three financial thresholds must have a Corporate Social Responsibility Committee, adopt a policy on Schedule VII activities, and spend at least two per cent of its average net profits of the three immediately preceding financial years, transferring what it does not spend either to a Schedule VII Fund or, for an ongoing project, to a special bank account.

In exam wording: section 135 is the whole subject, and Schedule VII is the list of activities.

Why the law has this at all

India was the first country to make corporate social responsibility a statutory obligation rather than an exhortation, and the choice the Act made is worth stating because it explains the section's shape.

It did not tax companies and spend the money itself. It left the choice of activity to the company, within a list, and the management of the project to the company's own committee.

But a duty to spend with no consequence for not spending is a duty in name only. The original section said only that the Board must explain in its report why it had not spent. Companies explained. So the 2019 and 2020 amendments added the machinery that now dominates the section: transfer the unspent amount out of the company's hands, either to a Fund or into a dedicated account that can only be spent on the project it was earmarked for, and a penalty if the transfer is not made.

The result is a section with two halves. The first, sub-sections (1) to (4), is about governance: who decides, what policy, what disclosure. The second, sub-sections (5) to (9), is about money: how much, where it goes if unspent, and what it costs to keep it.

Some words this chapter uses

Net worth, turnover and net profit are the three thresholds in sub-section (1). Average net profits are computed under section 198, excluding such sums as may be prescribed. An ongoing project is one fulfilling the prescribed conditions. A Fund specified in Schedule VII means a fund named in that Schedule, such as the Prime Minister's National Relief Fund. A scheduled bank is a bank in the Second Schedule to the Reserve Bank of India Act, 1934.

Which companies are covered: section 135(1)

Every company having net worth of rupees five hundred crore or more, or turnover of rupees one thousand crore or more, or a net profit of rupees five crore or more during the immediately preceding financial year shall constitute a Corporate Social Responsibility Committee of the Board consisting of three or more directors, out of which at least one director shall be an independent director.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in585

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the semester

Chapter Seventy-Nine

Secretarial Audit

Syllabus topic 4.1, label: "Secretarial Audit"

In one line

Every listed company and other prescribed companies must annex to the Board's report a secretarial audit report given by a company secretary in practice; the company must help him audit its records; the Board must explain in full anything he qualifies; and a default costs the company, its officers and the auditor two lakh rupees each.

In exam wording: section 204 is the whole subject, and its marginal note is "Secretarial audit for bigger companies".

Why the law has this at all

A company's accounts are audited every year by a chartered accountant, and that audit answers one question: are the numbers right. It does not answer the other question a member or a regulator wants answered, which is whether the company obeyed the law.

Nobody was checking that. The company secretary reports to the Board on compliance under section 205(1)(a), but he is the company's own officer, and asking him to certify compliance is asking a man to audit his own work.

Section 204 supplies the missing audit and gives it to a company secretary in practice, who is independent of the company, qualified in the law of companies rather than in accounting, and subject to his own professional discipline.

Two features make the audit useful rather than decorative. The company must give him the records, because an auditor who can be starved of papers audits nothing; and the Board must explain in full what he qualifies, so a bad report cannot be buried by annexing it and saying nothing about it.

Some words this chapter uses

A company secretary in practice is defined in section 2(25), being one deemed to be in practice under section 2(2) of the Company Secretaries Act, 1980. A qualification in a report is a statement that the auditor cannot certify something without reservation. The Board's report is the report under section 134(3). Secretarial records are the registers, minutes, returns and filings the Act requires.

Who must have one: section 204(1)

Every listed company and a company belonging to other class of companies as may be prescribed shall annex with its Board's report made in terms of sub-section (3) of section 134, a secretarial audit report, given by a company secretary in practice, in such form as may be prescribed.

Four elements, and an answer should name all four.

Who. Every listed company, and any company in a prescribed class. Note that the marginal note, "secretarial audit for bigger companies", is a description and not a test; the test is listing or the prescribed class.

What. A secretarial audit report in the prescribed form.

By whom. A company secretary in practice, and by nobody else. Not the company's own secretary, and not the statutory auditor.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in594

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the semester

Chapter Eighty

Winding Up: The Modern Map

Syllabus topic 4.2, label: "Winding Up", the introductory chapter to it.

In one line

Winding up by the Tribunal on five grounds remains in the Companies Act; voluntary winding up has gone out of it altogether and lives in the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code as voluntary liquidation; and a company that cannot pay its debts is no longer wound up under the Companies Act at all but goes through the Code.

In exam wording: section 270 applies Part I of Chapter XX to winding up by the Tribunal; section 271 states the five grounds; and section 59 of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016 provides for voluntary liquidation.

Why the law has this at all

The Companies Act, 1956 dealt with every kind of company failure, and it dealt with them slowly. A creditor's winding up petition on the ground of inability to pay debts could take years to reach an order, by which time the assets were worth little.

The Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016 took that whole subject away, and the reasoning was that a company which cannot pay its debts should first be rescued if it can be, through a time-bound resolution process, and liquidated only if it cannot. That is a different question from the one the Companies Act asks, which is whether a company ought to be brought to an end.

So the Eleventh Schedule to the Code performed a large amputation on 15 November 2016.

  • It substituted section 270, which had set out the two modes of winding up, so that it now says only that Part I applies to winding up by the Tribunal.
  • It substituted section 271, deleting the ground of inability to pay debts and the whole of the old sub-section (2) defining it.
  • It omitted sections 304 to 323, the entire Part on voluntary winding up: the circumstances, the declaration of solvency, the meeting of creditors, the appointment and powers of the liquidator, and the final meeting.

What was left in the Companies Act is winding up for reasons that are not about money: the members' own decision, conduct against the State, fraud, persistent default in filing, and the just and equitable ground.

Some words this chapter uses

Winding up is defined in section 2(94A) as winding up under this Act or liquidation under the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016, as applicable. Liquidation is the Code's word for the same process. A corporate person is the Code's expression, wider than a company. The Adjudicating Authority for corporate persons under the Code is the National Company Law Tribunal. Dissolution is the end of the company's existence, which follows the winding up.

The two modes today

Winding up by the Tribunal, under the Companies Act, 2013. Governed by sections 270 to 303 and sections 324 to 365, and dealt with in the chapters that follow this one.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in598

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the semester

Chapter Eighty-One

Winding Up by the Tribunal: The Petition and the Order

Syllabus topic 4.2, label: "Winding Up by the Tribunal"

In one line

A winding up petition may be presented by the company, a contributory, the Registrar, a person authorised by the Central Government or, on the sovereignty ground, a Government; the Tribunal must dispose of it within ninety days and may dismiss it, make interim orders, appoint a provisional liquidator or wind the company up; and once it does, the order operates for all creditors and contributories, no suit may proceed without leave, and the Tribunal takes jurisdiction over everything touching the company.

In exam wording: section 272 is who may petition, section 273 the powers of the Tribunal, section 274 the statement of affairs, section 277 the intimation and the winding up committee, section 278 the effect of the order, section 279 the stay of suits, and section 280 the Tribunal's jurisdiction.

Why the law has this at all

A winding up order does something no other order of a court does: it stops a company trading, discharges its employees, gathers all its creditors into one process and ends its existence.

Because the order is so drastic, the Act controls three things.

Who may ask for it. Not anybody with a grievance. Section 272 lists the petitioners exhaustively, and puts the fraud ground behind the Registrar and the sovereignty ground behind a Government.

How long it may take. A company under a pending winding up petition cannot borrow, cannot be sold and cannot plan. The ninety day limit in the proviso to section 273(1) exists because uncertainty is itself a harm.

And what happens the moment it is made. The order is for everybody, not only the petitioner; litigation stops; and the Tribunal takes over every question about the company, so the assets are not dissipated in a hundred separate courts.

Some words this chapter uses

A contributory is a person liable to contribute to the assets in a winding up, defined in section 2(26). A provisional liquidator is one appointed before the winding up order, to hold the position. A statement of affairs is the sworn account of the company's assets and liabilities. The Company Liquidator is the liquidator appointed on the order, under section 275. The commencement of the winding up is dealt with in section 357.

Who may petition: section 272(1)

A petition shall be presented by:

  • (a) the company;
  • (b) any contributory or contributories;
  • (c) all or any of the persons specified in clauses (a) and (b);
  • (d) the Registrar;
  • (e) any person authorised by the Central Government in that behalf; or
  • (f) in a case falling under clause (b) of section 271, by the Central Government or a State Government.

Note who is missing. A creditor is not in the list, and that is not an oversight; the ground on which creditors used to petition, inability to pay debts, was removed in 2016, and their remedy is under the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in606

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the semester

Chapter Eighty-Two

The Company Liquidator

Syllabus topic 4.2, label: "Liquidator", within "Winding Up by the Tribunal"

In one line

On the winding up order the Tribunal appoints a Company Liquidator from among insolvency professionals; he takes custody of everything, reports to the Tribunal within sixty days, has fourteen statutory powers subject to the Tribunal's overall control, is advised by an advisory committee and directed by meetings of creditors and contributories, keeps books, has his accounts audited twice a year, and may be removed on five grounds and made to make good any loss he causes.

In exam wording: section 275 is appointment, section 276 removal, section 281 the report, section 283 custody, section 287 the advisory committee, section 290 powers and duties, and sections 293 and 294 books and accounts.

Why the law has this at all

When a winding up order is made, the company still exists but nobody is running it: the directors' authority is at an end in substance, the employees are discharged by the order itself, and the assets are exposed.

So the Act creates an officer to stand in the company's place, and it has to solve three problems at once.

He must have enough power to act. Hence the fourteen powers in section 290, which let him trade, sell, borrow, sue, settle claims and sign anything necessary.

He must not be free to use them as he likes. Hence the overall control of the Tribunal in section 290(2), the advisory committee in section 287, the directions of creditors and contributories in section 292, the quarterly reports in section 288, the books in section 293 and the audited accounts twice a year in section 294.

And he must be answerable if he fails. Hence section 276, which lets the Tribunal remove him on five grounds and recover from him the loss he caused.

Some words this chapter uses

An insolvency professional is a person registered under the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016. The Official Liquidator is the officer attached to the Tribunal. A provisional liquidator is appointed before the winding up order under section 273(1)(c). A contributory is defined in section 2(26). Actionable claims are claims to a debt or beneficial interest in movable property not in possession. A going concern sale is a sale of the business as a working whole rather than of its assets separately.

Appointment: section 275

Section 275(1). For the purposes of winding up by the Tribunal, the Tribunal, at the time of passing the winding up order, shall appoint an Official Liquidator or a liquidator from the panel maintained under sub-section (2) as the Company Liquidator.

Section 275(2), as substituted by the Code. The provisional liquidator or the Company Liquidator shall be appointed by the Tribunal from amongst the insolvency professionals registered under the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in616

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the semester

Chapter Eighty-Three

Contributories, Calls and the Conduct of a Winding Up

Syllabus topic 4.2, label: "Contributories", within "Winding Up by the Tribunal"

In one line

The Tribunal settles a list of everyone liable to contribute, distinguishing present from past members and limiting each by the unpaid amount on his shares or the sum he guaranteed; it may make calls, set off what the company owes him, summon and examine anybody holding the company's property or suspected of fraud, detain a contributory about to abscond, and at the end dissolve the company.

In exam wording: section 285 is the list of contributories, section 296 the power to make calls, section 299 the power to summon, section 300 the examination of promoters and directors, section 301 the arrest of a person about to abscond, and section 302 the dissolution.

Why the law has this at all

A winding up asks one question about money: is there enough. If there is not, somebody must make up the difference, and the Act has to say who and how much.

The answer follows from limited liability itself. A member of a company limited by shares promised to pay the full price of his shares; if he has not paid it, the company's creditors are entitled to it. That unpaid amount, and nothing more, is his contribution.

But the question has a history. A member who sold his shares last month escaped, and the man who bought them may be worthless. So the Act reaches back to past members, but only for one year, only for debts contracted while they were members, and only if the present members cannot pay. Those three conditions are the balance the section strikes between the creditor's claim and the finality a seller is entitled to.

And a winding up asks a second question: where has everything gone. Sections 299 to 301 exist because the assets of a failing company have a way of leaving before the liquidator arrives, and a liquidator with no power to summon, examine or detain would arrive to an empty building.

Some words this chapter uses

A contributory is a person liable to contribute towards the assets in a winding up, and by the Explanation to section 2(26) a holder of fully paid-up shares is a contributory but has no liabilities of one, retaining a contributory's rights. A call is a demand for the unpaid amount on shares. Set-off is the deduction of what the company owes the contributory from what he owes it. Exculpation is being cleared of a charge. Dissolution is the end of the company's legal existence.

Settling the list: section 285(1) and (2)

Section 285(1). As soon as may be after the winding up order, the Tribunal shall settle a list of contributories, cause rectification of the register of members wherever required, and cause the assets to be applied for the discharge of the company's liability.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in628

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the semester

Chapter Eighty-Four

Provisions Applicable to Every Mode of Winding Up

Syllabus topic 4.2, the general provisions the syllabus label "Winding Up" carries with it.

In one line

Every claim, however contingent, may be proved; workmen's dues and part of a secured creditor's shortfall are paid before everything else; then taxes, wages, holiday pay, insurance contributions, compensation, welfare fund dues and investigation expenses; preferences given within six months, transfers not in good faith within a year and floating charges created within twelve months can be undone; onerous property may be disclaimed; and the officers who caused the failure can be punished, made personally liable without limit, and ordered to restore what they took.

In exam wording: section 326 is overriding preferential payments, section 327 preferential payments, sections 328 to 335 the avoidance provisions, section 333 disclaimer of onerous property, and sections 336 to 341 the offences and personal liability.

Why the law has this at all

The general rule of a winding up is that the unsecured creditors share the assets rateably, each taking the same proportion of his debt. That rule is fair between creditors who lent money on the same terms, and unfair in two situations the Act therefore corrects.

The first is the creditor who could not choose. A workman did not lend the company anything; he worked for wages he has already earned, and he has no way of securing himself. The State did not lend either; taxes accrue by law. So sections 326 and 327 lift them out of the ordinary queue.

The second is the creditor who was preferred. A company that knows it is failing can pay a friendly creditor in full, mortgage its assets to a director, or transfer a factory at an undervalue, and the rateable rule is defeated before the winding up begins. Sections 328 to 335 look back in time and undo those transactions, each with its own period.

And the third correction is not about creditors at all. A company fails because people ran it badly or dishonestly, and the corporate form should not shelter them. Sections 336 to 341 make them criminally liable, personally liable without limitation, and liable to restore the money.

Some words this chapter uses

To prove a debt is to establish it in the winding up. The relevant date is defined in the Explanation to section 327. Workmen's dues and workmen's portion are defined in the Explanation to section 326. A fraudulent preference is a transaction putting a creditor in a better position than he would otherwise have been. A floating charge is one that hovers over a class of assets until it crystallises. Onerous property is property that costs more to hold than it is worth. Misfeasance is a wrongful act in the performance of an office.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in640

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the semester

Chapter Eighty-Five

Official Liquidators, Records and the Close of a Winding Up

Syllabus topic 4.2, the closing provisions of the winding up chapter.

In one line

The Tribunal may direct the prosecution of delinquent officers; the liquidator needs sanction to compromise; every invoice must say the company is in liquidation; money must go into a scheduled bank and unclaimed dividends into a special account; a pending liquidation must be reported yearly; a dissolution may be declared void within two years; the winding up is deemed to commence with the petition; and small companies are wound up summarily by the Official Liquidator under the Central Government.

In exam wording: section 356 is the power to declare a dissolution void, section 357 the commencement of winding up, section 359 the appointment of the Official Liquidator, and sections 361 to 365 the summary procedure for liquidation.

Why the law has this at all

A winding up is a long administration of other people's money, and the sections gathered here answer the practical questions that arise while it goes on.

How is the world told? By section 344, which requires every invoice, order and business letter to say the company is being wound up, so that nobody deals with it in ignorance.

Where is the money kept? By sections 349 to 352, which put it in the public account of India or a scheduled bank, forbid a private account, and provide a permanent home for dividends nobody claims.

Who watches a liquidation that drags on? By section 348, which requires an audited statement every year once the winding up passes twelve months.

What if a company is dissolved and something turns up afterwards? By section 356, which lets the Tribunal declare the dissolution void within two years, so that an asset discovered later, or a claim never made, is not lost forever.

And what about the company too small to be worth the Tribunal's time? By sections 361 to 365, a summary procedure, with fixed and short periods, administered by the Official Liquidator under the Central Government.

Some words this chapter uses

The Official Liquidator is a whole-time officer of the Central Government appointed under section 359. The Company Liquidator is the liquidator in a Tribunal winding up, appointed under section 275. A scheduled bank is one in the Second Schedule to the Reserve Bank of India Act, 1934. The commencement of the winding up is defined by section 357. Judicial notice means acceptance without proof.

Prosecution and compromise: sections 342 and 343

Section 342(1). If it appears to the Tribunal in the course of a winding up that any person who is or has been an officer, or any member, has been guilty of any offence in relation to the company, the Tribunal may, on the application of any person interested in the winding up or suo motu, direct the liquidator to prosecute the offender or to refer the matter to the Registrar.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in657

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the semester

Chapter Eighty-Six

Voluntary Liquidation under the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code

Syllabus topic 4.2, label: "Voluntary Winding Up", which the Companies Act no longer contains.

In one line

A company that has committed no default may liquidate itself voluntarily on a declaration of solvency by a majority of its directors, a special resolution of its members appointing an insolvency professional as liquidator, and, where it owes anything, the approval of creditors representing two-thirds in value; the liquidator then realises and distributes under the Code's own waterfall and applies to the Tribunal for dissolution.

In exam wording: section 59 of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016 is the whole of voluntary liquidation, and section 53 of the Code supplies the order of distribution.

Why the law has this at all

A solvent company that has finished what it was formed to do should be able to end itself without a court. Under the Companies Act, 1956 and the 2013 Act as first enacted, it did so by a members' voluntary winding up, with a declaration of solvency and a liquidator appointed by the members.

The Code did not abolish that idea; it moved it. The reason is that after 2016 one statute deals with all corporate insolvency and liquidation, and it was untidy to leave a solvent liquidation in a different Act, administered by different officers, with a different order of distribution.

But the move changed three things, and they are the examinable differences.

The liquidator is an insolvency professional, registered and regulated by the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Board of India, not a person of the members' choosing.

The creditors have a veto. Where the company owes anything, creditors representing two-thirds in value must approve the members' resolution within seven days.

And the distribution follows the Code's waterfall in section 53, not the preferential payments in sections 326 and 327 of the Companies Act, which section 327(7) expressly disapplies to a liquidation under the Code.

Some words this chapter uses

A corporate person includes a company, a limited liability partnership and any other person incorporated with limited liability, but not a financial service provider. Default means non-payment of a debt when it has become due and payable. The Board is the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Board of India. The Adjudicating Authority for corporate persons is the National Company Law Tribunal: section 60 of the Code. Specified means specified by regulations made by the Board.

Who may do it: section 59(1) and (2)

A corporate person who intends to liquidate itself voluntarily and has not committed any default may initiate voluntary liquidation proceedings under the provisions of this Chapter.

Two conditions, and the second is decisive. An intention to liquidate voluntarily, and no default committed.

Section 59(2). The voluntary liquidation shall meet such conditions and procedural requirements, and be completed within such period, which shall not be more than one year, as may be specified.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in670

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the semester

Chapter Eighty-Seven

Winding Up of Unregistered Companies

Syllabus topic 4.2, within "Winding Up".

In one line

Bodies that are not registered under the Companies Act, but that carry on business with more than seven members, may be wound up by the Tribunal as unregistered companies, on three grounds, never voluntarily, and a foreign body corporate that has stopped carrying on business in India may be wound up here even though it has been dissolved abroad.

In exam wording: section 375 is the winding up of unregistered companies, section 376 the power to wind up dissolved foreign companies, and section 377 makes the Part cumulative.

Why the law has this at all

A large unincorporated association can fail in exactly the way a company fails. It has creditors who dealt with the group rather than with any individual, assets that nobody has authority to distribute, and members who dispute among themselves. But it has no liquidator, no winding up procedure and no forum, because those things belong to incorporation, and it never incorporated.

So the Act lends it the machinery without giving it the status. An unregistered company may be wound up under the Act, and for that purpose only, it is treated as a company; the proviso to section 377(2) says so in terms: "an unregistered company shall not, except in the event of its being wound up, be deemed to be a company under this Act, and then only to the extent provided by this Part".

And section 376 answers the foreign case. A body corporate incorporated abroad that traded here, and has been dissolved at home, leaves Indian creditors with nothing to sue. The section keeps it alive for the purpose of a winding up in India.

Some words this chapter uses

An unregistered company is defined by the Explanation to section 375. A nominal defendant is a person authorised to be sued on behalf of an unincorporated body. To compound a debt is to settle it for a lesser sum. Cumulative means added to, not in substitution for.

Which bodies are unregistered companies

The Explanation to section 375 defines the expression negatively and then positively.

It shall NOT include:

  • (i) a railway company incorporated under any Act of Parliament or other Indian law, or any Act of Parliament of the United Kingdom;
  • (ii) a company registered under this Act; or
  • (iii) a company registered under any previous companies law, other than one whose registered office was in Burma, Aden or Pakistan immediately before the separation of that country from India.

And save as aforesaid it SHALL include:

any partnership firm, limited liability partnership or society or co-operative society, association or company consisting of more than seven members at the time when the petition for winding up is presented before the Tribunal.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in678

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the semester

Chapter Eighty-Eight

The Tribunal and the Appellate Tribunal

Syllabus topic 4.3, labels: "National Company Law Tribunal", "National Company Law Appellate Tribunal"

In one line

The Central Government constitutes the National Company Law Tribunal of a President and Judicial and Technical Members, and above it the Appellate Tribunal of a Chairperson and Members; both sit in benches, are not bound by the Code of Civil Procedure but by natural justice, have a civil court's powers and the power to punish for contempt; appeals lie to the Appellate Tribunal within forty-five days and from it to the Supreme Court on a question of law within sixty; and no civil court may entertain what the Tribunal is empowered to decide.

In exam wording: section 408 constitutes the Tribunal, section 410 the Appellate Tribunal, section 421 the appeal, section 423 the appeal to the Supreme Court, section 424 the procedure, and section 430 the ouster of the civil court.

Why the law has this at all

Before the 2013 Act, company matters were divided among three forums: the High Court wound companies up and sanctioned schemes, the Company Law Board heard oppression petitions, and the Board for Industrial and Financial Reconstruction dealt with sick companies. A single dispute could therefore be split three ways, and the High Court's company jurisdiction competed for time with its ordinary work.

The Tribunal was created to gather all of it into one specialist forum, and the design follows from that purpose.

It is a mixed bench, one Judicial and one Technical Member, because company disputes turn as much on accounts and finance as on law.

It is not bound by the Code of Civil Procedure, because a winding up or a scheme is an administration rather than a lis, and it needs to move faster than a suit.

It has a civil court's coercive powers and the power to commit for contempt, because a forum that gathers assets must be able to compel.

And section 430 shuts the civil court out, because the whole gain would be lost if the same questions could be reopened in a suit.

Some words this chapter uses

A Judicial Member is a Member qualified by judicial or advocacy experience. A Technical Member is qualified by professional or service experience. A Bench is the constituted sitting that exercises the Tribunal's powers. A mistake apparent from the record is an error visible without argument. Natural justice requires notice and a hearing by an impartial decider.

Constitution: sections 407 to 412

Section 408. The Central Government shall, by notification, constitute a Tribunal to be known as the National Company Law Tribunal, consisting of a President and such number of Judicial and Technical Members as it deems necessary, to exercise the powers conferred by or under this Act or any other law for the time being in force.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in686

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the semester

Chapter Eighty-Nine

Special Courts and the Trial of Offences

Syllabus topic 4.3, label: "Special Courts"

In one line

The Central Government may establish Special Courts to try offences under the Act, staffed according to the gravity of the offence; those offences are non-cognizable and are prosecuted only on the complaint of the Registrar, a member or an authorised person; the lesser ones may be compounded by the Tribunal or the Regional Director; parties may be sent to mediation; and the punishment is fixed with regard to the size of the company, the nature of the default and its repetition, with lesser penalties for the smallest companies.

In exam wording: section 435 establishes the Special Courts, section 436 states what they try, section 439 makes offences non-cognizable, section 441 provides for compounding, and section 442 for the Mediation and Conciliation Panel.

Why the law has this at all

A company law offence is usually a failure to file, to disclose or to hold a meeting, and there are thousands of them. Two problems follow.

The first is delay. Company prosecutions in ordinary criminal courts joined a queue behind everything else, and a prosecution decided ten years after the failure to file punishes nobody usefully. Special Courts exist to shorten that queue, and section 436(3) lets them try summarily anything punishable with not more than three years.

The second is proportion. Not every default deserves a trial. A company that filed its return three months late has done something real but small. Section 441 lets the offence be compounded, that is settled on payment, by the Tribunal or, for smaller fines, by the Regional Director; section 442 offers mediation; section 446A tells the court to weigh the size of the company and the nature and repetition of the default; and section 446B halves the penalty for the smallest companies.

And the third idea, which runs through the whole Chapter, is control of who may prosecute. Section 439(2) allows a court to take cognizance only on the complaint of the Registrar, a shareholder or member, or a person authorised by the Central Government, so that a company's competitor or a disgruntled outsider cannot start a criminal case about its internal compliance.

Some words this chapter uses

Cognizable means an offence for which the police may arrest without warrant and investigate without an order. To compound an offence is to settle it on payment, so that the prosecution ends. The Regional Director is a person appointed as such by the Central Government. A summary trial is a shortened procedure with a limited sentencing power. Cognizance is a court's taking notice of an offence so as to proceed.

The Special Courts: section 435

Section 435(1). The Central Government may, for the purpose of providing speedy trial of offences under this Act, except under section 452, by notification, establish or designate as many Special Courts as may be necessary.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in699

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the semester

Chapter Ninety

Corporate Governance

Syllabus topic 4.4, label: "Corporate Governance"

In one line

Corporate governance in the Act is the sum of four devices: a Board with people on it who are not management, committees to do the work the Board cannot, a duty to disclose in writing what was decided and why, and an independent check by auditors of the accounts and of compliance.

In exam wording: section 149 supplies independent directors, sections 177 and 178 the committees, section 134 the Board's report and the Directors' Responsibility Statement, section 197 the control of remuneration, and sections 143 and 204 the audits.

Why the law has this at all

A company's members own it and its directors run it, and the two are not the same people. That separation is what makes the joint stock company useful, since it lets thousands of savers finance a business none of them could manage. It is also the whole problem of corporate governance, because the people in control of the money are not the people whose money it is.

The law's answer is not to close the gap but to police it, and it does so in four ways.

Composition. Put people on the Board who are not part of management, do not owe it money and are not related to the promoters, and require them to say so every year. That is section 149(6) and (7).

Delegation to specialists. A Board meeting quarterly cannot itself examine the auditor's independence or design a remuneration policy. So sections 177 and 178 create committees with fixed compositions matched to their tasks.

Disclosure. Nothing disciplines a Board like having to write down what it did and why. Section 134(3) lists seventeen matters the Board's report must contain, and section 134(5) makes the directors state, in their own names, that the accounts were prepared properly.

Independent verification. A statement is worth what its checker is worth. Section 143 gives the accounts to an auditor, section 204 gives compliance to a company secretary in practice, and sections 134(3)(f) and 204(3) make the Board explain in full whatever either of them qualifies.

And behind all four stands section 166, the statutory statement of a director's duties, which is what the machinery is there to enforce.

Some words this chapter uses

Governance here means the system by which a company is directed and controlled. A qualification is an auditor's reservation. Internal financial controls are defined in the Explanation to section 134(5)(e). Median employee's remuneration is the middle figure in the ranked list of employees' pay. A vigil mechanism is the whistleblower channel under section 177(9).

The first device: who sits on the Board

Independent directors, section 149(4) and (6). Every listed public company must have at least one third independent directors, fractions rounded off as one, and the Central Government may prescribe a number for other classes of public companies. Independence is defined by a long objective test: not a promoter, not related to promoters or directors, no pecuniary relationship beyond a director's remuneration or a transaction within ten per cent of his total income, and neither he nor his relatives connected with the company as key managerial personnel or employees in the preceding three financial years, or with its auditors or consulting firms, or holding two per cent of the voting power.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in710

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the semester

Chapter Ninety-One

Environmental, Social and Governance

Syllabus topic 4.4, label: "ESG (Environmental, Social and Governance)"

In one line

Environmental, social and governance is not a chapter of the Act but a way of reading it: the environment appears in the director's statutory duty, in Schedule VII and in the Board's report on energy and technology; the social component in corporate social responsibility, the woman director and the stakeholders' committee; and governance in the whole of the machinery examined in the previous chapter.

In exam wording: section 166(2) carries the environment and the community into the director's duty; section 135 with Schedule VII carries the social and environmental spending; and sections 134, 149, 177, 178 and 197 carry the governance.

Why the law has this at all

For most of the history of company law the answer to "in whose interest is a company run" was one word: the members. Everything else was somebody else's law, the environment belonging to environmental statutes and labour to labour statutes.

The 2013 Act made a deliberate change, and it made it in two places.

In the duty itself. Section 166(2) does not say a director must act for the members alone. It names the company, its employees, the shareholders, the community and the protection of the environment, which is a statutory statement that the interests a director must weigh are wider than the share price.

And in the money. Section 135 requires a prescribed company to spend two per cent of its average net profits on the activities in Schedule VII, which include environmental sustainability and a long list of social ends.

Why the expression "ESG" is nonetheless absent from the Act is a matter of chronology, not of substance. The vocabulary came from investors and from securities regulation, where reporting frameworks address listed companies. The Companies Act came first, and it expresses the same ideas in its own words. An answer that says so, and then shows where each component sits, is doing exactly what the topic asks.

Some words this chapter uses

Environmental here means the company's effect on the natural world. Social means its effect on employees, customers, suppliers and the community. Governance means how the company is directed and controlled, the subject of [Corporate Governance]. Sustainability means meeting present needs without compromising the ability of the future to meet its own. A stakeholder is anyone affected by the company, as against a shareholder, who owns part of it.

The environmental component

In the director's duty: section 166(2). A director shall act in good faith in order to promote the objects of the company for the benefit of its members as a whole, and in the best interests of the company, its employees, the shareholders, the community and for the protection of the environment.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in719

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the semester

Chapter Ninety-Two

Insider Trading: The Definitions

Syllabus topic 4.5, label: "Insider Trading"

In one line

An insider is a connected person, or anybody in possession of or having access to unpublished price sensitive information; such information is anything about a company or its securities that is not generally available and would materially affect the price if it were; and no insider may communicate it, and nobody may procure it, except in furtherance of legitimate purposes, the performance of duties or the discharge of legal obligations.

In exam wording: regulation 2(1)(g) defines an insider, 2(1)(d) a connected person, 2(1)(n) unpublished price sensitive information, 2(1)(e) generally available information, 2(1)(l) trading; and regulation 3 prohibits communication and procurement.

Why the law has this at all

A stock market works because buyers and sellers face the same uncertainty about what a share is worth. When one side knows the results are about to be announced and the other does not, the trade is not a bargain between equals; it is a transfer from the uninformed to the informed.

The harm is not to the individual on the other side of the trade, who would probably have sold anyway, but to the market itself. If outsiders believe insiders are dealing on what they know, they demand a discount for the risk, and every company pays for it in the price of its capital.

Hence the design of these Regulations, which is worth stating before any definition.

Define the information first, in regulation 2(1)(n), by a price test, not by a list. The list that follows is illustrative.

Define the person widely, in regulation 2(1)(g), so that it catches anybody in possession, however he came by it, and not only the company's own officers.

Prohibit two things separately. Communicating it, and trading on it. Regulation 3 does the first; regulation 4, in the next chapter, does the second. A director who tells his broker and never trades has still broken the law.

And leave a lawful channel, "in furtherance of legitimate purposes, performance of duties or discharge of legal obligations", because a company must be able to tell its auditors, its bankers and its advisers.

Some words this chapter uses

Trading is defined in regulation 2(1)(l) and is wider than buying and selling. A trading day is a day on which the recognised stock exchanges are open. An intermediary is one specified in section 12 of the Securities and Exchange Board of India Act, 1992. Legitimate purposes are to be defined by the Board of a listed company in its Code of Fair Disclosure and Conduct. A rebuttable presumption is one the person may displace by proof.

Where the law now lives

Section 195 of the Companies Act, 2013, which prohibited insider trading, was omitted with effect from 9 February 2018. So was section 194, on forward dealings.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in726

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the semester

Chapter Ninety-Three

Insider Trading: Trading Plans, Window Closure and Penalties

Syllabus topic 4.5, label: "Insider Trading", the operative half.

In one line

No insider may trade while in possession of unpublished price sensitive information, and if he does his trades are presumed to have been motivated by it, subject to six defences; a trading plan approved by the compliance officer and disclosed publicly, with a cool-off of one hundred and twenty days, is the lawful way for a permanent insider to deal; designated persons may not trade when the trading window is closed; and contravention is met by penalty and prosecution under the SEBI Act.

In exam wording: regulation 4 is the prohibition on trading, regulation 5 the trading plan, regulation 8 and Schedule A the Code of Fair Disclosure, regulation 9 and Schedule B the Code of Conduct and the trading window.

Why the law has this at all

The definitions in the previous chapter identify the wrong. This chapter is about proving it and about living with it, and the two problems are different.

Proving it is hard, because the state of a trader's mind is invisible. If the regulator had to show that a man traded because of what he knew, almost no case would succeed. So regulation 4(1) reverses the difficulty: prove possession and a trade, and motive is presumed. The Note says so in terms: the reasons for which he trades and the purposes to which he applies the proceeds are not intended to be relevant.

But a presumption that strong would be unjust without a way out, so the proviso lists six circumstances in which the insider may demonstrate his innocence, and regulation 4(2) allocates the burden: on a connected person to show he was not in possession, and on the Board in other cases.

Living with it is the second problem. Some people are permanently in possession: a finance director always knows something. If the prohibition were absolute they could never sell a share. Regulation 5 solves that with the trading plan: decide now, publicly, what you will do later, and the decision cannot have been influenced by information that did not yet exist.

And for everybody else there is the trading window, closed by the compliance officer when designated persons can reasonably be expected to have such information, which converts a legal test into an administrable rule.

Some words this chapter uses

A designated person is one covered by the company's code of conduct, specified by the board in consultation with the compliance officer. A compliance officer is defined in regulation 2(1)(c). Pre-clearance is prior approval of a proposed trade. A block deal window is a stock exchange mechanism for large negotiated trades. An informant is defined in Chapter III A.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in735

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the semester

Chapter Ninety-Four

Inspection, Inquiry and Investigation

Syllabus topic 4.3, the enforcement chapter the module's coverage of regulators carries with it.

In one line

The Registrar may call for information, inspect the books and hold an inquiry; the Central Government may order an investigation by inspectors or assign it to the Serious Fraud Investigation Office; the Tribunal may order one on a qualified minority's application or on evidence of fraud; inspectors have a civil court's powers, may seize books and may investigate related companies; the Tribunal may freeze assets and restrict securities; and on the report the Central Government may prosecute, petition for winding up or oppression, and seek disgorgement with unlimited personal liability.

In exam wording: section 206 is inspection and inquiry, section 210 investigation by the Central Government, section 212 the Serious Fraud Investigation Office, section 213 investigation ordered by the Tribunal, and section 224 the action on the report.

Why the law has this at all

Company law depends on filings that companies make about themselves. That works while companies are honest, and it fails exactly where the law matters most.

So the Act builds a ladder of increasing intrusion, and the ladder is the structure of any answer on this topic.

At the bottom, the Registrar asks a question. Section 206(1): furnish an explanation, produce a document. Nobody's rights are affected.

Next, he looks for himself. Section 206(3): produce your books for my inspection, and he must record his reasons in writing before he may.

Then he inquires. Section 206(4): where he is satisfied that the business is being carried on for a fraudulent or unlawful purpose, or that investors' grievances are not being addressed, he tells the company the allegations and inquires after giving it a reasonable opportunity of being heard.

Above that, an investigation. Sections 210 to 213: inspectors appointed by the Central Government, on its own opinion, on a report, on the company's own special resolution, in the public interest, on a court's or the Tribunal's order, or on a qualified minority's application.

And at the top, the Serious Fraud Investigation Office, a standing multi-disciplinary body which, once seized of a case, excludes every other agency.

The rise in intrusion is matched by a rise in who decides. The Registrar decides the first two steps himself; the inquiry needs a hearing; the investigation needs the Central Government or the Tribunal.

Some words this chapter uses

An inspector is a person appointed under this Chapter to investigate. Books and papers include books of account, deeds, vouchers, writings, documents, minutes and registers. Disgorgement is the surrender of a benefit wrongly obtained. A significant beneficial owner is the person behind a registered holding. Privileged communication is a communication protected from disclosure by law.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in746

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the semester

Chapter Ninety-Five

Registered Valuers, and Removal of a Company's Name from the Register

Syllabus topic 4.3, the two short chapters of the Act that follow the investigation chapter.

In one line

Every valuation required under the Act must be made by a registered valuer appointed by the audit committee or the Board, impartially and without interest in the asset for three years either side; and the Registrar may strike a defunct company's name off the register, on his own notice or on the company's application, whereupon it stands dissolved, though the liability of its officers and members continues and the Tribunal may restore it.

In exam wording: section 247 is valuation by registered valuers; section 248 the Registrar's power to remove a name, section 251 a fraudulent application, and section 252 the appeal and restoration.

Why the law has this at all

The valuer first. A great deal of this Act turns on what something is worth. A scheme of arrangement, a merger's share exchange ratio, a squeeze-out of the minority, a non-cash transaction with a director, a liquidator's first report: each depends on a number, and the person who most wants the number to come out a particular way is usually the person choosing the valuer. Section 247 answers that by requiring a registered valuer, appointing him through the audit committee rather than management, and disqualifying him where he has an interest in the asset for three years before or after the valuation.

The removal of names next. Most companies on the register are not trading. They were incorporated for a venture that never began or has long ended, and they file nothing. Winding them up through the Tribunal would cost far more than they are worth, and leaving them on the register makes the register a lie. Section 248 gives the Registrar an administrative route to dissolution, and sections 250 to 252 supply the safeguards: liability survives, a fraudulent application is punished as fraud, and the Tribunal may restore the name.

Some words this chapter uses

A registered valuer is a person having the prescribed qualifications and experience, registered as a valuer and a member of a recognised organisation. A dormant company is one that has obtained that status under section 455. Struck off means removed from the register of companies. Restoration is putting the name back. Jointly and severally liable means each is liable for the whole.

Valuation by registered valuers: section 247

Section 247(1): when and by whom. Where a valuation is required under the Act of any property, stocks, shares, debentures, securities or goodwill or any other assets, or of the net worth of a company or its liabilities, it shall be valued by a person having such qualifications and experience, registered as a valuer and being a member of an organisation recognised in the prescribed manner and on the prescribed terms, appointed by the audit committee or, in its absence, by the Board of Directors.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in761

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the semester

Chapter Ninety-Six

Companies Authorised to Register under this Act

Syllabus topic 4.3, the conversion route the Act calls Part I of Chapter XXI.

In one line

A partnership firm, limited liability partnership, co-operative society, society or other business entity of two or more members may register itself under the Act as an unlimited company or a company limited by shares or by guarantee; its property vests in the company, its liabilities and pending suits survive, its constituting instrument becomes its memorandum and articles, and its members become contributories for the debts contracted before registration.

In exam wording: section 366 states who may register, section 368 the vesting of property, section 369 the saving of liabilities, section 371 the effect of registration, and section 374 the obligations of a body seeking it.

Why the law has this at all

A business that has outgrown its form wants the advantages of incorporation, chiefly limited liability, perpetual succession and the ability to raise capital. It could of course form a new company and sell itself to it, but that means a conveyance of every asset, a novation of every contract, fresh licences, and stamp duty on all of it.

Part I of Chapter XXI avoids that. The same body becomes a company: section 368 vests its property in the company by force of the registration, section 369 preserves its liabilities, and section 370 lets its pending suits go on as if the registration had not taken place.

But the creditors did not agree to the change, and their debtor's liability is about to become limited. So the Act protects them at three points: section 369 keeps the liabilities alive, section 371(3)(c) and (d) make the members contributories for the debts contracted before registration, and section 374 requires the secured creditors' consent or no objection and a newspaper advertisement inviting objections before registration at all.

Some words this chapter uses

A company, in this Part, has the extended meaning in section 366(1). Assent is the members' approval at a general meeting. A contributory is a person liable to contribute to the assets in a winding up. Table F in Schedule I is the model form of articles for a company limited by shares. Vernacular means the local language.

Who may register: section 366(1) and (2)

Section 366(1): the extended meaning. For the purposes of this Part, "company" includes any partnership firm, limited liability partnership, cooperative society, society or any other business entity formed under any other law for the time being in force which applies for registration under this Part.

Section 366(2): the power. Any company formed, whether before or after the commencement of this Act, in pursuance of any Act of Parliament other than this Act or of any other law, or being otherwise duly constituted according to law, and consisting of two or more members, may at any time register under this Act as an unlimited company, a company limited by shares, or a company limited by guarantee, in the prescribed manner; and the registration shall not be invalid by reason only that it has taken place with a view to the company's being wound up.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in771

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the semester

Chapter Ninety-Seven

Producer Companies

Syllabus topic 4.3, Chapter XXIA of the Act.

In one line

Ten or more individual producers, or two or more Producer Institutions, may form a company limited by shares whose objects relate to primary produce; its members vote one vote each, take only a limited return on their capital and a patronage bonus in proportion to their dealings, cannot transfer their shares except to an active Member at par, and the Chapter overrides everything inconsistent with it, a Producer Company being otherwise treated as a private limited company.

In exam wording: section 378A carries the definitions, 378B the objects, 378C the formation, 378D the voting rights, 378E the benefits to Members, and 378ZQ and 378ZR the overriding effect and the private company analogy.

Why the law has this at all

A farmer selling his own crop is at every disadvantage. He is small, the buyer is large, he cannot store, grade or process, and he sells at the moment of harvest when everybody else is selling too.

The historical answer was the co-operative society, which lets producers pool their produce and bargain together. But co-operative societies are governed by State laws, are exposed to State control, and cannot easily raise capital or operate across State boundaries.

The Producer Company is an attempt to give the co-operative's purposes a company's form. It keeps the co-operative principles, and the Act names them: one member one vote, a limited return on capital, patronage bonus in proportion to dealings, and mutual assistance. And it takes the company's advantages: incorporation, limited liability, perpetual succession and the machinery of the Companies Act.

The result is a hybrid, and the way to answer any question on it is to identify which parent a rule comes from. Section 378D's one member one vote is the co-operative; section 378C(3)'s limited liability is the company.

Some words this chapter uses

Primary produce is defined in section 378A(j). Patronage is the use of the company's services by a Member through participation in its business. A patronage bonus is a payment out of surplus income in proportion to patronage. Withheld price is the part of the price for goods supplied that the company keeps back for later payment. Limited return is the maximum dividend specified by the articles. An active Member is one who fulfils the quantum and period of patronage the articles require.

The definitions: section 378A

"Primary produce" means the produce of farmers arising from agriculture, including animal husbandry, horticulture, floriculture, pisciculture, viticulture, forestry, forest products, re-vegetation, bee raising and farming plantation products, or from any other primary activity or service promoting the interest of farmers or consumers; the produce of persons engaged in handloom, handicraft and other cottage industries; any product resulting from those activities, including by-products; any product of an ancillary activity assisting them; and any activity intended to increase the production or improve the quality of any of them.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in780

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the semester

Chapter Ninety-Eight

Companies Incorporated Outside India

Syllabus topic 4.3, label: "Foreign Companies", Chapter XXII of the Act.

In one line

A company incorporated outside India which has a place of business in India must file its constitution, address, directors and Indian agent with the Registrar within thirty days, keep accounts of its Indian business, display its name and country of incorporation, and answer service on its Indian representative; a prospectus it issues in India must satisfy the Act; and until it complies with the Chapter it may be sued but cannot sue.

In exam wording: section 2(42) defines a foreign company, section 380 the documents to be delivered, section 381 the accounts, section 382 the display of name, section 383 service, sections 387 to 389 the prospectus, section 392 the punishment, and section 393 the effect of non-compliance.

Why the law has this at all

A company incorporated abroad is not created by Indian law and cannot be dissolved by it. Yet it may take deposits in Mumbai, employ people in Pune and sell to customers in Nagpur, and those Indians deal with a legal person they cannot investigate: they do not know who owns it, who directs it, what its constitution permits, or where to serve a writ.

Chapter XXII does not try to regulate the foreign company. It regulates the information available about it and the accessibility of it in India, and that is the theme of every section.

Who and what it is: the constitution, the registered office abroad, the directors and secretary, all filed under section 380.

Where to find it: the principal place of business in India under section 380(1)(e), and the name and country displayed on every office and letter under section 382.

How to serve it: on the person resident in India authorised to accept service, under sections 380(1)(d) and 383.

What it does here: accounts of the Indian business under section 381 and books kept at the principal place of business in India under section 384(3).

And the sanction is designed for a defendant who is out of the jurisdiction. Fining a foreign company is often futile, so section 393 takes away the one thing it cannot do without: the right to sue in India.

Some words this chapter uses

A foreign company is defined in section 2(42) as a company or body corporate incorporated outside India which has a place of business in India, whether by itself or through an agent, physically or through electronic mode, and conducts any business activity in India in any other manner. A place of business includes a share transfer or registration office: section 386(c). Certified means certified in the prescribed manner to be a true copy or correct translation. An expert is one whose statement appears in a prospectus.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in795

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the semester

Chapter Ninety-Nine

Government Companies, Registration Offices, Statistics and Nidhis

Syllabus topic 4.3, Chapters XXIII to XXVI of the Act.

In one line

Where a Government is a member of a company, an annual report on its working goes before the legislature with the Comptroller and Auditor-General's comments; the Central Government establishes registration offices and appoints Registrars, whose electronic records are evidence; it may require any company to furnish information or statistics; and it may declare a company to be a Nidhi and exempt it from provisions of the Act.

In exam wording: section 2(45) defines a Government company, sections 394 and 395 the annual reports, section 396 the registration offices, sections 397 to 402 the electronic filing and evidence, section 403 the fees, section 405 the information and statistics, and section 406 the Nidhis.

Why the law has this at all

A Government company is a company whose shareholder is the public. The ordinary machinery by which members hold directors to account, a general meeting and a vote, is worthless there, because the only member is a Ministry. So the Act substitutes a different accountability: an annual report laid before Parliament or the State Legislature, with the Comptroller and Auditor-General's comments attached to it.

A registration office is the memory of company law. Almost every obligation in this Act is discharged by filing something with the Registrar, and the value of filing depends on two things: that it can be done conveniently, and that what was filed can afterwards be proved. Sections 398 to 402 answer the first by making the whole system electronic; sections 397 and 399 answer the second by making the Registrar's record admissible without production of the original.

Information and statistics exist because the Central Government administers a statute over lakhs of companies and needs to see the aggregate, not merely the individual return.

And a Nidhi is a small mutual benefit society whose members lend to and borrow from each other. Applying the whole Act to it would be disproportionate, so section 406 lets the Central Government declare a company to be one and disapply or modify provisions for it, subject to Parliament.

Some words this chapter uses

A Government company is defined in section 2(45). The Comptroller and Auditor-General of India audits Government companies under section 143(5) to (7). Electronic form takes its meaning from the Information Technology Act, 2000. A Nidhi or Mutual Benefit Society is a company declared to be one under section 406(1). Prorogued means that a session of a House has been brought to an end.

Government companies: sections 394 and 395

Who they are: section 2(45). A Government company means any company in which not less than fifty-one per cent of the paid-up share capital is held by the Central Government, or by any State Government or Governments, or partly by the Central Government and partly by one or more State Governments, and includes a company which is a subsidiary of such a Government company.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in806

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the semester

Chapter One Hundred

Fraud, Penalties and the Closing Provisions

Syllabus topic 4.3, Chapter XXIX of the Act, its miscellaneous and closing provisions.

In one line

Fraud in relation to a company's affairs is punished with imprisonment of six months to ten years and a fine of one to three times the amount involved, three years being the minimum where public interest is involved; a false statement or false evidence, wrongful withholding of property, improper use of "Limited" and a residual contravention each have their own punishment; penalties are adjudicated by officers of the Central Government with an appeal to the Regional Director; and the Act closes with the repeal of the Companies Act, 1956.

In exam wording: section 447 is punishment for fraud, 448 false statement, 449 false evidence, 450 the residual penalty, 451 and 454A repeated default, 452 wrongful withholding of property, 454 adjudication of penalties, 463 the court's power to grant relief, and 465 the repeal.

Why the law has this at all

The Act's individual sections tell a company what to do. This Chapter tells everybody what happens when they do not, and it does four separate things.

It defines the gravest wrong. Before 2013 the Act had no general offence of fraud, and prosecutions had to be brought under the Indian Penal Code, 1860, whose definitions were not written with companies in mind. Section 447 supplies one, and its Explanation defines fraud so widely that it catches an omission and an abuse of position as much as a positive lie.

It fills the gaps. No draftsman can attach a punishment to every obligation, so section 450 provides one where no other is provided, and section 469(3) does the same for the rules.

It makes enforcement proportionate. A prosecution before a Special Court is heavy machinery for a late filing. Section 454 creates an adjudicating officer who imposes a penalty administratively, with an appeal to the Regional Director, and sections 451 and 454A double the consequence for a repeat within three years.

And it tempers all of it. Section 463 lets a court relieve an officer who acted honestly and reasonably and ought fairly to be excused, which is the answer to the objection that a statute of this weight will punish the merely unlucky.

Some words this chapter uses

Fraud, wrongful gain and wrongful loss are defined in the Explanation to section 447. An adjudicating officer is an officer of the Central Government not below the rank of Registrar. The Regional Director is a person appointed as such by the Central Government. An inactive company and a significant accounting transaction are defined in the Explanation to section 455.

Punishment for fraud: section 447

Without prejudice to any liability including repayment of any debt under this Act or any other law, any person found guilty of fraud involving an amount of at least ten lakh rupees or one per cent of the turnover of the company, whichever is lower, shall be punishable with imprisonment of not less than six months extending to ten years, and shall also be liable to fine of not less than the amount involved in the fraud extending to three times that amount.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in816

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the semester

The rest of this subject

These notes are cut from the University's printed syllabus. Open the syllabus itself, or the past papers, for the same subject.

Report or request
Done!